<<3 .o bulletin OP THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY AMERICA VOL. 27 JOSEPH STANLEY-BROWN, Editor •^ 1 1 3D NEW YORK PUBLISHED BY THE SOCIETY 1916 OFFICE RH FOR 1916 John M. Clarke, President J. P. Iddings, H. F. Reid, fVice-Presidents E. RUEDEMANN, Edmund Otis Hovey, Secretary William Bullock Clark, Treasurer Joseph Stanley-Brown, Editor F. R. Van Horn, Librarian Class of 1918 Frank B. Taylor, Charles P. Berkey, Class of 1917 Charles K. Leith, r Councilors Thomas L. Watson. Class of 1916 E. A. F. Penrose, Jr., W. W. Atwood, Printers Judd & Detweiler (Inc.), Washington, D. C. Engravers The Maurice Joyce Engraving Company, Washington, D. C. CONTENTS Page Proceedings of the Twenty-eighth Annual Meeting of the Geological So- ciety of America, held at Washington, District of Columbia, December 2S, 29, and 30, 1915 ; Charles P. Berkey, Secretary pro tern 1 Session of Tuesday, December 28 5 Report of the Council 5 Secretary's report 5 Treasurer's report 7 Editor's report 9 Election of Auditing Committee 11 Election of officers 11 Election of Fellows 12 Memorial of Theodore B. Comstock (with bibliography) ; by Heinkich Ries 12 Memorial of Orville A. Derby (with bibliography) ; by J. C. Branner 15 Memorial of Joseph Austin Holmes (with bibliography) ; by J. H. Pratt 22 Memorial of William John Sutton ; by W. F. Robertson 35 Memorial of A. B. Willmott (with bibliography) ; by A. P. Cole- man 37 Titles and abstracts of papers presented before the morning ses- sion and discussions thereon 38 Geographic history of the San Juan Mountains since the close of the Mesozoic era [abstract] ; by Wallace W. At- wood and Kirtley W. Mather 38 Dominantly fluviatile origin, under seasonal rainfall, of the Old Red Sandstone [abstract]; by Joseph Barbell 39 Influence of Silurian-Devonian- climates on the rise of air- breathing vertebrates [abstract] ; by Joseph Babbell 40 Some littoral and sublittoral physiographic features of the Virgin and northern Leeward Islands and their bearing on the coral-reef problem [abstract] ; by Thomas Wayland Vaughan 41 Coral-reef problem [abstract] ; by W. M. Davis 46 Tertiary-Quaternary orogenic history of the Sierra Nevada in the light of recent studies in the Yosemite region [ab- stract] ; by F. E. Matthes 40 Titles and abstracts of papers presented before the afternoon ses- sion and discussions thereon 47 Geological transformations of phosphorus [abstract] ; by Eliot Blackwelder 47 Diffusion in silicate melts [abstract and discussion] ; by N. L. BOWEN < s (iii) IV BULLETIN OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA Page Petrography of the Pacific Islands [abstract and discussion] ; by R. A. Daly 48 Some factors which affect the deposition of calcium carbonate [abstract] ; by John Johnson 49 Specific weight of drill cores [abstract] ; by Alfred O. Lane. 49 Chemical and mineralogical composition of meteorites [ab- stract and discussion] ; by George P. Merrill 50 Importance of water as a magmatic constituent [abstract and discussion] ; by George W. Morey 50 "Pele's tears" and their bearing on the origin of australites [complete paper and discussion] ; by Elwood S. Moore 51 Triassic igneous rocks in the vicinity of Gettysburg, Pennsyl- vania [abstract] ; by George W. Stose and J. A^olney Lewis 55 Desert regolith and its genetic relations to maximum epirotic deposition [abstract] ; by Charles Keyes 57 Origin of foliation in the Precambrian rocks of northern New York [abstract and discussion] ; by William J. Miller... 57 Landslides in unconsolidated sediments [abstract] ; by David H. Newland 58 Annual dinner 60 Session of Wednesday, December 29 60 Report of Auditing Committee 60 Titles and abstracts of papers presented before the morning ses- sion and discussions thereon 60 Ferrous iron content and magnetic properties of the natural oxides of iron as an index to their origin and history [ab- stract] ; by R. B. Sosman and J. C. Hostetter 60 Variable composition of melanochalcite [abstract] ; by W. F. Hunt and E. H. Kraus 61 Definition and determination of the mineral hydroxides of iron [abstract] ; by H. E. Merwin and Eugen Posnjak... 61 Saline fumarole deposits of the south Italian volcanoes [ab- stract] ; by Henry S. Washington 61 Crystals and crystal forces [abstract] ; by F. E. Wright... . 62 Extension of the Montana phosphate deposits northward into Canada [abstract and discussion] ; by Frank D. Adams and William J. Dick 62 Emerald deposits of Muzo, Colombia [abstract] ; by Joseph E. Pogue 63 Crystalline marbles of Alabama [abstract] ; by William F. Prouty 63 Oriskany iron ore [abstract] : by R. J. Holdex 64 Geologic map of the Fort Hall Indian reservation [abstract] ; by George R. Mansfield 64 Preliminary geologic map of the Wayan quadrangle, Idaho- Wyoming [abstract] ; by George R. Mansfield 65 Glacial lakes and other glacial features of the central Adiron- dacks [abstract] ; by Harold L. Alling 65 CONTENTS V Page Pleistocene features in the Schenectady-Saratoga-Glens Falls section of the Hudson Valley [abstract] ; by Herman L. Fairchild 65 Pleistocene uplift of New York and adjacent territory [ab- stract and discussion] ; by Herman L. Fairchild 66 Studies of glaciation in the White Mountains of New Hamp- shire [abstract]; by James Walter Goldthwait 67 Glaciation and stormy period of the fourteenth century [ab- stract] ; by Ellsworth Huntington 67 Pleistocene deposits of Minnesota and adjacent districts [ab- stract] ; by Frank Leverett 68 Resolution regarding the taking of expert testimony 69 Titles and abstracts of papers presented before the afternoon ses- sion and discussions thereon 70 Pennsylvanian of Tennessee [abstract] ; by L. C. Glenn 70 Subdivisions of the Thaynes limestone and Nugget sandstone, Mesozoic, in the Fort Hall Indian reservation, Idaho [ab- stract] ; by George R. Mansfield 70 Stratigraphy of some formations hitherto called Beckwith and Bear River, in southeastern Idaho [abstract] ; by George R. Mansfield and P. V. Roundy 70 Sedimentation along the Gulf coast of the United States [ab- stract] ; by E. W. Shaw 71 Relative age of the Detroit River series [complete paper and discussion] ; by Clinton R. Stauffer 72 Recession of Niagara Falls remeasured in 1914 [abstract] ; by J. W. Spencer 78 Terrestrial stability of the Great Lake region [abstract] ; by J. W. Spencer 79 Scour of the Saint Lawrence River and lowering of Lake On- tario [abstract] ; by J. W. Spencer 79 Pleistocene drainage changes in western North Dakota [ab- stract] ; by Arthur G. Leonard 80 Landslips and laminated lake clays in the basin of Lake Bas- com [abstract and discussion]; by Frank B. Taylor 81 Types of loess in the Mississippi Valley [abstract] ; by B. Shimek 82, Dry land in geology; presidential address by Arthur P. Coleman S2 Session of Thursday, December 30 83 Titles and abstracts of papers presented before the morning ses- sion and discussions thereon S3 Stages in the geologic history of Porto Rico [abstract and dis- cussion] ; by Chester A. Reeds S3 Cretaceous of Alberta, Canada [abstract] ; by Joseph H. Sin- clair S5 Sedimentary succession in southern New Mexico [abstract] ; by N. H. Darton 86 VI BULLETIN OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA Page Divisions and correlations of tbe Dunkard scries of Ohio [complete paper] ; by Clinton R. Stauffer 86 Silurian system of Maryland [abstract and discussion] ; by O. K. Swaktz and W. F. Prouty 89 Homocline and monocline [complete paper and discussion] ; by Reginald A. Daly 89 Occurrence of intraformational conglomerate and breccia [ab- stract] ; by F. V. Emekson 93 Keweenaw fault [complete paper] ; by Alfred O. Lane 93 Some structural features in the Green Mountain belt of rocks [abstract] ; by 'C. E. Gordon 101 Faulting in north-central Kentucky [complete paper and dis- cussion] ; by Arthur M. Miller , 101 Mechanics of intrusion of the Black Hills Precambrian gran- ite [abstract and discussion] ; by Sidney Paige 101 Precambrian structure of the Black Hills, South Dakota [ab- stract] ; by Sidney Paige 106 Titles and abstracts of papers presented before the afternoon ses- sion and discussions thereon . . 106 Rectilinear features in the eastern Catskills [abstract and discussion] ; by George H. Chadwick 107 Physiographic evidence of recent subsidence on the coast of Maine [abstract] ; by Charles A. Davis 108 Physiographic notes on the White Mountains [abstract] ; by Douglas W. Johnson 108 Position of the New England upland in the White Mountains [abstract] ; by Armin K. Lobeck 108 Study of ripple-marks [abstract] ; by Walter A. Bucher. . . . 109 Dead Lake of the Chipola River, Florida [abstract] ; by E. H. Sellards 109 Tectonic lines in the Hawaiian Islands [abstract] ; by Sidney Powers 109 Banded glacial slates of Permocarboniferous age, showing- possible seasonal variations in deposition [abstract and dis- cussion] ; by Robert W. Sayles 110 Geology of the Lake Iditarod region, Alaska [abstract] ; by Philip S. Smith. 114 Characteristics of the soil and its relation to geology [ab- stract] ; by C. F. Marbut 114 Geologic significance and genetic classification of arkose de- posits [abstract] ; by Donald C. Barton 115 Some features of the Kansan drift in southern Iowa [ab- stract and discussion] ; by George F. Kay 115 Triassic rocks of Alaska [abstract] ; by George C. Martin. . . 119 Lithogenesis and stratigraphy of the red beds of southeast- ern Wyoming [abstract] ; by S. H. Knight 120 Experiment in the graphic presentation of the economic geol- ogy of bedded deposits [abstract] ; by George H. Ashley. . 122 CONTENTS Vll Page Brecciation effects in the Saint Louis limestone [abstract] ; by Francis M. Van Tuyl 122 Vote of thanks 124 Register of the Washington meeting, 1915 125 Officers, Correspondents, and Fellows of the Geological Society of America 127 Proceedings of the Seventh Annual Meeting of the Paleontological Society, held at Washington, District of Columbia, December 29, 30, and 31, 1915 ; It. S. Bassler, Secretary 139 Session of Wednesday, December 29 142 Report of the Council 142 Secretary's report 142 Treasurer's report 143 Appointment of Auditing Committee 144 Election of officers and members 144 Election of new members 145 Memorial of Orville A. Derby 146 Announcements 146 Presentation of general papers 146 Presence of a median eye in trilobites [abstract] ; by Ru- dolph RUEDEMANN 146 Importance of "coral reefs" and reef deposits in the forma- tion of Paleozoic limestone [abstract] ; by Thomas C. Brown 147 Distribution and inferred migration of American Middle and Upper Devonic corals [abstract] ; by Amadeus W. Grabau. 147 Mutations of Waagen, Mutationsrichtung of Neumayr, Mu- tants of De Aeries : Relations of these phenomena in evolu- tion [title] ; by Henry Fairfield Osborn 148 Systematic rank of mutations and submutations in orthoge- netic series among the invertebrates [abstract] ; by Ama- deus W. Grabau 148 Classification of the Tetraseptata, with some remarks on par- allelism in development in this group : A study in ortho- genesis [abstract] ; by Amadeus W. Grabau 14S Guelph formation of Ontario [abstract] ; by M. Y. Williams. 148 Presidential address by E. O. TJlrich : The use of fossils in corre- lation 149 Section of Vertebrate Paleontology 149 Phylogenetic review of extinct and recent anthropoids, with special reference to the evolution of the human dentition [abstract] ; by W. K. Gregory 149 Additional characters of Tyrannosaurus and Ornithomimus [abstract] ; by Henry Fairfield Osborn 150 Criteria for the determination of species in the Sauropods. with description of a new species of Apatosaurus [ab- stract] ; by Charles C. Mook 151 Pelvis and sacrum of Caniarasaurus [abstract] ; by Henry Fairfield Osborn 151 Vlll BULLETIN OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA Page An early Pliocene Monodactylous horse [abstract] ; by Ed- ward L. Tkoxell 151 Session of Thursday, December 30 152 Preliminary report of the committee on the nomenclature of the skull elements in the Tetrapoda [abstract] ; by W. K. Gregory 152 Origin of the sternum in the reptiles and mammals [ab- stract] ; by S. W. Williston 152 Mounted skeleton of Caivis dims, with remarks on the meth- ods of reconstruction of extinct animals [title] ; by W. D. Matthew 153 Mounted skeleton of Blastocerus pampecus — a fossil deer from Argentina [title] ; by W. D. Matthew 153 Skeletons of Diplodocus and Apatasaurus in the Carnegie Mu- seum [abstract] ; by W. J. Holland 153 Section of Invertebrate and General Paleontology 153 Summary of the results of investigations of the Floridian and Bahaman shoal-water corals [abstract] ; by T. Wayland Vaughan 154 Correlation of the Upper Cretaceous deposits of the Atlantic and Gulf Coastal Plain [abstract] ; by L. W. Stephenson. 154 Session of Thursday, December 30 155 Report of the Auditing Committee 155 Mississippian section in west-central Kentucky [abstract] ; by Chakles Butts 155 Stratigraphic and faunal succession of the Chester group in Illinois and Kentucky [abstract] ; by Stuart Weller 156 Comparison of the Yellowstone Park alga? with Algonkian forms [abstract] ; by Charles D. Walcott 156 The Chester controversy [abstract] ; by E. O. Ulrich 157 Stratigraphy of the Canadian Cordillera [abstract] ; by Lan- caster D. Burling 158 New species of the Mesonacida 1 , with twenty-nine rudimentary segments posterior to the fifteenth [abstract] ; by Lancas- ter D. Burling 158 Comparison of European and American early Paleozoic for- mations [abstract] ; by Amadeus W. Grabau 159 Subdivisions of the Traverse group of Michigan and its rela- tion to other mid-Devonic formations [abstract] ; by Ama- deus W. Grabau 159 Some fossil alga? from the oil-yielding shales of the Green River formation of Colorado and Utah [abstract] ; by Charles A. Davis 159 Former extension of the Devonian formations in southeast- ern Missouri [abstract] ; by Stuart Weller 160 Bottom control of the composition of marine faunas as illus- trated by dredging in the Bay of Fundy [abstract] ; by E. M. Kindle ..,.,.., 160 CONTENTS ix Page Register of the Washington meeting, 1915 162 Officers, correspondents, and members of the Paleontological Society . . 163 Minutes of the sixth annual meeting of the Pacific Coast Section of the Paleontological Society ; E. L. Packard, Secretary 168 Resolution of condolence on the death of J. C. Hawver 168 General business .l 16S Election of f officers 160 Titles and abstracts of papers presented 169 Systematic position of several American Tertiary Lagomorphs [abstract] ; by Lee R. Dice 169 Pleistocene mammal fauna of Hawver Cave, a fissure deposit near Auburn, California [abstract and discussion] ; by Chester Stock 169 Fauna of the Rodeo Pleistocene [abstract] ; by John C. Mer- riam, Chester Stock, and C. L. Moody 169 New Miocene mammalian fauna from the Tehachapi region [abstract and discussion] ; by John 1'. Buwalda 170 The bison of Rancho La Brea ; by Asa C. Chandler 170 Structure of the posterior foot in the Mylodont sloths of Rancho La Brea [title] ; by Chester Stock 170 Recent studies on skull structure of Thallattosaurus [ab- stract] ; by John C. Merriam and Charles L. Camp 171 Review of the Pleistocene species, Pavo calif omicus [ab- stract] ; by Loye Homes Miller 171 Hipparion-like horses of the Pacific Coast and Great Basin provinces [abstract] ; by John C. Merriam. 171 Relationships of the invertebrates to the vertebrate faunal zones of the Pliocene Jacalitos and Etchegoin formations at Coalinga, California [abstract and discussion] ; by J. O. Nomland 172 Climatic zones in the Pliocene of the Pacific coast [abstract] ; by J. P. Smith 172 Marine Triassic invertebrate fauna from New Zealand [ab- stract and discussion] ; by C. T. Trechmann 172 Fauna of the Tejon group in the Cantua District of the Coa- linga quadrangle, California [abstract] ; by Roy E. Dick- erson 173 Fauna of the Tejon in the San Diego County [abstract] ; by Roy E. Dickerson 173 Molluscan faunas from Deadmans Island [abstract] ; by T. S. Oldroyd 173 Corals from the Cretaceous and Tertiary of California and Oregon [abstract] ; by J. O. Nomland 174 Eocene of the Lower Cowlitz River Valley, Washington [dis- cussion] ; by Charles 10. Weaver 174 Faunal studies in the Cretaceous of the Santa Ana Moun- tains of southern California [abstractl ; by Earl L. Pack- ard 174 X BULLETIN OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OP AMERICA Page Dry land in geology ; presidential address by Arthur P. Coleman 175 Hypersthene syenite and related rocks of the Blue Ridge region, Virginia ; by Thomas L. Watson and Justus H. Cline 193 Pleistocene uplift of New York and adjacent territory ; by Herman L. Fairchild 235 Glaciation in the White Mountains of New Hampshire ; by James Walter Goldth wait 263 Pleistocene drainage changes in western North Dakota ; by A. G. Leonard 295 Alexandrian rocks of northeastern Illinois and eastern Wisconsin ; by T. B. Savage 305 Petrography of the Pacific Islands ; by Reginald A. Daly. , . 325 Dominantly fluviatile origin under seasonal rainfall of the Old Red Sand- stone ; by Joseph Barrell 345 Influence of Silurian-Devonian climates on the rise of air-breathing verte- brates ; by Joseph Barrell 387 Crystalline marbles of Alabama ; by William F. Prouty 437 Correlation and displacements of the strand-line and the function and proper use of fossils in correlation ; by E. O. Ulrich 451 Correlation and chronology in geology on the basis of paleogeography ; by Charles Schuchert 491 Methods of correlation by fossil vertebrates ; by W. D. Matthew 515 Principles governing the use of fossil plants in geologic correlation ; by F. H. Knowlton 525 Silurian formations of southeastern New York, New Jersey, and Pennsyl- vania ; by Charles Schuchert 531 Comparison of American and European Lower Ordovicic formations; by Amadeus W. Grabau 555 Triassic igneous rocks in the vicinity of Gettysburg, Pennsylvania; by George W. Stose and J. Volney Lewis 623 Glacial lakes and other glacial features of the central Adirondacks; by Harold L. Alling 645 Cretaceous of Alberta, Canada ; by Joseph H. Sinclair 673 Triassic rocks of Alaska ; by George C. Martin 685 Index 719 ILLUSTRATIONS Plates Plate 1 — Reis : Portrait of Tbeo. B. Comstock 12 " 2— Branneh : Portrait of Orville A. Derby 15 3— Pratt : Portrait of J. A. Holmes 22 " 4— Robertsox : Portrait of W. J. Sutton 35 5— Coleman : Portrait of A. B. Willmott 37 " 6— Moore : Examples of australites 51 " 7 — Stauffer : The Anderdon surface at Amherstburg, Ontario .... 72 " 8 " Pre-Onondaga jointing at Amherstburg, Ontario.... 74 " 9 " Fossiliferous surfaces of Anderdon at Amherstburg, Ontario 76 ILLUSTRATIONS XI Page Plate 10-=— Fairchild : Pleistocene uplift of New York State 235 " 11 " Pleistocene deformation of the Ontario basin 244 " 12 " Isobases of Pleistocene uplift 253 " 13— Goldthwait : Ammonoosuc Valley and neighboring slopes of the White Mountains 263 " 14 — Leonard: Old Pleistocene valleys in western North Dakota 299 " 15 — Savage : May ville limestone 323 " 16 " Fossils from the Alexandrian rocks 324 " 17 " Fossils from the Alexandrian rocks. 325 " 18 — Prouty : Location map of crystalline marbles of Alabama 437 " 19 — Schuchert : Illustrations of disconformities 497 " 20 " Salina and Shawangunk at Otisville, New York. . . 544 " 21 " Shawangunk quartzites overlying Hudson River shales 545 . " 22 — Alling : Glacial delta-terrace and beaches of the central Adi- rondacks 658 " 23 " Copperas Pond, New York 660 " 24 " Glacial waters in the central Adirondacks 672 " 25 — Martin : Distribution of Alaska Triassic faunas 688 " 26 " Upper Triassic rocks, Nizina Valley, Alaska 690 " 27 " Upper Triassic rocks, Kotsina Valley, Alaska 694 " 28 " Upper Triassic rocks, Cooks Inlet and Nizina Valley, Alaska 699 " 29 " Triassic fossils from Alaska ■ 70S " 30 " Triassic fossils from Alaska and California 712 Figures Reeds : Figure 1 — Stages in the geologic history of Porto Rico S4 Lane : Figure 1 — "Ideal sketch of the primitive Keweenaw fault" 94 " 2 — Ideal sketch of the same fault as figure 1, supposing it to be a block-fault 95 " 3 — "Ideal sketch of the Keweenaw fault, after the deposi- tion of the eastern sandstone and before the second- ary faulting" 95 " 4 — A stage corresponding to figure 3 96 " 5 — "Ideal sketch of the Keweenaw fault, after the second- ary faulting" 9S " 6 — Ideal sketch of the Keweenaw fault just before the sec- ondary thrust faulting 98 " 7 — Ideal sketch of the Keweenaw fault just after the sec- ondary thrust 98 " S — Ideal sketch of a cross-section through the southern part of the Keweenaw (copper) Range (ck) , Lime- stone Mountain (./'), Silver Mountain (i) to the Huron Mountains 100 Watson and Cline: Figure 1 — Outline map of Virginia 195 Xll BULLETIN OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA GOLDTHWAIT : Figure Leonard : Figure Barrell : Figure Barrell : Figure Prouty : Figure Schuchert : Figure Page 1 — Carroll district, showing outwash deposits 281 1 — Map showing old Pleistocene valleys of western North Dakota 297 1— Geography of the British Isles in Devonian time 347 1 — Diagrammatic side view, respiratory-circulatory system of vertebrates 420 2 — Diagrams illustrating a possible mode of evolution of air-breathing 432 1 — Idealized section, showing marble-schist contact high above the drainage lines as represented in some areas of the Vermont marble deposits 439 2 — Idealized section, showing the less elevated position of the marble-schist contact above the drainage in the Georgia marble deposits 439 3 — Idealized section, showing the topographic relations of schist, marble, and dolomite in the Alabama marble deposits 439 4 — Diagrammatic representation of minor offsets in the marble deposit 441 5 — Schistose marble from near Taylors Mill 442 6 — Photomicrograph of schistose marble from near Taylors Mill 443 7 — Diagrammatic presentation of jointing in a portion of one of the quarries in the Alabama marble 444 8 — Photomicrograph of the commercial grade of Alabama crystalline marble magnified fifty diameters 445 9 — Diagram of schist lines in block of marble at variance with general bedding direction, due, it is thought, to differential movements in the layer because of drag. . 445 10 — Diagrammatic representation of a slab of marble taken from block at right angles to the bedding plane 44G 11 — Cross-section through marble valley at right angles to strike 446 12 — Section through marble valley at right angles to strike. 446 13 — Section through marble valley at right angles to strike. 447 14 — Section from the Knox dolomite area just to the west of the main marble belt 447 15 — View looking nearly west into Gantts quarry 449 1 — Paleogeography (and glaciated areas) of early Permian time 494 2 — Diagram showing the time and extent of the known floods that have inundated North America since the close of the Proterozoic era 496 ILLUSTRATIONS xiii SCHUCHEKT : „ Pag© Figure 3 — Triassic paleogeography 504 " 4 — Jurassic paleogeography 506 " 5 — Comanchian paleogeography 510 6— Map showing regions of elevation (horizontal shading and solid black) , the formation of the Coloradoan geo- syncline (right-hand oblique lines), and the Pacific overlap 511 " 7 — Cretaceous paleogeography 512 Schuchert : Figure 1— Contact between the Lower Devonian water lines (Coble- skill) and the Hudson River thin-bedded sandstones. 540 Grabau : Figure 1 — Disconformable contact of Lower Ordovicic on Lower Cambric at Eilean Dubh, near Durness, Scotland 563 2— Irregular contact between dolomite and bedded calcilu- tite in the cliffs facing the Kyle of Durness, Scotland. 564 3 — Section at Oedegarden, Sweden 593 4 — Ideal section illustrating the relationships of the several types of deposits in the north Scottish, Atlantic, and Siberian provinces in Lower Ordovicic time 597 " 5 — Diagram illustrating the westward increase of the hiatus between divisions B II and B III in Esthonia 599 6 — Section of the Lower Ordovicic formations shown in the railroad cut near Sjurberg, in Dalarne, Sweden 604 7 — Section of crystallines and early Paleozoics in the Lock- nesjo Lake region, Jamtland, Sweden 609 " 8 — Ideal section showing relationship of beds of preceding section before deformation and erosion 609 9 — Section of the stream bank south of Tommarp, Scania, in southern Sweden 613 " 10 — Paleographic map of eastern America and western Eu- rope and Africa in early Ordovicic time 621 Stose and Lewis : Figure 1 — Geologic map of the vicinity of Gettysburg, Pennsylvania 626 " 2 — Sections across the Triassic rocks of the Gettysburg area 628 Along : Figure 1 — Glacial channels in the Ausable quadrangle 659 " 2 — Preliminary profile of glacial lake levels in Lake Placid and Ausable quadrangles 670 Sinclair : Figure 1 — Part of Alberta and British Columbia 675 " 2 — Cretaceous sedimentation in the Alberta district of Canada 683 Martin: Figure 1 — Map of British Columbia and Yukon, showing known Triassic localities 712 (30 plates; 55 figures.) XIV BULLETIN OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA PUBLICATIONS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA Regular Publications The Society issues annually, in four quarterly parts, a single serial octavo publication entitled Bulletin of the Geological Society of America, the edi- tion being 700 copies. A small supply of authors' separates of the longer arti- cles is kept for sale by the Secretary at the prices quoted in each volume. The Bulletin is sold at the uniform price of ten dollars ($10.00) per vol- ume, with a discount of twenty-five (25) per cent to Fellows of the Society, persons residing elsewhere than in North America, and public and institu- tional libraries; carriage extra. Subscriptions are payable in advance. Reg- ular subscribers within the United States of America and its possessions re- ceive their parts, postage paid, as issued. Forty (40) cents per volume must be added to the subscription price to cover postage to other countries in the Postal Union. The price of the index to volumes 1-10 is $2.25 and of the index to volumes 11-20 is $3.50 ; carriage extra. No reduction is made to dealers. Orders should be addressed to the Secretary, whose address is care of the American Museum of Natural History, New York, N. Y., and drafts and money orders should be made payable to The Geological Society of America. Description of the Published Volumes Volumes. Pages. Vol. 1, 1889 593 + xii Vol. 2, 1890 622 4- xiv Vol. 3, 1891 541 4- xi Vol. 4, 1892 458 + xi Vol. 5, 1893 655 4- xii Vol. 6, 1894 528 4- x Vol. 7, 1895 558 + x Vol. 8, 1896 446 + x Vol. 9, 1897 460 + x Vol. 10, 1898 534 + xii Index to volumes 1-10 209 Vol. 11, 1899 651 4- xii Vol. 12, 1900 538 + xii Vol. 13, 1901 583 4- xii Vol. 14, 1902 609 + xii Vol. 15, 1903 636 + x Vol. 16, 1904 636 4- xii Vol. 17, 1905 7S5 + xiv Vol. 18, 1906 717 4- xii Vol. 19, 1907 617 + x Vol. 20, 1908 749 + xiv Index to volumes 11-20 422 Vol. 21, 1909 S23 4- xvi Vol. 22, 1910 747 + xii Vol. 23, 1911 75S + xvi Vol. 24, 1912 737 + xviii Vol. 25, 1913 802 + xviii Vol. 26, 1914 504 + xxi Vol. 27, 1915 739 + xviii LATES. Figures, 13 51 23 63 17 72 10 55 21 43 27 40 24 61 51 29 29 49 54 83 58 37 45 28 58 47 65 43 59 16 94 74 84 96 74 59 41 31 111 35 54 109 31 66 43 44 36 60 28 47 27 41 30 55 PUBLICATIONS XV Parts of Volume 27 Packs. Plates. Figures. P ,iICET0 Price to Fellows. Pi-blic. Number 1 1-192 1-9 9 $2.45 ' $3 50 Number 2 193-450 10-18 21 3.00 4*50 Number 3 451-554 19-21 s l.:-0 180 Number 4 * 555-739 22-30 17 2 .45 3. 50 Reprints prom Volume 27 Reprints. Pages. Plates. Figures Pkice to Price to Fellows. Public. Proceedings of the Twenty -eighth Annual Meeting of the Geological Society of America, held at Wash- ington, 1). 0.. December 28, 29, and 30. 1915. Chaki.es P. Bkrkey, Secretary pro tern 1-138 1-9 1--9 $1.70. • $2.50 Proceedings of the Seventh Annual Meeting of the Pal^ontological So- ciety, held at Washington, D. C, December 29, 30, and 31, 1915. R. S. Bassler, Secretary^ 139-174 .... . . . : .45 70 Dry land in geology. A. P. Coleman 175-192 .... .... . .2.5. '■_ .35 Hypersthene syenite and related rocks of the Blue Ridge region, Virginia. T. L. Watsom and J. H. Cline 193-234 .... 1 .55 .80 Pleistocene uplift of New York and adjacent territory. H.L. Fairchild 235-262 10-12 .... .50 .75 Glaciation in the White Mountains of New Hampshire. J. W. Gold- thwait 263-294 13 1 .45 .65 Pleistocene drainage changes in west- ern North Dakota. A. G. Leonard 295-304 14 1 .15 .20 Alexandrian rocks of northeastern Illinois and eastern Wisconsin. T. E. Savage t 305-324 15-17 .... .35 .50 Petrographv of the Pacific Islands. R.A.Daly 325-344 .30 .45 Dominantly flnviatile origin under seasonal rainfall of the Old Red Sandstone. J. Barrell 345-386 .... ] .55 .so Influence of Silurian-Devonian cli- mates on the rise of air-breathing- vertebrates. J. Barrell 387-436 1-2 .70 1.00 Crystalline marbles of Alabama. W. F. Prouty: 437-450 is 1-15 . 20 . 30 Correlation by displacements of the strand-line and the function and proper use of fossils in correlation. E. O. ULRiCHf 451-490 .55 .80 Correlation and chronology in geology on the basis of paleogeography. C. ScuucHERTf 491-5 1 4 19-2 i 1-7 .40 . 55 * Preliminary pages and index are distributed with number 4. t Under the brochure heading is printed Proceedings op the I'aliountologioal Society. XVI BULLETIN OP THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OP AMERICA Reprints. Pagks. Plates. Figures. Methods of correlation by fossil verte- brates. W. D. Matthew f. . , 515-524 Principles governing the use of fossil plants in geologic correlation. F. H Knowlton t 525-530 Silurian formations of southeastern New York, New Jersey, and Penn- sylvania. C. Schuciiert'I" 531-554 .... 1 Comparison of American and Euro- pean Lower Ordovicic formations. A. W. Grabau t 555-622 Triassic igneous rocks in the vicinity of Gettysburg, Pennsylvania. G. W. Stose and J. V. Lewis 623-644 .... Glacial lakes and other glacial fea- tures of the central Adirondacks. H. L. Alling 645-672 22-24 Cretaceous of Alherta, Canada. J. PL Sinclair 673-684 .... Triassic rocks of Alaska. G. C. Martin 685-718 25-30 1-10 1- 2 Price to Prick to Fellows. Public. $0.15 |0.20 .10 .15 .35 .50 .95 1.40 .30 .45 1- 2 .40 .60 1- 2 .20 .25 1 .45 .70 f Under the brochure heading is printed Proceedings of the Paleontological Society. PUBLICATIONS XVI 1 Irregular Publications In the interest of exact bibliography, the Society takes cognizance of all pub- lications issued wholly or in part under its auspices. Each author of a memoir receives 30 copies without cost, and is permitted to order any additional num- ber at a slight advance on cost of paper and presswork ; and these reprints are identical with those of the editions issued and distributed by the Society; but the cover bears only the title of the paper, the author's name, and the state- ment [Reprinted from the Bulletin of the Geological Society of America, vol. — , PP- — . pl- — (Date)]. Contributors to the Proceedings and "Abstracts of Papers" are also authorized to order any number of separate copies of their papers at a slight advance on cost of paper and presswork ; but such separates are bibliographically distinct from the reprints issued by the Society. The following separates of parts of volume 27 have been issued : Regular Editions Pages 175- -192, 70 copies. March 31, 1916. " 193- 234, 140 " June 1, 1916. " 235-262, plates 10-li 140 " • " 1, 1916. " 263- -294, plate 13, 190 " <( 1, 1916. " 295-304, 14, 240 " a 1, 1916. " 305- -324,*f plates 15- -17, 265 " it 3, 1916. " 325- -344, 540 " it 3, 1916. " 345- -386, 140 " ti 5, 1916. " 387-436, 340 " " 7, 1916. " 437-450, plate 18, 90 " it 17, 1916. " 451-490,*f 390 " a 23, 1916. " 491- -514,*f plate 19, 540 " September 1, 1916. " 515-524,*t 290 " it 1, 1916. " r,25-530,*t 190 " a 1, 1916. " 531-554,*t plates 20-2: 490 " a 13, 1916. " 555- -622, *f 490 " Novembei " 623- -644, 340 " " 30, 1916. " 645- -672, plates 22- -24, 90 " " 30, 1916. " 673- -6S4, 65 " December 9, 1916. " 685- -718, plates 25 -30, 190 " it 11, 1916. Special Editions % Pages i 12- 15, plate 1, 40 copies. March 30, 1916. 11 15- 21, " 2 190 " a 30, 1916. it 22- 35, " 3, 40 " a 30, 1916. " 35- 37, " 4, 40 " " 30, 1916. a 37- 38, " 5, 40 " " 30, 1916. a 41- 45, 40 " ti 30, 1916. " 51- 55, " 6, 140 " " 30, 1916. " 72- 77, plates 7-9, 90 " it 30, 1916. " 86- 88, 90 " " 30, 1916. it 89- 92, 540 " " 30, 1916. " 93-100, 1,040 " " 30, 1916. it 104-105, 140 " it 30, 1916. " 112-113, 140 " " 30, 1916. " 127-138. 90 " " 30, 1910. " 139-174, 165 " " 31, 1916. * Bearing on the cover Proceedings or the Paleoxtological Society. [Reprinted from the Bulletin of the Geological Society of America, vol. , pp. . pis. , (Date)]. t Under the brochure heading is printed Proceedings of the Paleoxtological Society. t Bearing imprint [Prom Bull. Geol. Soc. Am., Vol. 27, 1015]. XV111 BULLETIN OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA CORRECTIONS AND INSERTIONS All contributors to volume 27 have been invited to send corrections and in- sertions to be made in their papers, and the volume has been scanned with some care by the Editor. The following are such corrections and insertions as are deemed worthy of attention : Page 19, line 15 from top ; for "gift" read grit " 21, line 12 from top; for "papers" read pages " 21, lines 15 and 17 from top ; for "Boletino" read Boletim " 93, line 6 from bottom; for "Keweenewan" read Cretaceous " 99, line 7 from bottom; for "monoclinic" read monoclinal " 100, line 10 from bottom ; for "first" read last " 114, line 13 from top; for "R. B. Woodworth" read J. B. Woodworth " 174, line 13 from top ; for "Dickenson" read Dickerson " 408, line 1 from bottom ; for "G. W. Bridge" read T. W. Bridge " 520, line 17 from bottom ; for "Summary" read Conclusions " 521, page heading ; for "Summary" read Conclusions " 523, page heading; for "Summary" read Conclusions " 524, lines 1 and 8 from bottom ; for "following" read foregoing BULLETIN OF THE Geological Society of America Volume 27 Number 1 MARCH, 1916 JOSEPH STANLEY. BROWN, EDITOR PUBLISHED BY THE SOCIETY MARCH, JUNE, SEPTEMBER, AND DECEMBER CONTENTS \ Proceedings of the Twenty-eighth Annual Meeting of the Geo- logical Society of America, held at Washington, District of Columbia, December 28, 29, and 30, 1915. Charles P. Berkey, Secretary pro tern. ---------- Pages 1-138 Proceedings of the Seventh Annual Meeting of the Paleontological Society, held at Washington, District of Columbia, December 29, 30, and 31, 1915. R. S. Bassler, Secretary - - - 139 74 Dry Land in Geology. Presidential Address by Arthur P. Coleman 175-192 BULLETIN OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA Subscription, $10 per year; with discount of 25 per cent to institutions and libraries and to individuals residing elsewhere than in North America. Postage to foreign countries in the postal union, forty (40) cents extra. Communications should be addressed to The Geological Society of America, care of ,420 11th Street N. W., Washington, D. C, or 77th Street and Central Park, West, New York City. NOTICE. — In accordance with the rules established by Council, claims for non-receipt of the preceding part of the Bulletin must be sent to the Secretary of the Society within three months of the date of the receipt of this number in order to be filled gratis. Entered as second-class matter in the Post-Office at Washington, D. C, under the Act of Congress of July 16, 1894 PRESS OF JUDD & DETWEILER, INC., WASHINGTON, D. C. BULLETIN OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF AML Vol. 27, pp. 1-138, pls. 1-9 March 30, 1916 PROCEEDINGS OP THE TWENTY-EIGHTH ANNUAL MEET- ING OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OP AMERICA, HELD AT WASHINGTON, DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA, DECEMBER 28, 29, AND 30, 1915. Charles P. Berkey, Secretary pro tern. CONTENTS Page Session of Tuesday, December 28 5 Report of the Council 5 Secretary's report 5 Treasurer's report 7 Editor's report 9 Election of Auditing Committee 11 Election of officers 11 Election of Fellows 12 j/' Memorial of Theodore B. Comstock (with bibliography) ; by Heinrich Ries 12 !/ Memorial of Orville A. Derby (with bibliography) : by J. C. Branner. 15 j/" Memorial of Joseph Austin Holmes (with bibliography); by J. H. Pratt 22 V Memorial of William John Sutton ; by W. F. Robertson 35 y' Memorial of A. B. Willmott (with bibliography) ; by A. I'. Coleman.. 37 Titles and abstracts of papers presented before the morning session and discussions thereon 38 Geographic history of the San Juan Mountains since the close of the Mesozoic era [abstract] ; by Wallace W. Atwood and Hart- ley W. Mather 38 Dominantly fluviatile origin, under seasonal rainfall, of the old red sandstone [abstract] ; by Joseph Barrell 39 Influence of Silurian-Devonian climates on the rise of air-breath- ing vertebrates [abstract] ; by Joseph Barrell 40 Some littoral and sublittoral physiographic features of the Virgin and northern Leeward Islands and their bearing on the coral- reef problem [abstract] : by Thomas Wayland Vaughan 41 Coral-reef problem [abstract] ; by W. M. Davis 46 Tertiary-Quaternary orogenic history of the Sierra Nevada in the light of recent studies in the Yosemito region [abstract] : by F. E. Matthes 16 Titles and abstracts of papers presented before the afternoon session and discussions thereon 47 I — Bull. Geol. Soc. Am., Vol. 27. 1015 (1) 2 PROCEEDINGS OF THE WASHINGTON MEETING Page Geological transformations of phosphorus [abstract] ; by Eliot Blackwelder 47 Diffusion in silicate melts [abstract and discussion] ; by N. L. Bowen 48 Petrography of the Pacific islands [abstract and discussion] ; by R. A. Daly 48 Some factors which affect the deposition of calcium carbonate [abstract] ; by John Johnson 49 Specific weight of drill cores [abstract] ; by Alfred C. Lane 49 Chemical and mineralogical composition of meteorites [abstract and discussion] ; by George P. Merrill 50 Importance of water as a magmatic constituent [abstract and dis- cussion] ; by George W. Morey 50 )/ '"Pele's tears" and their bearing on the origin of australites [complete paper and discussion] ; by Elwood S. Moore 51 Triassic igneous rocks in the vicinity of Gettysburg, Pennsylvania [abstract] ; by Geoi'ge W. Stose and J. Volney Lewis 55 Desert regolith and its genetic relations to maximum epirotic deposition [abstract] ; by Charles Keyes 57 Origin of foliation in the Precambrian rocks of northern New York {abstract and discussion] ; by William J. Miller 57 Landslides in unconsolidated sediments [abstract] ; by David H. Newland 58 Annual dinner 60 Session of Wednesday, December 29 60 Report of Auditing Committee 60 Titles and abstracts of papers presented before the morning session and discussions thereon 60 Ferrous iron content and magnetic properties of the natural oxides of iron as an index to their origin and history [ab- stract] ; by R. B. Sosman and J. C. Hostetter 60 Variable composition of melanochalcite [abstract] ; by W. F. Hunt and E. H. Kraus 61 Definition and determination of the mineral hydroxides of iron [abstract] ; by H. E. Merwin and Eugen Posnjak 01 Saline fumarole deposits of the south Italian volcanoes [ab- stract] ; by Henry S. Washington Gl Crystals and crystal forces [abstract] ; by F. E. Wright 62 Extension of the Montana phosphate deposits northward into Canada [abstract and discussion] ; by Frank D. Adams and William J. Dick 62 Emerald deposits of Muzo, Colombia [abstract] ; by Joseph E. Pogue 68 Crystalline marbles of Alabama [abstract] : by William F. Prouty. 63 Oriskany iron ore [abstract] ; by R. J. Holden 64 Geologic map of the Fort Hall Indian reservation [abstract] ; by George R. Mansfield 64 Preliminary geologic map of the Wayan quadrangle, Idaho- Wyo- ming [abstract] ; by George R. Mansfield 65 CONTENTS 3 Page Glacial lakes and other glacial features of the central Adirondack* [abstract] ; by Harold L. Ailing 65 Pleistocene features in the Schenectady-Saratoga Glen Falls sec- tion of the Hudson Valley [abstract] ; by Herman L. Fairchild. 65 Pleistocene uplift of New York and adjacent territory [abstract and discussion] ; by Herman L. Fairchild 66 Studies of glaciation in the White Mountains of New Hampshire [abstract] ; by James Walter Goldthwait 67 Glaciation and stormy period of the fourteenth century [ab- stract] ; by Ellsworth Huntington 67 Pleistocene deposits of Minnesota and adjacent districts [ab- stract] ; by Frank Leverett 68 Resolution regarding the taking of expert testimony 69 Titles and abstracts of papers presented before the afternoon session and discussions thereon 70 Pennsylvanian of Tennessee [abstract] ; by L. C. Glenn 70 Subdivisions of the Thaynes limestone and Nugget sandstone, Mesozoic, in the Fort Hall Indian reservation, Idaho [ab- stract] ; by George R. Mansfield 70 Stratigraphy of some formations hitherto called Beckwith and Bear River, in southeastern Idaho [abstract] ; by George R. Mansfield and P. V. Roundy 70 Sedimentation along the Gulf coast of the United States [ab- stract] ; by E. W. Shaw 71 V Relative age of the Detroit River series [complete paper and dis- cussion] ; by Clinton R. Stauff er 72 Recession of Niagara Falls remeasured in 1914 [abstract] ; by J. W. Spencer 7S Terrestrial stability of the Great Lake region [abstract] ; by J. W. Spencer 79 Scour of the Saint Lawrence River and lowering of Lake Ontario [abstract] ; by J. W. Spencer 79 Pleistocene drainage changes in western North Dakota [abstract] ; by Arthur G. Leonard SO Landslips and laminated lake clays in the basin of Lake Basconi [abstract and discussion] ; by Frank B. Taylor 81 Types of loess in the Mississippi Valley [abstract] ; by B. Shimek. S2 Dry land in geology; presidential address by Arthur P.Coleman. 82 Session of Thursday, December 30 83 Titles and abstracts of papers presented before the morning session and discussions thereon S3 Stages in the geologic history of Porto Rico [abstract and discus- sion] ; by Chester A. Reeds 83 Cretaceous of Alberta, Canada [abstract] : by Joseph H. Sinclair. 85 Sedimentary succession in southern New Mexico [abstract] : by N. H. Darton 86 v Divisions and correlations of the Dunkard series of Ohio [com- plete paper] ; by Clinton R. Stauff er 86 Silurian system of Maryland [abstract and discussion] ; by C. K. Swartz and W. F. Prouty 89 4 PROCEEDINGS OF THE WASHINGTON MEETING Page Honiocline and monocline [complete paper and discussion] ; by Reginald A. Daly 89 Occurrence of intraformational conglomerate and breccia [ab- stract] ; by F. V. Emerson 93 V Keweenaw fault [complete paper] ; by Alfred C. Lane. . ., 93 Some structural features in tbe Green Mountain belt of rocks [abstract] ; by C. E. Gordon. 101 Y Faulting in north-central Kentucky [complete paper and discus- sion] ; by Arthur M. Miller. . . . '. 101 Mechanics of intrusion of the Black Hills Precambrian granite [abstract and discussion] ; by Sidney Paige 104 Precambrian structure of the Black Hills, South Dakota [ab- stract] ; by Sidney Paige 106 Titles and abstracts of papers presented before the afternoon session and discussions thereon 106 Rectilinear features in the eastern Catskills [abstract and dis- cussion] ; by George H. Chadwick 107 Physiographic evidence of recent subsidence on the coast of Maine [abstract] ; by Charles A. I >avis 108 Physiographic notes on the White Mountains [abstract] ; by Douglas W. Johnson 10S Position of the New England upland in the White Mountains [abstract] ; by Armin K. Lpbeck 108 Study of ripple-marks [abstract] ; by Walter A. Bucher 109 Dead Lake of the Chipola River. Florida [abstract] ; by E. H. Sellards 109 Tectonic lines in the Hawaiian Islands [abstract] ; by Sidney Powers : 109 Banded glacial slates of Permocarboniferous age, showing possi- ble seasonal variations in deposition [abstract and discussion] ; by Robert W. Sayles 110 Geology of the Lake Iditarod region. Alaska [abstract] ; by Philip S. Smith 114 Characteristics of the soil and its relation to geology [abstract] ; by C. F. Marbut 114 Geologic significance and genetic classification of arkose deposits [abstract] ; by Donald C. Barton 115 Some features of the Kansan drift in southern Iowa [abstract and discussion] ; by George F. Kay 115 Triassic rocks of Alaska [abstract] : by George C. Martin 119 Lithogenesis and stratigraphy of the red beds of southeastern Wyoming [abstract] ; by S. H. Knight 120 Experiment in the graphic presentation of the economic geology of bedded deposits [abstract] ; by George PL Ashley 122 Brecciation effects in the Saint Louis limestone [abstract] : by Francis M. Van Tuyl 122 Vote of thanks 124 Register of the Washington meeting, 1915 125 Officers, Correspondents, and Fellows of the Geological Society of America. 127 report of the council 5 Session" of Tuesday, December 28 The first general session of the Society was called to order at 9.15 o'clock a. m., Tuesday, December 28, at the George Washington Univer- sity Medical School, Washington, District of Columbia, by President Coleman. The report of the Council for the year ending November 30, 1915, was presented as follows : REPORT OF THE COUNCIL To the Geological Society of America, in twenty-eighth annual meeting assembled: The regular annual meeting of the Council was held at Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, in connection with the meeting of the Society, December 29-31, 1914. The details of administration for the twenty-seventh year of the exist- ence of the Society are given in the following reports of the officers : Secretary's Report To the Council of the Geological Society of America: Meetings. — The proceedings of the annual general meeting of the So- ciety held at Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, December 29-31, 1914, have been recorded in volume 26, pages 1-128; of the Cordilleran Section, pages 129-140, and of the Paleontological Society, pages 141-170, of the Bulletin. Membership. — During the past ) r ear the Society has lost four Fellows 1 by death — Theodore B. Comstock, Orville A. Derby, Joseph A. Holmes, and William J. Sutton. One resignation has become effective. The names of the nineteen Fellows elected at the Philadelphia meeting have been added to the list, all of them having completed their membership according to the rule. The present enrollment of the Society is 376. Six candidates are before the Society for election and several applications are under consideration by the Council. Distribution of Bulletin. — There have been received during the year (i new subscriptions to the Bulletin, and 9 subscriptions bave been discon- tinued, making the number of subscribers 115. The irregular distribution of the Bulletin during the past year lias been as follows: Complete volumes sold to the public, 15; sold to Fel- lows, 1; sent out to supply deficiencies, 1, and delinquents, 5; brochures 1 Since the meeting the Secretary has received notice of the death of Frank A. Hill. 6 PKOCEEDINGS OF THE WASHINGTON MEETING sent out to supply deficiencies, 8, and delinquents, 44 ; sold to Fellows, 3 ; sold to the public, 27. Bulletin sales. — The receipts from subscriptions to and sales of the Bulletin during the past year are shown in the following table : Bulletin Receipts, December 1, 1914-November SO, 191.5 Co nplete volumes. Brochures Grand Fellows. Public. Total. Fellows. Public. Total. total. $7.50 $7.50 $7. 50 7.50 7.50 7.50 7.50 7.50 7.50 7.50 7.50 7.50 7.50 7.50 7.50 Volume 11 7.50 7.50 7.50 7.50 7.50 7.50 7.50 Volume 12 7.50 Volume 13. . . $1.20 .90 1.10 $1.20 .90 1.10 8.70 .90 Volume 15 . . 7.50 7.50 7.50 7.50 8.60 Volume 16 7.50 Volume 17. 1.05 1.80 2.40 1.40 7.15 1.80 .80 7.55 8.25 4.50 3.75 $43.65 1.05 1.80 2.40 1.40 7.15 5.95 .80 9.50 8.25 4.50 3.75 $49.75 1.05 Volume 18 . 1.80 Volume 19 2.40 Volume 20 . . . 7.50 7.50 8.90 7.15 $4.15 5.95 .80 Volume 24. . . 15.00 22.50 835.00 60.00 15.00 30.00 835.00 60.00 1.95 $6.10 24.50 Volume 25. . . Volume 26. . . $7.50 38.25 839.50 Volume 27 . . . 63.75 Total .... Index 1-10 $7.50 $1,015.00 2.25 3.50 $1,022.50 2.25 3.50 $1,072.25 2.25 Index 11-20. . 3.50 $6.10 $43.65 $49.75 Total .... $7 . 50 $1,020.75 $1,028.25 $1,078.00 Receipts for the fiscal year $1,078.00 Previously reported 18,300.89 Total receipts to date $19,378.89 Charged, but not yet received: On 1911 account 7.50 On 1915 account 4.90 Total sales to date -. $19,391.29 Two subscriptions to volume 26 are still to be paid for. REPORT OF THE COUNCIL 7 Expenses. — The following table gives the cost of administration and of Bulletin distribution during the past year : EXPENDITURES OF SECRETARY'S OFFICE DURING THE FISCAL YEAR ENDING NOVEMEEK 30, 1915 Account of Administration Note book $0.20 Printing (including annual meetings of 1914 and 1915) 94.46 Messenger service 1.00 Telegrams 10.45 Telephone charges 1 . 03 Postage 37.36 Express charges 4. 86 Letter-heads 2 . 75 Ribbon for typewriter .75 Post-cards 5 . 50 Binding three copies of Bulletin 8 . 00 Fee to inscribe Society as member of International Engineer- ing Congress 5.00 Total $171.36 Account of Bulletin Express and freight charges . . . $44 . 7S Postage 6. 70 Messenger service 1 . 55 Printing 2.00 Jurat .25 Collection charges on checks 1.29 Wrapping paper 2 . 73 Total $59.30 Total expenditures for the year $230.66 Bespectf ully submitted, Charles P. Berkey, Secretary pro tern,. Treasurer's Report To the Council of the Geological Society of America: The Treasurer herewith submits his annual report for the year ending November 30, 1915. The membership of the Society at the present time is 376, of whom 284 pay annual duos. One member died early in 1914, but the notice 8 PROCEEDINGS OP THE WASHINGTON MEETING was not received until 1915. Nineteen new members were elected at the last annual meeting, all of whom qualified. There have been 4 deaths during the year and 1 resignation. Twenty-four members are delinquent in the payment of dues — 1 for six years, 2 for four years, 3 for two years, and are therefore liable to be dropped from the roll — and 18 for one year. One Life Member died during the year, which, with the 15 previous deaths, leaves 92 living Life Members. With the advice of the Investment Committee, the Treasurer bought during the year one New England Telephone and Telegraph Company five per cent bond, with interest, at a cost of $1,015; and two American Agricultural Chemical Company five per cent bonds, and interest, at a cost of $2,040.28. One bond of the St. Louis, Iron Mountain and South- ern Railway Company was redeemed on June 1. RECEIPTS Balance in treasury December 1, 1914 $1,055. 2S Fellowship fees, 1912 (1) $10.00 1913(1) 10.00 1914 (8) 80.00 1915 (261) 2,610.00 2,710.00 Initiation fees (19) 190.00 Interest on investments : Iowa Apartment House stock 50.00 Ontario Apartment House stock 200.00 Texas and. Pacific Railroad Company bonds 100.00 U. S. Steel Corporation bonds 150 . 00 St. Louis, Iron Mountain and Southern Railway Company bond 25 . 00 St. Louis and San Francisco Railroad Company equipment bond ■. 50 . 00 Fairmont and Clarksburg Traction Com- pany bonds 100.00 Consolidation Coal Company bonds 100.00 Chicago Railways Company bonds 100.00 Southern Bell Telephone and Telegraph Company bonds. 100.00 New England Telephone and Telegraph Company bond 50 . 00 American Agricultural Chemical Company bonds 50.00 Interest on deposits, Baltimore Trust Company 48 . 53 1,123.53 REPORT OF THE COUNCIL Case Library, accessions 1914 150.00 Redemption of St. Louis, Iron Mountain and Southern Railroad Company bond 1.000 . 00 Collection charge added to checks .50 Received from Secretary : Sales of publications $1,078 . 00 Authors' separates 88 . 20 Authors' corrections 17 . 45 Collection charges added to checks .87 Rinding Bulletin 1 .60 Postage on foreign subscriptions 6. SO — 1,192.92 $7,422.23 EXPENDITURES Secretary's office : Administration $171 . 36 Bulletin 59.30 Allowance 1,000.00 Treasurer's office : Postage, bond, safe-deposit box $40.00 Allowance for clerical hire 100.00 Publication of Bulletin : Printing $2,437 . 23 Engraving 1S5 . 44 Editor's allowance 250 . 00 $1,230.66 140.00 2,S72.67 Purchase of one New England Telephone and Telegraph Company five per cent bond, and interest 1,015 . 00 Purchase of two American Agricultural Chemical Com- pany five per cent bonds, and interest 2,040.28 ■ 7,29S.61 Balance in Baltimore Trust Company December 1, 1915 123.62 Eespectfully submitted, $7,422.23 Wm. Bullock Clark, Treasurer. Editor's Report To the Council of the Geological Society of America: The Editor submits herewith his annual report. The following- tables cover statistical data for the twenty-six volumes thus far issued: 10 PROCEEDINGS OP THE WASHINGTON MEETING Cost. Average — Vols. 1-20. Vol. 21. Vol. 22. Vol. 23. Vol. 24. Vol . 25. Vol. 26. pp. 610. pis. 55. pp. 839. pis. 54. pp. 759. pis. 31. pp. 774. pis. 43. pp. 755. pis. 36. pp. 820. pis. 28. pp. 525. pis. 27. Letter press. Illustrations. $1,086.58 390.09 $2,049.95 404.27 $1,600.45 200.81 $1,750.40 274.70 $1,047.90 288.80 $2,049.19 342.07 $1,070.22 171.79 Total $2,077.57 $2,454.22 $1,921.26 $2,025.10 $1,936.70 $2,391.86 $1,248.01 Average per page $3.41 $2.93 $2.53 $2.02 $2.56 $2.91 $2.37 Classification. Volume. 1 110 50 3 50 4 25 138 6 50 7 38 8 34 9 2 10 35 11 05 12 199 13 125 14 48 20 Hi 04 17 49 18 16 19 106 20 43 21 72 22 23 23 75 24 18 25 34 26 o bC bO u 6 o o O o 'o IS . ft !>> too ,2 >» 6C 03 aj =S be .rf o XII >> ft 0> be '3 O o o -a ft 03 bC bc-S o o -£ 6» ft c7 be ?-. O .£Po w O SB -u O go 03 ft .a ^ fl bC 3 ° o o id '6 o 03 o a CD Number of pages. 137 92 18 83 44 47 60 4 110 60 111 52 168 47 9 55 1 41 44 41 32 158 104 01 15 134 38 74 52 52 14 47 32 135 70 54 28 51 107 71 14 111 75 39 71 99 1 03 25 77 105 53 40 21 123 4 00 28 50 98 5 43 67 58 14 79 8 102 138 44 28 04 16 04 12 33 96 37 59 02 68 28 84 27 110 21 10 54 31 188 7 71 60 39 55 53 24 98 5 5 70 2 17 13 24 28 110 42 4 105 32 47 48 59 183 118 22 1 80 14 124 111 3 78 94 30 30 102 267 141 77 07 17 22 19 161 41 84 47 294 27 71 9 164 141 5 29 246 5 08 40 108 29 66 30 155 32 56 15 54 35 29 37 45 303 8 60 3 234 75 48 85 70 106 1 111 11 54 28 28 23 403 74 03 49 52 126 108 19 145 134 00 32 57 96 57 49 160 106 23 133 53 211 54 32 156 9 175 108 9 72 23 11 56 90 148 54 44 4 7 1 2 9 4 13 17 46 29-' 1 3 15 2 3 20 132 10 1 1 3 22 6 Total. 593+xii 662+xiv 541+xii 458+xii 665+xii 538+x 558+x 446+x 460+ x 534+xiii 651 + xii 538+xi 583+xii 609+xi 636+ x 636+xiii 785+xiv 717+xii 617+x 749 + xiv 823+xvi 747+xii 758+xvi 737+xviii 802+xviii 504+xxi Respectfully submitted, Joseph Stanley-Brown, Editor, The foregoing report is respectfully submitted. December 28, 1915. The Council. ELECTION OF OFFICERS 11 On motion, the report was laid on the table as usual until the following day. ELECTION OF AUDITING COMMITTEE The Auditing Committee, consisting of John E. Wolff, George H. Perkins, and E. B. Mathews, was then elected, and the Treasurer's report was referred to it for examination. ELECTION OF OFFICERS The Secretary declared the vote for officers for 1916 as follows, the ballots having been canvassed and counted by the Council in accordance with the By-Laws : President : John M. Clarke, Albany, New York. First Vice-President : J. P. Iddtngs, Brinklow, Maryland. Second Vice-President: Harry Fielding Reid, Baltimore, Maryland. Third Vice-President: Rudolph Ruedemann, Albany, New York. Secretary: Edmund Otis TTovey, New York City. Treasurer: William Bullock Clark, Baltimore, Maryland. Editor: Joseph Stanley-Brown, New York City. Librarian : Frank R. Van Horn, Cleveland, Ohio. Councilors: Frank B. Taylor, Fort Wayne, Indiana. Charles P. Berkey, New York City. 12 PROCEEDINGS OF THE WASHINGTON MEETING ELECTION OF FELLOWS The Secretary announced the election in due form of the following Fellows, the ballots having been canvassed and counted by the Council: Thomas Olachar Brown, A. B., A. M., Ph. D., Bryn Mawr College, Bryn Mawr. Pennsylvania. Charles Wilford Cook, A. B., M. S., Ph. D., University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Michigan. William Ebe'nezer Ford, Ph. B., Ph. D., Sheffield Scientific School, New Haven, Connecticut. Charles Townsend Kirk, B. S., A. M., Ph. D., University of New Mexico, Albu- querque, New Mexico. Donald Francis MacDonald, B. S., M. S., LL. D.. United States Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. Edgar Theodore Wherry, B. S., Ph. D., United States National Museum. Wash- ington, D. C. Announcement was then made by the Secretary that the Society had lost four Fellows by death during the year 1915 : Theodore B. Comstock, Orville A. Derby, Joseph A. Holmes, and William J. Sutton. Since the 1914 meeting the Secretary had also received notice of the death of Arthur B. Willmott on May 8, 1914. Memorials of deceased Fellows were presented as follows: MEMORIAL OF THEODORE BRYANT COMSTOCK BY HEINRICH RIES Theodore B. Comstock was born at Cuyahoga Falls, Ohio, on July 27, 1849. After graduating from school he attended the Pennsylvania State College, where he received the Bachelor of Agriculture degree in 1868. In 1870 he obtained the Bachelor of Science degree from Cornell Univer- sity, and in 1886 the Doctor of Science degree from the same institution. His first teaching position was that of Instructor in Botany in Cornell University, which he held from 1868-1870, and then left to accept a pro- fessorship of Natural Science at Pelham Priory from 1871-1872. Fol- lowing this he held the following positions : Instructor in Natural Science in Cincinnati, 1873 ; Director of the Kirkland Summer School of Natural History in 1875, and then acting Professor of Geology in Cornell Univer- sity until 1879. Many of bis former students at Cornell speak highly of the interest which he took in them and their work, and it may be of interest to note in this connection that he gave the first instruction in Economic Geology that was given at this institution. His lecture syllabus which he pub- BULL. GEOL. SOC. AM. VOL. 27, 1915, PL. 1 MEMORIAL OF THEODORE BRYANT COMSTOCK 13 lislied at that time contains many illustrations showing the application of geology to engineering problems. After leaving Cornell he occupied several other teaching positions as follows : Instructor in Shaler's Harvard Summer School of Geology, 1876; Professor of Mining Engineering and Physics, University of Illi- nois, 1885-1889; Director Arizona School of Mines, 1891-1893; Presi- dent University of Arizona, 1893-1895. During the period that he was engaged in teaching he also was occupied with more or less field work, beginning as early as 1870, in which year he went as assistant on the Morgan Expedition to Brazil. In 1876 he served as assistant on the Kentucky Geological Surve} r , and in 1877 as member of an expedition to the Northwest Territories, in 1877 as assistant on the Arkansas Geological Survey, and following that in a similar capacity on the Texas Geological Survey. In the later years of his life he gave up most of his active geological work and settled in Los Angeles, California, where he died on July 26, 1915. Doctor Comstock was a member of the following societies : Geological Society of America, of which he was an original Fellow; American Insti- tute of Mining Engineers, Mining and Metallurgical Society, American Association for the Advancement of Science, National Geographic So- ciety, National Educators' Association, Southern California Academy of Science, and New York Academy of Science. He was the author of many papers dealing chiefly with geological subjects, a list of which is appended. BIBLIOGRAPHY 1S73. On the geology of western Wyoming. American Journal of Science, third series, volume 6, pages 426-432 ; volume 7, page 151. 1875. Geological report. Abstract. American Journal of Science, third series, volume 10, pages 59-60. 1876. Remarks on the hot springs and geysers and other topics illustrating the scientific value of the Yellowstone Park. Proceedings of the American Association for the Advancement of Science, volume 24. part 2, pages 97-99. 1876. Formation of geyserite pebbles in pools adjacent to the geysers of the Yellowstone Park. Abstract. Proceedings of the American Associa- tion for the Advancement of Science, volume 24, part 2, page 97. 1877. On some unexplained phenomena in the geyser basins of the Yellowstone National Park. Proceedings of the American Association for the Ad- vancement of Science, volume 25, pages 235-239. 1883. Notes on the geology and mineralogy of San Juan County, Colorado. Transactions of the American Institute of Mining Engineers, volume 11, pages 165-191, map. 1886, Supermetamorphism and volcanism. American Naturalist, volume 20, pages 1006-1008. 14 PROCEEDINGS OF THE WASHINGTON MEETING 18S6. Some peculiarities of the local drift of the Rocky Mountains. American Naturalist, volume 20, pages 925-927. 1SS6. Remarkable extinct geyser basin in southwest Colorado. American Naturalist, volume 20, pages 963-965. 1886. The veins of southwest Colorado. American Naturalist, volume 20, pages 1043-1044. 1886. Mining engineering at the University of Illinois. Transactions of the American Institute of Mining Engineers, volume 15. page 589. 1S87. Supermetamorphism ; its actuality, inducing causes, and general effects. Abstract. Proceedings of the American Association for the Advance- ment of Science, volume 35, pages 232-233. 1S87. Hints toward a theory of volcanism. Abstract. Proceedings of the American Association for the Advancement of Science, volume 35, page 233. 1887. The geology and vein structure of southwestern Colorado. Transac- tions of the American Institute of Mining Engineers, volume 15, pages 218-265, plates 1-4, map. 1887. The fossil fuels of Illinois and their exploitation. Engineering and Min- ing Journal, volume 44, page 24, quarto. 1887. Notes on the region north of the Vermilion Lake district in British Co- lumbia. Transactions of the American Institute of Mining Engineers, volume 16, pages 109-111. 1887. Engineering relations of the Yellowstone Park. Transactions of the American Institute of Mining Engineers, volume 16. page 46. 188S. A preliminary examination of the geology of western central Arkansas. Report of the Arkansas Geological Survey for 1888, volume 1. pages 1-320, 2 maps. 18S9. Hot Springs formations in Red Mountain district, Colorado : A reply to the criticisms of Mr. Emmons. Transactions of the American Insti- tute of Mining Engineers, volume 17, pages 261-264. 1890. A preliminary report on the geology of the central mineral region of Texas. First Annual Report of the Texas Geological Survey, pages 237-391, plate 2. 1891. Report on the geography and mineral resources of the central mineral region of Texas, chiefly south of the San Saba River, north of the Pedernales River, west of Burnet, and east of Menardsville and Junc- tion City. Second Annual Report of the Texas Geological Survey, pages 553-664, 3 maps. 1891. Tin in central Texas. Engineering and Mining Journal, volume 51, pages 117-118, quarto. 1891. A preliminary report on parts of counties of Menard, Concho, Tom Green, Sutton, Schleicher, Crockett, Yalverde, Kinney, Maverick, Uvalde, Edwards, Bandera, Kerr, and Gillespie, Texas. Second Report of Progress of the Texas Geological Survey, pages 43-54. 1892. Valuable experiments in vein formation. Science, volume 19, page 214. 1894. Notes on Arizona mines. I. Silver. Engineering and Mining Journal, volume 57, page 103. 1895. Notes on Arizona geology. Engineering and Mining Journal, volume 60, page 369. II — Bull. Geol. Soc. Am., Vol. 27, 1015 BULL. GEOL. SOC. AM. VOL. 27, 1915, PL. 2 .■:'..'" •<.'-.■ ■ MEMORIAL OP ORVILLE A. DERBY 15 1900. The chloride district, Arizona. Engineering and Mining Journal, vol- ume 70, pages 97-98. 1901. The geology and vein phenomena of Arizona. Transactions of the American Institute of Mining Engineers, volume 30, pages 1038-1101, 1 figure. 1902. Edward Claypole, the scientist. American Geologist, volume 29, pages 1-23, 1 plate. 1903. Memoir of Edward Waller Claypole. Bulletin of the Geological Society of America, volume 13, pages 487-497. 1905. Superficial blackening and discoloration of rocks, especially in desert regions. Transactions of the American Institute of Mining Engineers, volume 35, pages 1014-1017. 1902. Geological notes. Bulletin of the Southern California Academy of Sci- ences, volume 1, page 74. 1907. The United States Geological Survey. Science, new series, volume 25, page 309. MEMORIAL OF ORVILLE A. DERBY BY JOHN C. BEANNEE Oivillc Adelbert Derby was born at Kelloggsville, New York. July 23, 1851; and died by his own hand at Eio de Janeiro, Brazil, November 27, 1915. He was the third son of John C. Derby and Malvina A. Lindsay Derby, and was reared on a farm near Kelloggsville, in Cayuga County, in the "Finger Lakes" region of New York State, about 16 miles south- east of Auburn. Derby entered Cornell University in 1860, and while yet a freshman he became so interested in geology and was such a promising student that lie was selected by Prof. Charles Fred Hartt, then professor of geology at Cornell, to accompany him on a trip to Brazil in the summer of 1'870. An incident showing a characteristic trait of the man had something to do with his selection for assistant on that trip and for his subsequent promotions. Professor Hartt had to leave the university for an absence of two weeks. He was a bit uncertain as to what could be done during his absence with this very new student of his. At a venture he gave him Hall's volume on the fossil bryozoa of New York — a work that Mould certainly have cooled the unguided ardor of most beginners. When Hartt came back at the end of two weeks Derby was patiently pegging away on the bryozoa. Hartt' s heart warmed to a student who had the grit to stick to his uninspiring work, and shortly thereafter the opportunity to visit Brazil was given him. Derby gladly accepted the invitation, and in doing so he determined both his career and the whole course of his life. On his first voyage to South America he went to Pernambuco and made the first considerable collections of fossils ever made at Maria Parinha. 16 PROCEEDINGS OF THE WASHINGTON MEETING In the summer of 1871 he went to Brazil with Hartt again, this time visiting the Amazon Valley and making an important collection of Car- boniferous fossils from the limestones at Itaituba, on the lower Tapajos River. In the interval between 1871 and 1873 he was occupied with his studies, and in 1873 he graduated at Cornell University; the year follow- ing he continued his geological work for the master's degree, which he received in June, 1874. His thesis was "On the Carboniferous brachio- poda of Itaituba., Rio Tapajos," and was published as number 2 of Volume I of the Bulletin of Cornell University, Ithaca, 1874. That was Derhy's first publication on the geology of Brazil, and it is not only a valuable paper in itself, but it is especially interesting in view of subsequent de- velopments. The Itaituba fossils were in compact limestone, but as they were silicified, they could be obtained in satisfactory form only by dis- solving away the surrounding rock — a long and tedious process which would have thoroughly discouraged most young men of Derby's age. In 1873 Derby was appointed instructor in geology in Cornell, and in the summer of 1874 Professor Hartt made arrangements to go to Brazil again. Leave of absence was obtained, Derby was placed in charge of the work of instruction in the department, and in September, 1874, Hartt went to Brazil again, taking Branner with him as his only assistant. Arriving in Rio de Janeiro, Hartt at once devoted all his energies to interesting the leading men in a geological survey of the empire, and by the end of a year the survey was provided for, and 0. A. Derby, Richard Rathbun, and E. F. Pacheco Jordao were named as assistants of the new "Commissao Geologica do Imperio do Brasil." In December, 1875, Derby reached Rio de Janeiro and began his work under the government. He held this position less than two years, for, through a change of ministry, the survey was abolished in 1877, and Hartt died in Rio that same year. Shortly after the extinction of the survey, however, Derby was given a position in the National Museum at Rio as curator in charge of geology. He remained in the museum until 1886, when he was made State Geologist of the Brazilian State of Sao Paulo. The establishment of the Sao Paulo Survey was a step of great impor- tance to geological science in Brazil, for Derby's knowledge of and interest in the geology of the country as a whole enabled him to grasp more firmly the geological problems of that particular State, and at the same time lie became and remained the leading authority on the geology of Brazil. He was State Geologist of Sao Paulo until 1904, when he resigned. In January, 1907, a new federal geological survey was provided for under Dr. Miguel Calmon, who was then minister of public works, arid MEMORIAL OP ORVILLE A. DERBY 17 Derby was made its chief — a position he held during the rest of his life. The appropriations were necessarily small at the outset, hut the work undertaken was of great importance to Brazil, for sooner or later it was to point the way to an intelligent and scientific development of the natural resources of the country. The first edition of Branner's Geologia Elementar was thus dedicated : "To Orville A. Derby, who has devoted his life to the study of the geology of Brazil, and has done more than any one else to solve its many problems, this work is affectionately dedicated." This is a brief and mild statement of Derby's' great service to Brazil, and to the science of geology, without mentioning his many other services to science and to that country. Visitors to Brazil who w r ere interested in geologjr always found him helpful in connection with their work. Dr. J. B. Woodworth, of Harvard, who went to Brazil in 1908 to study the Permian glaciation of the South- ern States of that country, says that "without his aid and personal at- tendance it would not have been possible for me to have carried on the Sbaler Memorial Expedition in Brazil to a successful issue in anything like the time in which that work was accomplished. With true Latin- American courtesy he paved the way for me to find what he would have been proud himself to have discovered — the actual occurrence of glaciated pebbles in the tillite beds of Parana." First and last, Derby was a paleontologist. He had no fondness for administrative work; he was but little interested in structural geology or in its methods ; he was forced by circumstances into some acquaintance with microscopic petrography; but his interest in paleontology was gen- uine, deep, and all-comprehensive. Prom all the cares of office and the worriments of life he found relief and happiness in boxes of fragments of fossils that most paleontologists would have put away as not worth while. It was chiefly to this interest of his in paleontology that we owe Dr. C. A. White's "Contributions to the Paleontology of Brazil," published a1 Rio in 1887, and the following valuable works by Dr. John M. Clark: "Trilobites of the Erere and Maecuru sandstones," Rio, 1896 ; "Upper Silurian fauna of Rio Trombetas," Rio, 1899 ; ''Devonian mollusks of the State of Para," Rio, 1899, and "Devonian fossils of Parana," Rio, 1913. Besides these more important publications there are many smaller papers on paleontology that can not be mentioned here, and there still remains unpublished an important volume by D. S. Jordan on the Cretaceous fossil fishes of Ceara. 18 PROCEEDINGS OF THE WASHINGTON MEETING During the last eight years Derby has given much of his time to the study of Psaronius and its relationships. The last of his published papers was on the stem structure of Tietea singularis, which appeared in the American Journal of Science for March, 1915, pages 251-260. Having to undertake work in regions hut poorly supplied with maps, one of his first and most important duties, when he becamo State Geologist of Sao Paulo, was the inauguration of topographic work. This work was intrusted to Horace E. Williams, an able and energetic young American, to whom the State of Sao Paulo and the scientific world are indebted for an excellent series of topographic maps, on a scale of 1 to 100,000, to say nothing of his explorations of the western portions of that State, his work on tire Serra da Canastra, etcetera. Derby's own list of publications on the geology of Brazil numbers 125 papers. Naturally they embrace a. wide range of subjects. Ten of his papers relate to the geology and genesis of the Brazilian diamonds. He became interested in the early cartography of Brazil and published a number of papers on the subject. As an author and as a scientific reasoner, he was an extremely cautious man, so much so that the word "hedge" was constantly on his lips, both for his own guidance and as a. warning to his assistants. The last evening I spent in his rooms at Rio de Janeiro he referred to this personal trait and remarked that it had prevented his marrying; that he was too cautious to take the risk. This cautiousness of his was prob- ably the real reason for some of the long delays in publishing his results, which led to tire tying up of his own results and those of his assistants. Without doubt he hoped the delays would enable him to put everything beyond question and to make his reports final and complete instead of preliminary and tentative. But the delays were prolonged from year to year, until his assistants became discouraged and the government more or less exasperated at the lack of practical results for such great and long continued expenditures. It was largely this long delay that finally led to his resignation as State Geologist of Sao Paulo. Derby never felt obliged to show results. After he had been State Geologist of Sao Paulo for ten or twelve years and had published next to nothing on the geology of that State, I asked him point blank and with some feeling where his results were. He replied : "They are in my head." We had to change the subject. But the important fact behind his delays is that the geology of Sao Paulo is difficult and involves problems that he had not been able to settle to his own satisfaction, and he was unwilling to commit himself to paper and thus lay himself open to adverse criticism. It seemed unfortunate for Brazil, for himself, and for the cause of MEMORIAL OF ORVILLE A. DERBY 19 science that he was unable to bring himself to take an active interest in the economic geology of the country; but his first and only interest in geology was in geology as a pure science. To him a fossil was a thing of beauty, of interest, and value, and a joy forever: but a mine or an industry was, after all, only an industry whose main object was money- getting. It goes without saying that Derby and I did not always agree about geological questions, but our very disagreements tended to stimulate care- ful work and finally to disclose the truth. An interesting illustration was our disagreement in regard to certain beds in the black diamond regions of Bahia; be called them Paraguassu and I called them Caboclo. After a year of proving each other in the wrong, he was induced to send his assistant, Boderic Crandall, to the region in question to settle the dispute. Crandall went and reported that we were not speaking of the same things ; that both series were legitimate, and that we were botb right. Derby was a man of unlimited gift. When once he decided on a course of action, nothing turned him to the right or to the left. His whole life is a demonstration of his power to make good in spite of obstacles that would bave been insurmountable for most men — his determination to devote his life to the geology of Brazil, cost what it might. How many of us would have lived for forty years in a foreign country, cut off, as he was, from all personal contact with the geologists of the world at large and from the people of his own race and from bis own family ? From the time he went to Eio, in 1875, to the day of his death — a space of forty years — he visited the United States only twice. The first of these visits was from January to June of 1883, when he went to Wash- ington to arrange for the publication of Dr. C. A. White's Contributions to the Paleontology of Brazil, an epoch-making work on South American paleontology. He spent part of that time in Boston, ISTew Haven, "New York, and Philadelphia. His other visit was made in 1890, when lie attended the Indianapolis meeting of the American Association, and re- turned to Eio by way of England. When the Commissao Geologica was stopped, in 1877, the rest of us took to our heels. Not so Derby; he was not to be stampeded by a simple lack of funds or of employment; he meant to save the results of the work of Hartt and of his colleagues, and, so far as it could be done, he did it. Personally Derby was one of the kindest hearted and most affect innate men I have ever known. His time, Ins sympathies, and his last dollar were at the service of his friends; and his rigid hand knew nothing of the kind deeds done by his left. The beggars in the streets found him their easiest victim. 20 PROCEEDINGS OF THE WASHINGTON MEETING He was held in the highest esteem in the community in which he lived. He stood for uprightness and honorable dealing, and he was never the billing tool of designing adventurers. For many years he has been justly regarded as the leading geologist in South America, and his standing is due not to the fact that there are but few geologists in South America, but to his ability and to his excellent work. In 1892 he was awarded the Wollaston prize of the Geological Society of London, while his distinguished services led to his being made one of the associate editors of the Journal of Geology and to his election to mem- bership in various learned societies in different parts of the world. He was a frequent contributor to the American Journal of Science. He was naturalized as a Brazilian citizen a few months before his death.* The circumstances that led to Derby's suicide are not clearly known, or rather they are not clearly understood. Neither the published ac- counts of all the details available to the authorities nor the many private letters received from mutual friends throw much light on the case. The act was committed in his rooms in the Strangers Hotel in Rio, where he had lived for eight years. The evening preceding his death was spent at the home of a Brazilian friend and he went to his own rooms about mid- night. The next morning he was called as usual, took his bath, drank his coffee, and read the morning papers. About 10 o'clock a messenger going to his room found him lying across his bed with a bullet-hole through his head and the revolver still grasped in his dead hand. He left no word of explanation or complaint about anything or against any one. The general impression seems to be that his suicide was due to disap- pointment on account of the reduction by the government of the appro- priations for his work. A few feeble efforts have been made to find other explanations for his act, but this must he and is accepted as the only genuine one. The history of his struggles to keep the scientific work intrusted to him out of politics and to make it efficient is nothing new. Scientific men the world over have often been in similar positions. In the present case there is no doubt but that the matter was complicated by the financial situation in Brazil brought about by the war in Europe. The govern- ment was hard pressed financially and it was absolutely necessary to re- duce expenses to the lowest possible point. It was not unnatural under * His successor as director of the Brazilian Survey is Dr. L. F. Gonzaga de Campos, who has been one of the geologists of the survey since it was begun. Doctor Campos is the author of a number of valuable papers on Brazilian Geology and a thoroughly conscientious man of wide personal acquaintance with the geology of Brazil. MEMORIAL OF ORVILLE A. DERBY 21 the circumstances that the geological service should have been selected as the one that could be reduced without producing serious confusion in the administration of the government. The Brazilian newspapers all speak of him in. the highest possible terms, and his death is generally and properly looked on in Brazil as a great national loss. His suicide itself was his last and his most emphatic protest against the extinction of geologic work — the final culminating expression of his profound interest in and devotion to the welfare of the country he had served faithfully for foidry years. A 'list of his papers on the geology of Brazil up to 1909 is given in this Bulletin, volume 20, papers 36 to 42. To that list should be added the following titles, that have appeared since the publication of that list: Bibliography Feicoes physicas e geologicas do Brasil. Boletino da Directoria da Agricul- tura da Bahia, volume X, pages 241-24S. Bahia, 1907. Service Geologico e Mineralogico do Brasil. Boletino do Ministerio da Indus- trie, Yiaoao e Obras Publicas, volume I, pages 69-82. Rio, Abril de 1909. Os miuerios de ferro do Brasil. Jornal do Commercio, Rio, August 25, 1909. Early iron-making in Brazil. Engineering and Mining Journal, New York, December 4, 1909. The iron ores of Brazil. The Times, London, December 2S, 1909, page 56. The iron-ore resources of the world. Stockholm, 1910, pages 813-822. Physical and geological features of Brazil. The Brazilian Yearbook for 1900. pages 11-14. Rio de Janeiro n. d. Estudios geologicos en el Brasil. Santiago de Chile, 1911. (Publication of the fourth congresso cientifico Latino Americano en 1908.) On the mineralization of the gold-bearing lode of Passagem, Minas Geraes. Brazil. American Journal of Science, volume CLXXXTI, September, 1911, pages 185-190. A notable Brazilian diamond. American Journal of Science, volume CLXXXTI. September, 1911, pages 191-194. O aproveitamento do carvao brasileiro. Jornal do Commercio, 24 de Abril de 1912, page 5. Speculations regarding the genesis of the diamond. Journal of Geology, vol- ume XX, July-August, 1912, pages 451-456. Observations on the stem structure Psaronius brasiliensis. American Journal of Science. November. 1913, pages 489-497. Observations on the crown structure of Psaronius brasilicnsis. American Jour- nal of Science. August. 1914. pages 149-156. Illustrations of the stem structure of Tietea singularis. American Journal of Science, volume XXXIX, March, 1915. pages 251-260. 22 PROCEEDINGS OP THE WASHINGTON MEETING MEMORIAL OF JOSEPH AUSTIN HOLMES 1 BY JOSEPH HYDE PRATT The life of Dr. Joseph Austin Holmes was devoted to the development and welfare of his country, and in his death the people of the United States have lost one of their most efficient and valuable public servants. He was a man who put duty first, and in carrying out this ideal he gave his life in an endeavor to improve the condition and safety of the miners. He did not know the word "failure ;" and, where other men would have failed, he has been able to accomplish the results desired. It is granted to but few men to be able in the few years of their life's activity to do that which will leave a permanent influence and impress on an industry; but to Doctor Holmes, whose life we are now commemorating, this dis- tinct ion was allotted. Due almost entirely to his energy and efforts, there has been created throughout this country an organized movement looking to the preserva- tion of human life; and, although his first work'Avas directed toward the prevention of mine accidents and safety and welfare of the hundreds of thousands of men who daily risk their lives in the production of fuel, so necessary to the nation's industry and commerce, it developed the "safety first'' idea that has spread to nearly every industry and into all walks of life. These words are almost synonymous with the word "Holmes," and wherever we see "safety first" we are reminded of the wonderful achieve- ments of this man. He has not only left his impress on an industry, but has also created an organization which will live as long as our govern- ment exists, and is a monument to the tireless energy, public-spiritedness, and unselfishness of the man who is responsible for its creation. I refer to the Bureau of Mines, whose foundation he laid by many feats of exact- ing labor and fruitful work, and who, by masterful generalship and argu- ments, as he only could use, carried the bill to establish the Bureau of Mines successfully through an unsympathetic Congress. To Dr. Charles D. Walcott, former Director of the United States Geo- logical Survey and now Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution, must be given the credit of recognizing those qualities of character and ability in Mr. Holmes which he realized were necessary in a man who could not- only lay the foundation and build up an organization that would lead to a Bureau of Mines, but who would also be able to direct it after its crea- tion. In a recent communication from Doctor Walcott, he wrote : x Read at the annual meeting of the Geological Society of America, Washington, D. C, December 2S, 1915. BULL. GEOL. SOC. AM. VOL. 27, 1915, PL. 3 MEMORIAL OF JOSEPH AUSTIN HOLMES 23 "About 1900 it became more and more evident that he (Doctor Holmes) was a man of broad conceptions and fitted to undertake work of national scope, and it was with great pleasure that I learned, in 1904, that he was willing to give all of his time and energy to the development of the Section of Mines and Mining in the Federal Survey. I told him that as soon as the work was suffi- ciently well organized it would be made a Division of the Survey and undoubt- edly lead to the creation of a Bureau of Mines and Mining. He entered into the work with a zeal and intelligence that was not fully understood by his immediate associates; but the work steadily grew and, in 1910, he was ap- pointed Director of tbe Bureau of Mines." His appointment, however, was not attained without very severe opposi- tion from a Secretary who was hostile to Doctor Holmes, and it is rumored that this important position was offered to several other men; but, to the credit of the men of science of this country, it can he said that they all refused to accept what all knew rightfully belonged to another. Those who knew Doctor Holmes, having confidence in his ability and believing that he was the logical head for the new Bureau, were persistent in their demand that he should receive the appointment. It is not generally known how near the Bureau came to losing Doctor Holmes as its Director and how near the University of West Virginia came to securing him as its president; and, as an incident bearing on this is illustrative of the loyalty of Doctor Holmes 1 friends, I wish to quote in part a few lines from a letter I recently received from Dr. I. C. White, State Geologist of West Virginia : "It was during this discouraging period of his life, just before the appoint- ment of a Director of the Bureau of Mines, when he had given up all hope of receiving the appointment, that he came up from Pittsburgh to spend the week end at the writer's home in Morgantown, West Virginia. He was weary and care-worn from the long and disappointing vigil, but gentle and loving as ever. No word of reproach or bitterness escaped his lips. If he could not serve his country in an edifice his own hands had so largely constructed, he was ready to give his services to a State that had stood by him in his long battle, and where he knew he would be among appreciative friends. The State Univer- sity of West Virginia was seeking a president, and one of the purposes of Doctor Holmes' visit to my home was to acquaint the writer, who had ever been his trusted friend, with the fact that he had despaired of being appointed Director of the United States Bureau of Mines, and would accept tbe presi- dency of the University of West Virginia if the regents of the same would make the tender." Fortunately for the industry, Doctor White and others, realizing that for the success of the Bureau of Mines it was necessary that Doctor Holmes should be its head, decided, out of genuine loyalty to him and appreciation of his work, that they Avould not place his name for action before the regents of the University until President Taft had actually 24 PROCEEDINGS OF THE WASHINGTON MEETING bestowed the directorship of the Bureau of Mines on some one else. His friends' belief in what President Taft would finally do was confirmed a few days' later, when the appointment of Doctor Holmes was announced from the White House. That he was a wise selection is evidenced by the wonderful develop- ment of the Bureau under his administration. The work he had planned as Chief of the Technologic Branch of the United States Geological Sur- vey developed rapidly, aided by Congress, which widened the scope and enlarged the purposes of the Bureau. The principal investigations taken up under Doctor Holmes' directorship and the results accomplished are as follows : An investigation in regard to the improper use of explosives and the use of improper explosives. Investigation in regard to better lights for mines. Eesult, the estab- lishment of a permissible list of portable electric lamps for use in danger- ous mines. In developing rescue work Doctor Holmes introduced into this country the so-called "oxygen breathing apparatus." Eesult, such apparatus is now not only widely used in mine-rescue work, but is being adopted by manufacturing plants and by city fire departments. There are today six mine-rescue stations, eight mine-rescue cars, and one rescue motor truck operated by the Bureau of Mines. There are 76 mine-rescue stations that have been established by mining companies, at which there are 1,200 sets of artificial breathing apparatus in addition to the auxiliary equipment for first-aid and lire-fighting work. There are also twelve mine-rescue cars being operated by mining companies. Investigations into the cause of disasters and the recommendations made by the Bureau have resulted in an ever decreasing death rate. The investigation of coal dust and explosions therefrom was one of the most important lines of investigation that Doctor Holmes took up. The result today is that the entire mining industry, including operators and miners, is convinced that coal dust will explode, and' recognize the danger from it; and mine operators and State officials are following the recom- mendations of the Bureau to prevent dust explosions. Investigations have been conducted regarding smelter smoke wastes and wastes in the treatment of rare minerals and metals. Doctor Holmes emphasized the need of such investigations, indicating that there was at least $1,000,000 a day being wasted or lost in the present methods of mining and utilization of our mineral resources. Investigations regarding the extraction of radium from its ores have resulted in the development of a process through which it will be possible MEMORIAL OF JOSEPH AUSTIN HOLMES 25 to greatly reduce the cost of radium compounds to the consumer. "The process is to he patented and dedicated to the public." 2 Investigations have been started to reduce the great loss of $75,000,000 annually, due to coking coal in beehive ovens. As a result already some of this loss has been reduced through the use of by-product ovens and the utilization of the by-products obtained. Doctor Holmes called attention to the annual waste of over $4,500,000 in brass-furnace practice, and then had prepared a report showing how, by practical means, this waste can be largely prevented. These are some of the investigations that Doctor Holmes has had taken up by the Bureau of Mines, and they illustrate the wide scope of the work he was planning for the Bureau to undertake. Its development into one of the most important of all the Federal. Bureaus has been phenomenal and is due not only to the indefatigable work of the Director, but to the fact that he was a splendid judge of men and their capacity for work and was able to surround himself with the type of men who were able to carry out the plans his master mind had conceived, and these men were loyal and true to him. - ,.■'■. He was thoughtful and considerate of his associates; and while he may have demanded much of them, he always gave them full credit for work done; and of the reports of the investigations carried out by the Bureau but Aery few bear his name as author. Credit is given to him who car- ried on the investigation. Doctor Holmes planned the character of the investigation, then put it up to one of his associates to do the detailed work. What he wanted was results. He had little time to write for pub- lication or to think about personal advancement, and he left it to bis associates to do the writing and give him the results — and. results he surely obtained. Although Doctor Holmes is the author of but comparatively few publi- cations, yet he has been personally responsible for the publication of many important scientific and economic papers, because he has had the fore- sight to open up new fields of investigation and secure the properly trained men to carry on the work he outlined. I doubt if there has ever been a man who surpassed him in this respect. This faculty of Doctor Holmes showed itself soon after he became State Geologist of North Carolina in 1891. In this position he had wide latitude for planning out a varied line of investigations relating to many subjects, inasmuch as the object of the State Survey was the investigation of all natural resources of the State. Almost as soon as he was appointed State Geologist, he began to plan new lines of work and to call in to assist 2 Van H. Manning: Jour. Ind. and Eng. Cheni., vol. 7, No. S, p. 71G, Aug., 1915. 26 PROCEEDINGS OF THE WASHINGTON MEETING him men who were fully qualified to carry on the investigation he de- sired. Thus you find associated with him during the first years of his directorship of the State Survey such men as Prof. George Williams, of Johns Hopkins; Prof. S. L. Penfield, of Yale; Dr. George P. Kunz, of New York; Prof. F. P. Venable, of the University of North Carolina; Dr. George P. Merrill, of the National Museum at Washington; Prof. George Swain, of the Massachusetts School of Technology ; Prof. Thomas L. Watson, of the University of Virginia; Prof. H. Y. Wilson, of the University of North Carolina; Prof. William Cain, of the University of North Carolina; Mr. H. B. C. Nitze, Mr. Gifford Pinchot, of Washington; Prof. Heinrich Eies, of Cornell, and others. The published reports of the State Survey, similarly as those of the Bureau of Mines, seldom bear the name of Holmes as one of the authors. Doctor Holmes did a great deal to broaden the scope of the State Geo- logical surveys and to demonstrate that there could be and should be a close cooperation between the State and Federal surveys. There was always most friendly cooperation between the North Carolina Survey and the Federal Survey; and, although the State received very largely from the Federal Survey, it gave very largely in return, for Doctor Holmes was always ready to give his time and energy to any work which promised to be of service to the Federal Survey ; and he was often called in consulta- tion regarding the work of that Survey. Doctor Walcott, who was then Director, states that he was early impressed with Mr. Holmes' thorough- ness and the quality of his work as State Geologist. In the Geological Survey his most important work was probably the application of geology to the industrial development of the country. He started this in the State Survey, but later introduced it into the Federal Survey. As State Geologist he became very much interested in the preservation of the forests of the southern Appalachian region, and it is due largely to his work as State Geologist that the Weeks bill was passed by Congress, which has resulted in the purchase of forest areas to be used for forest reservations in the southern Appalachian region and the White Mountain region. It was under the supervision of Doctor Holmes that the mass of evidence was collected, which proved to the congressional committees that it was absolutely necessary for Congress to take some action to prevent the destruction of the forests of these two areas in order to protect the flow of navigable streams. In connection with an investigation relating to our turpentine indus- try, he had experimental work carried on in regard to the cup and gutter method, which is now in general use in this industry. He also had inves- tigations made as to the practicability of the reproduction of the long- MEMOKLAL OF JOSEPH AUSTIN HOLMES 27 leaf pine, and an actual demonstration in planting of seed proved the feasibility of such reproduction. Doctor Holmes also started the "good roads" movement in North Caro- lina, and one of the first publications of the State Survey was a report on "Eoad materials and road construction in North Carolina." While his work in connection with the roads was almost entirely from the educa- tional standpoint, yet it was this work that made it possible for his suc- cessor to obtain, through the North Carolina General Assembly, the cre- ation of, first, a Highway Division of the Survey, and later of a State Highway Commission. In the State work Doctor Holmes also began investigations in relation to the water powers, mineral waters, underground water supplies, timber resources, mineral resources, and fisheries of the State; but a limited treasury and lack of time prevented him from carrying these out as rap- idly as he desired, and it was left to his successor to complete some of them. During his term of office as State Geologist, 1891 to 1905, the Survey published twenty bulletins and economic papers, giving the results of investigations that he had started. In 1905 the act creating the Survey was repealed and a new act, which was prepared by Doctor Holmes, was passed by the General Assembly of 1905. This created the North Caro- lina Geological and Economic Survey. Doctor Holmes brought geology to this people and made them realize its value and application in the arts. In connection with the investigation of the fisheries of the State, Doc- tor Holmes was the leading spirit in the establishment of the Biological Laboratory at Beaufort. In June, 1897, after consultation with Doctor Holmes and Prof. H. V. Wilson, of the University of North Carolina, the United States Commissioner of Fisheries established at Beaufort. North Carolina, a temporary station for the investigation of the marine fauna and flora of the Southern coast. Professor Wilson was appointed director, and for the next three years he and Doctor Holmes devoted much time and thought to its development. Congress finally made an appropriation for the establishment of a permanent laboratory, but made no appropria- tion for the purchase of a site. Doctor Holmes recommended a site and arranged for its private purchase and its donation to the government. He, with Professor Wilson, drew up the outline plans for the laboratory buildings, and he remained in close touch with the work of the laboratory until his resignation as State Geologist. This work of Doctor Holmes had an important bearing on the fisheries of the State of North Carolina, as it started the interest of the people of the State in the value of the III — Bull. Geol. Soc. Am., Vol. 27, 1915 28 PROCEEDINGS OP THE WASHINGTON MEETING fisheries, and finally resulted, some years after the resignation of Doctor Holmes as State Geologist, in the creation of the Fisheries Commission of the State of North Carolina. Doctor Holmes' work as State Geologist had brought him prominently before the public, and in 1903 he was chosen Director of the Department of Mines and Metallurgy at the Saint Louis World's Fair. He accepted this appointment and had charge of and organized that department. He planned the exhibits and introduced new features for the exhibits, which have since been adopted by all succeeding expositions. These new fea- tures made the Mine Building of the Saint Louis Exposition the most successful and instructive mining exhibit that was ever made at any ex- position. For special services rendered at this exposition he was deco- rated by several foreign governments. In connection with the mining exhibit, he suggested that an investigation be made of the fuels of the United States, and was successful in persuading Congress to authorize the investigation and make the necessary appropriation with which to carry on the work. Doctor Holmes and, at his suggestion, two repre- sentatives of the United States Geological Survey were created a com- mittee to carry on the investigations which were made during the years 1904 and 1905. Although Director of the Department- of Mines at Saint Louis, Doctor Holmes continued to have general supervision of the work of the North Carolina Geological Survey. Early in 1905 the Director of the United States Geological Survey appointed Doctor Holmes to take individual charge of the fuel investigations, and soon after he was ap- pointed Chief of the Division of Technology of the Federal Survey, and then severed his connection Avith the State Geological Survey. While connected with the Federal Survey, Doctor Holmes examined mine experiment stations and mine-rescue stations in Great Britain, Bel- gium, France, and Germany, and it was the result of these studies that led to the inauguration of the movement for mine-rescue work in tin's country. In 1907 President Roosevelt, on Doctor Holmes' recommendation, se- cured the appointment by the governments of Great Britain, Germany, and Belgium of one expert engineer from each of these countries to visit the United States and then visit, with Doctor Holmes, the more impor- tant coal fields of this country. This was done in order to determine to what extent the safety practices used in other mining countries might be introduced into the United States. It was on the basis of the findings of these engineers that Doctor Holmes developed and organized his investi- gations relating to mine explosions, etcetera. MEMORIAL OF JOSEPH AUSTIN HOLMES 29 In 1908, when President Roosevelt took up the question of the conser- vation of our natural resources, Doctor Holmes was appointed a member of the National Conservation Commission, and he had charge of the inventory of the nation's mineral resources. In all Doctor Holmes' work his central thought has always been the development of the mining industry and the improvement of conditions affecting the miner. In carrying out these great ideas, he thought only of the object to be attained and paid little or no heed to personal attacks or opposition, such as inevitably accompanies a forward movement or investigation that requires the cooperation of both the legislative and administrative departments of our government. When, however, an attack was made on him that appeared to endanger the work itself in which he was engaged, he was then ready to put forth all his efforts to meet and defeat the opposition. Doctor Holmes was human as the rest of us and occasionally was for- getful in regard to certain things that were to be clone. This character- istic of his sometimes led to severe criticism of his work by those who were not thoroughly acquainted with him. Whenever any apparent neglect on his part was called to his attention, the matter Avas instantly taken care of and ample apology made for the oversight. Doctor Holmes was excessively careful to observe all the little courtesies of life and was a splendid representative of the Southern Christian gentleman. Doctor Holmes was born at Laurens, South Carolina, November 23, 1859, and died at Denver, Colorado, July, 1915, after nearly a year's illness and fight against tuberculosis. His ill health was undoubtedly brought on by severe exposure in connection with the examination of mines after explosions and of hardships endured in investigations regard- ing mining conditions in Alaska. His parents were Z. L. and Catherine (Nickles) Holmes. His early education was in the schools of South Carolina, but his uni- versity work was at ( !ornell, where he graduated in 1881, taking the degree of B. S. Later lie received the degree of D. Sc. from the University of Pittsburgh, and in 1 !)(>!) the degree of LL. D. from the University of North Carolina. During bis college course Doctor Holmes devoted espe- cial attention to chemistry (including the chemistry of explosives), to metallurgy, geology, general physics, and mining. He visited mining regions and metallurgical plants in many parts of the United States, Germany, France, Great Britain, and Belgium. In the fall of 1881 he became professor of Geology and Natural History in the University of North Carolina, and held this position until 1891, when he became State Geologist. 30 PROCEEDINGS OF THE WASHINGTON MEETING On October 20, 1887, Doctor Holmes married Miss Jeannie I. Sprunt, of Wilmington, North Carolina. Doctor Holmes was a fellow and charter member of the Geological Society of America; fellow of the American Association for the Advance- ment of Science; member of the American Institute of Mining Engi- neers, American Society for Testing Materials, and American Society of Mechanical Engineers. He was appointed a member of the Mining Leg- islation Committee of Illinois ; one of the founders of the Elisha Mitchell Scientific Society; member of the Sigma Xi Scientific Society; member of the Washington Academy of Science, Saint Louis Academy of Science, and the North Carolina Academy of Science; member of the Cosmos Club of Washington and the Engineers' Club of New York. In closing this sketch let me further express my feelings and thought regarding Doctor Holmes in the words of several friends who were very close to him : "Doctor Holmes stands as one of the finest examples of unselfish devotion to the cause which he championed, even to the extent of giving his life for it. Mining in America in its national aspect is more deeply indebted to him on its scientific, operating, and industrial sides than to any one other individual. It seems most unfortunate that Doctor Holmes did not live to aid the movement to improve the laws affecting mines and mining ; but, with the Bureau of Mines firmly established, and cooperating with the thoughtful mining engi- neers and operators throughout the country, the results he hoped to see should be speedily obtained. "Charles D. Walcott." "Ever thoughtful, resourceful, a great organizer, a clear, logical, and eloquent speaker, a splendid judge of men and their capacity to do the work his master mind had planned, the United States Bureau of Mines, founded only in 1910, has under his leadership rapidly grown to be one of the most important of all government agencies. ... "His monument is the United States Bureau of Mines, and his memory -will be cherished forever in the hearts of countless miners, whose lives he has ren- dered safer in the perilous occupation they follow, and without the product of whose busy hands our present civilization could not exist. Although cut down in but little beyond the prime of life, he has left us an example of what glori- ous achievements, indomitable will, and untiring work can accomplish. The great Bureau he so largely created and so successfully directed will continue its brilliant work along the path he so skilfully blazed, since, thanks to a very able and conscientious Secretary of the Interior, his successor is in thorough accord with the high ideals of the former chief, and was ever his efficient helper. "I. C. White." "In the death of Doctor Holmes the people of the United States lose one of their most remarkable and efficient public servants. And the saddest part of it all is that Doctor Holmes is a victim of overwork — a too great devotion to MEMORIAL OF JOSEPH AUSTIN HOLMES 31 the duties which had been assigned to him in behalf of the safety of the mil- lion miners in the United States. He was one of the most enthusiastic, inde- fatigable workers I ever had the pleasure of associating with. His mind was continually on the yearly death toll of the miners, and, although taken away in the prime of his life, he has already accomplished much in reducing the terrible death rate. In the last five years of his life he saw a slowly but steadily decreasing death rate, and while it gave him much joy, it only added to his almost superhuman efforts in behalf of the men. "Van. H. Manning." A full list of Doctor Holmes' reports and more important scientific papers is given in his bibliography, which appears at the close of this sketch. The picture of Doctor Holmes that accompanies this sketch was selected by Mrs. Holmes. BIBLIOGRAPHY 1. Agricultural education in North Carolina. Miscellaneous Special Report Number 2, United States Department of Agriculture, 1883, pages 84-87. 2. Notes on the tornado which occurred in Richmond County, North Carolina, February 19, 18S4. Journal of the Elisha Mitchell Scientific Society, volume I, 1884, pages 28-34. 3. Notes on the Indian burial mounds of eastern North Carolina. Journal of the Elisha Mitchell Scientific Society, volume I, 1884, pages 73-79. 4. Occurrence of AMes canadensis and Pinus strobus in central North Caro- lina. Journal of the Elisha Mitchell Scientific Society, volume I, 1S84, pages S6-S7. 5. Notes on a petrified human body. Journal of the Elisha Mitchell Scientific Society, volume II, 1885, pages 59-60. (With Dr. T. W. Harris.) 6. Taxodium (cypress) in North Carolina. Journal of the Elisha Mitchell Scientific Society, volume II, 1885, pages 92-93. 7. Supplemental report on Sam Christian gold mine. Manuscript. North Carolina Geological Survey, 18S6, 3 pages. S. A sketch of Prof. Washington Caruthers Kerr, M. A., Ph. D. Journal of the Elisha Mitchell Scientific Society, volume IV, part 2, 1887, pages 1-24. 9. Temperature and rainfall at various stations in North Carolina. Journal of the Elisha Mitchell Scientific Society, volume V, 1SS8, pages 31-41. 10. Study of plants in the garden and field. The North Carolina Teacher, 1S88, 6 pages. 11. Historical notes concerning the North Carolina Geological Surveys. Jour- nal of the Elisha Mitchell Scientific Society, volume VI, 1889, pages 5-18. 12. The conglomerate and pebble beds of the Triassic and Potomac formations of North Carolina. Journal of the Elisha Mitchell Scientific Society, volume VI, 1889, page 14S. 13. Mineralogical, Geological, and Agricultural Surveys of South Carolina. Journal of the Elisha Mitchell Scientific Society, volume VI 1, 1890, pages 89-117. 32 PROCEEDINGS OF THE WASHINGTON MEETING 14. Hoover Hill gold mine in North Carolina. Engineering and Mining Jour- nal, volume LTV, page 520. 15. Character and distribution of road materials. Journal of the Elisha Mitchell Scientific Society, volume IX, part 2, 1892, pages 66-81. 16. Road material and road construction in North Carolina. (With William C. Cain.) Bulletin 4, North Carolina Geological Survey, 1893, 88 pages. 17. Geology of the sand-hill country of the Carolinas. Bulletin of the Geo- logical Society of America, volume 5, 1893, pages 33-34. 18. Economic geology of North Carolina. Southern States, volume I, 1893, pages 153-161. 19. Improvement of roads in North Carolina. Yearbook, 1894, United States Department of Agriculture, 1895, pages 513-520. 20. Notes on the kaolin and clay deposits of North Carolina. Transactions of the American Institute of Mining Engineers, volume XXV, 1895, pages 929-936, and Journal of the Elisha Mitchell Scientific Society, volume XII, part 2, 1895, pages 1-10. 21. Notes on the underground supplies of potable waters in the South Atlantic Piedmont Plateau. Transactions of the American Institute of Mining Engineers, volume XXV, pages 936-943, and Journal of the Elisha Mitchell Scientific Society, volume XII, part 1, 1895, pages 31-41. 22. Corundum deposits of the southern Appalachian region. Seventeenth An- nual Report of the United States Geological Survey, part 3, 1896, pages 935-943. 23. Gold in the Carolinas. Gold fields along the Southern Railway. Pub- lished by the Southern Railway, 1S97, pages S-19. 24. Mica deposits of the United States. Bulletin of the Geological Society of America, volume 10, 189S, pages 501-503. 25. North Carolina mineral industry in 1898. Engineering and Mining Jour- nal, volume LXVII, 1899, pages 50-51. 26. Mica deposits in the United States. Twentieth Annual Report of the United States Geological Survey, 1S99, pages 691-707. 27. Water Power in North Carolina. (With Geo. F. Swain and E. W. Myers.) Bulletin S, North Carolina Geological Survey, 1S99, 362 pages. 28. Some recent road legislation in North Carolina. Economic Taper Number 2, North Carolina Geological Survey, 1S99, 24 pages. 29. The deep well at Wilmington, North Carolina. Journal of the Elisha Mitchell Scientific Society, volume XVI, part 2, 1899, pages 67-70; Sci- ence, new series, volume XI, 1900, page 128. 30. Mica industry in North Carolina in 1900. United States Geological Survey. Mineral Resources, 1900, pages S53-954. 31. The Cretaceous and Tertiary section between Cape Fear and Fayetteville, North Carolina. Science, new series, volume XI, 1900, page 143. 32. Recent road legislation in North Carolina. North Carolina Geological Survey. Economic Paper Number 5, 1901, 47 pages. 33. Proceedings of the North Carolina Good Roads Convention. United States Department of Agriculture, Office of Public Road Inquiries. Bulletin Number 24, 1903, 72 pages. 34. Road building in North Carolina. United States Department of Agricul- ture, Office of Public Road Inquiries. Bulletin Number 24, 1903, pages 65-71. BIBLIOGRAPHY OF JOSEPH AUSTIN HOLMES 3o 35-41. Biennian reports of the North Carolina Geological Survey; 1891-1892 ; 1893-1S94; 1895-1896; 1S97-189S; 1S99-1900; 1901-1902; 1903-1904. 42. The collection of mineral statistics in the United States of America. Cong. int. cl'expansion econ. moncliale, Mons, 1905, sect. 2, Statis, int. Bruxelles. 2 pages. 43. Fuel investigations, Geological Survey ; progress during year ending Juno 30, 1909. Proceedings of the American Society for Testing Materials, volume 9, 1909, pages 619-625. 44. Inspection of mines. Report of proceedings of the American Mining Con- gress, twelfth annual session, Goldfleld, Nevada, September 27-October 2, 1909, pages 236-238. 45. Preliminary report of Committee on Standard Specifications for Coal. Proceedings of the American Society for Testing Materials, volume J). 1909, pages 277-279. 46. A rational basis for the conservation of mineral resources. Bulletin 29, American Institute of Mining Engineers, May, 1909, pages 469-476. 47. Coal-mine accidents and their prevention. National Civic Federation cir- cular, New York, November 23, 1909, 4 pages. 48. The Bureau of Mines and its work. Report of proceedings of the Amer- ican Mining Congress, thirteenth annual meeting, Los Angeles, Califor- nia, September 26-October 1, 1910, pages 219-227. 49-53. Annual Report of the United States Bureau of Mines, 1911-1915, 5 vol- umes. 54. The sampling of coal in the mine. Technical Paper 1, United States Bu- reau of Mines, 1911, IS pages. 55. The mining industry. Report of proceedings of the American Mining Con- gress, fourteenth annual meeting, Chicago, Illinois, October 24-2S, 1911. pages 69-71. 56. Diseases and accidents of miners and tunnel workers in the United States. Reprint from Transactions of the Fifteenth International Congress on Hygiene and Demography, September 23-28, 1912, 13 pages. 57. Saving miners' lives. Proceedings of the Fourth National Conservation Congress, Indianapolis. October 1-4. 1912, pages 200-205. 58. The national phases of the mining industry. Eighth International Con- gress of Applied Chemistry, volume 26, 1912, pages 733-750. 59. Speech concerning work of the Bureau of Mines. Report of proceedings of the American Mining Congress, seventeenth annual meeting, rhcenix. Arizona, December 7-11. 1914, pages 95-96. 60. Preliminary report on operations of coal-testing plant of United States Geological Survey at Louisiana Purchase Exposition, Saint Louis, Mis- souri, 1904. E. W. Parker, J. A. Holmes, and M. R. Campbell. Bulletin 263, United States Geological Survey, 1905, 172 pages. 61. Report on operations of coal-testing plant of United States Geological Sur- vey at Louisiana Purchase Exposition. Saint Louis, Missouri, 1904. Professional Paper 4.S, United States Geological Survey, 1906, 3 volumes. 62. United States Geological Survey. Preliminary report on operations of fuel-testing plant of United States Geological Survey at Saint Louis. Missouri, 1905; J. A. Holmes in charge. Introduction and chapter on "briquetting tests," by J. A. Holmes. Bulletin 290, United States Geo- logical Survey, 1906, 240 pages. 34 PROCEEDINGS OF THE WASHINGTON MEETING 63. The San Francisco earthquake and fire of April 18, 1906, and their effects on structures and structural materials. Reports by G. K. Gilbert, R. L. Humphrey, J. S. Sewell, and Frank Soule, with a preface by J. A. Holmes. Bulletin 324, United States Geological Survey, 1907, 170 pages. 64. Coal-mine accidents : their causes and prevention ; a preliminary statisti- cal report, by Clarence Hall and W. O." Snelling, with an introduction by J. A. Holmes. Bulletin 333, United States Geological Survey, 1907, 21 pages. 65. Washing and coking tests of coal and cupola tests of coke, conducted by United States fuel-testing plant at Saint Louis, Missouri, January 1, 1905, to June 30, 1907, by R. G. G. Moldenke, A. W. Belden, and G. R. Delamater, with introduction by J. A. Holmes. Bulletin 336, United States Geological Survey, 1908, 76 pages. 66. Organization, equipment, and operation of the structural materials testing laboratories at Saint Louis, Missouri, by R. L. Humphrey, with a preface by J. A. Holmes. Bulletin 329, United States Geological Survey, 1908, 84 pages. 67. United States Geological Survey. Report of United States fuel-testing plant at Saint Louis, Missouri, January 1, 1906, to June 30, 1907 ; J. A. Holmes in charge. Introduction by J. A. Holmes. Bulletin 332, United States Geological Survey, 1908, 299 pages. 68. Mining conditions under the city of Scranton, Pennsylvania. Report and maps, by William Griffith and E. T. Conner, with a preface by J. A. Holmes and a chapter by N. H. Darton. Bulletin 25, United States Bu- reau of Mines, 1912, 89 pages. 69. United States Congress, House of Representatives ; Committee on Mines and Mining. Hearing before committee, January 11, 1912 ; contains statement of J. A. Holmes, Director of Bureau of Mines, on existing law and new bill proposed to meet claims of Western mining men. Wash- ington, D. C, Government Printing Office, 1912, 48 pages. 70. Hearing before committee, Sixty-second Congress, second session, on H. R. 17260, an act to amend an act entitled "An act to establish in Depart- ment of Interior a Bureau of Mines," approved May 16, 1910, June 12, 1912 ; contains statement of J. A. Holmes, Director of Bureau of Mines. Washington, D. O, Government Printing Office, 1912, pages 4-16. 71. Analyses of coals in United States, with descriptions of mine and field samples collected between July 1, 1904, and June 30, 1910, by N. W. Lord, with chapters by J. A. Holmes, F. M. Stanton, A. C. Fieldner, and Samuel Sanford. Bulletin 22, United States Bureau of Mines, 1913, 2 volumes, text, and plates. 72. The use and misuse of explosives in coal mining, by J. J. Rutledge, with a preface by J. A. Holmes. Miners' Circular Number 7, United States Bureau of Mines, 1913, 53 pages. 73. United States Congress, House of Representatives ; Committee on Mines and Mining. Hearing (on H. R. 6063, appropriation for mining schools), Sixty-third Congress, second session, December 4, 1913 ; contains state- ment of J. A. Holmes, Director of Bureau of Mines. Washington, D. O, Government Printing Office, 1913, 19 pages. 74. Committee on Public Lands. Hearing on bill (H. R. 13137) to provide for leasing of coal lands in Territory of Alaska, and for other purposes, Feb- BULL. GEOL. SOC. AM. VOL. 27, 1915.PL. 4 MEMORIAL OF WILLIAM JOHN SUTTON 35 ruary 23-26, 1914 ; contains statements of J. A. Holmes, Director of Bu- reau of Mines, with an abstract of all bills on opening of coal lands in Alaska. Washington, D. C, Government Printing Office, 1914, part 2, 267 pages. 75. United States Navy Department. Report on coal in Alaska for use in United States Navy. Report of survey' and investigation by experi- mental tests of coal in Alaska, etcetera ; contains general statement by J. A. Holmes, Director of Bureau of Mines. House Document 876, Sixty- third Congress, second session, 1914, 123 pages. MEMORIAL OF WILLTAM JOHN SUTTON BY WILLIAM FLEET ROBERTSON ] William John Sutton was born in Kincardine, Ontario, on January 19, 1859. His earlier education was acquired in the public schools of Walkerton, Ontario, and later at Trinity College School, Port Hope, Ontario. This was followed by special courses in geology and assaying at Cornell and the Columbia School of Mines. In 1887 Mr. Sutton moved to British Columbia on the first flood of the "to the West" movement created by the completion of the Canadian Pa- cific Eailway. Settling in Victoria, he was very shortly after appointed the official government assayer, which position he held for some two years. The report of the Minister of Mines of British Columbia for the year 1888 contains Mr. Sutton's first published report, "A description of the mineral resources of the province" and "List of economic minerals found in the province." In those earlier days in British Columbia, although placer gold mining had been extensively developed in the interior and coal mining was in operation on the seaboard of Vancouver Island, lode mining had hardly gained even a foothold and the work was in the hands of "practical" men, who, it is more than suspected, classed geologists, chemists, and j^oets together as purely "ornamental frills," to be respected individually, but of little economic value. Finding scant financial encouragement in his chosen work, Mr. Sutton, like most of the earlier pioneers, not having "come West for his health," felt obliged to resign from his position as government assayer and en- tered the lumber business, subsequently securing large tracts of timber and land. Having thus acquired some little competency, his love for his earlier studies in geology and mineralogy again asserted itself, and feeling the 1 Written by Mr. Robertson at the request of Dr. R. W. Brock. 36 PROCEEDINGS OP THE WASHINGTON MEETING need for further instruction in these pursuits, which at that time could not be had here in the West, he went, in 1894, to the Michigan School of Mines at Houghton, Michigan, where he remained four years, taking a technical course and continuing as instructor in mineralogy and crystal- lography. Eeturning to British Columbia, Mr. Sutton entered the service of the Wellington Colliery Company as geologist, and on the company's interests being acquired by the Canadian Collieries (Dunsmuir), Limited, he con- tinued with the new company in the same capacity until the time of his death, on May 19, 1914. During his connection with the Wellington Colliery Company, Mr. Sutton also acted as consulting geologist for Mr. James Dunsmuir, who had numerous interests in the various metalliferous mining camps of the province. The Wellington Colliery Company owned the coal rights under a large portion of Vancouver Island, and these were unsurveyed and undefined; it therefore fell to Mr. Sutton to survey and geologically map all these areas and to prospect portions of these for workable coal. In this way he mapped geologically the greater part of the island, an extensive and val- uable piece of work, but of such a confidential nature that its publication would have been contrary to the interests of the company. In connection with this work and his personal timber interests, he ac- quired a knowledge of the geology of Vancouver Island probably more extensive than that possessed by any other person. He was regarded as the authority on the Cretaceous coal-bearing strata of Vancouver Island, and his opinions were often sought by the government departments. It was always a matter of sincere regret on Mr. Sutton's part and that of his friends that his official position prevented the publication of the mass of valuable geological information he had acquired. It seemed as though he had been obliged by his commercial duties to "keep his light under a bushel," and few but his personal friends and professional con- freres realized the extent of his geological work. So irksome to Mr. Sutton had become this feeling of restraint that he had planned to retire from commercial life and to devote his time to the preparation of his geological and mineralogical data for publication and had practically arranged with the writer that such should be done, under the auspices of the British Columbia Bureau of Mines. This intention was, however, frustrated by his sudden death, at Ucluelet, on the west coast of Vancouver Island, while in the active pursuit of his work. Mr. Sutton was a man of unusually strong physique and his death was probably due to heart failure, as he was never sparing of himself in his BULL. GEOL. SOC. AM. VOL.27, 1915.PL. 5 MEMORIAL OF A. B. WILLMOTT 37 work, and there were few professional woodsmen who could keep pace with him through the dense forests. While geology was his work, mineralogy was his hobby, and he had personally collected one of the best collections extant of British Columbia rocks and minerals, which he had amplified with rarer and more unique specimens acquired during a trip to Europe. His interests in science were varied. He was an energetic member of the Natural History Society of British Columbia, being president of the Society in 1912 and 1913, before which he read a number of papers, chiefly on forestry and its conservation. He was also a member of the Royal Astronomical Society of Canada, the Canadian Mining Institute, and the American Institute of Mining Engineers. Mr. Sutton's death is a great loss to scientific investigation in British Columbia, where devotees to science are few, and it seems a great pity that he was unable to leave more published records of his store of infor- mation. MEMORIAL OF A. B. WILLMOTT BY A. P. COLEMAN Arthur Brown Willmott, son of Rev. J. 0. Willmott, of Milton, On- » tario, passed away, after a long illness, on May 8, 1914, in his forty-eightb year. He graduated from Victoria University, Cobourg, Ontario, in 1887, taking his arts and science degrees at the same time. He attended Harvard University in 1891, and became professor of chemistry and mineralogy in McMaster University, Toronto, in 1892, continuing in that position until 1900, when lie turned his attention to economic geology. becoming field geologist and later manager of mines for the Lake Superior corporation at Sault Ste. Marie, Ontario. In 1893 he married Mina B. Sanders, daughter of W. B. Sanders, of Stouffville, Ontario. Mr. Willmott was for some years in the employ of the Bureau of Mines of Ontario, working in Precambriah areas. His greatest interest was in the iron deposits of the Keewatin of Ontario, especially in the Michipi- coten region, and he became a recognized authority on the difficult geo- logical and economic problems of the region. In 1910 Mr. Willmott returned to Toronto to take up work as a con- sulting mining engineer and to assume the active management of several mining companies. In 1913 he was again connected with the Lake Su- perior corporation in a consulting capacity, which position he held till his death. 38 PROCEEDINGS OP THE WASHINGTON MEETING The late Mr. Willmott was a most genial and lovable man, who made friends among all classes, and his premature death has been a sorrow to his many friends, as well as a serious loss to science. He leaves a widow and a son and daughter. BIBLIOGRAPHY Michipicoten Mining Division. Bureau of Mines, Ontario, volume 7. 1S97, pages 184-206. Michipicoten iron range. A. P. Coleman and A. B. Willmott. Bureau of Mines, Ontario, volume 8, part 2, 1899. Mineral industries of Sault Ste. Marie. Bureau of Mines, Ontario, volume 11, pages 91-100. The Michipicoten iron region. (A. P. C. and A. B. W.) Bureau of Mines, Ontario, volume 11, 1901, pages 152-185. The nomenclature of the Lake Superior formations. Journal of Geology, volume X, No. 1, 1902. The contact of the Archean and post-Archean in the region of the Great Lakes. Journal of Geology, volume XII, No. 1, 1904. The exploration of the Ontario iron ranges. Journal of the Canadian Mining Institute, volume VII, 1904. The iron "ores of Ontario. Journal of the Canadian Mining Institute, volume XI, 1908. The Societ}' then proceeded to the consideration of scientific papers. TITLES AND ABSTRACTS OF PAPERS PRESENTED BEFORE THE MORNING ■ SESSION AND DISCUSSIONS THEREON GEOGRAPHIC HISTORY OF THE SAN JUAN MOUNTAINS SINGE THE CLOSE OF THE MESOZOIC ERA* BY WALLACE W. ATWOOD AND KIRTLEY F. MATHER {Abstract) This paper gave a preliminary summary of physiographic studies which have been in progress during the last six field seasons. At the close of the Mesozoic era and the opening of the Cenozoic era there were mountain-making movements which affected the entire Rocky Mountain province of North America, and the great dome which was then formed in the San Juan area was at once subjected to vigorous erosion. As the mountain mass rose erosion began, and as the great dome was more and more deeply dissected a mountain topography must have been produced, and those moun- tains may be thought of as the first generation of the San Juan Range. Cer- tain deposits of Eocene till in this region indicate that during the dissection of these early San Juan Mountains ice formed in the range and descended to the bordering lowlands. 1 Presented with permission of the Director of the U. S. Geological Survey. ABSTRACTS AND DISCUSSIONS OF PAPERS 39 After the retreat and disappearance of the early Tertiary ice, stream erosion continued, and the western portion of the San Juan Mountain area was reduced to a surface of slight relief which may be thought of as a peneplain. After the deposition of the Telluride conglomerate on this peneplain there was fur- ther erosion in the range, and then came the three great epochs of volcanism — the San Juan, the Silverton, and the Potosi. During these epochs of volcanism a great volcanic plateau was developed. By this time the Miocene epoch had been reached and possibly passed, and with the quieting down of volcanic activity began the erosion and dissection of the volcanic plateau. During this period of dissection another generation of San Juan Mountains was carved, this time out of volcanic debris and great lava flows. The San Juan Mountains that were first carved out of this great volcanic plateau should then be thought of as surmounting those of today. Perhaps, if replaced, they would rise 3,000 or 4,000 feet above the present summits. They rose above the present summit peneplain. With the redoming of the area, which involved the warping or doming of the summit peneplain, another cycle of erosion was begun. Valleys were again formed, and in these valleys snows collected which in time formed glaciers that advanced to the lowlands bordering the range. These earliest Pleistocene glaciers retreated and disappeared. The range continued to be uplifted, and the streams were so rejuvenated that they cut great canyons below the broad troughs occupied by the Cerro glaciers. Again, climatic changes favored the formation of ice among the summits, and that ice (the Durango glaciers) descended through the main canyons to the foothills and later retreated and disappeared. The canyons were still more deeply cut into the mountain mass, and then climatic conditions favorable for glaciation once more returned and the Wisconsin or third series of Pleistocene glaciers formed and descended through the great canyons, nearly as far as those of the Durango stage. These glaciers have now disappeared, and there is no true glacier ice remaining in the region today ; but the streams are vigorously dissecting the mountain mass to still greater depths. The Black Canyon of the Gunnison has been largely cut during and since Pleistocene time. The vigor of the stream work is illus- trated in many a sharp V-shaped notch cut below the depth of ice-action. High among the mountains are the remarkable landslides and great accumu- lations of talus. The studies suggest somewhat continuous mountain growth in this region during late geologic time. Presented in abstract extemporaneously by the senior author. DOMINANTLY FLUVIATILE ORIGIN, UNDER SEASONAL RAINFALL, OF THE OLD RED SANDSTONE BY JOSEPH BARBELL (Abstract) The old red sandstones of the British Isles have been commonly inter- preted as deposited in great lakes. Walther has, however, urged that these formations are desert deposits; Goodchild regards them as laid down partly in large inland lakes, partly as torrential deposits, partly as old desert sands. IV — Bull. Geol. Soc. Am., Vol. 27, 1915 40 PROCEEDINGS OF THE WASHINGTON MEETING Extensive volcanic material is intermixed. The present writer interprets them as dominantly fluviatile deposits, formed under semi-arid climatic conditions. This stands between the extreme interpretations, but is essentially different from either. The subject is important from the standpoint of general and historical geology, but perhaps especially from that of organic evolution, since these deposits contain the oldest well known fish faunas in contrast to the rare and fragmentary fossils of the previous periods. If the stratigraphic record is misinterpreted, there is given, in consequence, an erroneous conception of the habitat and life adaptations of the advancing evolutionary wave of the verte brate phylum when it first clearly appears in the geologic record. A reinterpretatioii must rest on the criteria as to the mode of origin of sediments as much as on the actual stratigraphic features. It is the matching of more recent criteria to the older known facts of the stratigraphy of the old red sandstone which makes the basis of this paper. Presented in abstract extemporaneously. Eemarks were made by Messrs. A. W. Grabau and J. M. Clarke, with reply by the author. INFLUENCE OF SILURIAN-DEVONIAN CLIMATES ON THE RISE OF AIR- BREATHING VERTEBRATES BY JOSEPH BARBELL (Abstract) The relationships of ancient faunas to their environments is a field wherein paleontology and physical geology meet. It is a field which has been commonly cultivated by the former, but it is one in which the latter may as logically enter. It was as a physical geologist, with ideas sharpened and made definite by previous study of the nature of Devonian sediments, that the present writer took up this subject. The Devonian formations indicate the general presence of warmth and seasonal rainfall. In the Upper Devonian the general climatic conditions be- came more markedly semi-arid. There is found to be a concurrent elimination of sharks from the fresh waters. As a result, dipnoans and crossopterygians come to dominate the fauna. It is apparently in the Upper Devonian, further- more, that amphibians began to expand. An examination is made of the various possible causes for this advance in evolution. The only one which is found adequate is the compulsion of seasonal dryness. The actual line along which air-breathing developed was only one of several possible lines. The directions and limitations of later evolution were, how- ever, more or less determined by this choice. Slightly different conditions of environment and organic response, both readily possible, might apparently have been more favorable for the future of air-breathing vertebrates. By appreciating these lost opportunities of the remote past a better perspective is obtained, on the one hand, of the devious and groping and not always most successful nature of organic progress ; a better appreciation, on the other hand, of the dangers of stagnation or extinction which have been happily passed by. This and the previous paper were presented by the writer in abstract to the ABSTKACTS AND DISCUSSIONS OF PAPERS 41 American Society of Vertebrate Paleontology on December 26, 1907, but liave been withheld from publication. The present presentation will place the emphasis on the more general aspects and consequences of the problems of the Devonian climates in relation to the rise of air-breathing vertebrates. It is intended to publish the papers in the near future. Presented in abstract extemporaneously. SOME LITTORAL AND SUBLITTORAL PHYSIOGRAPHIC FEATURES OF THE VIRGIN AND NORTHERN LEEWARD ISLANDS AND THEIR BEARING ON THE CORAL-REEF PROBLEM BY THOMAS WAYLAHD VAUGHAN 1 (Abstract) The ocean bottom off the shores of the Antilles shows three distinct types of profiles, and a fourth type is furnished by Saba and other banks. The first is that found off the volcanic islands, such as Saba and the members of the Saint Christopher Chain, into the sides of which the sea has cut relatively narrow platforms ; but there are suggestions of submerged flats off the north- west end of Saint Eustatius and southeast of Nevis. The second type of submarine profile is well represented off the north shore of Saint Croix and the south shore of Cuba. The precipitous character of these profiles indicates faulting, and the geologic structure supports this in- terpretation. There is a down-thrown block between the Virgins and Saint Croix and another between Cuba and Jamaica. The third type of profile, represented by shores off which are extensive shallow flats, occurs where planation agencies have long been active. Here the rocks often, if not usually, dip under the sea at relatively gentle angles. The fourth type of profile is represented by the extensive submerged banks or platforms which have no bordering lands and whose upper surfaces range in depth from 9 to 30 fathoms. Good examples are Saba Bank, southwest of Saba Island : Pedro Bank, southwest of Jamaica, and Rosalind Bank, off Mosquito Bank, which is the continental shelf northeast of Nicaragua and Honduras. That the depth of water on these banks is essentially the same as in many atolls of the Pacific, especially the Paumotus, has been repeatedly pointed out, but apparently the fact has not yet been sufficiently emphasized. The third type of profile (that showing submarine terraces around islands) will now be discussed in some detail. From shoreline characters and other evidence the conclusion was reached that the Virgin Islands, the members of the Saint Martin group, and Antigua and Barbuda have recently undergone submergence to an amount of about 20 fathoms. 2 Assuming this conclusion to be correct, should the sealevel have remained stationary for a period of ap- preciable length antecedent to this submergence, there should be a submerged scarp or facet indicating its former stand ; should there have been a succession of temporary stands, there should be a series of submarine terrace flats separated by scarps. The available sources of information were the charts of 1 This article, illustrated by more than fifty profiles and a map, Is published In the Jour. Wash. Acad. Sci., vol. 6, pp. 53-56, Feb. 4, 1916. 2 Bull. Am. Oeog. Soc, vol. 46, 1914, pp. 426-429. 42 PROCEEDINGS OP THE WASHINGTON MEETING the United States Hydrographic Office and of the British Admiralty. The Virgin Bank and the Saint Martin Plateau were selected for special study. The charts of the former, on a scale of slightly more than 1 mile to an inch, and that of the latter, on a scale of about 2y 2 miles to an inch, were contoured on a 2-fathom interval from the shore to a depth of 40 fathoms, and on an interval of 10 fathoms in depths between 40 and 100 fathoms. The shoreline of the Virgin group shows indentations indicative of sub- mergence, and that the sea has stood at its present level long enough for alluvial filling of the heads of harbor digitations, while sea-cliffs occur at the ends of promontories. The chart of the near-by sea-bottom shows that south- of Saint John, Tortola, and Virgin Gorda there are two distinct submerged terraces and a less definite third terrace. The outer terrace fiat lies at depths between 26 and 28 fathoms on its landward and between 28 and 30 fathoms on its seaward margin, and it ranges in width from a half mile to 3 miles. On its sea front is a ridge which is inferred to be a submerged barrier coral reef. On its landward side a scarp rises from a depth of 26 or 28 fathoms to about 17 fathoms. Above this scarp is a second terrace flat, which has a depth of 14 to 15 fathoms on its landward and a depth of 14 to 20 fathoms on its seaward face, and ranges in width from one-third of a mile to 2 miles. Appar- ently the outer margin of this flat also bears a coral reef. These are the two principal terrace flats. The scarp separating them is indicated by crowded contours, and chart number 1832, United States Hydrographic Office, shows its continuity for 36 nautical miles, or about 1% land miles farther than from Washington to Baltimore. A third still higher terrace flat is suggested be- tween depths of 6 and 10 fathoms, above which a fourth terrace may now be in process of formation, but the information regarding these is at present not definite enough to warrant a positive statement. The continuity of the upper one of the two well marked flats needs to be emphasized. It should be noted that east of Virgin Gorda there has been an uptilt. On the windward side of Saint Thomas there is an extensive outer fiat, bounded on its landward side by a steep escarpment which in places is nearly 160 feet high. The landward margin of the plain is between 26 and 28 fathoms in depth; the seaward margin has a depth between 30 and 34 fathoms;, the width is as great as 10 miles and for distances as great as 8% miles, in depths between 29 and 31 fathoms, the range in relief of the surface may be as small as 2 fathoms. Its outer margin is cut by reentrants which have bottoms about 40 fathoms deep and simulate hanging valleys. There are also near the outer margin of this flat banks or ridges, the upper surfaces of which are relatively flat, between 17 and 20 fathoms in depth. One of these banks has a total basal width of about 4 miles and a length of more than 5 miles. As its form is not that of a coral reef, it can only be the base of what was an island, which had been reduced almost to a smooth surface by marine planation and then, as indicated by other evidence, submerged. As all the other shoals, with one exception, are truncated at nearly the same level, it seems that most of them should be ascribed to a similar origin. These shoals usually show escarpments between 20 and 30 fathoms on their windward sides and more gradual slopes on the leeward sides. The outer flat on the north side of Saint Thomas corresponds to the lower flat on the south side of Saint John, Tortola, and Virgin Gorda. Both are submarine plains, which several lines of evidence ABSTRACTS AND DISCUSSIONS OF PAPERS 43 show were developed when sealevel was about 20 fathoms, or slightly more, lower than now. The escarpment extending from the islands north of Culebra Island, east of Porto Rico, across the Virgin Passage, and along the north side of Saint Thomas, and the escarpment on the seaward face of the outlying- shoals apparently can be explained in no other way. The indentations on the outer margin of the outer flat may have been caused by emergence and stream cutting after its formation, or they may be due to initial marginal irregularities which have not been obliterated. The approximate accordance in level of the tops of the outlying shoals at depths between 17 and 20 fathoms has been mentioned. These summits accord in height with a flat or gently sloping zone, which lies above and nearer shore than the deeper flat and represents the 14 to 20 fathom flat south of Saint John and Tortola. It is scarcely represented on the seaward side of the promontories, namely, Cockroach and Cricket rocks and Outer Brass and Little Hans Lollick Islands. However, it spreads out on the flanks of the promon- tories and ranges from half a mile to nearly iy 2 miles in width ; it is separated on its seaward side by a steep slope or escarpment from the deeper flat and on its landward side by a less distinct escarpment, in places about 26 feet in height, from a less developed flat, which has a depth of 7 to 10 fathoms. The descent is sudden from the shore to about 6 fathoms, which is near the land- ward margin of the highest submarine flat. This flat also is narrow on the tips of the promontories mentioned, but widens on their flanks and along the shores of the main island. The submerged valley in Charlotte Amalia Harbor has a depth of 10 fathoms. The narrowness or absence of the 14 to 20 fathom flat on the promontory tips, while it is so well preserved in protected places, especially off the south sides of Saint John and Tortola, shows that it is older than the deeper flat, and in exposed places was cut away during the formation of the latter, sub- sequent to the formation of which, after perhaps a brief interval of still lower stand of sealevel, the entire area has been resubmerged to an amount about the same as that of the initial submergence. There is doubt as to the interpretation of the 7 to 10 or 12 fathom flat. In places it seems to be distinct and older than the one next lower, but it may represent the submarine terrace being formed at present sealevel. According to the physiography of the sea-bottom, the Virgin Islands were joined to Porto Rico during the cutting of the scarp separating the deepest from the next higher flat. The biogeographic evidence shows conclusively that the two were united and have been severed in Recent time by submergence. Stejneger says in his Herpetology of Porto Rico : "It is then plain that the 16 species of reptiles and batrachians found in Saint Thomas and Saint John form only a herpetological appendix to Porto Rico." Doctor Bartsch informs me that the testimony of the land Mollusca is the same as that of the reptiles and batrachians. The biogeographic evidence substantiates the deductions based on the purely physiographic study. There are three tiers of coral reefs in the Virgin Islands. They rise above (a) basements 10 fathoms or less in depth; (6) above the outer edge of the 14 to 20 fathom flat; (c) above the outer edge of the 28 to 34 fathom flat. As the escarpment within the outermost reef could not have been cut during the presence of such a reef, the flat must be older than the reef and the reef 44 PROCEEDINGS OF THE WASHINGTON MEETING must have developed during subsequent submergence. The flat, therefore, can not be due to the growth of tbe reef. The members of the Saint Martin group have indented shorelines, sea-cliffs, and an unusually fine development of bay-bars. The relations on the wind- ward side of the Saint Martin Plateau are similar to those north of Saint Thomas. The outer, deeper flat, from 26 to 36 fathoms in depth, has a maxi- mum length, east and west, of over 30 miles. It seems composed of two ter- races. The scarp on its landward side is distinct and in places is about 50 feet high, between 20 and 28 fathoms, as off the east end of Scrub Island, east of Anguilla Island, As some of the submerged valleys on the east side of the Saint Martin Plateau resemble valleys in the Upper Cretaceous Anacacho limestone Texas, it appears that not only must the scarp line which has been pointed out be interpreted as a former shoreline, but that these channels with steep heads must be interpreted as former drainage lines which were subaerially cut and afterward submerged. The Anacacho limestone in the Brackett quadrangle is similar in general character to the limestone which composes Anguilla and Tintamarre. While the shoreline stood some 20 fathoms lower than now, the Saint Martin Plateau must have been entirely above sealevel. The biologic evidence is in accord with this interpretation, but at present it alone is not sufficient to be decisive. Antigua is another island with an indented shoreline. It shows typical instances of submerged valleys and fairly good examples of pouch-shaped har- bors. Profiles off the southeast shore exhibit essentially the same features as the profiles on the Virgin Bank and tbe Saint Martin Plateau. If sealevel stood 20 fathoms below its present stand, Antigua and Barbuda would be united. Doctor Bartsch has especially studied the land mollusca and says: "The land shells show that these islands must have been connected in very recent time." The deduction that there has been in Recent geologic time submergence to an amount of about 20 fathoms in the Virgin Islands, on the Saint Martin Plateau, and on the Antigua-Barbuda Bank, it seems to me, may be accounted demonstrated. A set of profiles on the same vertical scale — (a) across Havana Harbor, showing depth of filled channel; (6) off the north side of Saint Thomas; (c) off the west side of Anguilla; (d) off the southeast coast of Antigua; (e) Mosquito Bank, off Nicaragua — all indicate a rise of sealevel by an amount of about 20 fathoms. There is in the Virgin Islands and in Cuba clear evi- dence of a lowering of sealevel by about 20 fathoms, perhaps more, previous to resubmergence. Although the evidence for the other areas is not definite as to the return of sealevel to a former stand, the similarity of the profiles suggests that it also occurred in them. As this lowering and subsequent rise of sealevel affects a large area, it appears too wide-spread to be explained by local crustal movement. The changes in position of strand-line here noted are more reasonably explained by the lowering of sealevel, due to the withdrawal of water in the Pleistocene ice epochs to form to great continental glaciers, and the raising of sealevel after each epoch through the melting of the glaciers ; but the volume of evidence supplied by this area is perhaps not large enough ABSTRACTS AND DISCUSSIONS OF PAPERS 45 to justify a general conclusion as to relations of Recent coral-reef development to glaciation and deglaciation. A brief comparison will now be made with the Great Barrier Reef of Australia. Fifteen profiles, on the same horizontal and vertical scales, the latter about 70 times the former, were drawn on the British Admiralty charts across the continental shelf south of the Great Barrier Reef and across the reef. These profiles show the continuity of the platform from the area south of the Great Barrier, that there is an outer, deeper flat about 200 feet deep, and that, except near its north end, the reef stands back from the seaward edge of the continental shelf. Therefore, apparently the idea that the plat- form was formed by infilling behind the reef may be permanently set aside. There is striking general similarity of the conditions presented to those off Nicaragua and in the West Indies. The evidence in favor of a shoreline be- tween about 25 and 30 fathoms below present sealevel antecedent to Recent submergence is strong, if not conclusive, and supports the deduction that the living barrier reef is growing on what was a land surface in Pleistocene time — an interpretation essentially that proposed by E. C. Andrews in 1902. The relations around the Pacific islands off which barrier reefs occur are those of continuous platforms surmounted or margined by discontinuous reefs. These relations indicate the superposition of reefs on antecedent platforms which have undergone geologically Recent submergence. E. C. Andrews so interprets the conditions of formation of the barrier reefs off the Fiji Islands. 3 It appears to me that the conditions governing the development of the living reefs in the West Indies, Central America, Brazil, Florida, and Australia are clear. The reefs have grown on antecedent basements during Recent sub- mergence. The history of these basements is complex, but during Pleistocene time they stood higher with reference to sealevel than now ; their outer mar- gins were remodeled by marine cutting and marine planation, and they were then resubmerged. These changes in height of sealevel accord with the de- mand of the glacial control theory. It would be remarkable if the conditions in the tropical western Pacific Ocean were exceptional, and the present avail- able facts indicate that they conform to the principles governing reef develop- ment in the other areas. Here it should be said, regarding the charts for the Pacific, that as they have been made primarily for navigation purposes, the depths of lagoons and lagoon channels are often given in a way fairly satis- factory, but on only a few charts can the submarine profiles outside the reefs be determined. The coral-reef problem can not be regarded as satisfactorily solved until the relations in the Pacific islands have been ascertained. In my opinion, but little further advance in understanding the problem can be ex- pected from purely biologic studies or from physiographic investigations of the dry land surface alone. As apparently the greatest present need is for more accurate information on the detailed submarine relief in depths between 15 and 50 fathoms, especially on the seaward .margins of the platforms, both outside the reefs and off the breaks in the reef lines, the efforts of those interested in such investigations should be concentrated on getting additional hydrographic surveys in coral-reef areas. Presented by title in the absence of the author. 3 Am. Jour. Sci., vol. 41, Jan., 1916, pp. 135-141. 46 PROCEEDINGS OP THE WASHINGTON MEETING CORAL-REEF PROBLEM BY W. M. DAVIS (Abstract) The author, having reviewed various coral-reef theories preparatory to his Shaler Memorial voyage of 1914, and having visited on that voyage thirty-five reef-encircled islands in the Pacific, is now preparing a report on his observa- tions and inferences. He finds in this connection only three theories that demand serious consideration — Darwin's theory of subsidence, Daly's theory of glacial control, and Vaughan's theory of submerged platforms. The present paper sets forth the difficulties that stand in the way of accepting two of these theories. The theory of glacial control seems inadequate because it excludes subsidence on insufficient grounds, because it assumes unwarranted conditions for preglacial islands, and because certain essential consequences of its main process — the truncation of low preglacial islands by the lowered and chilled ocean of the Glacial period- — are not found on Pacific islands. The theory of submerged platforms is unsatisfactory because it assumes without sufficient warrant the origin of the platforms independent of coral agencies, because it assumes the absence of reef-building corals during the production of the plat- forms, because it provides no adequate cause for the production of flat plat- forms in close association with steep volcanic islands, and because it excludes all but small changes of level in reef-encircled islands during recent geological periods. Presented in abstract extemporaneously. Eemarks were made by Professors R. A. Daly and J. P. Iddings, with reply by the author. TERTIARY -QUATERNARY OROGENIC HISTORY OF THE SIERRA NEVADA IN THE LIGHT OF REGENT STUDIES IN THE YOSEMITE REGION i BY F. E. MATTHES (Abstract) It is a noteworthy fact that the hanging tributaries of the Merced are not all graded with respect to the same former profile of the master stream. Those flowing over the massive and resistant granites of the Yosemite region indicate an old profile situated about 2,800 feet above the present canyon floor. Those flowing over normally jointed and relatively easily eroded rocks indicate a more strongly concave profile of a later date, situated 600 to 1,200 feet lower. The older profile of the Merced appears to be coordinate with the profiles determined by Lindgren for the Tertiary rivers of the northern Sierra Nevada (by means of the auriferous gravels). The younger profile of the Merced is believed to correspond to that stage of erosion which Lawson has recognized in the Chagoopa Plateau of the Kern River country. It clearly antedates the cutting of the inner gorge of the Merced, just as the mature valleys of the Chagoopa Plateau antedate the cutting of the Kern's narrow canyon. Inner 1 Published with permission of the Director of the U. S. Geological Survey. ABSTRACTS AND DISCUSSIONS OP PAPERS 47 trenches of the same order occur in most of the great canyons of the western Sierra slope. Their youthful aspect, coupled with the fact that they are still actively being deepened by the rivers, points strongly to their initiation in consequence of rapid tilting at a time which can scarcely have been more re- mote than the beginning of the Quaternary period. The amplitude of this uplift at the eastern edge of the Sierra block may be roughly estimated from the inclination of the younger profile of the Merced. That profile appears at least four times as steep as a graded profile of the river might be expected to have been. It is to be inferred, therefore, that the range crest at the head of the Merced stood, prior to the last uplift, only one-fourth as high as it now stands. Mount Lyell, instead of 13,090 feet, had an altitude of only some 4,400 feet. This, it will be observed, is 2,000 feet less than the present altitude of Mono Lake (6,417 feet). It would follow, then, that the regions to the east of the Sierra Nevada have also been uplifted broadly by several thousand feet since the end of Tertiary time. The Sierra uplift indicated by the older profile of the Merced is considerably less than that indicated by the younger profile and probably did not exceed 2,500 feet. Presented in abstract extemporaneously. The Society adjourned about 12.30 o'clock and reconvened at 2 o'clock. TITLES AND ABSTRACTS OF PAPERS PRESENTED BEFORE THE AFTERNOON SESSION AND DISCUSSIONS THEREON The Society reconvened at 2 o'clock, with President Coleman presiding and Charles P. Berkey acting as Secretary, and took up the consideration of scientific papers. GEOLOGICAL TRANSFORMATIONS OF PHOSPHORUS BY ELIOT BLACKWELDER {Abstract) Phosphorus migrates widely in and upon the earth, passing meanwhile through a varied and interesting series of metamorphoses. An attempt will be made to outline these changes, beginning with the crystallization of apatite and other phosphates in igneous rocks and primary veins, following them through the circulation of ground-water to the ocean, there to undergo an all but end- less series of reincarnations in the bodies of organisms, and ending temporarily with the fixing of the element in the form of phosphatic sediments. Subse- quent changes take place in the latter, both near the land surface and in the deep interior of the earth. The various known types of phosphatic deposits may be placed rather definitely in this metamorphic cycle. Presented in abstract extemporaneously. 48 PROCEEDINGS OP THE WASHINGTON MEETING DIFFUSION IN SILICATE MELTS BY N. L. BOWEN 1 (Abstract) This paper gave a brief description of some determinations of the rates of diffusion of molten rock-forming silicates and a discussion of the significance of the results in petrologic problems. Presented in abstract extemporaneously. Discussion Prof. J. 1'. Iddikgs remarked that Mr. Bowen's investigations were made on stationary liquids, but it is not to be supposed that large bodies of magma having different temperatures in different parts will exist without convection currents for any appreciable length of time, and his remark that convection currents may play a prominent role in differentiation processes is very much to the point. The effect of gaseous constituents in molten magmas, or of other components which reduce the viscosity of such liquids, must also be taken into account. PETROGRAPHY OF THE PACIFIC ISLANDS BY K. A. DALY (Abstract) The total number of named islands in the open Pacific is about 3,000. Of these, only 22 are reported to show outcrops of quartzose rocks. Five other islands are reported to have outcrops of crystalline schists, serpentine, or de- formed limestone. Excluding New Guinea and New Zealand with their immediate satellitic islands, Oceania has 345 islands which have been definitely described as wholly or largely volcanic in origin. Probably the whole number showing volcanic rocks above sealevel is at least twice as great. Among these islands only 15^ have yet afforded any petrographic data, and not one has been examined with desirable thoroughness. To illustrate the scrappiness of our information as well as certain problems regarding the origin of Pacific lavas, the igneous-rock types of each island, so far as recorded, have been tabulated. The compilation illustrates the advisability of a systematic exploration of all the smaller islands of the Pacific. The task is quite feasible, since the total land area involved is less than 75,000 square miles. If Hawaii, Viti Levu, Vanua Levu, New Pomerania, New Mecklenburg, and New Caledonia be excluded, the total land area to be covered would be only 50,000 square miles. In fact, with relatively small effort and cost, the natural history (including the petrography and geology) of all the land areas within one-eighth of the earth's surface could be investigated by a single organization. The Geological Society may well use its influence in developing a plan for such comprehensive exploration in the Pacific, under private American auspices. Presented in abstract extemporaneously. 1 Introduced by C. N. Fenner. ABSTRACTS AND DISCUSSIONS OF PAPERS 49 Discussion r Prof. J. P. Iddings heartily approved of the proposition of Professor Daly regarding the systematic surrey of the islands of the Pacific and suggested the desirability of having a properly equipped steamer for carrying out the survey. Further remarks were made by Messrs. A. C. Lane and N". L. Bowen, with reply by the author. SOME FACTORS WHICH AFFECT THE DEPOSITION OF CALCIUM CARBONATE BY JOHN. JOHNSON * (Abstract) This paper gave a brief discussion of the operation of the inorganic factors which affect the solubility, hence the precipitation of calcium carbonate, and therefore are important in connection with the origin and mode of formation of limestones. Of these factors there are two in particular, namely, the con- centration of free carbon dioxide in the water and the temperature, which exert an influence more far-reaching than has hitherto been generally recog- nized ; indeed, it appears that by considering their effects alone we are enabled to coordinate a large number of the phenomena of the deposition of limestones. Presented in abstract extemporaneously. Eemarks were made by Dr. A. C. Lane, with reply by the author. SPECIFIC WEIGHT OF DRILL CORES BY ALFRED C LANE (Abstract) It has been found that the specific gravity of drill cores, or volume per cubic foot, can be readily obtained by measuring their dimensions. This can be done to an accuracy of within 1 per cent, in pieces of core over 100 mm. long, without grinding off the ends, by using the micrometer gauge for the diameter and taking the average of six measurements of the diameter and the average of about four measurements of the length made with a finely graduated ruler. Thus, after weighing them, the weight in grams per cubic centimeter or (the same thing) ounces per cubic foot is obtained. Systematic tests seem to show that this may be of considerable practical value, as the variation in one lava flow between the denser, more crystalline, less glassy, and the more glassy, less crystalline, and perhaps more altered upper and lower parts, can be dis- tinctly and continuously followed, even when the amygdaloidal or vesicular structure is not conspicuous. Presented in abstract extemporaneously. 1 Introduced by H. S. Washington. 50 PROCEEDINGS OF THE WASHINGTON MEETING CHEMICAL AND MINERALOQICAL COMPOSITION OF METEORITES BY GEORGE P. MERRILL (Abstract) The paper gives a brief resume of researches on the subject indicated by the title, which were made with especial reference to the reported occurrences of minor constituents. No traces were found in the stones and irons examined of antimony, arsenic, barium, gold, lead, strontium, tin, tungsten, uranium, zinc, or zirconium. On the other hand, the presence was shown, beyond an apparent reasonable doubt, of the rarer elements iridium, platinum, palladium, ruthenium, and vanadium. Comparisons are made between the meteorites and terrestrial rocks, consideration being given to the efficacy of the former as world-forming materials. A continuation of work, preliminary reports and abstracts of which have been published in the American Journal of Science and the Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences, and final results of which are to appear in one of the memoirs of the Academy. Bead in abstract from notes. Discussion Prof. O. G. Farrixgton remarked that the long series of investigations on meteorites which Doctor Merrill had made had yielded many valuable results and were likely to yield more. To the list of elements found in meteorites given by Doctor Merrill it seems certain that radium can be added, since it has been found in one stone meteorite by an English analyst and is indicated by some unpublished results obtained in this country of which I had been notified. It has, so far, not been found in any iron meteorites. In comparing stony meteorites with the crust of the earth, I urged that the general average of stony meteorites could not properly be used, since most stony meteorites were of higher specific gravity than the rocks of the earth's crust. For the purpose of comparison, the class of stony meteorites known as eukrites should be used, since meteorites of this class most nearly resemble the rocks of the earth's crust in specific gravity and are composed of feldspars and pyroxenes, which are the dominant minerals in the earth's crustal rocks. Doctor Merrill replied briefly to Professor Farrington's remarks. IMPORTANCE OF WATER AS A MAGMATIC CONSTITUENT BY GEORGE W. MOREY * (Abstract) That water is an original constituent of the magma is now generally ad- mitted, but the importance of its effects has not received adequate recognition. The erroneous assumption is often met with that, since the critical tempera- ture of pure water is about 370°, it can exist, at temperatures higher than this, only in the gaseous state, no matter how great the pressure to which it 1 Introduced by Henry S. Washington. BULL. GEOL. SOC. AM. VOL. 27, 1915, PL. 6 EXAMPLES OF AUSTBALITES Figure 1 is a dumb-bell type of australite from Victoria, Australia. After Dunn. Fig- ure Z, Plate V Bulletin Geological Society of Victoria. 4/5 natural size. +i,£l?+-' e ' n' ar e different forms of "Pele's Tears" from Kilauea, Hawaii. Enlarged three times. Drawn by Edw. C. Seibert. ABSTRACTS AXD DISCUSSIONS OF PAPERS 51 is subjected. On the contrary, water can exist in solution in liquid magmas, and as such unquestionably plays a very important role in geologic processes whicli go on at temperatures up to 1,000° or higher. The presence of water in such solutions has three main effects, namely, it increases the fluidity of tbe melt, lowers the temperature at which crystallization begins, and facilitates the process of crystallization ; these effects are marked even when the quantity of water is relatively small. These facts, which have an important bearing on certain phenomena of volcanism and igneous intrusion, were discussed and illustrated. Presented in abstract extemporaneously. Discussion Prof. J. Volney Lewis: It is a well known fact tbat fragmeutal volcanics of acid character are far more abundant than basic ones. Some of us are accustomed to attribute this to the greater abundance of water in siliceous magmas, as a rule, or to their greater viscosity and hence greater resistance to the escape of this water during eruption. May it not be possible that the difference is in reality due, in part at least, to the greater capacity of basic magmas for retaining water in solution until it is gradually released by crystallization or imprisoned permanently in glass? I should lie glad to know whether or not the investigation of which Doctor Morey has spoken might throw light on this question. Doctor Morey replied briefly to Professor Lewis's remarks. "PELE'S TEARS 1 '. AND THEIR BEARING ON THE ORIGIN OF ALSTRALITES BY E. S. MOOUE CONTENTS I'age Introduction 51 Characteristics and origin 52 Comparison with similar bodies 53 Chemical constituents 54 Conclusion 5"> Introduction Among tbe problems confronting tbe Australian geologists few offer more interesting material for speculation than the question of the origin of tbe aus- tralites. These peculiar bodies liave been known by various names, such as obsidian buttons, obsidian bombs, and obsidianites. They somewhat resemble in composition and form tbe moldavites and billitonites. so Suess 1 has applied the name australites to such bodies from Australia, while he uses the term tektites to cover all bodies of this type. It is not the object of this paper to go into a detailed discussion of the aus- tralites, as they have already been described very fully by several of the 1 Franz Suess : Die Herkunft der Moldavite and verwandter. Glliser Jahrb. d. k. k. Geol. Reichsanstalt. Heft 2, vol. 50, 1900. 52 PROCEEDINGS OP THE WASHINGTON MEETING Australian and other geologists. Numerous analyses and a valuable discus- sion of the origin of these bodies will be found in a paper by H. S. Summers, 2 and an excellent set of figures accompanying a discussion of the genesis has been published by E. J. Dunn, 3 former Director of the Geological Survey of Victoria, Australia. In these publications various references to the bibliog- raphy on this subject will also be found. Characteristics and Origin The australites are small bodies of glass, often of remarkably perfect form, so perfect in some cases as to suggest an artificial origin. They are sometimes button-shaped, sometimes dumb-bell in shape, sometimes spherical, and at other times quite irregular in form. Many of them show flow structures and often pitted surfaces are developed. In chemical composition they are much like obsidian, although they are peculiar, in having in most cases a higher lime and magnesia content in proportion to potash and soda than is generally found in rocks so high in silica and in which the potash is usually higher than the soda. Summers, therefore, endeavors to show that they do not correspond to any terrestrial rock type. They are undoubtedly related to one another in chemical composition, as he points out, and most of them can doubtless be regarded as having a common source, yet comparison of the analyses with other special types show a close resemblance to some types of obsidian. There have been advanced several theories to account for the origin of these peculiar bodies, the two main theories being the volcanic and the meteoric. The greatest difficulty so far confronting the volcanic theory is the distribu- tion of the australites, which occur over a band stretching across Tasmania and over the whole of the southern part of Australia from the east to the west, covering the greater part of the island south of the tropic of Capricorn. Vari- ous suggestions have been made to account for their transportation, amortg them Mr. Dunn's ingenious bubble hypothesis, transportation by aborigines, emus, etcetera. These means have never appeared entirely satisfactory be-' cause, as pointed out by Summers, the australites are believed to be of Cenozoic age — although I believe they have never been found embedded in any solid formations — and that while there may be known volcanoes of this age in Vic- toria, some of the specimens are still found at least 2,000 miles from these volcanoes, and so far no deposits of obsidian have been found connected with them. To account for the distribution, therefore, the meteoric hypothesis has been advanced, but this is open to as great objections as the other. In the first place, the composition, form, and internal structure of the bodies are quite different from those of known meteorites, and in the second place it seems hard to realize how such perfectly formed bodies, which give every indication of having been in a liquid condition, could strike the earth from some extra- terrestrial source and have their outline so well preserved. If the heat which caused them to become liquid were due to atmospheric friction, it would be 2 H. S. Summers : Obsidianites — their origin from a chemical standpoint. Royal Soc. of Victoria, vol. xxi (new series), 1909. H. S. Summers : On the composition and origin of australites. Report of the Aus- tralian Association for the Adv. of Sci., vol. xiv, 1913, pp. 189-199. 3 E. J. Dunn : Australites. Bull. No. 27, Geol. Survey of Victoria, 1912. "pele's tears" 53 greatest at the moment of impact and the body must certainly suffer deforma- tion. On the other hand, if they had been heated, so that they could assume their present form before entering the atmosphere, it would be expected that the heat of atmospheric friction would cause the exterior to scale off and the perfect form to be destroyed. Other suggestions concerning the genesis have been made by Gregory and G. P. Merrill. Gregory has stated that these bodies may have been due to lightning discharges in the great dust storms of Australia ; but this theory has not received serious consideration, because it has neither the merit of satisfy- ing the demand for distribution nor explaining the form and composition of the bodies. In his article .-entitled "On the supposed origin of the moldavites and like sporadic glasses from various sources," after examining various obsidian peb- bles, moldavites, and billitonites, Merrill concludes with the statement that "whatever may have been their original source, the Bohemian and Moravian specimens are now simply water-worn pebbles of weathered glass, originally etched by corroding vapors or solutions, the results being indistinguishable from those produced by artificial etchings on obsidian with fluorhydric acid. The Australian forms are likewise, to me, simply pebbles of glass which have been water-worn or abraded by wind-blown sands. In their contours there is nothing even suggestive of meteoric markings, nor do I find any semblance of such an origin, so far as the surface markings alone are concerned, in the ex- amples from Billiton." 4 He explains, however, that this statement is not to be construed as meaning that he is opposed to the cosmic origin of these bodies. Comparison with similar Bodies Having thus briefly considered the australites, let us turn to some bodies of similar form whose origin is established beyond a doubt. There have been found two types of such bodies. One of these types, as mentioned by Mr. Sum- mers, 5 has been taken from the smoke-boxes of locomotives, and the other is found near Kilauea, Hawaii, in the form of "Pele's tears." The latter are little masses of lava of various shapes, to which I believe Mr. Perret first applied the name "Pele's tears" because of their relation to Pele's hair and the tear-drop form of many of them. My attention was first attracted to these through the kindness of Dr. T. A. Jaggar, and they seemed to show such a marked similarity in form to certain of the australites that they may have an important bearing on their origin. So far as observed, they are confined to a small spatter cone close to the main crater of Kilauea. They vary from one- sixteenth to about one inch in length and in diameter according to the shape. They exhibit various forms. Such shapes as rings, half rings, pears, tear- drops, hearts, spheres, spindles, and dumb-bells are common. In one case an oval central body surrounded by a ring, which seems, however, to be more or less distinct from it, was found. They consist of a pumiceous dark brown glass, with a smooth glazed coating covering the surface of the body where the original surface is unbroken. A little evidence of flow structure may be seen on the surface in some cases, but no such perfect button forms as exhibited by some of the australites have been found (see figures). * G. P. Merrill : Proc. U. S. National Museum, vol. 40. 1911, p. 486. 5 Loc. cit. V— Bull. Gbol. Soc. Am., Vol. 27, 1915 54 PROCEEDINGS OF THE WASHINGTON MEETING Several determinations for specific gravity were made and the results were found to vary considerably. Examples are 1.00, 1.25, and 1.36. In making these determinations it was desired to obtain the density of the body — that is, glass sponge with included air, rather than that of the glass composing the body. Chemical Constituents In order to determine whether these bodies represent a special differentiated phase of the magma, with greater silica content and higher viscosity or other particular properties, a partial analysis was made. The writer is indebted to L. J. Youngs, of State College, Pennsylvania, for the following figures : Per cent Si0 2 49.94 A1 2 3 13.52 FeO (total iron calculated as ferrous iron) 10.79 Ti0 2 1 . 26 CaO 9.74 MgO 11.80 Total 97.05 There was a very slight, gain on ignition. The alkalies were not determined, owing to scarcity of material on hand, but by difference they would correspond closely with amounts found by other analysts in rocks from this region. The rock is a basalt in composition, and under the microscope the crushed material is found to consist of 70 to 90 per cent of brownish glass, the proportions vary- ing in different bodies, with small phenocrysts of feldspar and pyroxene and possibly some olivine. A comparison of the analysis with various analyses of Kilauean rocks found in Washington's tables 6 and made by Silvestri, Phillips, and Lyons shows that the magnesia is very much higher and, as a rule, the lime is considerably higher than for most of these rocks. It compares better with an analysis of Pele's hair made by A. H. Phillips and is similar in most respects to an analy- sis by Merwin of the lava dipped from the crater Halemaumau. 7 Although the figures obtained by Mr. Youngs were carefully checked and there seems to be an established high percentage of magnesia, it is not safe to draw conclusions, without further analyses, as to whether a high magnesia content is always characteristic of "Pele's tears." If it be a special feature, then may not their composition have some bearing on the question of the tem- perature at which this lava becomes liquid and possibly on the origin of these particular bodies? This point is more interesting because of the proportionally high percentage of lime and magnesia in the austral ites and the high tempera- ture at which they dissolve and pass into the liquid condition. The calcium and magnesium bearing minerals, such as the olivines, pyroxenes, and more calcic feldspars, are always considered among the high-temperature minerals. 8 Chemical analyses of igneous rocks. Professional Paper 14, U. S. Geol. Survey. 7 Day and Shepard : Water and volcanic activity. Bull. Geol. Soc. Am., vol. 24, 1913, p. 586. "pele's tears" . 55 Conclusion The forms of some of "Pele's tears" are so similar to the dumb-bell types of australites as to demonstrate the probability of the latter being of volcanic origin. These bodies of distinctly volcanic origin demonstrate the possibility of bodies with such shapes as spheres, dumb-bells, etcetera, being formed in the atmosphere from a rotating liquid body. There is no evidence in the com- position of the lava that a specially viscous type of liquid is necessary to de- velop these forms; but the magnesia and lime contents are high, and it appears that we must look for some specially favorable condition of temperature, pressure, or other physical circumstance to account for their origin, since they are not, so far as known to the writer, common products of volcanoes. Thus may some special condition also have given rise to the australites. No attempt is made here to throw fresh light on the distribution of the australites in Australia, although it is the opinion of the writer that they are of volcanic origin and the method of transportation will be discovered as the geology of Australia becomes better known. TRIASSIG IGNEOUS BOOKS IN THE VICINITY OF GETTYSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA BY GEORGE W. STOSE AND J. VOLNEY LEWIS (Abstract) CONTENTS Page Distribution and mode of occurrence 55 Petrography 56 General character 56 Texture 56 Order of crystallization ' 56 Varieties of diabase 56 Distribution and Mode of Occurrence (by g. w. stose) The igneous rocks are all intrusive. No basalt flows. One main sill crosses the area from southwest to northeast just east of Gettysburg. Average thick- ness, 2,500 feet. Dips under shales on west at 20°. Irregular outline in places may be clue in part to cross-faulting. Average width of outcrop about 1 mile. Local widening to over 2 miles, probably due to local thickening and corre- sponding displacement of overlying shale. Two main cross-cutting bodies nearly at right angles to bedding. Larger one, 1 mile thick. Offshoots from these form minor sills and cross-cutting bodies. A sill along the plane of the flat, overlapping western contact of Triassic sediments on Paleozoic limestone exposed at many places. Thin dikes and sills are in part later than the large sill and cross-cutting bodies. The igneous magma seems to have entered the Triassic rocks near their western border ; to have spread along the flat, western contact as a sill ; to have extended laterally in a thick sheet between the layers as the Gettysburg sill ; to have broken across the bedding in several places between these two sills as cross-cutting bodies. Judging from the coarseness and thickness of the 56 PROCEEDINGS OF THE WASHINGTON MEETING intrusive bodies, the molten rock probably reached the surface, but all traces of the lava have been removed by erosion. Petrography (by j. v. lewis) GENERAL CHARACTER Dominantly diabasic. Remarkable diversity of differentiation facies. Range from coarse-grained granitic texture and pink to light or dark gray colors in the larger bodies to dense black rock in thin sheets and dikes and in contact facies. Chief constituents greenish black pyroxene and whitish to gray plagioclase, the former generally preponderating. Approximately equal at many places and locally the feldspar is in excess. The microscope shows plentiful magnetite and minute apatite crystals and generally some quartz and orthoclase. Locally in darker varieties much hypersthene or olivine or both. In lighter facies quartz and orthoclase abound, chiefly in micrographic intergrowth. Here and there biotite and, far less commonly, titanite. Pyroxene not uncommonly altered in part to uralitic amphibole or serpen- tine and chlorite with granular magnetite. Corresponding alteration of feld- spars yields fine scaly (apparently sericitic) aggregates and, less commonly, kaolin. Epidote abundant in places. Typically diabasic — pyroxene filling angular interstices in a felted ground- mass of slender plagioclase crystals. By coalescence of pyroxene into larger areas, in which feldspars are imbedded, the texture becomes ophitic. Dense varieties grade into typical basalt with- glassy ground-mass ; some with scat- tered phenocrysts of pyroxene and, less commonly, feldspar and olivine. Tn acid facies much quartz and orthoclase, in separate grains or micrographic intergrowth, occupy angular spaces among plagioclase crystals and there is much less pyroxene. ORDER OF CRYSTALLIZATION Prevailing diabasic — plagioclase completed before pyroxene. Two marked exceptions: (1) Trismatic pyroxene crystals in some coarser quartz-orthoclase facies with subordinate plagioclase. (2) Pyroxene phenocrysts in dense black dikes, thin sheets, and contact facies, with few large feldspars. This earlier crystallization, probably before intrusion, followed the usual order in plutonic rocks and would have produced a gabbro. In the normal diabase the order has been : (1) apatite, (2) magnetite. (3) olivine, (4) plagioclase, (5) pyrox- ene, (6) micrographic quartz-orthoclase, (7) orthoclase, (S) quartz. VARIETIES OF DIABASE (1) Normal diabase, the most common pyroxene-plagioclase rock; (2) feldspathic diabase, or anorthosite. chiefly plagioclase feldspar; (3) quartz diabase, with abundant quartz, chiefly in micrographic intergrowth with ortho- clase ; (4) viicropegmatite, mainly micrographic quartz-orthoclase; (5) aplitc, essentially dense granular quartz-orthoclase rock; (6) hypersthene diabase, much hypersthene, replacing in part monoclinic pyroxene; (7) olivine diabase, with abundant olivine; (8) basaltic diabase, or basalt, dense black facies, in TRIASSIC IGNEOUS ROCKS NEAR GETTYSBURG 57 places vesicular and having glassy ground-mass; (9) olivine basalt, dense black variety, with abundant olivine. Presented in abstract extemporaneously by both authors. DESERT BEQOL1TH AND ITS GENETIC RELATIONS TO MAXIMUM EPIROT1V DEPOSITION BY CHAJJLES KEYES (Abstract) It was remarked by many who listened to the admirable illustrated lecture on the "Characteristics of Egyptian deserts," given by Dr. W. F. Hume before the meeting of the Twelfth International Geological Congress in 1913, that it was a very great surprise to learn that arid lands were so dominantly bare- rock plains rather than rolling sand wastes, or tracts deeply mantled by rock debris, as so commonly regarded. That the mantle of decayed rock materials which so widely distinguished most pluvial lands of the globe and which is so aptly denominated the regolith should appear to be so largely wanting in this most famous and typical of deserts was a fact that was directly ascribed to the peculiarities of arid land depletion. The recognition of the prevalency of bedrock surfaces over broad tracts does not preclude the existence of frequent and often extensive accumulations of rock- waste in the deserts. Enormous amounts of these soil materials are manifestly not only constantly moved about over wide areas of the arid country, but they are directly exported far beyond desert confines. The areas of greatest accumulation of continental or epirotic deposits appear to have a close genetic relation to the areas of greatest arid deflation. Concrete illus- trations are drawn from four continents. " Presented by title in the absence of the author. ORIGIN OF FOLIATION IN THE PREGAMBRIAN ROCKS OF NORTHERN NEW YORK BY WILLIAM J. MILLER (Abstract) It has been generally assumed that the Adirondack Precambrian rocks, in- cluding the Grenville strata and the syenite-granite intrusive series, have been severely compressed and folded as well as thoroughly metamorphosed and foliated by the compression. Evidence will be presented to show that the Grenville strata have never been highly folded or severely compressed. Various broad Grenville belts are known to be only very slightly folded, while many masses, large and small. are merely tilted or domed at various angles, though some local contortions do occur. These structural relations are best explained as having been the result of slow irregular up welling of the more or less plastic magmas (prob- ably under very moderate compression), whereby the Grenville strata, pre- viously deformed little or none at all, were broken up, tilted, and lifted or domed. Some bodies of strata, caught between batholithic magmas, were locally squeezed or contorted. 58 PROCEEDINGS OP THE WASHINGTON MEETING The Greuville sediments, which are thoroughly crystallized, were certainly reorganized into new minerals under deep-seated conditions ; but, since the strata were never highly compressed, it is evident that they were subjected to essentially static rather than dynamic metamorphism. This explains not only the retention of stratification surfaces to the present time, but also the in- variable parallelism of stratification and foliation. Regarding the foliation of the syenite-granite series, it is believed that during the process of intrusion the magmas were under only moderate lateral pressure, if any ; that the process of intrusion was long continued ; that the foliation was developed essentially as a flow-structure, under moderate pressure, during the intrusion, and that the almost universal but varied granulation of these rocks was produced mostly by movements in the partially solidified magma, and possibly in part by moderate pressure applied after complete con- solidation. The usual parallelism of both Grenville masses and foliation with adjacent masses and foliation of the syenite-granite intrusives are readily accounted for because the Grenville masses were swung into general parallelism with the slow-moving magmatic currents. Presented in abstract extemporaneously. Discussion Prof. J. E. Wolff : In the Archean highlands of New Jersey, with a nearly constant northeast striking and easterly dipping foliation and frequent north- east pitching linear structure, it seems necessary to siippose strong lateral compression. Further remarks were made by Professors R. A. Daly, M. B. Baker, and George H. Chadwick, with reply by the author. Professor Coleman remarked : It seems to me that both sides in this inter- esting discussion are entirely right, but in different areas. From my own field experience at one point or another I can corroborate the statements made by all who have joined in the discussion. There is no real contradiction between them, since what took place in one region differed from what took place in another. - LANDSLIDES IN UNCONSOLIDATED SEDIMENTS BY DAVID H. NEWLAND (Abstract) The paper discusses landslides as an agency of degradation in regions of low relief and loose sediments like the larger stream valleys in the glaciated district. Occurrences in the terraced Pleistocene clay and sand beds of the Hudson-Champlain Valley are referred to in particular, on account of the number of available observations which extend over a considerable period of time. Gravity disturbances in bedded clays and sands often occur on small gradients. The materials as a whole possess less stability under varying con- ditions of moisture content and climate than the unsorted heterogeneous ac- ABSTRACTS AND DISCUSSIONS OF PAPERS 59 cumulations of rock weathering that are commonly involved in slides in moun- tain regions. Their forms are correspondingly varied and complex, in some instances embodying very puzzling mechanical features. The gravity stress which is the fundamental cause of dislocation may be transmitted long dis- tances through the medium of a practically fluid stratum below the zone of rupture, as has not infrequently happened in the Hudson Valley. Unlike the usual condition in mountain forms, there need be no essential variations in the character of the material displaced and the undisturbed beds. Any struc- tural change that could be of significance in the formation of such slides, in the very nature of the case, is scarcely to be looked for, and the same is true also with respect to a slipping surface. The conditions attendant on the disturbances can generally be determined by observation or by testing the ground in the vicinity, from which some con- clusion may be drawn as to the causes leading up to the slides. The exact impetus or proximate causes, however, is seldom to be ascertained. Usually several factors have to be taken into consideration in determining the origin of individual slides, and their relative importance is difficult to estimate. The problem may be further complicated by the entrance of some external influence into the situation, either of natural development or arising from the agency of man. Of the conditions which govern the form taken by the movement, those of more immediate concern are the nature of the beds — that is, whether clay, sand, or mixture of the two ; the moisture content, and the surface contour. The forms that have come under observation in the Hudson Valley are as follows : 1. Surface creep, involving soil, sand, and gravel ; little active in plastic clays. 2. Slumping and flows ; peculiar to clays and silts. 3. Earth slides; materials of any sort, but not fluent; the movement takes place on the face of slopes that are oversteepened. 4. Subsidence of surface through squeezing out of a wet clay substratum on the plane of its bed. 5. Subsidence of surface from unbalanced pressure on confined liquid sub- stratum, leading to an upward movement at a distance. The influence of the various kinds of movement on the process of degrada- tion is too important to be left out of account in a region like the Hudson Valley. Their importance, of course, can not be estimated quantitatively, although there is reason to believe that locally they have a predominant part in the work of surface leveling. On the nearly flat tops of the terraces erosion ordinarily is unable to make much headway, especially when the surface is heavily sodded, whereas a very light slope suffices to cause the precipitation of masses of earth in slides, some of which may attain large proportions. There is record of 10 or 12 catastrophic landslides in the Hudson Valley in a period of 75 years ; the larger ones involved upward of 100,000 cubic yards of earth. The inconspicuous forms, no doubt, accomplish the largest share of leveling, since they are widely active with cumulative effects. Presented in abstract extemporaneously. The Society adjourned at 5.45 o'clock p. m. 60 PROCEEDINGS OF THE WASHINGTON MEETING ANNUAL DINNEE The annual dinner of the Society was held at Rauscher s, about 227 persons participating. Dr. John M. Clarke acted as toastmaster and the speakers of the evening were Messrs. William 1ST. Rice, H. P. Gushing, Frank D. Adams, Charles D. Walcott, George 0. Smith, W. G. Miller, and Joseph Barrell. Session op Wednesday, December 29 The Society convened at 9.15 o'clock a. m., with President Coleman in the chair. REPORT OF AUDITING COMMITTEE 1 The Auditing Committee begs to report that they have examined the papers and vouchers of the Treasurer and find them to be correct and in good order. The investment securities will be examined at a later date. John E. Wolff, George H. Perkins, For the Committee. The report was accepted. The printed report of the Council was then taken from the table and, on motion, accepted. The Society then took up the consideration of scientific papers. TITLES AND ABSTRACTS OF PAPERS PRESENTED BEFORE THE MORNING SESSION AND DISCUSSIONS THEREON FERROUS IRON CONTENT AND MAGNETIC PROPERTIES OF THE NATURAL OXIDES OF IRON AS AN INDEX TO THEIR ORIGIN AND HISTORY BY K. B. SOSMAN AND J. C. HOSTETTER 2 (Abstract) Practically all natural iron oxide contains more or less ferrous iron, the percentage varying from a few hundreths of 1 per cent up to the percentage found in magnetite. The magnetic susceptibility likewise varies over a very wide range and depends in part on the ferrous iron content. By measuring 1 Under date of February 19, 1916, Edward B. Mathews reports that, acting as a mem- ber of the Auditing Committee of the Society, he examined the Society's securities in the hands of the Treasurer and found them to he as listed in the Treasurer's report under date of December 1, 1915. 2 Introduced by Arthur L. Day. ABSTRACTS AND DISCUSSIONS OF PAPERS 61 these quantities, both for natural oxides and for oxides made under known conditions in the laboratory, it is possible to draw some conclusions concerning the conditions under which the natural oxides were formed or to which they have been subjected since their formation. Presented in abstract extemporaneously by the senior author. VARIABLE COMPOSITION OF MELANOCHALCITE BY W. F. HUNT AND E. H. KRAUS {Abstract) Our previous knowledge of this rare mineral has been restricted to that of a single paper by the late Prof. G. A. Koenig. An investigation of recently acquired material shows, however, considerable variation in the chemical com- position from that previously reported. Koenig's interpretation of the com- position as a basic salt of an ortho-silico-carbonic acid is questioned, and evi- dence is given . for considering melanochalcite as a mechanical mixture of tenorite, malachite, and chrysocolla. Presented by title in the absence of the authors. DEFINITION AND DETERMINATION OF THE MINERAL HYDROXIDES OF IRON BY H. E. MERWIN AND EUGEN POSNJAK (Abstract) Specimens from a large number of localities were grouped according to optical characteristics. Those found to be sufficiently homogeneous were studied chemically and thermally. Definitions are based on a correlation of char- acters. Those characteristics most readily determined are emphasized. Presented in abstract extemporaneously by the senior author. Brief remarks were made by Prof. J. E. Wolff. SALINE FUMAROLE DEPOSITS OF THE SOUTH ITALIAN VOLCANOES BY HENKY S. WASHINGTON (Abstract) After a brief account of previous work on volcanic salts, the occurrences observed in the summer of 1914 at Vesuvius, Etna, and Vulcano were described. Analyses were given showing the characteristics of the salts found at each volcano. They present certain rather remarkable features — among them the practical absence of chlorides at Vulcano; the occurrences of thiosulphates (no sulphites) within the crater, but not on the outer slope at the same volcano : the prevalence of chlorides, with sulphates, at Etna; the relatively large amount of iron at Vulcano and its paucity at Etna, though the lavas show the converse relations. An interpretation of the results and their application to our views on the constitution of the magma was attempted. The purely 62 PROCEEDINGS OF THE WASHINGTON MEETING mineralogic description, in collaboration with Dr. H. E. Merwin, will be pub- lished later. Presented in abstract extemporaneously. CRYSTALS AND CRYSTAL FORCES BY F. E. WEIGHT (Abstract) A general discussion of crystals as systems of vectorial forces, with special reference to their individuality and their behavior with respect to other systems of forces, special emphasis being placed on the individuality of crystals as it finds expression in the so-called false equilibria of thermodynamics. Methods for the measurement of crystal forces were considered briefly. Presented in abstract extemporaneously. EXTENSION OF THE MONTANA PHOSPHATE DEPOSITS NORTHWARD INTO CANADA BY FRANK D. ADAMS AND WM. J. DICK (Abstract) The paper described an investigation undertaken for the Commission of Conservation of Canada for the purpose of ascertaining whether the great phosphate deposits recently discovered in Montana, Idaho, Wyoming, and Utah could be traced northward into Canada. Three lines of section across the Rocky Mountains in Canada were examined and were described. These are those on the North Kootenay Pass, the Crows Nest Pass, and on the main line of the Canadian Pacific Railway. In the most northerly of these sections, crossing the Rocky Mountain National Park at Banff, in the province of Alberta, the phosphate was discovered. Presented in abstract extemporaneously by the senior author. Discussion Mr. L. D. Burling : The contact between the Devonian and the Cambrian in the North Kootenay Pass section was craite naturally ascribed by Dawson to faulting, but the direct superposition of the two systems described by Professor Adams is strikingly corroborated in three other widely scattered localities: (1) at Elko, British Columbia; (2) in the mountains near Upper Columbia Lake, and (3) along the main line of the Canadian Pacific Railway, just west of Banff, Alberta, where the Sawback formation has been shown to directly underlie the intermediate limestone of the Devonian and to be of Cambrian age; 25 miles to the west, however, the Cambrian is overlain by 10,000 or more feet of Ordovician and Silurian strata. Of interest also in this connection will be the statement that the small "downfaulted block" which has been described as representing the "Jurassic" in the Canadian Pacific Railway section west of Banff is now believed to ABSTRACTS AND DISCUSSIONS OF PAPERS 63 represent an outcrop of the Upper Banff shale in its normal position with respect to the underlying Rocky Mountain quartzite. The finding of the Albertella fauna in place is not the least interesting of Professor Adams' results. The reference of this elusive drift-block fauna to the Middle Cambrian instead of the Lower Cambrian has been confirmed dur- ing the past summer by its discovery in place in the type section on Mount Bosworth, British Columbia, some 700 feet above the base of the Cathedral limestone. The definite placement of this fauna is of value in connection with the discussion of the Precambrian age of the rocks of the Galton and Purcell series, since the latter are now known to be older than the Albertella fauna. That they are still older is evidenced by Dawson's early and hitherto un- recorded discovery of Lower Cambrian fossils in the Kootenay Valley south of Upper Columbia Lake. Brief remarks were made by Prof. Alfred C. Lane, with reply by the author. EMERALD DEPOSITS OF MUZO, COLOMBIA BY JOSEPH E. POGTJE (Abstract) The paper is a result of a field study of the deposits made in July, 1915. The geological and mineralogical relations of the emerald are discussed and evidence presented to show that the emerald originated as a result of gas- aqueous emanations from an intrusion that is not exposed, but is indicated by the presence of contact rocks, pegmatites, and a significant mineral asso- ciation. Presented in abstract extemporaneously. CRYSTALLINE MARBLES OF ALABAMA BY WM. F. PROUTY {Abstract) The crystalline marbles of Alabama are largely confined to an area about 35 miles long and 1^4 miles in maximum width. This area is for the most part a fault block, with the strike of its rocks in some places similar to and in other places differing from both that of the Ocoee phyllite, which bounds it on the southeast side throughout the length of the field, and the Knox dolo- mite formation, which bounds the field for the larger part of the distance on the northwestern side. Topographically the area is a well defined valley, ex- cept locally, where it is crossed by ridges of dolomite or more resistant rock. Although there is no direct fossil evidence to indicate the age of the marble. the general characteristics lead to the conclusion that it varies in age from Cambrian to Ordovician in different parts of the field. The thickest deposits of marble are in the central and southwestern parts of the field, and it is here that the chief developments of the area are being made at the present time. The quarry methods employed in some of the openings are considerably 64 PROCEEDINGS OF THE WASHINGTON MEETING different from the usual methods in such work, the object being to take ad- vantage of the unusual structural conditions. The Alabama marble is medium to fine grained, with distinctly interlocking crystals. It is unusually translucent, sonorous, and resistant to abrasion and weathering. These qualities, together with its warm coloring, explain its growing popularity in the market. A careful study of the structural conditions in different parts of the field show numerous examples of drag folding and, locally, schistosity in the marble. The sharp line of demarcation between calcite and dolomite beds is sug- gestive of a distinct differentiation in the original sediments. Presented by title in the absence of the author. ORISKANY IRON ORE BY E. J. HOLDEN (Abstract) This ore occurs in quantity only in Virginia. Its chief development has a definite stratigraphic position at the top of the Lewistown limestone. The ore bodies have thicknesses up to 40 feet and extend on the strike for distances of a few hundred feet to half a mile and down the dip for several hundred feet. Various theories of its origin have been given, but mining has shown that the ore is secondary, and it now seems certain that the most productive phase of the ore is a limestone replacement, the iron being derived from the overlying shale. Presented in abstract extemporaneously. GEOLOGIC MAP OF THE FORT HALL INDIAN RESERVATION BY GEORGE K. MANSFIELD (Abstract) The sedimentary rocks of the Fort Hall Indian Reservation include repre- sentatives of all the great Paleozoic and later systems except the Cretaceous. Igneous rocks, mainly extrusives, are present in great abundance and consider- able variety, including a single occurrence of nepheline basalt. Some of the Triassic and Jurassic rocks are so well developed as to require new sub- division. The structure is quite complex, with both folding and faulting, especially the latter, and there is an important thrust-fault, the Putnam over- thrust. Three epochs of deformation and four of igneous activity have been recognized. There may be others. Important deposits of phosphate occur in the eastern part of the reservation. Presented by title. ABSTRACTS AND DISCUSSIONS OF PAPERS 65 PRELIMINARY GEOLOGIC MAP OF THE WAYAN QUADRANGLE, IDAHO- WYOMING BY GEORGE R. MANSFIELD {Abstract) The rocks of the Wayan quadrangle include some basalt and a long sequence of sedimentary formations representing all the great Paleozoic and later sys- tems except the Cambrian and Silurian. The strata have been complexly folded and faulted. The most noteworthy structural features are the great bifurcated syncline that occupies the central portion of the quadrangle, bending off toward the northwest, and the Bannock overthrust that traverses the quadrangle in an irregular course. There are many minor folds and faults. Besides structural problems, there are many of stratigraphic and physiographic interest. The quadrangle is of great economic importance because of the large body of high-grade phosphate rock that it contains. Presented by title. GLACIAL LAKES AND OTHER GLACIAL FEATURES OF THE CENTRAL ADIRONDACKS BY HAROLD L. ALLING 1 {Abstract) Although the glacial geology of the foothills of the Adirondacks has been investigated, the central area, specially the Mount Marcy, Lake Placid, Ausable, and Elizabethtown quadrangles, has not yet received the attention it deserves. Here Pleistocene phenomena are beautifully shown in great abundance. The most interesting features are two series of local glacial lakes, or water levels, ranging from 2,000 down to 500 feet in altitude through a dozen successive stages. They are indicated by deltas, terraces, strong beaches, and channels. In several of the outlets beautiful cataract plunge basins are exhibited. The post-lacustrine deformation of a number of the levels has been determined and indicates that the amount of uplift decreases in passing to the lakes of lower altitude. Presented by title. PLEISTOCENE FEATURES IN THE SCHENECTADY-SARATOGA-GLENS FALLS SECTION OF THE HUDSON VALLEY BY HERMAN L. FAIRCHILD {Abstract) A map shows (1) the deep flooding by the sealevel waters of the Hudson Valley; (2) the vast areas of detrital plains; (3) the glacial indrainage, espe- cially the Iromohawk; (4) the ice-block kettles of Saratoga and Round lakes. The relation of the Iromohawk distributary channels to the Round Bake 1 Introduced by H. L. Fairehild, 60 PROCEEDINGS OF- THE WASHINGTON MEETING kettle shows that a large portion of the drift-buried ice block, which produced the basin of Round Lake, persisted until the locality had been raised 175 feet, the total Pleistocene uplift being 375 feet. Differential uplift diverted the Iromohawk flow from its northward course, as mapped by J. H. Stoller, into the present Mohawk channel. Presented in abstract extemporaneousl}'. PLEISTOCENE VPLTFT OF NEW YORK AND ADJACENT TERRITORY BY HERMAN L. FAIRCHILD (Abstract) The paper published in the Bulletin, volume 25, pages 219-242, was intended to emphasize the fact of deep submergence in sealevel waters of the Con- necticut and Hudson valleys. With further study of the marine plane and with precise levels on the international boundary, it is now possible to locate with approach to accuracy the isobases of land uplift across New York and the adjoining areas, east and west. A fixed vertical relation in the Ontario basin between the Iroquois and the marine planes give us a key, for the Iroquois area, to (1) the amount of post- Iroquois uplift; (2) of Iroquois or glacial uplift; (3) of initial altitude; (4) of local warping; (5) of flooding, due to differential uplift of the Rome outlet. The uplifting of the area, in time and amount, shows very close relation to the latest ice-body, and the uplifting appears to have been a progressive wave, subsequent to the far removal of the ice. Presented in abstract extemporaneously. Published in full in this volume. Discussion on the two preceding Papers Frof. J. W. Spencer : Some years ago I devoted much time in the study of the terraces of New England, but only published a note on them. From the highlands of northern New England extensive terraces, sometimes 20 miles long, were found to occur in all the great valleys, with slopes much less than the gradients of the rivers. These terraces descended not in warpings, but by steps (overlapping one another) ; not merely to the south in the Connecticut Valley, but westward down the Lamoille, eastward down the Saco, northward in the valleys leading to the Saint Lawrence. Consequently, if they were due to the rise of the mountain mass, there should be some agreement between the terraces of the different valleys. If such had been the case, the movements were per sal turn in steps and not by warping curves. This does not support the hypothesis of Professor Fairchild. that the Connecticut terraces record the warping. Also long ago I found that the Iroquois beach extended east of Watertown, and correctly traced it to East Pitcairn; but in 1902 Professor Fairchild terminated late Iroquois some 20 miles within the explored zone, as shown on his map. Prof. R. D. Salisbury : We can congratulate ourselves on the fact that Professor Fairchild has been able so long to follow up his studies on glacial ABSTRACTS AND DISCUSSIONS OP PAPERS 67 drainage and associated problems, and that lie can now present to us the ripe conclusion of his long and careful study. The generalizations based on such detailed and long-continued work are the generalizations which we have come to trust. The fact that his conclusions tie up harmoniously the conclusions of many individual workers who have studied local areas intensively is grati- fying and seems to be good evidence of the soundness of the results at which Professor Fairchild has arrived. I have but one comment to add. I think the east end of isobase O will have to be shifted somewhat farther south. Professor Fairchild replied briefly to Professor Spencer's and Salis- bury's remarks. STUDIES OF GLAC1ATION IN THE WHITE MOUNTAINS OF NEW HAMPSHIRE BY JAMES WALTEK GOLDTHWAIT (Abstract) The field studied in 1915 is the northwestern part of the White Mountains, more particularly the Ammonoosuc Valley between Littleton and Bretton Woods. It is the purpose of the paper to show that glacial phenomena, which were regarded by Louis Agassiz and by Charles H. Hitchcock as records of local mountain glaciers, and by Warren TJpham as records of a local White Mountain ice-cap, remaining at the close of the last Glacial epoch, are in reality records of the North American ice-sheet, which retired into Canada without leaving either mountain glaciers or a local ice-cap in its wake. Stria*, dispersion of boulders, terminal moraines, outwash plains and kame terraces, mapped in detail, are offered as evidence. Observations on the Mount Washington Range, the Franconia Mountains, and Mount Moosilauke support the view advanced in 1912, that there were cirque cutting glaciers in the White Mountains at a time prior to the last regional glaciation, but that these glaciers were small and not very numerous. Presented by title in the absence of the author. GLACIATION AND STORMY PERIOD OF THE FOURTEENTH CENTURY BY ELLSWORTH HUNTINGTON {Abstract) A recent study of the salt lakes at the eastern base of the Sierra Nevada s shows that their later strands can be dated in terms of the growth of the big trees on the other side of the mountains. Gale has shown that chemical evi- dence indicates that Owens Lake must have overflowed not more than "4,000 years ago or considerably less," Jones has shown the same to be true of Pyramid Lake. Since they did not use the entire drainage area and made no allowance for increased solution of mineral matter from the rocks with in- creased precipitation, it seems necessary to reduce the time to approximately 2,000 years. In that period Owens Lake has decreased to 40 per cent of its former size, and Pyramid has similarly shrunk, although not so much. Below the old outlet strands there is in each case a series of younger strands whose 68 PROCEEDINGS OP THE WASHINGTON MEETING height and relative age agree with the fluctuations in the growth of the sequoia trees 50 miles west of Owens Lake. The most notable strand appears to date from the fourteenth century — a time at which the big trees made a peculiarly rapid growth. It is remarkable for its size and strength. It could have been formed only under the influence of unusually high winds. What seems to be the same strand can also be recognized at Mono and Pyramid lakes, both by its relative location and its evidences of peculiarly strong wave action. The fourteenth century period was also marked by climatic stress in other regions. In central Asia the Caspian Sea and Lop-Nor expanded with great rapidity, as is known from well authenticated historic records. In north- western Europe storms of unusual severity afflicted the countries around the North Sea. Floods were of frequent occurrence, and extraordinarily cold winters caused the Baltic Sea to be frozen over completely. Norway suffered great economic distress because of persistent failure of the crops. In England the rains were so abundant that the average production of wheat per acre fell off one-third and the agricultural population was in great distress. In Iceland and Greenland similar occurrences took place. Petterson holds that increased severity of climate and the crowding down of the ice were the cause of the final abandonment of Greenland by the Norsemen. It is noteworthy that in both the eastern and western hemispheres the chief evidences of climatic stress come from the semi-arid and desert regions, where a subtropical climate prevails, or else from the northern border of the belt of cyclonic storms. These are the regions where the Glacial period also produced the most noteworthy results, either by the expansion of salt lakes or by the production of ice-sheets. The conditions in the fourteenth century seem to have been of essentially the same nature as those of the Glacial period, the only apparent difference being in degree. It is possible that a study of such climatic fluctuations during historic times may lead to a final solution of the problem of the nature and cause of Glacial periods. Presented in abstract extemporaneously. PLEISTOCENE DEPOSITS OF MINNESOTA AND ADJACENT DISTRICTS BY FBANK LEVERETT {Abstract) The extension of glacial investigations into Minnesota from districts farther east has shown that in the last, or Wisconsin, stage of glaciation the Labrador ice-sheet reached its culmination and began to wane before the ice which spread over northern Wisconsin and neighboring parts of Minnesota reached its culmination, and that this ice in turn began to wane before the Keewatin ice-sheet, which lay still farther west, reached its culmination. It is suggested in explanation of this westward wave of ice culmination that the highland of Labrador Avas the natural starting point of glaciation, and that because of storms coming to it from the southwest the ice-sheet grew westward to such an extent as to eventually receive more snowfall in the region south of Hudson Bay than in the Labrador district; so that there resulted a waning of ice movement from ■ the latter district. Still later the ice-sheet grew westward into central Canada and caused the culmination of the Keewatin ice movement which spread into Minnesota and Iowa. ABSTRACTS AND DISCUSSIONS OF PAPERS (j ( .> The same sort of westward growth of the ice-sheet may have taken place in the Illinoian stage of glaciation, for it now appears probable that the Illi- noian drift from the Labrador center is somewhat older than drift which was carried southward from the region south of Hudson Bay through the Lake Michigan basin into Illinois, and also older than the Iowan drift brought in from districts still farther west. This interpretation, if correct, may do away with some of the difficulty hitherto found in explaining the development of an ice-sheet in the low area west of Hudson Bay. Presented in abstract extemporaneously. Soeietv adjourned at 12.45 o'clock p. m. AFTERNOON SESSION The Society met at 2.10 o'clock p. m., with Mr. F. B. Taylor in the chair. RESOLUTION REGARDING THE TAKING OF EXPERT TESTIMONY The Secretary pro tern, read a resolution adopted by the Council at its noon meeting as follows : "In view of the fact that there is almost a universal desire among scientific men for some sort of reform in the manner of presenting expert opinion in legal procedure, and in view of the fact that the geologists of the country are certainly as deeply interested in this matter as any other scientific body, the following resolutions are presented for consideration : "Resolved, That the Geological Society of America recognizes the urgent need of reform in the methods of securing evidence or expert opinion in judicial procedure ; "That the Geological Society of America approve the efforts of the Ameri- can Association for the Advancement of Science in this behalf, and "That the Council of the Society is hereby authorized and directed to co- operate with the Committee of the American Association for the Advancement of Science in an endeavor to bring about such a reform." On motion, the resolution was adopted by the Society. From 2.10 to 2. -'10 o'clock p. m. the Society met in joint session with the Paleontological Society and listened to the address of Dr. E. 0. Ul- rich, President of that Society, on "The use of fossils in correlation." The Society then proceeded to the consideration of scientific papers. Many of the attending geologists took advantage of the invitation of the Geophysical Laboratory to visit that institution during the afternoon. Arrangements were made by the staff of the laboratory to exhibit the work of the different departments, and a most instructive afternoon was spent by those interested in the geophysical and petrographic lines. VI — Bull. Geol. Soc. Am., Vol. 27, 1915 70 PROCEEDINGS OF THE WASHINGTON MEETING TITLES AND ABSTRACTS OF TAPERS PRESENTED BEFORE THE AFTERNOON SESSION AND DISCUSSIONS THEREON PENNSYLVANIAN OF TENNESSEE BY L. C. GLENN (Abstract) The paper described briefly the formations into which the Pennsylvanian is divided in the State, gave their areal distribution, discussed the principal coals in each, and attempted to correlate these coals. P>rief consideration was given to the age of the deposits found in the State. Presented in abstract extemporaneously. SUBDIVISIONS OF THE THATNES LIMESTONE AND NUGGET SANDSTONE, MESOZOIC, IN THE FORT HALL INDIAN RESERVATION, IDAHO BY GEOEGE R. MANSFIELD {Abstract) A mineral examination of the Fort Hall Indian Reservation by a Geological Survey party in 1913 involved a detailed mapping of some of the Mesozoic formations. It proved desirable to subdivide the Thaynes limestone, Lower Triassic, and the Nugget sandstone, Jurassic or Triassic. The thickness of these strata, including the intervening Ankareh sandstone, is about 6,S00 feet. The Thaynes limestone was raised to the rank of a group consisting of three formations — the Ross limestone at the base, the Fort Hall formation, and the Portneuf limestone. The Ankareh, which at the type locality is a shale, was here found to be a sandstone. The Nugget sandstone was sub- divided into four members — the Higham grit at the base, the Deadman lime- stone, the Wood shale, and the main sandstone member. The paper described briefly the formations subdivided, explained the use of the names, and included a discussion by G. H. Girty of the interesting faunas of the three formations of the Thaynes group. Presented in abstract extemporaneously. STRATIGRAPHY OF SOME FORMATIONS HITHERTO GALLED BEGKWITH AND BEAR RIVER, IN SOUTHEASTERN IDAHO BY GEORGE R. MANSFIELD AND P. V. ROTJNDY (Abstract) In the Montpelier and Wayan 30-minute quadrangles of southeastern Idaho, parties of the Geological Survey have found great thicknesses of strata, aggre- gating 17,000 feet or more, that have hitherto been assigned to the Beckwith and Bear River formations. On the maps of the Hayden Surveys both forma- ABSTRACTS AND DISCUSSIONS OF PAPERS 71 tions are included in the Laramie. The Beckwith has been assigned to the Cretaceous or Jurassic and the Bear River to the Upper Cretaceous. There is a considerable lack of agreement, both lithologically and faunally, between the formations in the quadrangles named and the Beckwith and Bear River formations in their type localities. The discrepancy is so great that it now seems inadvisable to continue the use of the names Beckwith and Bear River in the district discussed. Three groups of strata are recognized, the lowest of which is marine Jurassic, and rests unconformably on the Twin Creek limestone, the main Jurassic formation of the region. The two higher groups are non-marine and probably Lower Cretaceous. They are separated from each other by an unconformity, but the lower group appears to be con- formable on the Jurassic beds below. The two higher groups have some re- semblances to the Kootenai of Montana and Canada, but the data are at present insufficient for their correlation with that formation. No character- istic Bear River fossils have been found in the district, though such have been found farther north, and there is a possibility that the doubtful beds may grade upward into the true Bear River in that direction. The beds formerly called Beckwith are divided into seven formations and a new name is given to the strata hitherto called Bear River. The paper gave a statement of the stratigraphic problems involved, together with a de- scription of the formations. Presented in abstract extemporaneously by the senior author. SEDIMENTATION ALONG THE GULF COAST OF THE UNITED STATES BY E. W. SHAW (Abstract) Sedimentation along the Gulf Coast of the United States proceeds in three general and markedly different ways, each of which prevails over a large area. On the west coast the sediment delivered to the sea by streams is being re- worked, some of it many times over, but is not carried far away. At the mouths of the Mississippi silt, clay, and fine sand are accumulating, layer on layer, almost precisely where dropped by the river. Along the Florida coast comparatively little sediment is carried into the sea by streams, and the littoral deposits consist largely of very clean sand and calcium carbonate extracted from sea-water by invertebrates, alga?, bacteria, etcetera. The lagoon and barrier beach conditions which prevail along the west coast and a part of the north coast are perhaps the most common, and those at the mouths of the Mississippi most unique, though the processes in operation at the southern end of Florida differ in some respects from any in operation elsewhere in the world. The object of the paper was to compare and contrast individual processes and results affecting each region. On shore and off shore samples of sediment from each of the three general regions were exhibited. Presented in abstract extemporaneously. 72 PROCEEDINGS OF THE WASHINGTON MEETING RELATIVE AGE OF THE DETROIT RIVER SERIES BY CLINTON R. STAUFFER The Detroit River series is that part of the so-called Monroe formation which lies above the Sylvania sandstone. In an article on the "Nomenclature and subdivisions of the Upper Siluric strata of Michigan, Ohio, and Western New York." by Lane, Prosser, Sherzer, and Grabau, 1 this series was subdivided as follows : [ Lucas dolomite Upper Monroe or | Amherstburg dolomite Detroit River Series] Anderdon limestone [ Flat Rock dolomite The series is overlain by the Onondaga (Columbus or Dundee) limestone or the lowest generally recognized Devonian of the region. Doctor Prosser orig- inally defined the Lucas limestone as the upper portion of the Monroe and states that "it includes all the rocks between the top of the Sylvania sandstone and the base of the formation which Doctor Lane in Michigan has named the Dundee limestone." 2 It is thus evident that the Lucas has been much re- stricted in the later paper. However, it seems probable that the Upper Monroe, or Detroit River series, includes beds not very well known at the time the definition of the Lucas, limestone was written. There is not only some doubt as to the stratigraphic order of these subdivisions, but very conflicting opinions regarding the real age of the whole series. It may be that part of the con- fusion lies in the fact that the faunas of these subdivisions are not entirely distinct, and that they have been mistaken for each other in the various out- crops. Only a small portion of any of the faunas of the series is as yet known. The Detroit River series is rather widely distributed. over Michigan, Ontario. Ohio, and doubtless Indiana as well. In Ohio the Anderdon outcrops in the quarries at Castalia ; the Amherstburg probably occurs at Fremont, certainly at West Liberty, and the Lucas outcrops at numerous places along the margin of the Onondaga (Columbus), in northwestern Ohio. It is especially well shown and quite fossiliferous at Silica and Centennial, in Lucas County. In Ontario the most extensively distributed division of this series is probably the Amherstburg, at least so far as at present known. In addition to those along the Detroit River, outcrops of this dolomite may be found near Woodstock. Saint Marys, Wingham, Formosa, and McRae Point. The Lucas dolomite is less perfectly known, but appears, to be represented in the outcrops at Kin- cardine and perhaps the upper part of the outcrop above Reachville. The Anderdon is not certainly known in Ontario, outside of Fssex County, although it is quite well developed in Monroe County. Michigan. Probably the best development of the series is along the Detroit River, but it is by no means confined to that region. The salt shaft at Oakwood, 3 near Detroit, cut one of the best and most complete sections through it that is thus far known, except- ing, of course, the numerous well records. But the most accessible sections are those that have been exposed in the vicinity of Amherstburg. Ontario. iBull. Geol. Soc. Am., vol. 19, 1907, p,,556. 2 .Tour. Geol.. vol. xi, 1903, pp. 540-541. 3 Mich. Geol. and Biol. Survey, Pub. 12, Geol. ser. 9, 1911, fig. 21, opp. p. 278. BULL. GEOL. SOC. AM. VOL. 27, 1915, PL. 7 t.< Si Figure 1. — The uneven upper Surface of the Anderdon Limestone in the Amherstburg Stone Company's Quarry Figure 2. — Rough upper Surface of the Anderdon Limestone, showing Joints widened by Solution and later filled with Onondaga Mud THE ANDERDON SURFACE AT AMHERSTBURG, ONTARIO RELATIVE AGE OP DETROIT RIVER SERIES 73 The Flat Rock dolomite is not exposed at Amherstburg, unless the lowest beds of the Amherstburg Stone Company's quarry belong to it; but the other divi- sions are well shown. These are all more or less fossiliferous and at certain places have yielded an abundant fauna. All divisions of the Detroit River series contain Devonian faunal elements. This is most marked in the Am- herstburg dolomite, and probably least in the Lucas dolomite. The Amherst- burg dolomite is typically developed in the bottom of Detroit River at Amherst- burg, Ontario, and within the last seven or eight years this has been excellently exposed in the dry cut of the Livingston Channel. Near the north end of this cut the rocks are very fossiliferous and nearly all of the abundant forms are not only of marked Devonian aspect, but resemble decidedly the Onondaga fauna. Some of the most striking resemblances are to be found among the species of Cladopora, Cystiphyllum, Favosites, Hederella, Romingeria, Synapto- phyllum, Syringopora, Crania, Meristella, Pentamerella, Productella, Reticu- laria, Rhipidomella, Schizophoria, Spirifer, Stropheodonta, Conocardium, Mo- diomorpha, Paracyclas, Schizodus, Bellerophon, Callonema, Eotomaria, Loxo- nema, Platyceras, Tentaculites, Ryticeras, Dawsonoceras, Proetus, etcetera. Such an aggregation of genera would alone be sufficient to demand comparison with the Onondaga fauna, but in many cases even the similarity of the species is so close as to have caused their identification with the Onondaga forms. Certainly one can have no quarrel with the man who insists that this fauna must be placed within the Devonian system. It is, in fact, a Devonian fauna. But the massive layers of brown dolomite containing this fauna are overlain, toward the south end of the cut, by similar beds carrying the Lucas fauna. A close study of this latter fauna, which is the one that has usually been con- sidered to have especially strong Silurian affinities, shows that it is different from those to which it has been compared, and that the majority of its species, that have been considered Silurian, were really described from the Lucas dolomite of Michigan or from the Ohio outcrops of this same formation ; 34 per cent of the species listed by Grabau and Sherzer 4 are also found in undis- puted Silurian deposits ; 9 per cent occur in typical lower Devonian, and 57 per cent are apparently not known outside of the Detroit River series. While the Lucas fauna at first seems impossible as a Devonian aggregation, this latter consideration decidedly minimizes the relationship to other known Si- lurian faunas. In northwestern Ohio the Onondaga (Columbus) limestone rests uncon- formably on the Lucas dolomite, but at Amherstburg and at the Sibley quarry, nearly straight across the river in Michigan, it rests on the Anderdon lime- stone. The dip of the rocks at the Amherstburg Stone Company's quarry is to the west-southwest, although well records show that it evidently is reversed at no great distance. A similar dip occurs at the Sibley quarry across the river. In the dry cut of the Livingston Channel the dip is south at the rate of about 100 feet per mile, thus seeming to indicate the rising axis of an anti- cline of which the limbs slope away to east and west. This has led some men to the belief that the Anderdon belongs immediately under the Onondaga, as it has usually been found in surface outcrop. Also very serious doubt exists in the minds of some as to whether there is a stratigraphic break or an erosion surface at the top of the Anderdon limestone or between the Onondaga and * Mich. Geol. and Biol. Survey, Pub. 2, Geol. ser. 1, 1910, pp. 211-213. 74 PROCEEDINGS OF THE WASHINGTON MEETING the Detroit River series. The question involved is not confined to the Detroit River region alone, but is contingent on observed conditions over the whole southwestern part of Ontario, as well as much of Ohio, and which conditions are undoubtedly similar to those in other adjoining States to the west. Near the eastern end of Lake Erie the relation of the Onondaga to the Silurian is one of unconformity (disconformity). This is well illustrated in the outcrops at Buffalo and to the westward in Ontario. There are, however, two distinct erosion periods represented at or near the base of the Onondaga. One of these preceded and the other followed the Oriskany sandstone. 5 It is probable that it was the latter of these that scattered the sands of Oriskany origin over a much wider region than that originally covered by the formation itself. This is indicated by the fact that none of the sandy remnants at the base of the Onondaga, west of North Cayuga township, in Ontario, carry even the slightest trace of Oriskany fossils. At most places a well developed basal conglomerate may be found in the lowest Onondaga beds, but occasionally it is rather im- perfectly formed or sometimes entirely wanting. Even in such cases, however, not one of the Ontario contacts, and few, if any, of those in Ohio thus far examined, is without abundant evidence of the erosion period that intervened between the formations in contact. Near Springvale this is abundantly shown by the reworked beds of Oriskany, that now contain an Onondaga fauna, and the widened cracks in, the pre-Oriskany dolomites, which are now filled with sand to a depth of several feet below the contact. At Goderich, Ontario, the basal conglomerate of the Onondaga limestone is especially well developed. Pebbles of the Upper Monroe as large as a man's fist are mingled with Onondaga corals, brachiopods, trilobites, etcetera, in an arenaceous limestone which rests on an uneven surface of Monroe. In the early days of the Goderich salt industry Mr. Attrill drilled a test well near the Lake Huron shore, across the Maitland River from Goderich. In reporting on the results of this experiment, Dr. T. Sterry Hunt says : "We now come to the considera- tion of an unexpected result of the examination of the cores from the Goderich boring, namely, the occurrence beneath 27S feet of beds, chiefly dolomite, which, according to the Geological Survey, underlie the Oorniferous (Onon- daga) limestone of the region, of not less than 276 feet, chiefly of gray, non- magnesian. coralline limestone, abounding in chert and seeming like a repeti- tion of the Oorniferous (Onondaga). Beneath this lower fossiliferous lime- stone, it will be noted, are dolomites with gypsum, succeeded by variegated marls, with an aggregate thickness of not less than :>64 feet before reaching the saliferous strata, which latter have been penetrated 520 feet without reach- ing the underlying Guelph formation. Prof. James Hall, who has kindly ex- amined such specimens of the corals as I have obtained from the limestone, recognizes in them two species of Favositcs, Favosites ivinchelli and Favosites emmonsi, together with a section of Accrvularia <>r Dipfoyphyllum-" e This fos- siliferous horizon is undoubtedly a part of the Detroit River series and very probably includes the Amherstburg dolomite and the Anderdon. as these beds outcrop about 35 miles farther north. The interesting point here is that it lies 278 feet below the base of the Onondaga, and that this latter has a well 5 Bull. Geol. Soc. Am., vol. 23, 1912, p. 373 ; also Geol. Survey Canada, Memoir 34, 1915, p. 60 and pi. iii. 8 Geol. Survey of Canada, Rept. Prog, for 1876-1S77 (187S), p. 242. sis ►9 O Kg i H Si > > g s W CO i-3 W c! P o 1-3 > 3* 1" w r H P> n CD w OH O > ■A X o a > H RELATIVE AGE OP DETROIT RIVER SERIES 75 developed basal conglomerate in which pebbles of the Detroit River series are mingled with sand and Onondaga fossils and which rests on an uneven surface of Detroit River series. Certainly there can be no doubt but that at this place the time interval between the fossiliferous Detroit River series and the over- lying Onondaga was very long. The most important consideration, however, is the condition at Amherstburg, since it is there that doubt has been expressed regarding the occurrence of an extensive unconformity (disconformity) at the base of the Onondaga. At Amherstburg the development of the basal conglomerate is weak; in fact, various geologists to whom specimens from this horizon were submitted ex- pressed grave doubt as to the real conglomeratic nature of the deposit, although admitting the intermingling of the Anderdon and Onondaga limestones at the contact. This basal layer of the Onondaga is composed of more or less angular fragments of the compact drab Anderdon intermingled with the rather porous brown magnesian Onondaga, and in which there is sometimes so much sand that a thin layer might be called a real sandstone. In addition to the unevenness (see plate 7, figure 1), the upper surface of the Auderdon is rough and uneven. This roughness is attributable to differential weathering, since recently weathered surfaces of the Anderdon show the same pitted surface, although the rock is fresh at a small fraction of an inch below the surface. In some of these irregularities considerable accumulations of sand occur and fragments of the Onondaga often cling to these irregularities after the over- lying layer has been removed. The Anderdon is affected by a system of joints which do not pass upward into the Onondaga. Some of these joints have been widened by solution to three or more inches before the Onondaga was de- posited, and then into these cracks the Onondaga muds, intermingled with sand, filtered as the sea advanced over the region (see plates 7, 8, 9). In some cases this sand has penetrated several feet below the contact and may now be found in cavities among the Anderdon fossils. The upper surface of the Anderdon is often pretty well covered with rather large, low-spired gas- tropods and somewhat similar cephalopods (see plate 9). These are almost always of the brownish gray Onondaga limestone, which has led some one to suggest that the underlying mud must have been soft when the Onondaga sea advanced over it, and at which time these gastropods and cephalopods were pressed into this soft mud. Unfortunately these fossils are poorly pre- served and have not been satisfactorily determined. Grabau and Sherzer say that the gastropod is probably Trochonema ovoides, 7 but they do not even mention the cephalopod. Possibly it is the Trochoceras anderdonense which they have described. The indications are that these gastropods and cepha- lopods were already fossil when the Onondaga sea advanced over the region ; in fact, they were molds of the exterior and interior of the shells into which the Onondaga mud was pressed. Frequently it is possible to find casts of the shelly portion made up of the Onondaga material, which contrasts strongly with the other, while the internal mold of the Anderdon material is still retained and forms a perfect core for the fossil. Many of the infillings of these gastropod and cephalopod molds are in large part sand. One or two somewhat similar fossils were found in the basal Onondaga above the contact, but they were so poorly preserved that it was impossible to make out whether 7 Mich. Geol. and Biol. Survey, Pub. 2, Geol. ser. 1, 1909, p. 44. 76 PROCEEDINGS OP THE WASHINGTON MEETING they were in reality the same forms. These may have been internal molds loosened from the Anderdon and incorporated into the Onondaga at the time the latter was being deposited. There is thus an accumulation of positive evidence demonstrating the exist- ence of a period of erosion of long duration at the basal contact of the Onondaga in the Amherstburg quarry, and very similar evidences may be found on the Michigan side of the river. It is, of course, impossible to say positively that the sand at the contact represents the Oriskany in this region. remote from any known deposits of that formation, or that it is even material derived from the erosion of an Oriskany deposit, as is certainly the case farther northeast in Ontario. It is equally possible that the sand at Amherstburg was derived from outcrops of the Sylvania. subjected to erosion in pre-Onon- daga time, since the Onondaga (Dundee) limestone is in contact with the Sylvania sandstone at the National Silica Company's quarry. 7 miles north- west of Monroe. Michigan/' and hence may have a similar relation at other near-by localities. It should be pointed out also that the Onondaga of extreme southwestern Ontario, like the Columbus limestone of northern Ohio, probably does not represent the whole of the formation as developed in western New York. In Ontario, immediately across the Niagara River from Buffalo, where the Onondaga limestone is probably the exact equivalent of the same deposit in New York, the lower layers are characterized by the relative absence of corals and the abundance of brachiopods. Some of the most characteristic fossils of this horizon are Amphigenia elongata, Anophia nucleate, Anoplotheca Camilla, Gentronella glansfagea, Ghonetes hemisphericus, Cypricardinia in- denta, Platyceras dentalium, and numerous others that are abundant at higher horizons. The beds carrying these species have been traced across the prov- ince and are last found near the shore of Lake Huron to the south of Port Elgin. These species are not found in the Onondaga at Goderich or at Am- herstburg; neither are they found in the outcrops on the islands of Lake Erie and at Marblehead. The probability is that the beds which should contain them were never deposited in those regions, and that the lowest Onondaga is wanting. Some of these species reappear in the Columbus limestone of central Ohio, where the Onondaga fauna is again more like that of western New York. It. is therefore evident that the time interval represented by tbe uncon- formity (disconformity) between the Anderdon limestone and the Onondaga was a long one. If we may trust the record of tbe Goderich well, as described by Hunt, and the excellent section of the Oakwood salt shaft, tbe stratigraphic order as given by Sherzer and Grabau cannot be disputed. The period of erosion at Amherstburg therefore removed all the Lucas and Amherstburg dolomites and lasted through as much of the Onondaga as is represented by the lower zone of that formation at the eastern end of Lake Erie. Tbe par- ticular division of the Detroit River series which shows most marked Middle Devonian faunal characters therefore preceded its derivative fauna, tbe Onon- daga, by the Lucas dolomite interval and this long erosion period. If tbe arenaceous material at the base of the Onondaga at Amherstburg and near-by localities in Michigan represents the Oriskany horizon, as believed by Sherzer 8 W. H. Sherzer and A. W. Grabau: Geol. and Biol. Survey Michigan', Pub. 2, Geol. •r. 1, 1009 (1910), p. 40. BULL. GEOL. SOC. AM. VOL. 27, 1915. PL. 9 f \4 Figure 1. — The Surface of the Anderdox Limestone, showing Molds a.\d Joints filled with Onondaga Mud V *' ?. >> , «. Figure 2. — Utper Surface of the Anderdon Li.mi:stoxe, showing Onondaga Casts in the Anderdon Molds FOSSILIFEROUS SURFACES OF ANDERDON AT AMHERSTBURG, ONTARIO ' RELATIVE AGE OF DETROIT RIVER SERIES 77 and Grabau, 9 the Amherstburg dolomite can not very well be considered younger than Helderbergian. But since the basal Onondaga at Amherstburg does not carry the oldest fauna belonging to that formation, there is still room for doubt that the arenaceous contact is that representing the Oriskany farther to the east in Ontario and New York. As is well known and as already pointed out above, the Oriskany sandstone itself rests unconformably on the Silurian (Cobbleskill and Rondout), at the eastern end of Lake Erie. It may be that the unconformity (disconformity) at the base of the Oriskany in western New York represents the one occurring at the base of the Detroit River series, and that the unconformity (discon- formity) at the top of the Oriskany is the one so prominent at the base of the Onondaga in Ohio, Michigan, and extreme southwestern Ontario. If this be the case, these two unconformities run together at various places in Ontario near the eastern end of Lake Erie, but diverge rapidly to the westward from Springvale. There is thus represented an unknown interval during which it is probable the Detroit River series was deposited ; for to maintain that such a fauna as that found in the Amherstburg dolomite is Silurian is more im- possible than to find a place for it among the recognized Devonian formations. While the fauna of the Detroit River series is not altogether unlike that of the Helderbergian, it differs so markedly from it that it can hardly have lived in that sea which spread westward over New York and even into Illinois during Lower Devonian. The occurrence of some of these same fossils in the dolomites of Alberta, as shown by a small collection from the headwaters of the north fork of the Saskatchewan River, 10 suggests that there may have been another embayment from the north or northwest during early Devonian with a very different fauna from that found in the Helderbergian of the At- lantic embayment, although in part contemporaneous with it. The fact that a fauna similar to that of the Detroit River series, especially in its Mollusca, and to a less extent in the Anthozoa and Brachiopoda, occurs in the lowest Devonian of the Ural Mountain region of Russia 11 lends some support to this suggestion. Even in the Idiostroma limestone of the Cedar Valley of Iowa there is a suggestion of the recurrence, at a much later date, of the coral and hydrozoan reefs of the Anderdon. Presented in abstract extemporaneously. Discussion Dr. A. C. Lane: Over a large area there is no trouble in drawing the line between Devonian and Silurian, as there is such an unconformity that the Onondaga (Dundee) comes almost directly, separated only by the Oriskany sandstone from the Salina or Lower Monroe. But near Detroit River we find that, while there remains an unconformity, or rather disconformity, under the Dundee, the Oriskany seems also to be almost or quite continuous as a trans- gression sandstone with the Sylvania sandstone. If we turn to Schuchert's 9 Mich. Geol. and Biol. Survey, Pub. 2, Geol. ser. 1, 1909 (1910), p. 46. 10 A. W. Grabau and W. H. Sherzer : Mich. Geol. and Biol. Survey, Pub. 2, Geol. ser. 1, 1909 (1910), pp. 102 and 116. ii Th. Tschernyschew : Memoires du Comite" Geologique, vols, iii, 1885, and Iv, 1893. Von N. Lebedew : Idem., vol. xvii, 1902, tables opp. p. 132. 78 PROCEEDINGS OF THE WASHINGTON MEETING curves we see that between the marked -depression of the middle of the (Upper) Silurian and the Devonian there was a long period of relatively low sealevel or high stand of the continent, not due to any disturbance in Michigan, but per- haps due to disturbances in the other hemisphere. The question is whether the base of the Devonian shall be drawn at the beginning or the end of this time of uplift. If we assume, as seems likely, that the beginning is the best line, the most sharply marked, and the one most nearly coeval throughout the world, then the Detroit River series would be Devonian. We have, however, an alternation of a fauna so Devonian that it was at first taken for Hamilton (Traverse) and then a recurrence of Silurian fauna. But this Silurian fauna is of a local peculiar type — that associated with brines — that may easily be assumed to have lingered on in some Dead Sea or Aral Sea. The real difficulty is that in New York we have a Lower Devonian fauna of a quite different type. We must either assume these to have formed during the unconformity, so well described by Stauffer, or assume that New York and Michigan were in different provinces for a length of time that seems unlikely. But the division line between Devonian and Silurian must depend on dias- trophic studies outside of Michigan. RECESSION OF NIAGARA FALLS REMEASURED IN 1311, BY J. W. SPENCER {Abstract) In October, 1914, just ten years after my previous survey, which had been the fifth (the fourth was that of Kibbe, in 1890), I remeasured the crest-line of the main cataract of Niagara. The principal changes were not at. but adja- cent to, the apex. Here had been a narrow Y-shaped incision in the upper strata only, which has widened to one of U-shape 50 feet broad. To the west blocks of rock 400 feet long and from zero to 55 feet wide had fallen, thus straightening the line. The fallen area here and elsewhere aggregated about two-thirds of an acre, corresponding to a mean recession for the full width of the falls of scarcely 2.5 feet a year. The diversion from the river had been more or less compensated by the late prevailing high water. This reduces the mean annual rate Of recession during 72 years to 4 feet a year, compared with 1.2 feet during the previous 02 years, but adds 5 per cent to the computed age of the falls. The eastern end of the great cataract at the time of Hennepin (1678) has been investigated, the location of the western end having been previously found. Thus it appears that the mean rate of recession during 236 years was approximately 3.75 feet a year. This factor would increase the calculated age of the fall by 10 per cent, which figure still comes within the limit originally provided for (39.000 ± 4,000 years), but on the side of increased age. Additional soundings in the upper part of the gorge were also made. In no case did I find depth of 100 feet, in contrast with those of 186 to 192 feet a short distance below. These confirm the evidence of a late reduction in the height of the falls, as previously described, and also mentioned by Kalm in 1750. The reduction in height was due to the falling of the gorge walls at the Whirlpool Rapids, thereby damming and raising the river level above them. I made another sounding (of 210 feet) near that of 183 feet, previously de- ABSTRACTS AND DISCUSSIONS OF PAPERS 79 scribed, in the channel just beyond the end of the gorge. This shows that the level in Lake Ontario was, after the birth of the falls, even lower than I had previously announced. These are new facts leading to further precision, besides confirming earlier results. Presented in abstract extemporaneously. TERRESTRIAL STABILITY OF THE GREAT LAKE REGION BY J. W. SPENCER (Abstract) ■ Among the results obtained by studying the lower lake terraces is one relat- ing to the cessation of earth-movements. The terraces in question are those most strongly developed at or near the mouths of tributary streams, recurring all the way from the head of the lake to below the outlet of Lake Ontario, at 12 to 20 feet and 2 to 5 feet above its level. In them no deformation is deter- minable, in contrast with the differential movement of 540 feet between the head of the lake and Parishville, New York, as seen in the Iroquois beach, with tilting varying from 2 to 6 feet per mile. Having previously proved from the daily fluctuations of lake levels that there has been absolutely no earth- movement since 1854, these terrace features show that the cessation dates back a long time. The movements were in operation after the diversion of the Huron drainage to that of Lake Erie, which I have placed at 3,500 to 4,000 years ago. At present this would give near the date for their cessation. Presented in abstract extemporaneously. SCOUR OF THE SAINT LAWRENCE RIVER AND LOWERING OF LAKE ONTARIO BY J. W. SPENCER ( Abstract) I am not aware of previous investigations on this problem. When the waters of the Ontario basin were subsiding from the earlier glacial lake, the Saint Lawrence River channel did not come into existence until they fell to a level of not more than 20 feet above the present stage. This figure represents the total lowering of the lake due to the river scour acting on its general bed of drift. At the upper rapids the river has exposed very little rock. Thus at the first, or Gallops Rapids, the river flows over beds of boulders in two of its branches, while in the third the rock has been channeled for only a quarter of a mile (in Ordovician strata). These features show the relative youthfulness of the modern Saint Lawrence River. The present shoreline of the lake was examined for evidence of deformation, but neither in it nor the lower terraces could such be found. To one who had primarily observed the coast of the lake at Hamilton and Toronto, where great beaches occur, he would be surprised to find how wide- spread has been the cutting away of the shores or the small development of the beach. It is much less developed than the Iroquois. Tndeed, the interven- VII— Bull. Gbol. Soc. Am., Vol. 27, 1915 80 PROCEEDINGS OP THE "WASHINGTON MEETING ing terraces do nut suggest such long pauses as were required for the building of the Iroquois beach. So far no time measurement is of any value., The most important problem is the date when the waters fell below the Iroquois beach, as this would most nearly coincide with the last clays of the Glacial period. But these new data show the newness of both the Saint Lawrence and the modern shores of Lake Ontario. Presented in abstract extemporaneously. PLEISTOCENE DRAINAGE CHANGES IN WESTERN NORTH DAKOTA BY ARTHUR G. LEONARD {Abstract) The continental ice-sheet produced important drainage changes in western North Dakota. Its effects are particularly well shown in the case of the Mis- souri, Yellowstone, and Little Missouri rivers, since all these streams were forced to seek new channels. The southerly course of the Missouri River below old Fort Stevenson has been attributed to the later or Wisconsin ice-sheet, but evidence is presented that the valley is preglacial. This evidence is based on the presence of glacial boulders and drift on the valley bottom and at many points on a terrace repre- senting a former floodplain of the Missouri. The river must have flowed in its broad, terraced valley at the time of the earlier ice-invasion, and on the floor of this valley the glacier deposited boulders and till. When the ice-sheet in- vaded the region, it blocked the valleys of both the Missouri and Yellowstone rivers, and also the preglacial valley of the Little Missouri, forcing these streams to seek new channels. Lakes were formed in the valleys of the Little Missouri and Yellowstone, rivers, the waters rising until they overflowed the divide to the Knife River. The combined waters of the three rivers flowed east across Dunn County and southeast across Morton County to the mouth of the Cannon Ball River. The length of this Pleistocene valley of the Yellow- stone and Missouri rivers, which extends from the head of the Knife to the mouth of the Cannon Ball and crosses the divides between the Knife and Heart rivers and that between the Heart and Cannon Ball, is 155 miles. The lower 50 miles of the Yellowstone Valley was blocked with ice during the Glacial period, and the waters flowed east to the valley of the Little Missouri, forming at least two broad, flat-bottomed valleys connecting these streams. One of these valleys, 28 miles long, is now occupied in part by Bennic Pierre Creek, a tributary of the Yellowstone. The Little Missouri was also forced out of its preglacial valley, which is now occupied by Cherry and Tobacco Garden creeks. It probably flowed for a time through the Pleistocene valley of the Missouri and Yellowstone rivers, but later took an easterly course and formed its present postglacial valley, which extends from the mouth of Bowling Creek to the Missouri River — a dis- tance of 100 miles. Evidence is given that this lower valley of the Little Mis- souri is much younger than the portion above the mouth of Bowling Creek. Read by title in the absence of the author. ABSTRACTS AND DISCUSSIONS OF PAPERS 81 LANDSLIPS AND LAMINATED LAKE GLAYS IN THE BASIN OF LAKE BASCOM BY FRANK B. TAYLOR (Abstract) Lake Bascom was a sprawling glacial lake which filled the valley of Hoosick River and its branches in northwestern Massachusetts, southwestern Vermont, and adjacent parts of New York. The lake was 500 feet deep near Williams- town and slightly deeper toward Pownal. Many landslips have occurred around the sides of the main deep part of the lake and a few in ravines which held narrow bays. Laminated pebbleless lake clay and silt covers a considerable part of the lake floor around Williamstown and eastward toward North Adams, •and it also occurs between North Adams and Briggsville and northward and at Petersburg and near North Pownal. During some of the later, lower stages of the lake, pebbleless clay and silt were deposited near Hoosick, around Hoosick Falls and North Hoosick and near North Bennington. Other laminated clays on the Owl Kill and on the Hoosick below Eagle Bridge are not related to landslips. At its highest level Lake Bascom stood at an altitude of 1,125 or 1,130 feet above sealevel. With three or four exceptions, all the landslips observed in this region occur in the basin of Lake Bascom at some distance beloAV its highest level. Some of the largest slips are very old. surely Pleistocene in age. In all probability they occurred soon after the fall of the lake waters. They are now represented by a series of steplike benches at certain places on the hillsides. Other slips are more recent and some are still in active movement. In one place they are just beginning, the bluff back of the edge of a previous slip being riven by deep cracks. Nearly all of these landslips are related to underlying beds of laminated pebbleless lake clay and silt. The slips generally occurred on steep slopes where a stream was cutting at the bottom and where the underlying beds at or above the stream level were lake clay and silt. Some, however, are not related to any stream. The weakness of these beds, increased by softening in seasons of prolonged rain, caused a yielding and a slipping down of the heavy overlying masses. In some slips the laminated beds are partly exposed in ver- tical sections in the bluff at the back of the slipped mass ; in others the clay beds are exposed in the banks or bed of the stream, where they are generally distorted. A few landslips of a different character, perhaps more appropriately called landslides, occurred recently (August 20, 1901) on the east face of Mount Greylock. These were much smaller masses than some of the slips in Lake Bascom, but the amount of their descent was much greater, being in one case 1,500 feet. These slides occurred after a prolonged wet period and have no relation to lake clays. Presented in abstract extemporaneously. Discussion Mr. George C. Martin stated that Lake Bascom was evidently very similar to some of the marginal lakes on the borders of the existing Alaskan piedmont 82 PROCEEDINGS OP THE WASHINGTON MEETING glaciers. .These lakes are not only filled with icehergs, but in one case 1 a lake is known to contain a large arm of the glacier, which floats on the surface of the lake and forms the larger part of its area. The occurrence of till over- lying the clays in the former bed of Lake Bascom may possibly be explained as the residue from the melting of a large amount of heavily debris-laden glacial ice that floated on the surface of the lake and that was left stranded on the lacustrine deposits when the lake was drained. The presence of many bergs and possibly of a floating glacial arm in Lake Bascom may also explain in part the poor development of beaches. Further remarks were made by Messrs. M. B. Baker and H. F. Cleland, with reply by the author. TYPES OF LOESS IN THE MISSISSIPPI VALLEY BY B. SHIMEK (Abstract) The gray loess and two types of yellow loess of the Upper Mississippi Valley and the red and yellow loesses of the South are discussed with reference to geographical distribution, differences in structure, color, and fossils, and the significance of these differences. The conclusion is drawn that these types indicate in part differences in time of deposition and in part differences in source of materials. Incidental references are made to deposits which resemble loess and have been so classed. Presented by title in the absence of the author. Society adjourned at 5.20 o'clock p. m. PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS At 8 o'clock p. m., at the Cosmos Club, Prof. A. P. Coleman delivered his address as retiring President, his topic being DRY LAND IN GEOLOGY Published as pages 175-192 of this volume. The address Avas followed by the complimentary smoker given in honor of the Geological Society of America and the Paleoiitological Society by the local members of the former organization. The address of the Presi- dent was the most largely attended session of the meeting, about 300 persons being present. 1 G. C. Martin : Geology and mineral resources of the Controller Bay region, Alaska. U. S. Geol. Survey, Bull. 335, 1908, pp. 47-48, pi. via, abstracts and discussions op papers bs Session of Thursday, December 30 The Society convened at 9.15 o'clock a. m., with President Coleman in the chair. The Society proceeded immediately to the consideration of scientific papers. titles and abstracts op papers presented before tpie morning session and discussions thereon stages in the geologic history of porto rico BY CHESTER A. KEEDS (Abstract) In March, 1915, Prof. C. P. Berkey in his report, "Geological Reconnoissance of Porto Rico," Annals New York Academy of Sciences, stated that an early Tertiary peneplain separated an "older" from a "younger" series of formations in Porto Rico. Observations made in the field during the following June and July suggest that more recent erosion cycles and periods of uplift and subsi- dence are also in evidence, and that they are responsible, for the most part, for the present configuration of the island. The positive and negative oscilla- tions of the strand-line were induced in all probability by diastrophic move- ments within the island mass and adjacent sea-floor. Previous to the early Tertiary peneplanation beds of shale, limestone, con- glomerate, and volcanic rocks were intruded by igneous masses, producing a basal complex of folded and faulted strata and igneous intrusions. Following this peneplanation no igneous intrusion or ejectments have occurred, for none were observed in the basal lignitic shales and overlying chalky and cross- bedded limestones of the younger series. Folding and faulting are, however, in evidence in certain places in the beds of the "younger" series. Evidences of marine transgression are to be seen in the marginal coastal plains and the wave-cut escarpments. Suggestions of an earlier transgression are to be seen in the even-crested cliffs and headlands on certain coasts and the isolated hills, ridges, and plateaus of near-by tracts. This older plain is typically developed in the district to the south and west of Tauco. While successive transgressions and recessions of the sea were affecting the coastal and marginal tracts, subaerial denudation was busily sculpturing the present mature topographic features of the interior out of the exposed portion of the older warped peneplain and accompanying monadnocks. Features which indicate that stream erosion has been varied are to be found in the abandoned erosion levels in valley walls and at water gaps on rivers like the Descalabrado and the Jacaguas. At one stage the lower courses of these rivers were filled with sand and gravel. At the present time these sediments are being eroded and at some points the stream bed was observed to be 50 to 60 feet below the base of the gravel deposits. The stages in the geologic history of Porto Rico were varied in length and kind of work performed. 84 PROCEEDINGS OF THE WASHINGTON MEETING Approximately 10,000 fossil specimens were obtained from the "older" and "younger" series of formations. In certain localities algae, foraminifera, and corals were collected from the limestone members in the "older" series. They suggest Cretaceous age. The larger portion of the collection, however, was STAGE ELEVATION EROSION SUBSIDENCE DEPOSIT/ON COMMENTS xrv Delta and Coastal Terraces Coastal Barriers, Dune Sand, San Juan Formation River Flood Plains Present xm Slight Uplift Rejuvenescence of Rivers Partial Withdrawal of Sea from Platform xu Alluvial and Coastal Conglomerates, Sands and Shales XT Marginal Transgression of the Sea 5? 'Cycle of Erosion incomplete X Inauguration of present Upland Dissection & Incept- ion of present River Valleys IX Uplift Tilting Sedimentary Series, Po/ding&fau/fing WL Development of Peneplain 2 1 Cycle of Erosion incomplete w Uplift Tilting Sedimentarv Ser/es.roldingS faulting w Local Deposition of green Shales and Limestones Long Duration V Subsidence affecting greater Portion of Island Unconformity between 'o/der'S 'younger Series I st Cycle of Erosion w Development of Peneplain Deposition beyond Edge of present P/at- 9 'form m Uplift Injected Porphyries, etc affecting both Igneous & Sedimentarv Series R Local Deposition of Conglomer- ates, black Shales, interbedded Tuffs and Breccias. and Lime- stones on submeroed P/altorm Long Duration i Initial Volcanic Cones Figure 1. Chester A Reeds. December 1915 -Stages in the geologic History of Porto Rico gathered from the lignitic shales and white limestone of the "younger" series. The sea-urchins collected from these beds indicate late Eocene or early Oligo- cene age. It would be premature to assign ages to the various formations and stages in the geologic history of Porto Rico before this large collection of fossils has been worked up. Presented in abstract extemporaneously. Discussion Mr. Edwin T. Hodge : The "older series" in Porto Rico has long been looked on as non-fossiliferous, and therefore of undeterminate age. East summer, during my investigation in the south central portion of the island, I was fortu- nate enough to find some fragmentary fossils, which, it is true, do not consti- tute a whole flora or fauna, yet are sufficient to establish with certainty the following statements : At the crest of the Sierra Oayey, the rocks of which lie near the base of the series, I found the calises of two OladopJiyllia furcifcra characteristic of the ABSTRACTS AND DISCUSSIONS OF PAPERS 85 Edwards of the Gulf. An adjacent bed of hematite contained some fossil leaves. These I have submitted to Doctor Berry and Doctor Knowlton, who tell me that while they are not critical, yet they tend to substantiate the evi- dence of the corals. A few miles farther south and higher in the stratigraphic series, as worked out by purely structural methods, I found the lower portion of a Venaricardia alticosta index for the Chickasawan and Claibornian of the Gulf. The Cretaceous and Eocene strata in which these fossils were found have been folded to high angles — as much as 90° in places — and peneplained. The evidence of this peneplanation is decisive. It is shown by the even heights and flat crests of the mountains, the discordant relation existing between the drainage and the structure, which shows superimposition, and by the presence of deep residual soils. On this peneplain was laid down the "later limestones." From fossils col- lected in Porto Rico by Doctor Berkey and studied by Miss O'Connell, we know these to be of Oligocene age. Thus in Porto Rico we have positive proof that the Eocene is separated from the Oligocene by a period of time during which there was uplift and intense folding, followed by long erosion. This is entirely a new fact to science and throws light on the small thickness and extent of the Oligocene, both in the eastern United States and Porto Rico. It follows that the Oligo- cene present is probably very late Oligocene. Doctor Reeds replied that as the collection was very large nothing definite could be said at present regarding the age of the beds. CRETACEOUS OF ALBERTA, CANADA BY JOSEPH H. SINCLAIR 1 (Abstract) Recent explorations by the author in the foothills of southern Alberta, Canada, have resulted in the identification of a very complete Benton fauna and accurate measurements of 4,500 feet of Cretaceous sediments. The application of the Missouri River succession of Cretaceous rocks to the foothill district is questioned in several horizons, and Stebinger is borne out in his prophecy that the Clagett does not exist there as a lithologic unit. The presence of the Bearpaw is also uncertain, although it may exist as a thin, brackish-water formation containing coal seams. The adoption of the name "Dakota" for a thick formation lying between the Kootanie and the Benton is questioned on the ground that a not sufficiently great variation exists between the few specimens found in it by Cairnes and the flora of the Kootanie formation. While the adoption of the section of the Missouri by Dawson may appear correct farther east in the Great Plains, it appears that continental conditions have pinched out certain marine phases of the eastern section, in the foothills of Alberta. The unsatisfactory line of demarcation between the Cretaceous and the Tertiary is also shown. Certainly no lithologic break is seen and the 1 Introduced by Charles P. Berkey and A. W. Grabau. 86 PROCEEDINGS OP THE WASHINGTON MEETING lack of fossils makes a paleontological differentiation difficult. The total thick- ness of the Cretaceous appears to be 7,000 feet. Presented in abstract extemporaneously. SEDIMENTARY SUCCESSION IN SOUTHERN NEW MEXICO BY N. H. DARTON (Abstract) In connection with the study of the Red Beds and associated strata in New Mexico many stratigraphic data have been obtained of the entire Paleozoic and Mesozoic succession. The distribution and local variations of the forma- tions present some novel features which throw light on the geologic history of the region. Especially notable are the overlap relations of the formations of Carboniferous age, particularly the Pennsylvanian division, which overlaps Cambrian, Ordovician, Silurian, Devonian, and Mississippian rocks. The rela- tions of the Red Beds of Permo-Pennsylvanian and Triassic age were studied in detail. Considerable new evidence was also obtained on the distribution of the Comanche group and overlying formations of Cretaceous age. Bead by title in the absence of the author. DIVISIONS AND CORRELATIONS OF THE DUNKARD SERIES OF OHIO * BY CLINTON K. STATJFFEK The youngest Paleozoic deposits in Ohio have long been known as the Upper Barren Coal Measures and more recently as the Dunkard .series. These rocks are quite extensively developed in adjacent States to the east and have doubt- less been removed by erosion over wide areas in which no trace of them now remains. It is only the comparatively thin western edge of the Dunkard that extends into Ohio and covers a rather narrow strip along the Ohio River from Jefferson to Meigs county. At the northern end of the Ohio portion of the Dunkard basin there is ho appreciable break between the Monongahela and the overlying Dunkard series. From the stratigraphic relations the basal plant beds (Cassville) ought therefore to continue the same flora that flour- ished during the formation of the preceding Waynesburg coal bed, but appar- ently such is not the case. Over the southern half of the basin, however, the Waynesburg sandstone usually rests directly on the Monongahela with marked unconformity, the Cassville, the Waynesburg coal, and a portion of the under- lying shales usually being absent. Unconformities in a series of rocks, such as the Dunkard, probably do not have any very great significance ; in fact, they occur at several horizons within the series ; but the development of the coarse massive Waynesburg sandstone, often a true conglomerate, over much of the unconformity between Monongahela and Dunkard may be indicative of changed conditions. The Dunkard series of Ohio may be divided, as in Pennsylvania and West Virginia, into the Washington and the Greene formations. The former begins * Published with the permission of the State Geologist of Ohio. DIVISIONS AND CORRELATIONS OF DUNKARD SERIES 87 with the shales above the Waynesburg coal and ends with the Upper Washing- ton limestone ; the latter includes the remainder of the series. This division of the Dunkard series was originally suggested by J. J. Stevenson, 1 although, according to his definition, the Waynesburg sandstone and the underlying plant shales are included with the Monongahela series. The usage herein suggested for Ohio has been approved and used by the United States Geological Survey in the various Pennsylvania folios. 2 Each of the so-called Dunkard formations is made up of a great number of more or less distinct divisions, which are often traceable over very considerable areas and most of which have been given definite locality names by the Pennsylvania and West Virginia Geological Surveys. Many of these can be recognized in Ohio and form the basis of such stratigraphic correlations, as is possible between the various parts of the Dunkard basin. This division of the Dunkard into two formations is very arbitrary, as the stratigraphical or even the lithological break at the horizon used is not pronounced. It does, however, mark the highest level at which marine or brackish-water fossils were found and probably represents the ap- proximate close of the oscillations between land and marine conditions, and introduces the purely land and fresh-water deposits in the Dunkard basin. The Washington formation varies in thickness from 230 feet in Belmont County to more than 300 feet in Washington County, while to the south of Marietta, where the massive sandstones are well developed, this division of the Dunkard includes 2S6 feet above the Washington coal, hence is probably at least 3S6 feet in thickness. The Greene formation reaches a maximum thickness of about 250 feet, although it is usually much thinner and often is a mere capping to the higher hills. Because of its limited distribution and its position in the hills, its character is less perfectly known than is that of the lower formation. Much of the topography of the region which it occupies consists of quite gentle slopes, which are covered with a deep soil and often well sodded. From Marietta southward the dividing line between the Washington and Greene formations is hard to trace because of the absence of the Washington limestones, but it may still be continued by use of the Jollytown coal horizon or the base of the Jollytown sandstone, which probably marks the break be- tween the two divisions. This sandstone stratum may be picked up at various places to the south of Marietta and has occasionally been quarried for grind- stones. A large part of the Dunkard of Ohio is to be classed as "Red Beds," although the Monongahela series and even the Conemaugh are not without their red shales, which in the Monongahela are often so like those of the Dunkard as to make them easily confused if it were not for other well defined strata asso- ciated therewith. There are but few really red sandstones, and those are usually only coated red on the outside or weathered surface, in the Ohio Dunkard. The red is thus almost confined to the shales. In the northern part of the Dunkard covered area the red beds are to be found chiefly in the Greene formation, but to the southward most of the shale in the whole series is red. In the main, these shales, sandstones, limestones, and beds of coal represent land and swamp or fresh-water deposits, but the presence of gypsum Second Geol. Survey Penna., Rept. K, 1875 (1876), pp. 34-56. 2 See U. S. Geol. Survey Folios Nos. 121, 180, etcetera. 88 PROCEEDINGS OP THE WASHINGTON MEETING in certain of the shales and sandstones, and again marine or brackish-water fossils in other beds, indicates that these conditions at times gave place to others of a very different character. The Dunkard series as a whole is not very fossiliferous ; in fact, it is almost as barren of the identifiable traces of life as it is of the workable coal seams, which originally suggested the term "Upper Barren Measures" for this deposit. In addition to the occasional plant fragment that may be found in almost any part of the series, there are certain rather well defined horizons in the Ohio Dunkard which have yielded important fossils. Plants are, of course, of first importance. Their remains are occasionally to be found in the roof shales of any of the coal seams or even in beds of argillaceous shale and sandstone. Almost any outcrop of limestone may be found to contain small fresh-water gastropods and ostra codes. The Middle and Upper Washington limestones often contain fish plates and teeth, some of which are referable to sharks, and are therefore probably marine. A Lingula occurs in the shales associated with the Washington coal. The lowest shales of the series are sometimes a black carbonaceous mass associated with a hard limestone, and these beds contain scales, teeth, and coprolites, all of which are probably fish remains. The most important find of the whole fossil collection, however, was made in the red shales of the Washington formation in the vicinity of Elba and Marietta. At the former of these places, near the base of the Dunkard, amphibian coprolites were found in relative abundance. These are remarkably similar to those found in the Termian of the Western States. At the latter place, during the past summer, fragments of a neural spine of Edaphosaurus were found in the sandstones associated with the red shales just above the Lower Marietta sand- stone. The remains of this reptile have never before been found in the United States outside of Oklahoma, Texas, and New Mexico. The importance of this find must be very evident, since it agrees with the earlier conclusions drawn from identifications of the Dunkard flora and proves the age of the Dunkard to be identical with the Permian or Permocarboniferous of Texas. After hav- ing seen the whole vertebrate collection, Dr. S. W. Williston says that "of the fishes I recognize teeth like those of Diplodus from the Texas Permian, -but this type runs through the Pennsylvanian and is not characteristic. The Elasmobranch spine is unlike any that I have seen in Texas. The coprolites can not be distinguished from those commonly found in Texas and New Mexico. . . . The Edaphosaurus spine is unquestionable, small as it is. The range of the family in Texas is both Wichita and Clear Fork. It occurs in New Mexico in the El Cobre beds, which the accumulated evidence now places as the equivalent of the lower Texas beds (Wichita). . . . In Europe Edaphosaurus occurs in the uppermost Carboniferous of Kuonova and the Rothliegende of Saxony." 3 In view of this evidence of the Vertebrate fossils, there can be no doubt that the lower portion of the Dunkard series is the .equivalent of the lower Texas beds (Wichita) which overlies the Cisco, and that in all probability both beds are Permian. Presented in abstract extemporaneously. Brief remarks were made by Prof. A. C. Lane. 3 Letter of December 15, 1915. ABSTRACTS AND DISCUSSIONS OF PAPERS 8.9 SILURIAN SYSTEM OF MARYLAND i BY C. K. SWARTZ AND W. F. PROUTY (Abstract) The authors have been engaged in the study of the Silurian system of Mary- land for several years and this paper presented a synopsis of their chief results. The various formations that constitute the Silurian system of Maryland were discussed, including their lithology, faunas, and stratigraphic features. The formations were correlated with those of the same age in New York and other parts of the Appalachian basin. The problem presented by the Silurian Red Beds was considered briefly and certain analogies between them and the Catskill formation were pointed out. Presented in abstract extemporaneously by the senior author. Discussion Mr. G. W. Stose : The stratigraphy presented by Mr. Swartz in the diagrams is no doubt more accurate and final than that in my report on the eastern part of the area about Hancock, Maryland. The interfingering of red sedi- ments toward the east, extending to lower horizons than the base of the Wills Creek, is of special interest and will require careful study before final con- clusions of nomenclature and correlation are reached. In regard to the faunal relations of the Kiefer sandstone, I do not feel com- petent to speak ; but Mr. Ulrich, who was responsible for having it made a member of the McKenzie formation in my report, has, in a recent table, placed it as a member of the Clinton formation, thus agreeing with Mr. Swartz. Mr. George H. Chadwick : Objection is made to the inclusion of the Roches- ter in the Clinton. The distinctive Rochester fauna is widespread and the facts presented in this paper emphasize the undesirability of submerging it in the very different assemblage lying beneath it, against the plain evidence that the Rochester fauna endures with little modification into the Lockport. HOMOGLINE AND MONOCLINE BY REGINALD A. DAI.Y CONTENTS Page Definition of "homocline" 89 Different definitions of "monocline" 90 Favored definition of "monocline" 91 Summary 92 Definition of "Homocline" Workers in deformed strata have long felt the need of a general name for a mass of bedded rocks all of which dip in the same direction. Such a mass may be a tilted fault-block, a series of tilted fault-blocks, a combination of 1 Presented by permission of the Director of the Indiana Geological Survey. 90 PROCEEDINGS OE THE WASHINGTON MEETING overthrust blocks, one limb of anticline or syncline, an appressed fold, a series of appressed folds, or a local, single flexure in a pile of otherwise horizontal beds. In many an instance the observer is long delayed in reaching a con- clusion as to which of these or other categories a group of inclined beds is to be finally referred ; after years of research he may not be able to make this decision. Yet in his field notes and reconnaissance report, if not in his final publication, he should have a broad term by which to refer to the structural unit here described. . Feeling this need during years of reconnaissance and detailed studies in the Canadian Cordillera and elsewhere, the writer has suggested the name "homo- cline" to cover the case. 1 A "homocline" is thus "any block or mass of bedded rocks all dipping in the same direction." According to one of its several definitions, "monocline" has exactly the-meaning given to "homocline," and it is necessary to show reason for preferring the new term. Different Definitions of "Monocline" "Monoclinal" was invented by W. B. and H. D. Rogers, who wrote: "We propose the term monoclinal to signify a sameness in the direction of dip, and shall term a mountain or valley in which such sameness prevails a monoclinal mountain, or monoclinal valley." 2 Since sameness of dip, rather than the singleness of dip direction, is emphasized, it appears that "homoclinal" would have been etymologic-ally preferable. Though the originators of the word, W. B. and H. D. Rogers made very little use of it, and then almost, if not quite, ex- clusively in the adjective form. Some authors have since employed "mono- clinal" as a noun, equivalent to the proposed "homocline," signifying merely a series of beds dipping in the same direction ; but "monocline" in this sense has been comparatively little used. In 1865 Page used "monoclinal" as a noun, meaning a one-limb flexure, or the same as "monoclinal fold," Powell's name for well known flexures of the Colorado plateaus. 3 In 1880 Dutton adopted this usage. 4 In 1882 Dutton used "monocline" with the same meaning, and also in 1882 A. Geikie published what seems to be the first formal definition of "monocline." He expressed it in the following words : "Curvature occasionally shows itself among horizontal or gently inclined strata in the form of an abrupt inclination, and then an immediate resumption of the previous flat or gently sloping character. The strata are thus bent up and continue on the other side of the fold at a higher level. Such bends are called monoclines, or monoclinal folds, because they present only one fold or one-half of a fold, instead of the two in an arch or trough." 5 The Dutton-Geikie usage represents a considerable narrowing of meaning when compared with the "monocline" implied in the Rogers' use of the ad- jective "monoclinal." The same narrower definition of "monocline" is to be 1 R. A. Daly : Memoir 68, Geol. Survey of Canada, 1915, p. 53. 2 W. B. and H. D. Rogers : Reports of the Association of American Geologists and Naturalists, 1840-1842, Boston, 1843, p. 4S5. 3 D. Page : Handbook of Geological Terms, Edinburgh and London, 1865, p. 312. J. W. Powell : Colorado River of the West, Washington, 1875, fig. 67, opp. p. 183. 4 C. E. Dutton : Report on the geology of the high plateaus of Utah, 1880, p. 26. 5 A. Geikie : Textbook of Geology. London, 1882, p. 515. HOMOCLINE AND MONOCLINE 91 found in all three of the succeeding editions of A. Geikie's textbook, in J. Geikie's Structural and Field Geology (1905), in the Standard Dictionary. (1S95), in Webster's New International Dictionary (1910), Murray's New English Dictionary (1908), in Norton's Elements of Geology (n. d., 1905?), Scott's Introduction to Geology (1911), in Blackwelder and Barrows' Elements of Geology (n. d., 1911?), and in Tarr and Martin's College Physiography (1914). Several authorities define the adjective "monoclinal" in the sense of W. B. and H. D. Rogers — "dipping in one direction" — while defining "monocline" in the way adopted by Dutton and Geikie. Examples are to be seen in the Century Dictionary (1895) and in Murray's New English Dictionary (190S). J. D. Dana at first defined both "monoclinal" and "monocline" in the Rogers sense, but in the last edition of his Manual of Geology restricted the meaning of "monocline" as Dutton and Geikie had done. 6 Among recent writers who have retained both "monoclinal" and "monocline" in the broad Rogers sense are: R. S. Tarr (Elementary Geology, 1897), Cham- berlin and Salisbury (Geology, Volume I, second edition, 1906), Anderson and Pack (Bulletin 603, United States Geological Survey, 1915), and R. H. Johnson (Science, volume 42, 1915, page 450). Favored Definition of "Monocline" It is safe to conclude that the majority of influential authorities writing since 1880 have favored the Dutton-Geikie definition of "monocline." So far as the writer has been able to find out, Dutton had the priority in the use of this word in geology, while A. Geikie seems to be the first to have given it formal definition. Therein lies one reason for retaining this usage. A second and stronger reason is found in the need for the word in just the sense implied by Dutton and expressed by Geikie. For the observer working in Arizona, Dutton's "monocline" is as necessary as "anticline" is for the worker in Pennsylvania. In general, the geologists who are interested in a simple, ultimately complete system of names for all types of folds may well favor the Dutton-Geikie usage. The use of the noun in that sense makes obviously desirable a similar narrowing of the adjective "monoclinal." This seems to be a compelling argument for disregarding priority in connection with "monoclinal" and for re-defining it so as to cover one instead of many kinds of structure in bedded rocks. French and German authors have long used the word "flexure" (Flexur) to signify "monocline" in the Dutton-Geikie sense. This usage was introduced by Suess and followed by Richthofen, de Margerie and Heim, Reyer, Neumayr, Credner, de Lapparent, and Haug. It is, however, impossible for writers of English to limit "flexure" in this way. The word has too long meant "folding" in general, or simply "fold," as in the writings of the Geikies, Prestwich. Jukes Brown, W. B. and H. D. Rogers, Dana, Dutton, Willis, and others. Suess proposed the restriction of meaning because the monoclinal fold (a result of tension and radially acting force) was thought to be genetically and thoroughly contrasted with anticlines and synclines (results of compression and tangential 9 J. D. Dana : Textbook of Geology, 1864, p. 42 ; New Textbook of Geology, 4th ed., 1883 ( ?) ; Manual of Geology, 4th ed., 1895, p. 102. 92 PROCEEDINGS OP THE WASHINGTON MEETING force). Yet some structures, correctly described as synclines and anticlines because of their arrangement of dips, are probably due to forces acting radially and not directly parallel to the earth's surface. In any case, it seems better, as far as possible, to keep all these elementary terms purely empirical in meaning and free from theoretical connotation. Summary Thus simplicity, the demands of a logical system, the active need of field geologists, and a certain degree of priority "suggest that Button and Geikie should be followed in their definition of "monocline." It may be noted that de Margerie and Heim recommended the noun "monoclinal'' as a synonym for the continental word "Flexur," or "flexure." ' Hence there appears to be no reason why French and German writers should not aid in internationalizing the nomenclature here advocated. If "monocline" and "monoclinal" be fixed in the Dutton-Geikie sense, the broad, useful concept denoted by the "monoclinal" of W. P.. and H. P. Rogers needs a new name. As already observed, that term is readily found by follow- ing literally the Rogers recipe for its manufacture. They intended to name a body of strata showing throughout dip in the same direction and for that "homocline" (or "homoclinal" ; adjective, "homoclinal") is the appropriate word. Its use would have the advantage of rescuing "monocline" from its threatened fate of meaning two different things, and therefore meaning neither without cumbrous explanations. In stratigraphic. physiographic, economic, and even philosophical geology "homocline" should be distinctly useful. Presented in abstract extemporaneously. Discussion Mr. G. W. Stose : I welcome the suggestion of the term homocline. The need of a term for this structure has long been felt in the United States Geological Survey, where confusion has been avoided in editing by using monoclinal for the homocline as distinct from monocline or monoclinal fold. The term homocline will not only be useful in referring to rocks having the same dip, but whose structure is not known, as mentioned by Professor Daly, but also for the beds between an anticline and syncline, to which neither the term limb of the anticline nor limb of the syncline is not appropriate. Prof. William H. Hobbs : I wish to add my indorsement of Professor Daly's position and express the belief that the use of homoclinal in the sense of uni- formity of dip will prevent much misunderstanding. A region where such a term might have been used to advantage is that of the Taconic shales in east- ern New York State. Almost by accident I came on much compressed anti- clinal cores in a number of localities which showed the wide zone of westerly dipping shales to be isoclinal, though before regarded as a single limb of a fold. 7 E. de Margerie and A. Heim : Les dislocations de l'ecovce terrestre. Zurich, 1888, p. 26. KEWEENAW FAULT 93 OCCURRENCE OF INTRA FORM ATIONAL CONGLOMERATE AND BRECCIA BY F. V. EMERSON ' {Abstract) Areas of round clay pebbles and angular masses of stratified clay appear in the sands and sandy clays of Eocene age near Shreveport, Louisiana. The rounded pebbles are of sandy clay, soft when wet, but fairly firm when dry. and of diameters up to 3 inches. Many pebbles are incrusted with iron oxides, forming concretionary masses. The clay fragments are mainly tabular, but occasionally there are large masses of stratified and often well-jointed clay which stand at all angles. The matrix is a rudely stratified sandy clay, in places strongly cross-bedded. The rounded pebbles indicate weak wave action in waters of moderate depth and the clay breccias with their disordered arrangements show sliding and slumping. Presented in abstract extemporaneously. Brief remarks were made by Messrs. A. C. Lane and A. P. Coleman. KEWEENAW FAULT BY ALFRED C. LANE CONTENTS Page Summary 93 History 93 The primitive Keweenaw fault 95 Primitive erosion 96 Ifelation of Keeweenawan formation to Cambrian and Precambrian 97 The Paleozoic invasions 97 The Appalachian revolution 99 Later history 100 Summary The Keweenaw fault began as a block-fault in an interior basin like those of the Great Basin region and was also a line of volcanic activity (figure 2). The Upper Keweenawan were deposited as playa beds in the trough d and shade into the "Eastern'' Upper Cambrian sandstone, and that perhaps into the "Trenton*' limestone. Thrice later — in Richmond, Niagara, and Mid- Devonian times — the sea covered the region (figure 4), but retired at the time of the Appalachian Revolution, when an overthrust fault took place (figures G and 7). Erosion reduced the land to a peneplain in Keweenawan time and exposes sometimes the block-fault, sometimes the thrust-fault. History The great Keweenaw fault, which bounds the south side of one of the greatest copper-producing regions, has been an important one not only eco- 1 Introduced by A. P. Brlgham. 94 PROCEEDINGS OF THE WASHINGTON MEETING nomically and structurally, but in the history of geology. It is not necessary to review the literature recently summarized in United States Geological Society Monograph 52 and my own report on the Keweenaw series. I may, however, recall the names of Jackson and Foster and Whitney, Agassiz, Pumpelly and Wadsworth, Hubbard, Van Hise and Leith among those who have written on it. Very recently an important paper on Limestone Moun- tain, by Case and W. I. Robinson, 1 has appeared which has a bearing on the subject, as does also the work of Thwaites in Wisconsin. 2 I have also occa- sion to refer to the recent work of Allen and Barrett. 3 1 have left until the last honoris causa the Monographic Bulletin 23, by Irving and Ohamberlin, issued just 30. years ago. 1 It would be strange if 30 years of such active progress in research as the past 30 had not produced more facts and fuller Figuke 1. — "Ideal Sketch of the primitive Keweenaw Fault" As represented in figure 24, page 113, of Bulletin 23, U. S. Geological Survey light on the subject in a region which has been in the meantime the seat of much diamond-drilling and study. In this paper I briefly compare three diagrams from Bulletin 23 with three others more nearly in accord with the facts as I now know them. Figures 1, 3, and 5 are figures 24, 25, and 26 of Bulletin 23, not pretending to be sections, but diagrams to explain the view of the authors. Figures 2, 4, and 6 are equally diagrams, not sections, for it would be impossible to get Limestone Mountain into a section with the Keweenaw fault on a sufficiently large scale. The bases are the corresponding figures of the set 1, 3, and 5 modified to 1 Journal of Geology, vol. xxiii, 1915, p. 256. 2 Sandstones of the Wisconsin coast of Lake Superior, Belt No. 25 of Wis. Geol. and N. H. Survey. 3 Contributions to Precambrian geology. Mich. Geol. and Biol. Survey, Pub. 18, 1915. 4 U. S. Geol. Survey Bull. 23. "Observations on the junction between the Eastern sandstone and the Keweenaw series on Keweenaw Point, Lake Superior.. KEWEENAW FAULT 95 represent more nearly the geological structure. Figures 7 and 8 with 6 cor- respond to 5. The Primitive Keweenaw Fault We 5 agree that the faulting began in Keweenaw time. In figure 2, by changes from figure 1, I have tried to show (1) that J) of the Keweenawan lies on the underlying Huronian unconformably, the beds in contact on the two sides Figure 2. — Ideal Sketch of the same Fault as Figure 1, supposing it to be a Block-fault differing many thousands of feet in horizon. This is well marked around Sunday Lake, as noticed by H. L. Smyth, Rose, and others. In fact, according to Allen's recent discoveries, the whole Upper Huronian was eroded away along much of the Gogebic range. (2) That this fault-line acted as a channel or conduit for volcanic activity, so that intrusive pipes (h) and sills (g) are Figure 3. — "Ideal Sketch of the Keweenaw Fault, after the Deposition of the Eastern Sandstone and before the secondary faulting" As represented in figure 25, loc. cit. found near it — for example, Mount Bohemia gabbro, the Torch Lake quartz porphyry, Indiana Mine porphyries and gabbro, Bergluud intrusives, etcetera — and the more viscous felsic lavas are also found near it. One period of erup- tion of rhyolites culminates before the deposition of conglomerate S, (c) of We" refers to the authors of Bulletin 23 and myself. VIII — Bull. Geol. Soc. Am., Vol. 27, 1915 96 PROCEEDINGS OF THE WASHINGTON MEETING this figure. (3) Therefore I have changed the hade of the fault from that of an overthrust to the steep hade of a block-fault. There is some direct evi- dence of this. It is certainly not as flat as a later overthrust fault (Old Colony and Torch Lake and Oneco sections) . A nearly vertical hade would be also a more natural channel for volcanic activities. Many overthrust faults are devoid of them. Primitive Erosion We agree, as shown in figures 3 and 4, that this primitive fault suffered erosion, and that the Eastern or Jacobsville sandstone may have lapped on both sides of it. But the study of land formations, which has much advanced in the last 20 years, would lead one to infer that the valley at d was being filled as it was formed, and that there is no such sharp gap in dip or strike or time of deposition between the Upper Keweenawan and the Cambrian sand- stone, as is fairly inferable from figure 3. Tn fact, my own figure 4 does not do justice to my conception of the continuity of sedimentation that takes Figure 4. — A Stage corresponding to Figure 3 Showing the section after the deposition of the four Paleozoic overlaps place in a block-fault valley or graben. The Keweenawan is for me largely the land facies (the Old Red Sandstone facies) of the Middle and Early Cambrian (Waucobic). We know now definitely through Thwaites and the Wisconsin Survey that the Upper Keweenawan is indistinguishable in lithology, dip, or strike from the Cambrian sandstones, for the "Western" Apostle Islands sand- stones that have been hitherto called Cambrian by every one he classes as Upper Keweenawan, and the line between them and the Mississippi Valley fossiliferous Upper Cambrian sandstone is drawn in a region where there are no outcrops. However, Limestone Mountain at .;' has fortunately been left us (figure 8) to show that the "Eastern" sandstone is really directly beneath the Trenton. The Jacobsville or Eastern sandstone shows both in drill cores (as at the Oneco mine) and exposures fragments of the Keweenawan amygda- loids, that indicate clearly that at the deposition there was yet a little of the uplifted fault-block exposed to attack. The association of zeolites with copper shows the cooperation of thermal waters, and I therefore believe that much, if not all, of the copper deposition took place during this period of early erosion. KEWEENAW FAULT 97 Relation of Keweenawan Formation to Cambrian and Precambrian Before the deposition of the Keweenawan the Huronian was uplifted and suffered deep erosion, so deep that, according to Allen, 6 over a large part of the Gogebic Range the Neo-Huronian, which he calls the Copps formation, is removed. Consequently apparently Van Hise mistook the Animikie, or Middle Huronian, for the Upper Huronian. However great the pre-Keweenawan ero- sion may be, however, all agree that it existed. It seems to have gone so far and so nearly was a peneplain produced, in the later stages of which conglom- erates must be finer and often absent, that coarse basement conglomerates of the Keweenawan are not often found. This is important, as indicating the importance of the gap separating the Keweenawan from the Huronian. The black shales of the Neo-Huronian also might indicate the fine-grained deposits of advanced baseleveling. The Keweenawan formation seems, however, to have been formed when the Huronian was raised above water in a desert something like our Great Basin. The dolomitic marls, the micaceous shales, tbe arkose sandstones, the slight chemical assorting or leaching of the sedi- ments, as well as the abundance of salt, as I believe, largely connate waters, all favor this conclusion to which, I think, Leith came before myself. I have been especially interested lately in studying angular clay pebbles that I find in the Keweenawan drill cores, and take to be broken up, dried crusts on the top of desert clays. This desert basin formation, with accompanying lava flows, like those of the Snake River Valley of Oregon, lasted until late into the Cambrian ; for the Upper Cambrian, Jacobsville, or Eastern sandstone, still is arkose, with as much as three-eighths of the sand grains feldspar, still micaceous, and still has saline, though not so saline waters. They become dis- tinctly fresher in the upper part. These Upper Cambrian sandstones also contain pebbles of the Keweenawan, showing that the escarpment of the. Keweenawan fault was neither peneplained nor covered at the time of the Upper Cambrian. So I think it is pardonable if I am more confirmed in the belief that the Keweenawan is more largely Cambrian than Precambrian — more parallel to the Triassic, with which it was once confused — than to the Permian. I emphasize the fact that the Keweenawan occurred after rather than before the great Precambrian peneplanation, because Lawrence Martin has acutely suggested this as a test whether the Keweenawan is really Cam- brian. The line of contact of the base of the Keweenawan on the various Huronian formations is, as Allen's map shows, fairly smooth, except where disturbed by faulting that also affects the Keweenawan. The Paleozoic Invasions By the time the sea invaded the valley d, however, the fault-scarp was pretty well worn down, as figure 3 indicates, and though I have indicated the Eastern sandstone in figure 4 as not entirely covering the range, it may finally have clone so. though even near Limestone Mountain (,/) there are some small pebbles which may be Keweenawan. Such pebbles certainly come near the Keweenawan fault in strata which one would think are not much below. I Loc. cit., chapter Hi, pp. 58-59. 98 PROCEEDINGS OF THE WASHINGTON MEETING Figure 5. — "Ideal Sketch of the Keweenaw Fault, after the secondary faulting" Loc. cit., figure 26, page 114 Figure 6. — Ideal Sketch of the Keweenaw Fault just before the secondary Thrust faulting Figure 7. — Ideal Sketch of the Keweenaw Fault just after the secondary Thrust KEWEENAW FAULT 99 wanted, however, to indicate, the still greater expansion and greater distance from shoreline of the succeeding limestones. During the Paleozoic we have no evidences of great disturbances ; but four times, as Case and Robinson show, the sea advanced over the region, quite possibly when at periods of world-wide quiescence and peneplanation the oceans were so filled as to raise the sealevels at about the same time when, as four chief salients in Schuchert's curve indicate, there was wide-spread sub- mergence of the North American continent. No unconformity and but little disconformity has yet been recognized in these strata in Michigan. They are indicated in figure 4 as practically conformable except near where Limestone Mountain was to be. I have indicated the Richmond as a mere filled channel in the Trenton, because it seems to have been less widely distributed in Michigan. There may well have been, we should expect that there were, later Car- boniferous invasions, all traces of which have been removed. There is little Devonian left. We have then : 1. "Trenton" — Ordovician — Decorah — Black River : T. 2. Cincinnatian R. 3. "Niagara" — Upper Silurian — Lockport N. 4. Mid-Devonian — probably Hamilton — compare the overlap at Milwaukee, Wisconsin D. The first and third I had recognized years ago ; the second and fourth Rob- inson has just recognized. The Appalachian Revolution Home time after the Mid-Devonian the faulting, folding, and disturbances of the "Eastern" sandstone took place, which on the whole are very slight, but which left us Limestone Mountain (./') as a fortunate remnant. I take it that the further disturbances along the Keweenaw fault, illustrated by figure ">. from Irving and Chamberlin, and 6 and 7, were at about the same time. They were certainly later than the deposition of the Eastern sandstone, and had there been much disturbance earlier than the Devonian I think it would have been registered at Limestone Mountain. Moreover, the earlier Paleozoic is generally quiescent in the Great Lakes region; but the Appalachian Revo- lution may well have had some effect even here. T have indicated this effect in two stages. In figure 6. I suppose, a continuation of the block-faulting. This is indicated by flatter dips, and even sometimes southerly dips, near the fault along the range (New Baltic and South Lake mines). Though such southerly dips may lie produced by simple thrust, it is easier at least to draw them by supposing a monoclinic fold or faulting, such as shown, to precede the thrust. Moreover, the consolidation of the beds i-d with a greater thick- ness down to the Archean than on the side of h would naturally lead to some folding or slump faulting on that side. Either with or without this prelimi- nary bending it is easy to see that the same tangential compression that has bowed Lake Superior and produced the thrust-faulting and folding described by Thwaites, striking on an uneven wall, with soft sandstone on one side and 100 PROCEEDINGS OF THE WASHINGTON MEETING hard trap on the other, would shear off the top and cause it to override the sandstone, as shown in figure 7. That the copper deposition was largely prior to this folding is shown by numerous facts. A copper-bearing lode is cut off by the underthrust Eastern sandstone. The Algoruah mine, the Lake, and South Lake may be conceived of as working on one bedded lode folded so as to be exposed three times. Later History But all this time erosion was going on, and theoretically near this fault there must have been land deposits of Permo-Triassic age, some remnant of which may some day be found like the fragments of Cretaceous found in the Mesabi Range. During Cretaceous time the peneplain must have been somewhat higher than the present surface. And sometime in the Tertiary, the down-cutting Figure 8. — Ideal Sketch of a Cross-section through the southern Part of the Keweenaw (Copper) Range (ck), Limestone Mountain (j), Silver Mountain (i) to the Huron Mountains. streams reaching harder rock through the mantles of paleozoics, became more and more adjusted to the structure, though here and there transverse streams persisted in valleys now occupied by Portage Lake, the Flint Steel, Fire Steel, and Ontonagon. This Tertiary uplift presumably, culminated in the Quater- nary when this region was overridden by the Keewatin ice, and later was about the limit of the westward spread of the Labrador ice. At first the bed- rock conditions are somewhat as in figure S. Near the fault-line we find both thrust and vertical faults as well as slump faults, the strata disturbed and broken. The thrust-faults have a flatter hade than the strata and the thrust- faults a steeper. Both tend to cut out certain parts of the section. The present surface level' relative to the fault systems is sometimes higher, sometimes lower, so that in places we find the Keweenaw formation overlying the Eastern sandstone, as at k of figure S, and again upturned against it. as would be the case did the present surface pass just above m of figure 8. Presented in abstract extemporaneous!}'. ABSTRACTS AND DISCUSSIONS OF PAPERS 101 SOME STRUCTURAL FEATURES IN THE QREEN MOUNTAIN BELT OF ROCKS BY C. E. GORDON (Abstract) The Taconic, or, more broadly speaking, the Green Mountain belt of rocks, is notably, if not preeminently, a region of fracture. The great displacements are genetically of the reversed type, although in later adjustments there may have been some normal faulting along the planes of earlier reversed faults. These great fracture lines follow the general trend of the Green Mountain axis, but often cross it. An east-west trend of the foliations of the ancient gneisses, which has been observed at certain places, may be genetically asso- ciated with these transverse breaks if, as seems likely, the lines of weakness in these basal gneisses coincide with their structural features. Erosion has been extensive enough to expose the faulted relations of the gneisses and the younger rocks. A reasonable restoration of the Precambrian floor on the basis of this faulting gives a different impression of the topog- raphy of the land over which the Cambrian sea transgressed from what the present topographic relations, viewed without recognition of the extensive fracture of the basal Precambrian floor, might convey. Presented by title in the absence of the author. FAULTING IN NORTH-CENTRAL KENTUCKY BY ARTHUR M. MILLER Faults which are all of the normal type, with prominent drag zones on their downthrow sides, are by no means uncommon in the Blue-grass region of the State, though, on account of the length of time which has elapsed since they were formed and the great thickness of residual soil covering, they are not always easy to detect in the uplands. They vary in length from a few hundred yards to nearly 50 miles, and in throw from 5 or 10 to 350 feet. They nearly always occur in pairs — a primary and a secondary fault — the latter evidently consequent on the former. The adjustment of tension strains accompanying a bowing up of the Cin- cinnati Geanticline might well result in slippings along tension fissures. Such would constitute the "primary" faults. The dropping down with tilting in of the strata toward these faults would tend to develop parallel tension cracks at certain distances away from the primary cracks. A further slipping and tilting of the strata with the continued bowing up of the anticline would widen and deepen the developing secondary fissures until they, too, would become planes of slipping, constituting "secondary" faults, and the wedges of strata between the primary and secondary would become "fault-blocks." This type of faulting is well illustrated in the West Hickman Creek fault strip, which stretches from near Paris, in Bourbon County, to near Union Mills, in Jessamine County, a distance of 25 miles. The maximum throw near the middle of the strip of the west (primary) fault is about 150 feet. Nearly its whole extent is in the uplands of the Central Blue-grass region, where it displaces Eden shale on Lexington lime- 102 PROCEEDINGS OF THE WASHINGTON MEETING stone. It has formed with its secondary member a nearly continuous narrow strip of relatively poor Eden shale land, sharply contrasted with the excellent Lexington limestone typical blue-grass land on either side of it. This linear tract of beech-tree, sobby, "soapstone" land— from an eighth to a mile wide, penetrating the heart of the Blue-grass — the farmers of tbe region, in ac- cordance with a tradition handed down from the early settlers, have been accustomed to account for on the theory that it is an "old buffalo trail." It passes 1 mile east of Lexington, and at this point was chosen as a site for the main city reservoir, the clay bottom it has furnished being excellent for hold- ing water. A very similar poor-land strip stretches from near Great Crossings, in Scott County, past Stamping Ground, in the same county, to near Peaks Mill in Franklin, a distance of about 12 miles. The two bounding faults of this strip are the Kissinger (primary) and the Switzer (secondary). The amount of the throws and the strata displaced are the same as in the West Hickman, except that toward the western end Mays- ville (Upper Cincinnatian) has been preserved by being brought down on a level with the Eden. The most prominent of these faults is that of the Kentucky River. It stretches from near Levee, in Montgomery, to near Burdetts Knob, in Garrard County, a distance of 50 miles. The maximum throw in the middle of the stretch is about 350 feet. It here displaces in the uplands Garrard sandstone and Lower Maysville on Lexington limestone, and at the bottom of the gorge of the Kentucky River Upper Lexington on Lower Highbridge (Camp Nelson). The general trend is north 70° east. Another is the Glencairn fault, crossing the Lexington and Eastern Railroad at Glencairn Station. It stretches from near Campton. in Wolfe County, to near Irvine, in Estill County, a distance of about 25 miles. The maximum throw is about 150 feet, Through most of its extent it displaces at the surface Lower Pennsylvanian on Upper Mississippian. The Kentucky River fault is so called because from Boonesboro, in Madison County, to Camp Nelson, in Jessamine County, a distance by the windings of the river of 41 miles, the general course of the river and the fault coincides. In this stretch the river in its meanderings crosses the fault nine times, flow- ing in a narrow picturesque gorge of hard Highbridge limestone, whenever it is on the northwest (relative upthrow) side of the fault, and in a wider valley, presenting less pronounced scenic features, when it is on the southeast (down- throw) side, where it is bedded in the softer limestones and shales of the Lexington or Eden. While the general southwest diversion of the river in this course is in evi- dent relation to the fault, the minor bends, or the meanders proper, bear no relation to it. At the eastern ends the Kentucky River and Glencairn faults die out in monoclines which involve at the surface Mississippian and Tennsylvanian, and underneath strata at least as low as the Silurian, for it has resulted in the accumulation at these two ends of tbe Ragland and Campton oil pools re- spectively. The Ragland was discovered accidentally as the result of wild-cat drilling, the Campton in response to advice given by the writer, based on what he FAULTING IX NORTH-CENTRAL KENTUCKY 103 suspected was the relation in the former instance between the oil and the monoclinal structure and the monoclinal structure and the fault. Later a shallow oil pool was developed at the southwestern end of the Glencairn fault, near Irvine. The oil horizon in the first two instances appears to be a magnesian lime- stone of approximately Clinton (Brassfield) age. In the Irvine wells the oil appears to come from the Columbus (Devonian) limestone. In the Lexington limestone of the Blue-grass region are barite veins which have been rather extensively worked in recent years. They are in evident relation to the faults, being fillings of solution cavities, which are widened cracks usually extending outward from the faults at approximately right angles. The walls show no signs of any considerable vertical displacements, but there is some evidence of horizontal movements. All this fissuring and faulting appears to be of the same age, which is post- Pennsylvanian, as Pennsylvanian strata are traversed and displaced by some of them. It is also evidently pre-Tertiary. The latter conclusion is reached from a study of the relations of the Kentucky River to its fault. The Kentucky appears to be a superimposed river which formerly crossed a baseleveled Cincinnati arch in a northwesterly direction from the present site of Boonesboro to where Elkhorn Creek now empties into it. This would carry it by the present site of Lexington. As the river during a subsequent period of rejuvenation cut its way deeper into the strata, it came more and more under the influence of the fault, the effect of which was to cause it to veer in its course to the southwest. The excellent illustrations of intrenched meanders in this portion of its course, as in other portions, would seem to indicate that the diversion was before any of the present meanders were acquired. These meanders are supposed to date from a period of Tertiary baseleveling. hence the Kentucky River fault, and apparently all the other faulting as well, is pre-Tertiary. We have independent evidence that the Cincinnati Geanticline was first formed in late Silurian or early Devonian time (researches of Foerste). It appears to have received a second bowing up after the aggradation period of the Pennsylvanian, which followed the complete peneplanation just before the latter period was ushered in. Provisionally we may assign this faulting to the post-Pennsylvanian revo- lution. Though now only the eastern end of the faults traverse and displace Penn- sylvanian strata, there is strong evidence from outliers scattered out over the Blue-grass region that the strata from the Ordovician up to and inclusive of the Pennsylvanian — except very uppermost Silurian and lowermost Devonian — once went over the Cincinnati arch. The recentness of the strata preserved in these faulted outliers is generally proportional to the amount of the throw in the faults and the distance they are situated from the axis of the arch. One very instructive example is Burdetts Knob, near the southern end of the Kentucky River fault, almost on the summit of the central anticlinal dome. Here is preserved a little patch of Lower Mississippian. 104 PROCEEDINGS OP THE WASHINGTON MEETING One can hardly avoid the conclusion that the Mississippian went over the arch ; and if the Mississippian was thoroughly baseleveled before the deposition of the Pennsylvanian, it is hard to escape from the inference that the latter must also have stretched across. Presented in abstract extemporaneously. Discussion Prof. Frank R. Van Horn : In Professor Miller's discussion of the faults, with mention of the barite veins, he omitted to state that the veins contain small amounts of galena and sphalerite. It is probable that the Lexington veins are similar in origin of those of southern Illinois and western Kentucky, in Caldwell and Crittenden counties, where the same mineral association was found, except that fluorite is the gangue mineral instead of barite. In this latter region the veins were worked at first for the lead, but lately for the fluorite, which was used as a flux. MECHANICS OF INTRUSION OF THE BLACK HILLS PRECAMBRIAN GRANITE BY SIDNEY PAIGE (Abstract) A consideration of the Black Hills granite intrusion may throw light on the mechanics of intrusion in general. Field relations indicate that the Black Hills granite came into its present position in the main by physical distension of the invaded rock body, under great load. The schists were deformed by the advance of the magma ; were forced into closely appressed recumbent folds. The schistosity produced by this folding lent itself to further injection by the granite through great num- bers of parallel dikes and by intricate lit-par-lit intrusion. The harder rocks — the quartzites — were distended and broken apart by the upward movement and the magma flowed in between the blocks. It is believed the magma was intruded at a relatively low temperature ; that it contained considerable water, and acted as a relatively mobile mass. The relation of dikes to schist layers, the fact that lit-par-lit injection tends to neutralize chemical and physical differences between magma and invaded rock, the probable low temperature of the granite, and the fact that positive evidence of much assimilation is lacking — all support the belief that this process was but a corollary of physical displacement, and not a primary process by which the forward movement of the magma was accomplished. The possi- bility that large blocks of roof have been engulfed in the magma, and that this process was an important one, must remain an open question. Presented in abstract extemporaneously. Discussion Prof. Joseph Barrell: Mr. Paige has shown in his discussion of the field relations of the Black Hills granite that they indicate intrusion in the main, by physical distension of the invaded rock body, under great load. ABSTRACTS AND DISCUSSIONS OF PAPERS 105 This may seem at first sight to be an argument against the validity of other modes of intrusion in other regions, more especially against the validity of the stoping hypothesis. Although, as Daly has said, the stoping hypothesis was postulated independently by a number of geologists, it has been so largely developed by his work that he is deservedly regarded as its chief founder and expositor. As one of those, however, who have contributed papers in which it is held that the rise of certain batholiths was by stoping, it seems appro- priate for me to speak of the relations of the two modes of intrusion. The invasion of the Black Hills granite by crustal distension seems a logical con- clusion, but at the same time does not controvert the evidence that certain other bodies have risen to their final boundaries by a process of stoping. In this statement I am not taking exception to Mr. Paige's conclusions. In fact, we have discussed this topic and I think we agree; but where a more or less novel view, such as the stoping hypothesis was ten years ago, is advocated as an explanation of certain examples, the idea is apt to arise among readers that the expounders wish to give it a universality of application and eliminate competing hypotheses. What, then, is the adjustment of factors which in one case may lead to lateral displacement as a chief mode of invasion, in another case to overhead stoping, permitting a passive rise? The rise of magmas from abyssal depths would appear to result from the unbalancing of a hydrostatic equilibrium. The liquid column is lighter than the surrounding rocks. As the liquid arises above that datum plane where the liquid and solid are under the same pressure, the internal pressure at any level is diminished by the weight of the column of liquid below ; the pressure in the surrounding rocks is diminished by the greater weight of the rock column between the level and the datum plane below. A bursting and intruding pressure is consequently developed. In the zone of flowage the thick cover would permit this internal pressure to act laterally, pushing the walls aside. Injection into the roof in steep foliation planes also implies a lateral distension. More or less doming of the cover is of course also to be postulated. When a large magmatic body has advanced, however, comparatively near to the surface, a lateral distension of the walls or cover becomes subordinate, because the line of least resistance is now for the magma to dome the cover upward, to produce intrusion fractures, and to intrude in distinct sheets and dikes, rather than to produce a Ut-par-Ut injection. The mechanical conditions making stoping a dominant process are then found especially in the zone of fracture ; those making for injection, mashing, and crystallization with lateral distension of the wall rocks prevail in the zone of flow. The Black Hills granite belongs to the Precambrian. In these ancient batholiths crustal dis- tension by the invading magmas appears to have been a dominant process, though stoping even here may have participated. The far younger batholiths of the Cordillera were intruded to high levels and with more or less absence of compressive forces. In these stoping appears to be a dominant process in the higher stages of their invasion. If we could restore the great depths eroded from the Archeozoic and look at the former higher levels, or if we could look deeper into the crust to observe the relations of post- Jurassic batholiths yet concealed, the distinction in dominant modes of intrusion evi- dent between the older and younger periods of igneous activity might be found to have largely disappeared. 106 PROCEEDINGS OP THE WASHINGTON MEETING Mr. Charles E. Deckek : Having heard that an unconformity had been found in the Precanibrian in the Black Hills, I should like to ask Mr. Paige about the conglomerate he mentions in his paper. Is it a basal conglomerate, and is there evidence of an unconformity beneath it? Brief remarks were made by Prof. E. A. Daly. Mr. Paige replied : I am gratified that both Professor Daly and Professor Barrell agree that the Black Hills granite may have come to place in such a manner as I have indicated. The idea that the variation in the mechanics of igneous intrusion is a function of depth and temperature has long appealed to me as reasonable ; that magmas and the rocks that they invade must act differently at varying depths seems a logical deduction from what we know of the earth's temperature and pressure gradient and from what we have observed in the field. The idea, carried to its ultimate analysis, demands that there should be a region at very great depths where, due to intricate injection and prolonged impregnation by the magma, sediments will break down and lose their identity as such, taking on all the characteristics of igneous rocks. PRECAMBRIAN STRUCTURE OF THE BLACK HILLS, SOUTH DAKOTA BY SIDNEY PAIGE (Abstract) A study of the Precanibrian rocks of the Black Hills reveals a great series of slates and schists, for the most part monotonously alike, striking in a north- west direction, and having steep dips, generally, except in the extreme south- west, to the east. At the south intrusions of granite break through the strata, and around the principal mass of granite about Harney Peak a schistosity is developed parallel with the granite contact. A closer study shows that the persistent eastward dips represent both schis- tosity and bedding, the two for the most part parallel, and that the series is compressed into a number of great folds which comprise innumerable minor isoclinal folds. And. finally, a sufficient number of individual beds can be traced to locate the position and nature of the greater axes of folding and to detect the pres- ence of two important faults. The nature of the granite intrusion is such as to lead to the belief that the mass exerted an important influence on the folding, and the position of one of the faults was the determining factor in the localization of the great Home- stake ore body. Presented in abstract extemporaneously. TITLES AND ABSTRACTS OF PAPERS PRESENTED BEFORE TILE AFTERNOON SESSION" AND DISCUSSIONS THEREON Tbe Society convener! at 2 o'clock p. m., with President Coleman in the chair. The Society proceeded immediately to the consideration of scientific papers. ABSTRACTS AND DISCUSSIONS OF PAPERS 107 RECTILINEAR FEATURES IN THE EASTERN CATSKILLS BY GEORGE II . CHADWICK (Abstract) It seems to have escaped notice that there is in the eastern Catskill Moun- tains a series of right-line valleys gridironed across the ranges in a direction 15° east of north similar in character to those features in the Adirondack^ that have been interpreted as due to block-faulting ; but no proof is at hand that such faults exist in the horizontal red beds of the Catskills. The valleys indicated are, however, parallel with the mural front of these mountains facing the Hudson Valley and with the strike ridges of folded Helderberg limestones in that valley, a few miles distant. The field evidence suggests that the cause of these features is a close spacing of joints along zones at intervals. Presented in abstract extemporaneously. Discussion Mr. John L. Rich : Mr. Chadwick has presented a very interesting paper, and with his primary thesis I am heartily in accord. With regard to the straight mural front of the Catskills, which is interpreted as probably a product of glacial erosion, I wish to suggest the alternative hypothesis that, since it parallels the folding in the Hudson Valley to the east, it may be rather a structural feature representing the eastern limit of the flat-lying beds. The speaker suggests that the roughly accordant, flat-topped summits of the higher Catskills may be remnants of a peneplain, possibly Jurassic. Without specifically opposing this proposition. I wish to give expression to my increas- ing distrust of the verity in regions of horizontal rocks, particularly where some beds are distinctly more resistant than others, of peneplains for which the only evidence are small flat areas on the summits and accordant altitudes. Dr. W. J. Miller : In the eastern Adirondacks there are numerous normal faults, proved to be such by most of the familiar criteria for the recognition of faults. In many other cases, however, there are prominent zones of ex- cessive jointing, often showing more or less evidence of faulting by the slicken- side. fault breccia, etcetera. In other cases such evidence of actual displace- ment is lacking. Many times it is difficult to decide whether a given zone is due simply to excessive jointing or whether the jointing has accompanied actual faulting in the zone. Doctor Chadwick replied to Mr. Rich as follows : The peneplains bevel across the rock layers, and consequently are independent of the harder layers except for short intervals. Doctor Chadwick replied to Doctor Miller as follows : There is no question of the existence of faults in the eastern Adirondacks, but it is unsafe to assume that all similar rectilinear valleys are of fault origin, and particularly in the northwestern Adirondack region, where the work of Doctor Martin fails to find faults, although the physiographic features are similar. 108 PROCEEDINGS OF THE WASHINGTON MEETING PHYSIOGRAPHIC EVIDENCE OF RECENT SUBSIDENCE ON THE COAST OF MAINE BY CHARLES A. DAVIS (Abstract) For several years the author has been collecting evidence which seemed to him to prove a recent subsidence of the North Atlantic coast, still in progress. Some of these evidences have already been presented before this Society. During the summer of 1915 some attention has been given to the physiographic evidence of subsidence presented by certain beaches in southwestern Maine, where an ancient beach was found almost buried in a salt marsh, which clearly must have been formed subsequent to the beach. The unaltered crest of this old beach is several feet lower than that of the modern beach of exactly the same type. Other beaches with multiple ridges in the same region give note- worthy confirmation of the evidence furnished by the one mentioned. Some other physiographic evidence of subsidence now in progress was pre- sented, and this was shown to be fully in harmony with other types of evidence already presented in former papers. Presented in abstract extemporaneously. PHYSIOGRAPHIC NOTES ON THE WHITE MOUNTAINS BY DOUGLAS W. JOHNSON (Abstract) The paper presents certain observations made during a brief visit to the White Mountains in the summer of 1914. The origin of the felsenmCer or block moraine, the date of cirque forma- tion, and the position of the New England peneplain with reference to the mountains are briefly treated. Presented by title in the absence of the author. POSITION OF THE NEW ENGLAND UPLAND IN THE WHITE MOUNTAINS BY ARMIN K. LOBECK * (Abstract) An attempt to trace the New England peneplain from the base of Mount Monadnock to the White Mountains has led to the unqualified conclusion that in the latter region the peneplain lies near the base of the mountains, and that the mountains represent monadnocks rising far above the badly dissected upland surface. In addition to the field evidence, a study of the topographic sheets east of the mountains and Hitchcock's Atlas of New Hampshire, by means of projected sections, decisively supports the conclusion. Presented in abstract extemporaneously. 1 Introduced by Douglas W. Johnson. ABSTRACTS AND DISCUSSIONS OF PAPERS 109 STUDY OF RIPPLE-MARKS BY WALTER A. BUCHEK * (Abstract) The mechanics of the problem ; mathematical laws ; results of new experi- ments ; significance in stratigraphy ; field observations in Kentucky and Ohio. Presented by title in the absence of the author. DEAD LAKE OF THE CH1POLA RIVER, FLORIDA BY E. H. SELLAEDS {Abstract) The Chipola River in Florida affords a good illustration of a tributary stream ponded by the deposition of sediment in the valley of the main stream. This river, which originates entirely within the coastal plain, flows for a con- siderable part of its course across limestones and is fed very largely by clear water limestone springs. It is therefore a clear-water stream, carrying only a limited amount of sediment. The Apalachicola River, of which the Chipola is a tributary, heads on the contrary in the mountains of northern Georgia and receives a heavy load of sediment, which is deposited, as the river becomes overloaded, near the Gulf. The Chipola enters the Apalachicola about 25 miles, by land, from the Gulf of Mexico. In this lower part of its course the Apalachicola is rapidly aggrading its valley, while the Chipola, owing to the limited amount of sediment which it carries, is building its valley much more slowly. This condition results in flooding the valley of the Chipola River. The lake thus formed, known as the Dead Lake of the Chipola River, derives an added interest from the fact that it has come into existence so recently that the cypress timber of the former river swamp, now mostly dead, is still standing, although the water in the lake has reached a depth of from 10 to 20 feet, while the lake itself is 10 or 12 miles long and from 1 to 2 miles wide. The channel of the river may still be followed in its winding course through the lake. Presented in abstract extemporaneously. TECTONIC LINES IN THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS BY SIDNEY POWERS 2 (Abstract) The alignment of the Hawaiian Islands shows that they have been formed at the points of intersection of two sets of tectonic lines, one set running parallel to the group of islands from northwest to southeast, the other set being cross-fractures from northeast to southwest. On the island of Hawaii the rift lines of Mauna Loa and of Kilauea ai'e quite pronounced structural 1 Introduced by Nevin M. Fenneman. 3 Introduced by John E. Wolff. 110 PROCEEDINGS OF THE WASHINGTON MEETING features following the second set. In the case of Mauna Loa, one rift starts near Hilo, on the east coast, and the other from Ka Lae, the southernmost point of the island, and at their intersection the sink of Mokuaweoweo has been formed. South of Mauna Loa are the almost parallel rifts of Kilauea : one from the east of Pahala, on the south shore ; one from near the Olaa Mill, on the northeast, and a third from the line of pit-craters on the east — all intersecting in the sink of Kilauea. Extensive faulting, not clearly related to the above tectonic lines, has accom- panied the formation of the islands. On Niihau the eastern portion of the original volcano has dropped out of sight, leaving a line of sheer cliffs. Kauai was originally a volcanic doublet, but the volcanic pile on the northwest has subsided, as is seen in the truncated flows of the Napali cliffs. On Oahu a portion of the Kaala Range may have dropped down in blocks, forming the "pali" (cliff), and cinder cones with some lava flows may have risen between the crags, giving rise to part of the present topography. On the north side of Molokai there is a line of cliffs, rising to a height of 1,000 to 3,500 feet, which bounds the southern third of the original volcano. After the collapse of the northern two-thirds, lava flows built up a small peninsula at the foot of the cliffs, and on this peninsula the leper colony is now situated. On Hawaii the breakdown of a portion of the Kahala dome is marked by cliffs on the northeast shore. The west side of Mauna Loa is scarred by a crescentic-shaped fault from Kealakekua southward, along which there has been subsidence on the seaward side. Later flows of lava have run over the cliffs and obscured the fault-line. The crater of Mohokea forms a crescentic depression on the south side of Mauna Loa, but the age of this crater, with respect to Mauna Loa. is uncertain. The south side of the dome of Kilauea, near the sea, from Kalapana nearly to Punaluu, has dropped down in a series of steps over which the later lava flows have poured from far back in geologic time until the last flow of 1S68. The last movement along this shore was a subsidence of from 4 to 7 feet in 1868. Presented by title in the absence of the author. BANDED GLACIAL SLATES OF PERMOCARBONIFEROUS AGE, SHOWING POSSIBLE SEASONAL VARIATIONS IN DEPOSITION BY ROBERT W. SAYLES * (Abstract) Above the Squantum tillite, which I described last year, there is a series of banded slates about 800 feet in thickness. The manner of transition from the tillite to the slate, with no unconformity, makes it certain that the slate was the result of deposition in waters from the melting of the glacier which formed the tillite. The first of the transition beds are conglomerates alternating with sandstones. Then come sandstones alternating with slates. Here and there it is plain that the ice readvanced over these beds, plowing them up and often dragging upward into the mass thus formed irregular lumps of the clay. Two beds of tillite in the slate itself show the close association of the slate with 1 Introduced by J. B. Woodworth. ABSTRACTS AND DISCUSSIONS OF PAPERS 111 the main tillite. One of these beds is about 50 feet from the main tillite formation and the other about 150 feet. Prof. John E. Wolff has made a microscopical examination of the tillite and slate and finds that they have the same nrineralogical composition. As one goes upward in the banded slate it is seen that the layers of sandstone become thinner and thinner, then disappear entirely, and finally the alternating layers are shown only in slate of dark and light bands, the dark bands containing more heavy basic material than the light. The cause of this disappearance of the sandstone layers can be ex- plained by the gradual withdrawal of the glacier and the consequent slacken- ing of the currents, which would be strong enough to carry sand only in the neighborhood of the ice. The lower pebbly members of the transition beds show irregularities of deposition, especially in lenticular forms, due to the in- constant conditions of streams coming from a glacier. A regularity of alterna- tion in deposition, however, becomes evident after the first 50 feet or so of the transition beds have been passed, where the layers indicate deeper and quieter water, and thus more uniformity in deposition. The thin individual layers of sandstone and slate now show through hundreds of feet such regularity in thickness and interval that a regularly recurring cause must be sought. Professors P>. K. Emerson and Gerard De Geer have described this same regularity of layers of sand and clay in the glacial clays of the Connecticut Valley and Sweden respectively and have ascribed the banding to yearly deposition. They believe that the layers of coarser material indicate summer, when the streams from the melting ice were rapid, and the layers of fine material indicate winter, when the streams had less velocity. Neither Emer- son nor De Geer could suggest any other period to which such regular alterna- tions could be related. Other American geologists have published this same idea which De Geer conceived in 187S. Among them may be mentioned Dr. Charles P. Berkey, Prof. A. P. Coleman, and Mr. Frank B. Taylor. This ex- planation may not be generally accepted, but no other cause, so far suggested, accounts for all the facts of the case. When the seasonal units have been accurately determined, they will furnish a basis for estimating the length of time required for the deposition of the formation. The facts observed in the slate at Squantum resemble so closely those described by De Geer and Emerson that it would seem as if there must be a very strong probability of these being similar cases, in spite of the millions of years which separate the two Glacial periods. Bead in full from manuscript. Discussion Prof. W. W. Atwood : This paper appeals to me as particularly interesting. I have seen similarly banded clays associated with the Wisconsin drift and during the past season I found just such banded clays associated with the Eocene till of southwestern Colorado. In examining in the field the slates here described by Mr. Sayles I was convinced that the regularity of the repe- tition of the bands of sands and clays meant a regularly returning cause, and seasonal changes in stream action seem adequate. This paper suggests that the idea of seasonal changes in deposition so well put forth by De Geer and others may help us in working out a calendar of ancient geologic time and IX — Bull. Geol. Soc. Am., Vol. 27, 1915 112 PROCEEDINGS OP THE WASHINGTON MEETING lead to a fuller appreciation of the significance of varying climatic conditions on sedimentation. Professor Hobbs : I have been greatly interested in Mr. Sayles' able dis- cussion of this subject and the conclusions which he has reached concerning the annual deposits indicated by the tillite. It was my good fortune to ex- amine with Baron De Geer a number of sections in the thin-banded clay in the delta deposits along the former ice-front of Scandinavia. Checked as these individual bands were by moraines of annual deposition, and worked out as they have been with such infinite care, one could hardly fail to accept the conclusion to which they pointed. The conclusions of Mr. Sayles point the way for many studies in the future which it is certain will be crowned with results. I was interested to note that in some of his sections there was indi- cation of what represents, perhaps, a climatic cycle, something entirely to be expected, though it did not seem to be indicated by the banded clays near Stockholm. Prof. Joseph Barbell : Doctor Sayles has given a very convincing presenta- tion, showing that the banding in the argillites associated with the Squantum tillite corresponds to the similar banding in Pleistocene glacial clays and is to be interpreted as showing seasonal variations in the Permocarboniferous glacial climates. This is both interesting and important, since the biologic evidence of most periods previous to the later Mesozoic shows warmth without marked zonal climates extending into high latitudes. In the combinations of winter and summer conditions which go to make up the geologic climates, there are four combinations possible, so far as warmth and cold are concerned : First, winter may be submerged and summer is domi- nant throughout the year, with or without a season of drought. This is the present climate of the torrid zone and in a number of past times appears to have been the dominant type even into high latitudes. It means the existence of some condition which carried solar heat received in equatorial latitudes into high latitudes with minimum loss by radiation. Second', winter and sum- mer may alternate, but with mild winters, the present climates of the warm temperate latitudes. This was perhaps the commonest type of climate in high latitudes during the Jurassic and Cretaceous periods. Third, winter and sum- mer may alternate, but with rigorous winters, leading, with sufficient snow- fall, to glacial conditions. This is the climate typical of high temperate lati- tudes today, but in the Pleistocene it extended into middle latitudes. It is favored by direct and local absorption of solar heat and its re-radiation, with minor control by a planetary distribution of equatorial warmth. It seems, as Doctor Sayles has here shown, to have been the type also of the Permocar- boniferous glaciation in eastern Massachusetts. Fourth, the climate may be continuous winter, as seen loithin the present ice-sheets in polar latitudes — summer completely submerged, winter continually dominant. Now, regarding the obliquity of the ecliptic and position of the pole as un- changed through geologic time, the middle latitudes should show the greatest contrast between the total amounts of winter and summer insolation. Doctor Sayles' paper suggests, in accordance with this expectation, that glaciation in all times in the temperate zone has been connected, as at present, with a marked seasonal climate, exhibiting the third of the several combinations listed — a climate distinguished from normal geological climates by the emer- gence of winter. ABSTRACTS AND DISCUSSIONS OF PAPERS 113 Let us go much farther back in time. A similar stratigraphic banding exists in argillites associated with the Huronian tillites at Cobalt, Ontario. I was fortunate in being able to examine this section under the guidance of Messrs. Miller, Knight, and Coleman during the International Geological Excursion in 1913, although they are not responsible for the following statement of obser- vations. The banding has, I believe, been noted for a long time by the Ontario geol- ogists and may have been discussed in their reports. At the south end of Cobalt Lake occurs a thick bed of argillite delicately banded, indicating rhythmic deposition. The bands are grouped in series which show larger rhythms. If tbe bands are animal, the rhythmically recurring groups show climatic fluctuations covering periods of years. On the southeast side of Cobalt Lake the argillites are succeeded by a ripple-marked quartzite. The thick till sheet rests on this without obliterating the ripples or crumpling the argillite beds at a greater depth. The boulder conglomerate is faintly bedded with grits and some beds of banded argillite show occasional subangular boulders dropped into them. Many of the boulders are markedly soled and indicate undoubted glacial wear. The whole suggests the presence of quiet water, which at first was far enough from the glacier front to receive only silt and clay. Later it was mantled apparently by an iceberg deposit rather than a true ground till. This implies, however, true till in some region not far distant. At a later stage there may have been an overriding of ice in this same region. In other places at Cobalt what appears to be undoubted tillite containing striated boulders rests directly on the floor of Keewatin rocks, although the final proof, consisting of striatums 'on that floor, has not yet been found. The association of these banded argillites with iceberg deposits and ground moraine indicates, therefore, the existence of summer melting and winter freezing during the Huronian glaciation. Sederholm also has found in Finland as far back as during Bottnian time a regular alternation of clayey and sandy material which he interprets as an annual stratification, explainable only by assuming a regular change of seasons. Glacial conditions then seem to be brought about by a marked lowering of the mean annual temperature of the whole globe, accompanied by an accentu- ation of seasons in middle latitudes. This suggests a less effective spreading out of equatorial warmth at such times and a more direct and rapid absorption and also radiation of solar energy in the temperate zones. Glacial periods are marked by strong seasonal climates, the emergence of winter. This is a fact which, according to its distinctness, must enter into the adjustment of factors bearing on the causes of Glacial periods. The explanation of non-glacial cli- mates must, on the other hand, account for the submergence of winter in middle and high latitudes with the earth's axis permanently situated as it is at present. The explanation of glacial periods and of warm-pole periods are equally important and complementary problems. The presence of marked seasonal climates in temperate latitudes during glacial periods is an important fact which must enter into that explanation. Mr. Frank B. Taylor : Laminated pebbleless clays formed in the preglacial lakes which followed the retreating "Wisconsin ice-sheet occur in many places in the Great Lakes region. A deposit of this kind occurs at Bracebridge, in 114 PROCEEDINGS OP THE WASHINGTON MEETING the highlands east of Georgian Bay. It is nearly 100 feet thick, and if the successive pairs of laniime be regarded as marking annual periods of deposi- tion, this deposit, as I now recall it, would indicate a time of about 2,500 years for its formation. It has seemed to me that laminated clays of this type are particularly characteristic of deposition in association with the retreating ice- sheet, and it is a striking and impressive fact to find precisely similar clays greatly indurated and so closely associated with the ancient tillites. Mr. John L. Rich: In a bottom of an old pond I once found a deposit of beautifully developed banded clays, in which the bands were marked by frag- ments of leaves. In this case the banding clearly represented seasonal ac- cumulation, the leaf-bearing partings corresponding to autumn and winter, when the fallen leaves were being carried and deposited by the streams. Prof. R. B. Woodwobth said that Mr. Sayles' correlation of the banded shales with the tillite beds at Squantum added another group of water-laid deposits which have been identified among the ancient glacial formations wherein we should expect to find the equivalents of our Pleistocene and modern sand plains, kames and espars, and brick clays ; already possible examples of one or another of these have been reported in Brazil and elsewhere. GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE IDITAROD REGION, ALASKA BY PHILIP S. SMITH (Abstract) The paper describes the area! geology of the Lake Clark-Iditarod region, Alaska. This region is located in southwestern Alaska, extending from the Pacific Mountains to the central part of the Yukon Plateau province. The rocks are dominantly sedimentary strata of Mesozoic age, but some Paleozoic limestones are also exposed. Igneous rocks, both of intrusive and of effusive origin, occur at a number of places, and certain of them seem to have been closely associated with the deposits of commercial value, such as gold and quicksilver. Unconsolidated deposits are widespread and throughout much of the region mantle over and hide underlying bedrock. These deposits are mainly of glacial and glaciofluviatile origin, though lacustrine, fluviatile, and volcanic ash deposits are also described. Presented by title in the absence of the author. CHARACTERISTICS OF THE SOIL AND ITS RELATION TO GEOLOGY BY C F. MAKBUT (Abstract) The soil is made up mainly of rock-waste. Its characteristics are of two kinds: (1) those derived from the rock from which it came, or those that are inherited, and (2) those impressed on it by the forces that have been acting on it since its life history began, or those that are acquired. The latter char- acteristics are relatively few in number and vary with many factors. The conditions determining their character and strength of expression were dis- cussed. ABSTRACTS AND DISCUSSIONS OF PAPERS 115 The relation of geology to soil was brought out by (1) a comparison of the chemical composition of a number of soils developed from the same rocks under varying conditions ; (2) a comparison of the physical characteristics of a num- ber of soils developed from the same rocks under varying conditions; (3) a comparison of the physical characteristics of a number of soils developed from different rocks under similar conditions ; (4) a comparison of the physical characteristics of a number of soils developed from the same rocks under vary- ing topographic conditions. Presented in abstract extemporaneously. GEOLOGIC SIGNIFICANCE AND GENETIC CLASSIFICATION OF ARKOSE DEPOSITS BY DONALD C. BARTON 1 {Abstract) Different opinions are held as to the conditions under which arkose has been formed. A study of arkose deposits shows that they are of several distinct types, of which the more important are (a) deposits of great thickness and with fresh feldspars, (6) deposits of moderate size associated with coal and argillaceous beds, and (c) deposits of moderate size, more or less argillaceous and associated with red beds. A survey of the conditions under which arkose could be expected to form shows that the granular disintegration of granite is widespread and is a possibility under practically all climates ; that in rigorous climates erosion and deposition of the granitic sand can take place contemporaneously with the disintegration, but that in regions of moist cli- mate the mantle of vegetation must be critically weakened by some change of conditions, such as a marine transgression or increasing aridity, before the products of disintegration and decomposition beneath can be eroded and then accumulated. It therefore seems possible to formulate a genetic classification of arkose deposits. Presented by title in the absence of the author. SOME FEATURES OF THE KANSAN DRIFT IN SOUTHERN IOWA BY GEORGE F. KAY (Abstract) In county reports issued by the Iowa Geological Survey and in other publi- cations many of the features of the Kansan drift of southern Iowa have been described, including the original Kansan drift plain, the present topography of the Kansan drift, the tabular divides, the characteristics of the weathered and unweathered zones of the Kansan drift, the gumbo, which is closely re- lated to the Kansan drift, and the fine, loesslike clay overlying the Kansan drift surface, and which has been interpreted by several investigators to be material of eolian origin deposited after a mature topography had been devel- oped on the Kansan drift. The origin of the gumbo has been interpreted 1 Introduced by R. A. Daly. 116 PROCEEDINGS OE THE WASHINGTON MEETING differently by different authors, the most recently published view being that of Tilton, who considers the material to have been formed, in the main, dur- ing the retreating stages of the Kansan iee. To this gumbo and other ma- terials which he considers to be related in age to the gumbo he has given the name Dallas deposits. Detailed field studies which are still in progress in southern Iowa seem to warrant the author in making a preliminary statement involving some inter- pretations which differ from those previously advanced. (1) The surface of the Kansan drift, after the Kansan ice withdrew, was, according to present evidence, a ground moraine plain, which, from the main divide between the Mississippi and Missouri rivers, sloped gently to the south- east and south toward the Mississippi and to the southwestward toward the Missouri. This drift plain was so situated topographically that weathering agents were very effective, but erosion was slight. As a result of the weather- ing during an exceedingly long time a grayish, tenacious, thoroughly leached, and non-laminated joint clay, which has been named gumbo, was developed to a maximum thickness of more than 20 feet. This gumbo contains only a few pebbles, which are almost wholly siliceous, and grades downward into yellowish and chocolate-colored Kansan drift from 3 to 7 feet in thickness, in many places with numerous pebbles, few, if any, of which are calcareous. This oxidized but non-calcareous drift, in turn, merges into unleached drift, oxidized yellowish for several feet, below which is the normal unleached and unoxidized dark-grayish to bluish-black Kansan drift. The gumbo is believed, therefore, to be essentially the result of the thorough chemical weathering of the Kansan drift; but, subordinately, other factors, such as the wind, freezing and thawing, burrowing of animals, slope wash, etcetera, have undoubtedly contributed to its formation. The Kansan drift which has been changed to gumbo may have differed somewhat from the normal Kansan drift that lies below the gumbo. (2) After the gumbo plain had been developed by weathering processes on the Kansan drift plain, diastrophic movements seem to have occurred, the plain having been elevated to such an extent that erosion became effective and valleys began to be cut into the gumbo plain. Erosion of the gumbo plain progressed to such an extent that some valleys were cut to a depth of more than 150 feet before grade was reached and a mature topography was devel- oped. Only remnants of the original gumbo plain remain, the most conspicu- ous of these being flat, poorly drained areas, known as tabular divides. Where creep and slumping have occurred the gumbo, in places, may be found on slopes at an elevation several feet below the level of the gumbo plain. The tabular divides are more prevalent east of a line drawn north and south through south-central Iowa than west of such a line. In the southwestern part of the State the Kansan gumbo, which is in situ, is found only where the divides, which are no longer distinctly tabular, retain the level of the former gumbo plain. (3) While there is, in places, loess of eolian origin on the Kansan drift of southern Iowa, much of the material which has been described as loess is thought to be not of eolian origin, but to be related more or less closely to the gumbo. The upper few feet of the Kansan gumbo, which is now limited to the tabular divides and divides closely related to tabular divides, is a fine- grained, loesslike, joint clay, in which, if diligent search is made, it is possible ABSTKACTS AND DISCUSSIONS OF PAPERS 117 to find a few yery small siliceous pebbles similar to those in the normal gumbo, and it is thought that this loesslike clay is the result of changes that have been going on at and near the surface of the gumbo during the great length of time since the normal gumbo was formed. The loesslike clay which is now found as a mantle on the Kansan drift on the slopes and divides that have been brought by erosion considerably below the level of the original gumbo plain is believed to be the product not primarily of wind action, although wind may have been a factor, but chiefly the product of the weathering and con- centration of the gumbo and to some extent of the underlying Kansan drift, where erosion has not kept pace with the weathering. (4) The evidence indicates that the time taken to develop the present topography from the gumbo plain stage, although it represents a great length of time, is short when compared with the time taken to develop the gumbo plain from the Kansan drift. It is thought that the formation of the main part of the gumbo and the development of the present mature topography of the Kansan drift were effected between the close of the Kansan epoch and the advance of the Illinoian ice into Iowa ; in other words, during the Yarmouth inter-Glacial epoch. All the evidence indicates that the Yarmouth epoch was an exceedingly long interval of time. (5) Detailed chemical analyses of gumbo, loesslike clay, etcetera, are now being made in the chemical laboratory of the University of Iowa by Dr. J. N. Pearce. The results of these analyses will go far to strengthen or weaken the interpretations given above from the field evidence. Presented in abstract extemporaneously. Discussion Mr. W. C. Alden : I would like to make a few remarks on the Iowan drift in connection with Doctor Kay's paper. I have seen a number of exposures of this clay on top of the Kansan drift, which, for want of a better name, we have called ''gumbo." It seems to me a very important deposit. When first seen I thought it must be distinct from the underlying till, inasmuch as the till below it is oxidized, though the gumbo itself is mostly gray and unoxidized, excepting at the top. On further examination, however, I do not feel sure of its being distinct, and considerable evidence has been found indicating that it really may be the weathered upper part of the Kansan till which has been thoroughly leached of its soluble material and deoxidized. It is nowhere laminated like a water-laid silt, where I have seen it. It generally contains pebbles scattered sparsely throughout. The pebbles are mostly small and of chert and quartz, with some quartzites and crystallines, the latter badly de- composed. Rarely included boulders are found disintegrating and with feld- spars decomposing to kaolin. Thicknesses of 15 to 20 feet of this clay are not uncommon. There is no definite line at the base of the gumbo ; it grades into the till below. I am not yet fully convinced that it is the residuum of weather- ing of the upper part of the till, but there is much to suggest that this is the case. Probably Doctor Kay's investigations will settle the matter. If it is such, I think it indicates a very long time of exposure of the Kansan drift, prior to the Illinoian stage of glaciation, since the gumbo is also found under Illinoian till in Henry County, Illinois. It seems to make the Yarmouth in- 118 PROCEEDINGS OP THE WASHINGTON MEETING terval much longer than some of us have beeu inclined to think heretofore, especially since the development of the gumbo appears to have taken place largely, if not wholly, before the dissection of the Kansan drift plain. It seems to be confined to the flat uplands and does not mantle the eroded slopes. In any case it clearly marks a stratigraphic horizon, the top of the Kansan till. The point to which I wish particularly to call attention is the relation of this super-Kansan gumbo to tbe lowan drift. For a number of years past there has been considerable question in the minds of some of the geologists as to whether there really is a post-Kansari drift in northeastern Iowa. This was because of difference of interpretation of some of the phenomena. It was finally decided that the Federal Survey should cooperate with the Iowa Geological Survey in a critical review of the evidence in the held. I was assigned to this work with Morris M. Leighton of the Iowa Survey as assistant, and we spent the held seasons of 1914 and 1915 in the investigation. It is a pleasure to be able to announce that we have reached the conclusion that there really is good evidence of the presence of a post-Kansan drift sheet in that area ; so that we are in the main in agreement with the late Doctor Calvin in regard to the lowan drift. We found the area much less markedly eroded than the Kansan drift area. The topography is of a peculiar type. We have called it a mantled, mature- erosion topography — that is, there are there the large patterns of maturely developed dendritic drainage systems — but most of the minor details have ap- parently been smootbed out. It is what one would expect if an ice-sheet were to spread over the maturely dissected topography of the Kansan drift area, wearing away the spurs, smoothing out the irregularities, partly filling the valleys, and mantling the whole with a rather thin sheet of till. This is indeed just what seems to have occurred. The slopes are very largely long, low, smooth, and, excepting close to the main streams, almost wholly uncut by lateral drainage lines. The minor valleys are shallow, open swales with smoothly rounded bottoms, where the streams flow in shallow trenches. There is a notable absence of the V-shaped cross-profiles seen in the Kansan area. The uppermost drift throughout the lowan drift area is a highly calcareous till. It is more modified by weathering than the Wisconsin, more so indeed than one would infer from some of the published descriptions, yet not nearly so much changed as the Kansan drift ; neither is it so much modified as the Illinoian drift. The famous big granite boulders, although not entirely con- fined to the lowan drift area, are notably abundant there and seem to be particularly characteristic of this drift deposit. Now, the particular interest in regard to the super-Kansan gumbo is that it affords a new line of evidence which tends to corroborate the other data. Many new exposures have recently been afforded by grading for country roads, electric interurban railroad lines, and the Chicago, Milwaukee and Saint Paul Railroad ; also we made about 250 test borings with an auger S feet in length. We have found numerous exposures of the super-Kansan gumbo, or a deposit exactly like it, in the higher parts of the lowan area, those parts particularly where remnants of the original Kansan drift plain are likely to have been preserved. In several places there is a black carbonaceous bed at the top, apparently an old soil, and overlying this a thin deposit of later till — the lowan till. Where this till is less than 4 or 5 feet thick, its limestone pebbles and ABSTRACTS AND DISCUSSIONS OF PAPERS 1.19 finer calcareous material have generally been entirely removed by leaching; where the drift is thicker than 4 or 5 feet, it is highly calcareous below the leached zone. At one place the gumbo bed outcropped in a slope about 50 feet below the top of the ridge. It thus appears that there is clearly a post-Kansan till in northeastern Iowa. It is older than the Wisconsin and seems to be distinctly younger than the Illinoian, The loess, which is largely absent or very thin in the Iowan area, mantles the weathered and eroded surface of the Illinoian drift as it does that of the Kansan. A similar gumbo bed was found in western Iowa between two drift sheets, apparently the Kansan and Nebraskan, but this need not be discussed at this time. Mr. Frank Leverett stated that in case the gumbo is a derivative from boulder clay microscopical examination should bring to light insoluble min- erals, aside from siliceous rocks, that were combined to make up the rocks which are common in the boulder clay, but have not been found preserved in coarse fragments in the gumbo. The interpretation by Professor Kay seems at best but tentative and will need to be tested by such lines of evidence as are now under investigation, so that a year hence we may know better the value of the interpretation. So far as Mr. Leverett's personal observations have gone, there seems lacking the transition zone between boulder clay and gumbo which one would expect to find if the gumbo is a derivative from boulder clay. Usually less than a foot space will take one from typical boulder clay into typical gumbo, and one's first impression is that the gumbo has been deposited on the boulder clay as a distinct bed. Mr. Charles E. Decker : I have seen examples of the gumbo which Professor Jvay describes at the Survey Office in Washington. These samples are very much like a thoroughly leached clay that occurs in connection with the oldest drift in northwestern Pennsylvania at Franklin and Oil City. However, there are larger fragments of rock in the clay at those localities than in the speci- mens of gumbo. TRIASSIC ROCKS OF ALASKA BY GEORGE C. MARTIN (Abstract) Triassic rocks, including over 5,000 feet of limestones and shales with highly characteristic marine Upper Triassic (Karnic and Noric) faunas, are now known to be widely distributed in Alaska. The Middle and Lower Triassic are represented by a single known occurrence of marine Middle Triassic shales and possibly also by volcanic and metamorphic beds. The more impor- tant Alaskan Triassic sections were described and correlated. Correlations were also suggested with the Triassic occurrences in British Columbia, as well as with the better known Triassic sections in California and other parts of the world. An outline was given of the events of Triassic time in the northwestern part of America. Presented in abstract extemporaneously. 120 PROCEEDINGS OF THE WASHINGTON MEETING LITHOGENESIS AND STRATIGRAPHY OF THE RED BEDS OF SOUTHEASTERN WYOMING BY S. H. KNIGHT J (Abstract) The principal object of this paper is to announce the results thus far ob- tained from a detailed study of the red beds of southern Wyoming. This study is an attempt to determine, first, the origin and source of the sediments of which the red beds are composed ; second, the physical conditions which were active during their deposition ; and, lastly, their relations to contem- poraneous and adjacent formations. The sections thus far studied in detail are exposed along the eastern flank of the Medicine Bow Mountains and along the western flank of the Laramie Mountains. This region affords a good opportunity for a study of this nature, inasmuch as there is a striking change in the lithological character of the lower half of red-bed series, as first brought out by my father, W. C. Knight, and later emphasized by Darton. The change in lithological character throws considerable light on the direc- tion from which the material was derived and the distance which it has been transported. Along the eastern flank of the Medicine Bow Range the lower half of the red-bed series (Casper formation) consists of about equal amounts of conglomeratic arkose and sandstones, with a very minor development of shale, while the same formation 20 miles to the east, along the western flank of the Laramie Range, exhibits in one section, which may be taken as typical, the following: arkose, 2 per cent; sandstone, 61 per cent; shale, 22 per cent, and limestone, 15 per cent. The total thicknesses of the formations in the two localities are 710 feet and 6S7 feet respectively. Owing to the size, angu- larity, and freshness of the feldspars in the conglomeratic arkoses, one may say that the material has not been derived from any great distance ; this, to- gether with the fact that these arkoses are practically wanting in the Laramie Range section, leads one to believe that the material had its origin to the west, probably from the region now occupied, in part at least, by the Medicine Bow Mountains. The evidence for the upper half of the series is not so clear, but it is hoped that some petrographical and mechanical analyses now being conducted will throw some new light on the problem. We may now turn to the physical conditions which influenced the deposition of the red beds in this region. The evidence points to a continental origin for a large part of the series. Torrential, fluvatile, and eolian deposits have been recognized. The evidence for a continental interpretation may be summed up as follows: (1) Lack of continuity in sections measured at short intervals: (2) channeling to a depth of 10 or more feet; in one section seven erosion intervals were noted within 450 feet of the base of the section; (3) the ever- prevailing cross-bedding of both the torrential and eolian type: (4) the char- acter of the material; (5) color; (6) lack of marine fossils. In this con- nection I wish to call attention to a striking conglomerate 150 feet from the base of the series, in an exposure on Sand Creek, Albany County, Wyoming. This conglomerate has a thickness of 34 feet and consists for the most part of water-worn pebbles and boulders of an igneous rock nature, the maximum 1 Introduced by A. W. Graban. ABSTRACTS AND DISCUSSIONS OF PAPERS 121 diameter of the larger boulders measuring 10 inches. Embedded near the base of this conglomerate were found a series of sandstone blocks, the largest of which measured 3 feet S inches by 7 feet 6 inches in its longest and shortest diameters. Thirty of these blocks were counted in 200 feet of outcrop. The material of which these blocks are composed consists of a fine-grained, evenly bedded, friable, red sandstone. These blocks are very angular in outline and the bedding planes of the various blocks are tipped at all angles. They present a strong contrast to the well rounded, smooth, hard pebbles and boulders with which they are embedded. It is evident from the size and angular outline, together with the friable nature of the sandstone, that these blocks have not been carried laterally any great distance, unless they can be conceived to have been floated or rafted by ice action. A careful search was made for some evidence of ice activities in the conglomerate, but none was found. In seeking for an interpretation which will account for the presence of these blocks in such a position, we have only to turn to some interesting facts recorded higher in the same section. It might be well to note that the lower 500 feet of the section, in which these blocks occur, is composed of heavy beds of a coarse sandy to conglomeratic arkose, interbedded with a number of thinner bands of fine-grained red sandstone, the materials of which are indistinguishable from those comprising the above-mentioned blocks. At a height of 330 feet from the base of the section one of these sandstone members was found to have a uniform thickness of 7 feet. Some 18 feet above this member (348 feet from the base) a second sandstone member, having a maximum thickness of 10 feet, was found to be channeled to a depth of 5 feet. At a distance of 370 feet from the base two large sandstone blocks, having regular bases on the same horizontal plane, were found to be completely inclosed by coarse arkose. The largest of these two blocks measured 26 feet long and 4 feet thick. Lastly, at a height of 416 feet from the base four sandstone blocks, all with regular bases in the same horizontal plane, were found completely inclosed by coarse arkose. The largest of this set measured 2 feet 6 inches in thickness, while the distance between the extreme ends of the two outer blocks was 50 feet. In all cases these sandstone members were found to have irregular upper sur- faces, while their lower were approximately straight, and in each set on the same horizontal plane. From the foregoing it is apparent that we are dealing in each case with what was originally a continuous sandstone member, which, with the exception of the case noted at a height of 330 feet, has been channeled previous to the deposition of the overlying arkose members. In the cases noted from 370 and 416 feet from the base this channeling has cut completely through the beds, thus permitting the overlying and underlying arkose mem- bers to come together. We may carry this development a step further and assume that during a period of exceptional torrential activity, when coarse conglomerates were being deposited, such sandstone remnants of preexisting beds may have been undermined by the lateral cutting of a stream and tum- bled into the river bed, where they would be deposited along with the pebbles and boulders being swept down by the torrent. This occurrence will be de- scribed more fully in a subsequent paper. As to the stratigraphical relationships and age of this red-bod series, two points brought out by this research might be mentioned. First, that all of the limestone members (some ten having been recognized), which tend to repk -e 122 PROCEEDINGS OP THE WASHINGTON MEETING the red beds to the east, have yielded marine fossils. These fossils are now being studied in the Taleontological Laboratories at Columbia University. This fauna substantiates the previously recognized Pennsylvania age of these limestones. In the Red Mountain region, near the Wyoming-Colorado bound- ary line, a thin red conglomerate was noted 177 feet below the base of the overlying Morrison shale. This conglomerate contains numerous bone frag- ments, mostly of a water-worn nature ; but after a two-day search the writer was rewarded by the finding of a complete limb bone, the nature of which is yet undetermined. It is anticipated that this horizon, which was recognized in two sections 30 miles apart, will yield better material when thoroughly examined. Presented by title in the absence of the author. EXPERIMENT IN THE GRAPHIC PRESENTATION OF THE ECONOMIC GEOLOGY OF BEDDED DEPOSITS BY GEORGE H. ASHLEY (Abstract) Aii attempt to present, by means of charts and maps, all of the known data concerning the resources of an area, so that, without the text, which in the main is confined to an explanation of the charts and maps, the reader may determine for himself the position on or under the surface, probable thickness, etcetera, of any and all beds of coal, clay, limestone, iron, etcetera, at any point in the area, so far as the data on hand warrant any conclusions. Presented in abstract extemporaneously. BRECCIATION EFFECTS IN THE SAINT LOUIS LIMESTONE BY FRANCIS M. VAN TUYL T (Abstract) The Saint Louis limestone, as developed in southeastern Iowa and adjacent parts of Illinois and Missouri, is frequently so badly brecciated and disturbed that all semblance of the original structure is lost. The character and cause of this disturbance has until the present never been fully investigated, although it has been commented on by nearly all geologists who have examined the formation even casually. Recent study of the Saint Louis has made necessary considerable revision of the formation as defined in previous reports. It is now known that the arenaceo-magnesian limestone sometimes shown at its base and formerly in- eluded with it is a distinct formation of the horizon of the Spergen limestone. This has been shown to be both physically and faunally distinct and to be separated from the true Saint Louis by a disconformity. Moreover, the Pella member, which was formerly regarded as the topmost subdivision of the Saint Louis, is also formationally distinct. This bears a good Sainte Genevieve fauna and is separated from the true Saint Louis be- 1 Introduced by T. E. Savage. ABSTRACTS AND DISCUSSIONS OF PAPERS 123 neatli by a disconformity of considerable magnitude. It possesses a character- istic basal sandstone. As at present restricted, therefore, the Saint Louis represents only about one-half of the strata originally referred to it, or about 50 to 60 feet of limestone. In southeastern Iowa the formation, as revised, is divisible into two well marked portions, which in their typical development are of about equal thick- ness. These are everywhere separated from each other by a slight discon- formity. The lowermost of these is usually dolomitic, either wholly or in part, and the lower portion of the upper one is sometimes so. To the north- westward the upper division soon disappears, but the lower one continues to the north-central part of the State, overlapping older and older formations, until at Humboldt it is found resting on beds of Kinderhook age. Where undolomitized, both divisions of the Saint Louis consist typically of line-grained, compact, brittle, gray limestone, which breaks with a subeon- choidal fracture. Beds of granular limestones a few feet in thickness, how- ever, appear at some horizons, and the lower portion of the lower division is often shaly or arenaceous, or both. The dolomitic portions, on the other hand, are buff in color, somewhat coarser in grain, and tough. These occur both as interbedded layers in the limestone and as lateral gradations or facies of lime- stone beds of considerable thickness. That the formation was deposited in shallow seas is clearly indicated by several features hereinafter noted. The brecciation effects in the formation may be grouped into three main types. First, the disturbed portion may assume the form of a small mound or reef of limestone blocks, usually in a calcareous or sandy matrix, with undis- turbed layers lapping up on its flanks and filling in its depressions. These may appear at any horizon in the formation. Second, it may appear along minor faults in the Lower Saint Louis, or be confined largely to one bed of this member, due to differential movements. The latter is accompanied occa- sionally by the tonguelike extensions of the material forced down into the beds below, especially when the latter are softer. Third, it may embrace the major part, if not the entire formation, over an area of variable but usually limited extent. In this type the disturbance has been produced by mashing on a large scale, and the brecciation is often associated with folds and over- thrust faults of small magnitude. The Pella beds are also involved to a slight extent in this disturbance, but in no instances have the underlying formations been found to exhibit signs of this type of deformation. Regarding the origin of the brecciation, at least three periods of disturbance are believed to have operated in its production. The mounds or reef-like masses of the first type are believed to have been formed during the first period under conditions of violent wave action, possibly induced by local shallowing of the sea during deposition. The presence of local discontinuities in the formation and of cross-bedded lime sands supposedly formed by the grinding up of layers already deposited is in favor of this view. Other fea- tures which suggest wave action at the time of deposition are contemporaneous erosion phenomena, wave-marks, and cross-bedding. The brecciation of the second type was formed during the second period of deformation. The importance of this can not be definitely evaluated, since its effects are often overshadowed by the disturbance of the third type. But that this disturbance is distinct from the third is indicated by the fact that 124 PROCEEDINGS OF THE WASHINGTON MEETING dolomitization intervened between the two. Thus the reefs produced by the first disturbance and the shattered areas and fracture lines produced by the second are often either wholly undolomitized or are very imperfectly altered, while the undisturbed limestone about them is uniformly dolomitized. This proves that dolomitization succeeded the first and second periods of disturbance. But a later disturbance involves both the poorly dolomitized areas and the uniformly dolomitized ones, and a later series of fractures cuts the earlier ones. Furthermore, the fact that dolomitization never affects the topmost lime- stone layers of the Saint Louis nor any layers of the Pella indicates that the alteration took place prior to the close of the Saint Louis. Now, since the brecciation of the second type is known to have taken place still earlier, and it is known to be confined to the Lower Saint Louis, it seems probable that this shattering may be related to the uplift which brought tbis division to a close. The third period of disturbance was by far the most important. To this is ascribed the extensive mashing and shearing effects and the overthrust fault- ing on a small scale so common in the formation. This was influenced to a large extent by the effects, of the preceding disturbances, thereby obscuring to a large degree the evidence of these. That the deformation which produced this is post-Pella, but pre-Pennsylvanian in age, is indicated by the fact that blocks of Pella limestone have been found sheared down into lower beds, and thus preserved at a locality where Pennsylvanian sandstone generally rests disconformably on these beds of a lower horizon. The general parallelism of the strike of the faults and of the tilted layers formed at this time with certain anticlines in the region, notably the Benton- sport anticline which trends approximately north 68° west, suggests a common mode of origin of these two types of deformation. Presented by title in the absence of the author. VOTE OF THANKS The following resolution presented by Professor Fairchild was adopted : "Resolved, That the sincere and hearty thanks of the Society be extended to the members of the local committee who have made the efficient and satis- factory arrangements for this large and very successful meeting, especially Messrs. T. W. Vaughan and A. C. Spencer, in general charge of the local com- mittees, and the chairmen of the subcommittees, Messrs. L. W. Stephenson, r. S. Smith, F. L. Ransome, Whitman Cross, and E. S. Bastin. "Resolved, That the Society express its thanks to the George Washington University for the use of this building as a place of meeting." The Society adjourned at 5.20 o'clock p. m. REGISTER OF THE MEETING 125 Register of the Washington Meeting, 1915 FELLO WH Frank D. Adams William C. Alden Henry M. Ami George H. Ashley Wallace W. Atwood J. Austin Bancroft Joseph Barrell Florence Bascom R. S. Bassler E. S. Bastin George F. Becker Charles. P. Berkey Edward W. Berry S. W. Beyer Eliot Blackweldei: John M. Boutavell Alfred Hulse Brooks H. A. Buehler Ci-iarles Butts D. D. Cairnes H. D. Campbell Maries R, Campbell Charles Camsell Stephen R. CAPrs Ermine C. Case George H. Chadwick William B. Clark John M. Clarke H. F. Cleland Arthur P. Coleman Arthur J. Collier Henry P. Cushing Reginald A. Daly N. H. Darton William M. Davis Joseph S. Diller Richard E. Dodge John A. Dresser Charles R. Dryer Herman L. Fair child Clarence N. Fenner Cassius A. Fisher August F. Foerste L. C. Glenn Amadeus W. Grabau John S. Grasty Louis C. Graton Baird Halberstadt William H. Hobbs William J. Holland William 0. Hotchkiss Ernest Howe Ellsworth Huntington J. P. Iddings John D. Irving Thomas A. Jaggar George F. Kay Frank J. Katz Arthur Keith Edward M. Kindle Edwin Kirk Cyril W. Knight F. H. Knoavlton Adolph Knopf Henry B. Kummel Alfred C. Lane Willis T. Lee J. Volney Lewis Frederic B. Loomis Samuel W. McCallie H. D. McCaskey George R. Mansfield Curtis F. Marbut Francois E. Matthes Walter C. Mendenhall George P. Merrill 126 PROCEEDINGS OF THE WASHINGTON MEETING Herbert E. Merwin Arthur M. Miller WlLLETT G. MlLLER William John Miller Fred H. Mofpit Elwood S. Moore Cleophas C. O'Harra Henry F. Osborn Sidney Paige Frederick B. Peck R. A. F. Penrose George W. Perkins William C. Phalen Joseph Hyde Pratt Louis M. Prindle Frederick S. Eansome Chester A. Reeds William North Rice George B. Richardson Heinrich Ries Rudolph Ruedemann Rollin 1). Salisbury Frank C. Schrader Charles Sci-iuchert Alfred R. Schultz William B. Scott E. H. Sellards Eugene W. Shaw H. W. Stumer William J. Sinclair Eugene A. Smith George 0. Smith J. W. Spencer J. Stanley-Brown Timothy W. Stanton Clinton R. Staupfer Lloyd W. Stephenson Ralph W. Stone George W. Stose C. K. Swartz Stephen Taber James E. Talmage Frank B. Taylor Jo han A. Udden E. 0. Ulrich Frank R. Van Horn Gilbert Van Ingen Charles D. Walcott Henry S. Washington Thomas L. Watson Carroll H. Wegemann Stuart Weller Lewis G. Westgate David White I. C. White George R. Wieland John E. Wolfe J. B. Woodworth FELLOWS-ELECT Thomas C. Brown Edgar T. Wherry In addition to the foregoing, there were registered at the meeting 17 members of the Paleontological Society and 101 visitors. OFFICEBS, COEEESPONDENTS, AND FELLOWS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF AMEEICA OFFICERS FOR 1916 President : John M. Clarke, Albany, N. Y. Vice-Presidents: J. P. Iddings, Brinklow, Md. Harry Fielding Eeid, Baltimore, Md. Eudolph Euedemann, Albany, 1ST. Y. Secretary : Edmund Otis Hovey, American Museum of Natural History, New York, N. Y. Treasurer: Wm. Bullock Clark, Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Md. Editor: J. Stanley-Brown, 26 Exchange Place, New York, N. Y. Librarian: F. E. Van Horn, Cleveland, Ohio Councilors : (Term expires 1916) E. A. F. Penrose, Jr., Philadelphia, Pa. W. W. Atwood, Cambridge, Mass. (Term expires 1917) Charles K. Leiti-i, Madison, Wis. Thomas L. Watson, Charlottesville, Va. (Term expires 1918) Frank B. Taylor, Fort Wayne, Ind. Charles P. Berkey, New York, N. Y. X— Bull. Geol. Soc. Am., Vol. 27, 1915 (127) 128 PROCEEDINGS OP THE WASHINGTON MEETING MEMBERSHIP, 1916 CORRESPONDENTS Charles Barrois, Lille, France. December, 1909. W. C. Brogger, Christiania, Norway. December, 1909. Giovanni Capellini, Bologna, Italy. December, 1910. Baron Gerhard De Geer, Stockholm, Sweden. December, 1910. Sir Archibald Geikie, Hasslemere, England. December, 1909. Albert Heim, Zurich, Switzerland. December, 1909. Emanuel Kayser, Marburg, Germany. December, 1909. W. Kilian, Grenoble, France. December, 1912. J. J. H. Teall, London, England. December, 1912. Emil Tietze, Vienna, Austria. December, 1910. FELLOWS indicates Original Fellow (see article III of Constitution) Cleveland Abbe, Jr., U. S. Weather Bureau, Washington, D. C. August, 1899 Frank Dawson Adams, McGill University, Montreal, Canada. Dec, 1SS9. George I. Adams, 17 San T'iao Hutung, Peking, China. December, 1902. Jose Guadalupe Aguilera, Instituto Geologico, Mexico, Mexico. Aug., 1 890. William Clinton Alden, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. De- cember, 1909. Truman H. Aldrich, Birmingham, Ala. May, 1889. John A. Allan, University of Alberta, Strathcona, Canada. December, 1914. R. C. Allen, State Geologist, Lansing, Mich. December, 1911. Henry M. Ami, Strathcona Park, Ottawa, Canada. December, 1S89. Frank M. Anderson, State Mining Bureau, 2604 Mtna St., Berkeley, Cal. June, 1902. Robert Van Vleck Andersox, 7 Richmond Terrace, Whitehall, S. W., London, England. December, 1911. Ralph Arnold, 923 Union Oil Building, Los Angeles, Cal. December, 1904. George Hall Ashley, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. Aug., 1895. Wallace Walter Atwood, Harvard University, Cambridge, Mass. Dec, 1909. Rufus Mather Bagg, Jr., Lawrence College, Appleton, Wis. December, 1896. Harry Foster Bain, 734 Salisbury House, London, E. O, England. Dec, 1895. Manley Benson Baker, School of Mining, Kingston, Ontario. Dec, 1911. S. Prentiss Baldwin, 2930 Prospect Ave., Cleveland, Ohio. August, 1895. Sydney H. Ball, 71 Broadway, New York City. December, 1905. Joseph A. Bancroft, McGill University, Montreal, Canada. December, 1914. Erwin Hinckley Barbour, University of Nebraska, Lincoln, Neb. Dec, 1S96. Joseph Barrell, Yale University, New Haven, Conn. December, 3902. George H. Barton, Boston Society of Natural History, Boston, Mass. Au gust, 1890. Florence Bascom, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. Aug., 1894. Ray Smith Bassler, U. S. National Museum, Washington, D. C. Dec. 1906 Edson Sunderland Bastin, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. De- cember, 1909. LIST OF MEMBERS 129 William S. Bayley, University of Illinois, Urbana, 111. December, 1888. ♦George F. Becker, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. Joshua W. Beede, Indiana University, Blooinington, Ind. December, 1902. Robert Bell, Geological Survey, Department of Mines, Ottawa, Canada. May. 1889. Charles P. Berkey, Columbia University, New York, N. Y. August, 1901. Edward Wilber Berry, Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Md. Dec, 1909. Samuel Walker Beyer, Iowa Agricultural College, Ames, Iowa. Dec, 189G. Arthur B. Bibbins, Goucber College, Baltimore, Md. December, 1903. Eliot Blackwelder, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wis. Dec, 190S. John M. Boutwell, 1323 De la Vine St., Santa Barbara, Cal. Dec, 1905. John Adams Bownocker, Ohio State University, Columbus, Ohio. Dec, 1904 *John C. Branner, Lelaud Stanford, Jr., University, Stanford University, Cal Edwin Bayer Branson, University of Missouri, Columbia, Mo. Dec, 1911. Albert Perry Brigham, Colgate University, Hamilton, N. Y. December, 1893. Reginald W. Brock, University of British Columbia, Vancouver, B. C. De- cember, 1904. Alfred Hulse Brooks, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. Aug., 1899. Amos P. Brown, University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia, Pa. Dec, 1905. Barnum Brown, American Museum of Natural History, New York, N. Y. De cember, 1910. Charles Wilson Brown, Brown University, Providence, R. I. Dec, 1908^ Thomas Clachar Brown, Bryn Mawr College, Bryn Mawr, Pa. Dec, 1915. Henry Andrew Buehler, Rolla, Mo. December, 1909. Bert S. Butler, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. December, 1912 G. Montague Butler, College of Mines, Tucson, Arizona. December, 1911. Charles Butts, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. December, 1912. De Lorme Donaldson Cairnes, Geological Survey Branch, Department of Mines. Ottawa, Canada. December, 1912. Fred Harvey Hall Calhoun, Clemson College, S. C. December, 1909. Frank C. Calkin, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. Dec, 1914. Henry Donald Campbell, Washington and Lee University, Lexington, Va. May, 1889. Marius R. Campbell, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. Aug., 1892. Charles Camsell, Geological Survey of Canada, Ottawa, Canada. Decem- ber, 1914. Stephen Reid Capps, Jr., U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. Dec. 1911. Frank Carney, Granville, Ohio. December, 1908. Ermine C. Case, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Mich. December. 1901 George Halcott Chadwick, University of Rochester, Rochester, N. Y. De- cember, 1911. Rollin T. Chamberlin, University of Chicago, Chicago, 111. December, 1913. *T. C. Chamberlin, University of Chicago, Chicago, III. Clarence Raymond Claghorn, Tacoma, Wash. August, 1891. Charles H. Clapp, University of Arizona, Tucson, Arizona. December, 1914. Frederick G. Clapp, 120 Broadway, New York, N. Y. December, 1905. *William Bullock Clark, Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Md. John Mason Clarke, Albany, N. Y. December, 1897. 130 PROCEEDINGS OF THE WASHINGTON MEETING Herdman F. Cleland, Williams College, Williainstown, Mass. Dec, 1905. J. Morgan Clements, 20 Broad St., New York City. December, 1894. Collier Cobb, University of North Carolina, Chapel Hill, N. C. Dec, 1894. Arthur P. Coleman, Toronto University, Toronto, Canada. December, 189G. George L. Collie, Beloit College, Beloit, Wis. December, 1897. Arthur J. Collier, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. June, 1902. Charles Wilfokd Cook, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Mich. Decem- ber, 1915. Eugene Coste, 1943 11th St., West, Calgary, Alberta, Canada. Dec, 1906. Alja Robinson Crook, State Museum of Natural History, Springfield, 111. December, 1898. *William O. Crosby, Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass. Whitman Cross, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. May, 18S9. Garry E. Culver, 1104 Wisconsin St., Stevens Point, Wis. December, 1891. Edgar R. Cumings, Indiana University, Bloomington, Ind. August, 1901. *Henry P. Gushing, Western Reserve University, Cleveland, Ohio.. Reginald A. Daly, Harvard University, Cambridge, Mass. December, 1905. Edward Salisbury Dana, Yale University, New Haven, Conn. Dec, 1908. *Nelson H. Darton, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. Charles Albert Davis, U. S. Bureau of Mines, Washington, D. C. Dec, 1910 *William M. Davis, Harvard University, Cambridge, Mass. Arthur Louis Day, Geophysical Laboratory, Carnegie Institution, Washing- ton, D. C. December, 1909. David T. Day, 1333 F St. N. W.. Washington, D. C. August, 1891. Bashford Dean, Columbia University, New York, N. Y. December, 1910. Frank Wilbridge De Wolf, Urbana, 111. December, 1909. * Joseph S. Diller, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. Edward V. d'Invilliers, 518 Walnut St., Philadelphia, Pa. December, 1SS8. Richard E. Dodge, Teachers' College, New York, N. Y. August, 1897. Noah Fields Drake, Fayetteville, Arkansas. December, 1898. John Alexander Dresser, 326 Notre Dame de Grace Ave., Montreal, Canada. December, 1906. Charles R. Dryer, Oak Knoll, Fort Wayne, Ind. August, 1S97. *Edwin T. Dumble, 2003 Main St., Houston, Texas. Arthur S. Eakle, University of California, Berkeley, Cal. December, 1S99. Charles R. Eastman, American Museum of Natural History, New York. N. Y. December, 1895. Edwin C. Eckel, Munsey Building, Washington, D. C. December, 1905. *Benjamin K. Emerson, Amherst College, Amherst, Mass. William Harvey Emmons, University of Minnesota, Minneapolis, Minn. De- cember, 1912. John Eyerman, Oakhurst, Easton, Pa. August, 1891. Harold W. Fairbanks, Berkeley, Cal. August, 1892. ♦Herman L. Fairchild, University of Rochester, Rochester, N. Y. Oliver C. Farrington, Field Museum of Natural History, Chicago, 111. De- cember, 1895. Nevin M. Fenneman, University of Cincinnati, Cincinnati, Ohio. Dec, 1904. Clarence Norman Fenner, Geophysical Laboratory, Washington, D. C. De- cember, 1911, LIST OP MEMBERS 131 Cassius Asa Fisher, 711 Ideal Building, Denver, Colo. December, 1908. August F. Foerste, 12S Rockwood Ave., Dayton, Ohio. December, 1899. William Ebenezer Ford, Sheffield Scientific School, New Haven, Conn. De- cember, 1915. Myron Leslie Fuller, 131 State St., Boston, Mass. December, 1898. Henry Stewart Gane, Wonalancet, New Hampshire. December, 1896. James H. Gardner, 1014 Daniel Building, Tulsa, Oklahoma. December, 1911. Russell D. George, University of Colorado, Boulder, Colo. December, 1900. *Grove K. Gilbert, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. Adam Capen Gill, Cornell University, Ithaca, N. Y. December, 1888. L. C. Glenn, Vanderbilt University, Nashville, Tenn. June, 1900. James Walter Goldthwait, Dartmouth College, Hanover, N. H. Dec, 1909. Charles H. Gordon, University Library, University of Tennessee, Knoxville, Tenn. August, 1893. Clarence E. Gordon, Massachusetts Agricultural College, Amherst, Mass. December, 1913. Charles Newton Gould, 408 Terminal Bldg., Oklahoma City, Okla. Decem- ber, 1904. Amadeus W. Grabau, Columbia University, New York, N. Y. December, 1S98, Walter Granger, American Museum of Natural History, New York, N. Y. December, 1911. Ulysses Sherman Grant, Northwestern University, Evanston, 111. Dec, 1890. John Sharshall Grasty, University of Virginia, University, Va. Dec, 1911. Louis C. Graton, Harvard University, Cambridge, Mass. December, 1913. Herbert E. Gregory, Yale University, New Haven, Conn. August, 1901. George P. Grimsley, Geological Survey of West Virginia, Martinsburg, W. Va. August, 1893. Leon S. Griswold, Plymouth, Mass. August, 1902. Frederic P. Gulliver, 1112 Morris Bldg., Philadelphia, Pa. August, 1895. William F. E. R. Gurley, University of Chicago,' Chicago, 111. Dec, 1914. Arnold Hague, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. May, 1889. Baird Halberstadt, Pottsville, Pa. December, 1909. Gilbert D. Harris, Cornell University, Ithaca, ft. Y. December, 1903. John Burchmore Harrison. Georgetown, British Guiana. ~ June, 1902. Chris. A. Hartnagel, Education Building, Albany, N. Y. December, 1913. John B. Hastings, 1480 High St., Denver, Colo. May, 1889. *Erasmuth Haworth, University of Kansas, Lawrence, Kans. Ray Vernon Hennen, West Virginia Geological Survey, Morgantown, W. Va. December, 1914. Oscar H. Hershey, Kellogg, Idaho. December, 1909. Richard R. Hice, Beaver, Pa. December, 1903. *Robert T. Hill, Federal Bldg., Los Angeles, Cal. Richard C. Hills, Denver, Colo. August, 1894. Henry Hinds, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. December, 1912. *Charles H. Hitchcock, 2376 Oahu Ave., Honolulu, Hawaiian Islands. William Herbert Hobbs, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Mich. August 1891. *Levi Holbrook, P. O. Box 536, New York, N. Y. Roy J. Holden, Virginia Polytechnic Institute, Blacksburg, Va. Dec, 1914. 132 PROCEEDINGS OF THE WASHINGTON MEETING William Jacob Holland, Carnegie Museum, Pittsburgh, Pa. December, 1910. Arthur Hollick, Staten Island Association of Arts and Sciences, New Brighton, S. I. August, 1898. Thomas C. Hopkins, Syracuse University, Syracuse, N. Y. December, 1894. William Otis Hotchkiss, State Geologist, Madison, Wis. December, 1911. *Edmund Otis Hovey, American Museum of Natural History, New York, N. Y. Ernest Howe, 77 Rhode Island Ave., Newport, R. I. December, 1903. George D. Hubbard, Oberlin College, Oberlin, Ohio. December, 1914. Lucius L. Hubbard, Houghton, Mich. December, 1894. Walter F. Hunt, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Mich. December, 1914. Ellsworth Huntington, 222 Highland St., Milton, Mass. Louis Hussakof, American Museum of Natural History, New York, N. Y. December, 1910. Joseph P. Iddings, Brinklow, Md. May, 18S9. John D. Irving, Yale University, New Haven, Conn. December, 1905. A. Wendell Jackson, 9 Desbrosses St., New York, N. Y. December, 1888. Robert T. Jackson, 195 Bay State Road, Boston, Mass. August, 1894. Thomas Augustus Jaggar, Jr., Hawaiian Volcano Observatory, Territory of Hawaii, U. S. A. December, 1906. Mark S. W. Jefferson, Michigan State Normal College, Ypsilanti, Mich. De- cember, 1904. Edward C. Jeffrey, Harvard University, Cambridge, Mass. December, 1914. Albert Johannsen, University of Chicago, Chicago, 111. December, 1908. Douglas Wilson Johnson, Columbia University, New York, N. Y. Dec, 1906. Alexis A. Julien, South Harwich, Mass. May, 1889. Frank James Katz, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. Dee., 1912. George Frederick Kay, State University of Iowa, Iowa City, Iowa. Dec, 1908. Arthur Keith, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. May, 1889. *James F. Kemp, Columbia University, New York, N. Y. Charles Rollin Keyes, 944 Fifth St., Des Moines, Iowa. August,- 1890. Edward M. Kindle, Victoria Memorial Museum, Ottawa, Canada. Dec, 1905. Charles Townsend Kirk, University of New Mexico, Albuquerque, New Mexico. December, 1915. Edwin Kirk, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. December, 1912. Cyril Workman Knight, Toronto, Ontario, Canada. December, 1911. Adolph Knopf, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. December, 1911. Frank H. Knowlton, U. S. National Museum, Washington, D. C. May, 1889. Edward Henry Kraus, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Mich. June, 1902. Henry B. KcImmel, Trenton, N. J. December, 1895. *George F. Kunz, 401 Fifth Ave., New York, N. Y. George Edgar Ladd, State College, N. M. August, 1891. Lawrence Morris Lambe, Department of Mines, Ottawa, Canada. Dec, 1911. Henry Landes, University of Washington, University Station, Seattle, Wash. December, 1908. Alfred C. Lane, Tufts College, Mass. December, 18S9. Esper S. Larsen, Jr., U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. Dec, 1914. Andrew C. Lawson, University of California, Berkeley, Cal. May, 1889. Willis Thomas Lee, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. Dec, 1903. James H. Lees, Iowa Geological Survey, Des Moines, Iowa. December, 1914. LIST OF MEMBERS 133 Charles K. Leith, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wis. Dec, 1902. Arthur G. Leonard, State University of North Dakota, Grand Forks, N. Dak December, 1901. Frank Leverett, Ann Arbor, Mich. August, 1890. Joseph Volney Lewis, Rutgers College, New Brunswick, N. J. Dec, 1906. William Libbey, Princeton University, Princeton, N. J. August, 1899. Waldemar Lindgren, Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass. August, 1890. Miguel A. R. Lisboa, Irrigation and Water Supply Service. Rio de Janeiro, Brazil. December, 1913. Frederick Brewster Loomis. Amherst College, Amherst, Mass. Dec, 1909. George Davis Louderback, University of California, Berkeley, Cal. June, 1902. Robert H. Loughridge, University of California, Berkeley, Cal. May, 1889. Albert P. Low, Department of Mines, Ottawa. Canada. December, 1905. Richard Swann Lull, Yale University, New Haven, Conn. December, 1909. Samuel Washington McCallie. Atlanta, Ga. December. 1909. Hiram Deyer McCaskey, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington. D. C De- cember, 1904. Richard G. McConnell, Geological and Natural History Survey of Cana'da, Ottawa. Canada. May, 1889. Donald Francis MacDonald, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. December, 1915. James Rieman Macfarlane, Woodland Road, Pittsburgh. Pa. August, 1891. William McInnes, Geological and Natural History Survey of Canada, Ot- tawa, Canada. May, 1889. Peter McKellar, Fort William, Ontario, Canada. August, 1890. George Rogers Mansfield, 2067 Park Road N. W., Washington, D. C. De- cember, 1909. Curtis F. Marbut, Bureau of Soils, Washington, D. C. August, 1897. Vernon F. Marsters, San Juancito, Honduras. C. A. August. 1892. George Curtis Martin, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. June, 1902. Lawrence Martin, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wis. December, 1909. Edward B. Mathews, Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Md. Aug., 1895. Francois E. Matthes, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. Decem- ber, 1914. W. D. Matthew, American Museum of Natural History, New York, N. Y. December, 1903. Thomas Poole Maynard, 1622 D. Hurt Bldg., Atlanta, Ga. December, 1914. P. H. Mell, 165 East 10th St., Atlanta, Ga. December, 1888. Walter C. Mendenhall, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. June, 1902. John C. Merriam, University of California, Berkeley, Cal. August, 1895. *Frederick J. H. Merrill, 631 Higgins Bldg., Los Angeles, Cal. George P. Merrill, U. S. National Museum, Washington, D. C. Dec, 18SS. Herbert E. Merwin, Geophysical Laboratory, Washington, D. C. Dec, 1914. Arthur M. Miller, State University of Kentucky, Lexington, Ky. Dec, 1897. Benjamin L. Miller, Lehigh University, South Bethlehem, Pa. Dec, 1904. Willet G. Miller, Toronto, Canada. December, 1902. William John Miller, Smith College, Northampton, Mass. December, 1909. 134 PROCEEDINGS OF THE WASHINGTON MEETING Fred Howard Moffit, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. Dec, 1912. G. A. F. Molengraaf, Technical High School, Delft, Holland. December, 1913. Henry Montgomery, University of Toronto, Toronto, Canada. Dec. 1904. Elwood S. Moore, Pennsylvania State College, State College, Pa. Dec, 1911. Malcolm John Munn, Clinton Bldg., Tulsa, Okla. December, 1909. *Frank L. Nason, West Haven, Conn. David Hale Newland, Albany, N. Y. December, 190(5. John F. Newsom, Leland Stanford, Jr., University, Stanford University, Cai. December, 1899. William H. Norton, Cornell College, Mount Vernon, Iowa. December, 1895. Charles J. Norwood, State University, Lexington, Ky. August, 1894. Ida Helen Ogilvie, Barnard College, Columbia University, New York, N. Y. December, 1906. Cleophas C. O'Harra, South Dakota School of Mines, Rapid City, S. Dak. December, 1904. Daniel Webster Ohern, University of Oklahoma, Norman, Okla. Dec, 1911. Ezequiel Ordonez, 2 a General Prim 43, Mexico, D. F., Mex. August, 1890. Edward Orton, Jr., Geological Survey of Ohio, Columbus, Ohio. Dec, 1909. Henry F. Osborn, American Museum of Natural History, New York, N. Y. August, 1894. Sidney Paige, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. December, 1911. Charles Palache, Harvard University, Cambridge, Mass. August, 1897. William A. Parks, University of Toronto, Toronto, Canada. December, 1906. * Horace B. Patton, Colorado School of Mines, Golden, Colo. Frederick B. Peck, Lafayette College, Easton, Pa. August, 1901. Richard A. F. Penrose, Jr., 460 Bullitt Bldg., Philadelphia, Pa. May, 1889. George H. Perkins, University of Vermont, Burlington, Vt. ; State Geologist. June, 1902. Joseph H. Perry, 276 Highland St., Worcester, Mass. December, 1888. Olaf August Peterson, Carnegie Museum, Pittsburgh, Pa. December, 1910. William Clifton Phalen, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. De- cember, 1912. Alexander H. Phillips, Princeton University, Princeton, N. J. Dec, 1914. Louis V. Pirsson, Yale University, New Haven, Conn. August, 1894. Joseph E. Pogue, Northwestern University, Evanston, 111. December, 1911. Joseph Hyde Pratt, North Carolina Geological Survey, Chapel Hill, N. C. December, 1898. Louis M. Prindle, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. Dec, 1912. *Charles S. Prosser, Ohio State University, Columbus, Ohio. William Frederick Pkouty, University of Alabama, University, Ala. De- cember, 1911. *Raphael Pumpelly, Newport, R. I. Albert Homer Purdue, State Geological Survey, Nashville, Tenn. Dec, 1904. Frederick Leslie Ransome, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. Au- gust, 1895. Percy Edward Raymond, Museum of Comparative Zoology, Cambridge, Mass December, 1907. Chester A. Reeds, American Museum of Natural History, New York, N. Y. December, 1913. LIST OP MEMBERS 135 Harry Fielding Reid, Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Md. Dec, 1892. William North Rice, Wesleyan University, Middletown, Conn. August, 1890. John Lyon Rich, University of Illinois, Urbana, 111. December, 1912. Charles H. Richardson, Syracuse University, Syracuse, N. Y. Dec, 1899. George Burr Richardson, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. De- cember, 1908. Heinrich Ries, Cornell University, Ithaca, N. Y. December, 1S93. Elmer S. Riggs, Field Museum of Natural History, Chicago, 111. Dec, 1911. Jesse Perry Rowe, University of Montana, Missoula, Mont. December, 1911. Rudolph Ruedemann, Albany, N. Y. December, 1905. John Joseph Ruti.edge, Experiment Station, Pittsburgh, Pa. Dec, 1911. Orestes H. St. John, 1141 Twelfth St., San Diego, Cal. May, 1889. *Rollin D. Salisbury, University of Chicago, Chicago, 111. Frederick W. Sardeson, University of Minnesota, Minneapolis, Minn. De cember, 1892. Thomas Edmund Savage, University of Illinois, Urbana, 111. December, 1907. Frank C. Schrader, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. Aug., 1901. Charles Schuchert, Yale University, New Haven, Conn. August, 1895. Alfred Reginald Schultz, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. De- cember, 1912. William B. Scott, Princeton University, Princeton, N. J. August, 1892. Arthur Edmund Seaman, Michigan College of Mines, Houghton, Mich. De- cember, 1904. Henry M. Seely, Middlebury College, Middlebury, Vt. May, 1S89. Elias H. Sellards, Tallahassee, Fla. December, 1905. Joaquim Candido da Costa Sena, State School of Mines, Ouro Preto, Brazil. December, 1908. Millard K. Shaler, 4 Bishopsgate E. C, Loudon, England. December, 1914. George Burbank Shattuck, Vassar College, Poughkeepsie, N. Y. Aug., 1899. Eugene Wesley Shaw, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. Dec, 1912. Solon Shedd, State College of Washington, Pullman, Wash. Dec, 1904. Edward M. Shepard, 1403 Benton Ave., Springfield, Mo. August, 1901. Bohumil Shimek, University of Iowa, Iowa City, Iowa. December, 1904. Hervey Woodburn Shimer, Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Boston. Mass. December, 1910. Claude Ellsworth Siebenthal, U. S. Geological Survey, Washiugton, D. C. December, 1912. *Frederick W. Simonds, University of Texas, Austin, Texas. William John Sinclair, Princeton University, Princeton, N. J. Dec, 1900. Joseph Theophilus Singewald, Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Md. December, 1911. Earle Sloan, Charleston, S. C. December, 1908. Burnett Smith, Syracuse University, Skaneateles, N. Y. December, 1911. Carl Smith, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. December, 1912. *Eugene A. Smith, University of Alabama, University, Ala. George Otis Smith, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. Aug., 1897. Philip S. Smith, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. Dec, 1909. Warren Du Pre Smith, University of Oregon, Eugene, Oregon. Dec, 1909. W. S. Tangier Smith, Lodi, Cal. June, 1902. 136 PROCEEDINGS OP THE WASHINGTON MEETING *John C. Smock, Trenton, N. J. Charles H. Smyth, Jr., Princeton University, Princeton, N. J. Aug., 1892. Henry L. Smyth, Harvard University, Cambridge, Mass. August, 1894, Arthur Coe Spencer, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. Dec, 1896. *J. W. Spencer, 2019 Hillyer Place. Washington, D. C. Frank Springer, U. S. National Museum, Washington, D. C. December, 1911. Josiah E. Spurr, Bullitt Bldg., Philadelphia, Pa. December, 1894. Joseph Stanley-Brown, 26 Exchange Place, New York, N. Y. August, 1S92. Timothy William Stanton, U. S. National Museum, Washington, D. C. Au- gust, 1891. Clinton Raymond Stauffer, University of Minnesota. Minneapolis, Minn. December, 1911. Lloyd William Stephenson, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. De- cember, 1911. *John J. Stevenson, 215 West 101st St., New York, N. Y. Ralph Walter Stone, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. Dec, 1912. George Willis Stose, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. Dec, 1908. Charles Kephart Swartz, Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Md. De- cember, 1908. Stephen Taber, University of South Carolina, Columbia, S. C. Dec, 1914. Joseph A. Taff, 781 Flood Building, San Francisco, Cal. August, 1895. Mignon Talbot, Mount Holyoke College, South Hadley, Mass. Dec, 1918. James E. Talmage, University of Utah, Salt Lake City, Utah. Dec, 1897. Frank B. Taylor, Fort Wayne, Ind. December, 1895. * James E. Todd, 1224 Rhode Island St., Lawrence, Kans. Cyrus Fisher Tolman, Jr., Leland Stanford, Jr., University, Stanford Uni- versity, Cal. December, 1909. Arthur C. Trowbridge, State University of Iowa, Iowa City, Iowa. Decem- ber, 1913. *Henry W. Turner, 209 Alaska Commercial Building, San Francisco, Cal. William H. Twenhofel, University of Kansas, Lawrence, Kans. Dec, 1913. Mayville William Twitchell, State Geological Survey, Trenton, N. J. De- cember, 1911. Joseph B. Tyrrell, Room 534, Confederation Life Building. Toronto, Canada. May, 1889. Johan A. Udden, University of Texas, Austin, Texas. August, 1897. Edward O. Ulrich, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. Dec. 1903. Joseph B. Umpleby, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. Dec, 1913. *Warren Upham, Minnesota Historical Society, Saint Paul, Minn. *Charles R. Van Hise, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wis. Frank Robertson Van Horn, Case School of Applied Science, Cleveland. Ohio. December, 1898. Gilbert van Ingen, Princeton University, Princeton, N. J. December, 1904. Thomas Wayland Vaughan, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington. D. C. Au- gust. 1896. Arthur Clifford Veach, 7 Richmond Terrace, Whitehall, S. W., London, England. December, 1906. *Anthony W. Vogdes, 2425' First St., San Diego, Cal. LIST OF MEMBERS 137 *M. Edvvaed Wadsworth, School of Mines, University of Pittsburgh. Pitts- burgh, Pa. *Charles D. Walcott, Smithsonian Institution, Washington, D. C. Thomas L. Walker, University of Toronto, Toronto, Canada. Dec, 1903. Cxiari.es H. Warren, Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass. December, 1901. Henry Stephens Washington, Geophysical Laboratory, Washington, D. C. August, 189G. Thomas L. Watson. University of Virginia, Charlottesville, Va. June, 1900. Charles E. Weaver, University of Washington, Seattle, Wash. Dec, 1913. Walter H. Weed, 29 Broadway, New York, N. Y. May, 1889. Carroll Harvey Wegemann, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. De- cember, 1912. Samuel Wei dm an, Wisconsin Geological and Natural History Survey, Madi- son, Wis. December, 1903. Stuart Weller, University of Chicago, Chicago, 111. June, 1900. Lewis G. Westgate, Ohio Wesleyan University, Delaware, Ohio. Aug., 1894. Edgar Theodore Wherry, U. S. National Museum, Washington, D. C. De- cember, 1915. David White, U. S. National Museum, Washington, D. C. May, 1S89. *Israel C. Whtte, Morgantown, W. Va. George Reber Wieland, Yale University, New Haven, Conn. December, 1910. Frank A. Wilder, North Holston, Smyth County, Va. December, 1905. *Edward H. Williams, Jr., Woodstock, VI. * Henry S. Williams, Cornell University, Ithaca, N. Y. Ira A. Williams, Oregon School of Mines, Corvallis, Ore. December, 1905. Bailey Willis, Leland Stanford, Jr., University, Cal. December, 1S89. Alfred W. G. Wilson, Department of Mines, Ottawa, Canada. June, 1902. Alexander N. Winchell, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wis. Aug., 1901. *Horace Vauglin Winchell, 826 First National Society Bldg., Minneapolis, Minn. * Arthur Winslow, 131 State St.. Boston, Mass. John E. Wolfe, Harvard University, Cambridge, Mass. December, 18S9. Joseph E. Woodman, New York University, New York, N. Y. Dec. 1905. Robert S. Woodward, Carnegie Institution of Washington, Washington, D. C. May, 1889. Jay B. Woodworth, Harvard University, Cambridge, Mass. December, 1895. Charles Will Wright, Ingurtosu. Arbus. Sardinia, Italy. December, 1909. Frederic E. Wright, Geophysical Laboratory, Carnegie Institution, Washing- ton, D. C. December, 1903. *G. Frederick Wrtght, Oberlin Theological Seminary, Oberlin, Ohio. George A. Young, Geological Survey of Canada, Ottawa, Canada. Dec. 1905. CORRESPONDENTS DECEASED Herman Crednwr. Died July 22, 1913. Edward Suesr. Died April 20, 1014. A. Michel-Levy. Died September, mil. Tii. TsciiERxvsmEw. Died Jan. 15. 1014. H. Rosenbusch. Died January 20, 1014. Ferdinand Zirkel. Died June 11, 1912. 138 PROCEEDINGS OP THE WASHINGTON MEETING FELLOWS DECEASED ♦ Indicates Original Fellow (see article III of Constitution) *Chas. A. Ashburner. Died Dec. 24, 18S9. Alfred E. Barlow. Died May 28, 1914. Charles E. Beecher. Died Feb. 14, 1904. Albert S. Bickmore. Died Aug-. 12, 1914. Wii. Phipps Blake. Died May 21, 1910. Amos Bowman. Died June 18, 1894. Ernest R. Buckley. Died Jan. 19, 1912. ♦Samuel Calvin. Died April 17, 1911. Franklin R. Carpenter. Died April 1, 1910. *J. 11. Chapin. Died March 14, 1892. *Edward VV. Clavpole. Died Aug. 17, 1901. *Theo. B. Comstock. Died July 26, 1915. George H. Cook. Died Sept. 22, 1889. *Edward D. Cope. Died April 12, 1897. Antonio Del Castillo. Died Oct. 28, 1895. * James D. Dana. Died April 14, 1895. George M. Dawson. Died March 2, 1901. Sir J. Wm. Dawson. Died Nov. 19, 1899. Orville A. Derby. Died Nov. 27, 1915. Clarence E. Ddtton. Died Jan. 4, 1912. * William B. Dwight. Died Aug. 29, 1906. ♦George II. Eldridge. Died June 29, 1905. *Samuel F. Emmons. Died March 28, 1911. Wm. M. Fontaine. Died April 29, 1913. *Albert E. Foote.' Died October 10, 1895. ♦Persifor Frazer. Died April 7, 1909. *Homer T. Fuller. Died Aug. 14, 1908. N. J. Giroux. Died November 30, 1891. *Christopher W. Hall. Died May 10, 1911. *.Iames Hall. Died August 7, 1898. John B. Hatcher. Died July 3, 1904. *Robert Hay. Died December 14, 1895. C. Willard Hayes. Died Feb. 9, 1916. *Angelo Heilprin. Died July 17, 1907. Frank A. Hill. Died July 13, 1915. * Joseph A. Holmes. Died July 13, 1915. David Hone* man. Died October 17, 1889. Died April 16, 1911. Died July 27, 1914. Died Feb. 12, 1S92. Died Jan. 15, 1902. *Edwin E. Howell. *I1orace C. Hovey. Thomas S. Hunt. *Alpheus Hyatt. *.Toseph F. James. Died March 29, 1897. Wilbur C. Knight. Died July 28, 1903. Ralph D. Lacoe. Died February 5, 1901, J. C. K. Laflamme. Died July 6, 1910. Daniel W. Langton. Died June 21, 1909. * Joseph Le Conte. Died July 6, 1901. * J. Peter Lesley. Died June 2, 1903. Henry McCalley. Died Nov. 20, 1904. *W J McGee. Died September 4, 1912. Oliver Marcy. Died March 19, 1899. Othniel C. Marsh. Died March 18, 1899. James E. Mills. Died July 25, 1901. *Henry B. Nasox. Died January 17, 1S95. *Peter Neff. Died May 11, 1903. *.Iohn S. Newberry. Died Dec. 7, 1892. William H. Niles. Died Sept. 12, 1910. *Edward Orton. Died October 16, 1899. *Amos O. Osborn. Died March, 1911. *Richard Owen. Died March 24, 1890. Samuel L. Penfield. Died Aug. 14, 1906. David P. Penhallow. Died Oct. 20, 1910. *Franklin Platt. Died July 24, 1900. William H. Pettee. Died May 26, 1904. *.Iohn W. Powell. Died Sept. 23, 1902. *Lsrael C. Russell. Died May 1, 1906. * James M. Saffokd. Died July 3, 1907. *Charles Schaeffer. Died Nov. 23, 1903. ♦Nathaniel S. Shaler. Died April 10, 1906. William J. Sutton. Died May 9, 1915. Ralph S. Tarr. Died March 21, 1912. William G. Tight. Died Jan. 15, 1910. Charles Wachsmuth. Died Feb. 7, 1896 Thomas C. Weston. Died July 20, 1910. Theodore G. White. Died July 7, 1901. ♦Robert P. Whitfield. ♦George H. Williams. ♦J. Francis Williams. Arthur B. Wilmott. ♦Alexander Wixchell. Died April 6, 1910. Died July 12, 1894. Died Nov. 9, 1891. Died May 8, 1914. Died Feb. 19, 1891. ♦Newton Winchell. Albert A. Wright. William S. Yeates. Died May 1, 1914. Died April 2, 1905. Died Feb. 19, 1908. Thomas M. Jackson. Died Feb. 3, 1912. Summary Correspondents 10 Original Fellows 44 Elected Fellows 335 Membership 389 Deceased Correspondents 6 Deceased Fellows 85 BULLETIN OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA Vol. 27, pp. 139-174 March 31, 1916 proceedings of the paleontological society PROCEEDINGS OF THE SEVENTH ANNUAL MEETING OP THE PALEONTOLOGICAL SOCIETY, HELD AT WASH- INGTON, DISTEICT OP COLUMBIA, DECEMBEE 29, 30, AND 31, 1915. R. S. Bassler, Secretary CONTENTS Page Session of Wednesday, December 29 142 Report of the Council 142 Secretary's report 142 Treasurer's report 143 Appointment of Auditing Committee 144 Election of officers and members 144 Election of new members 145 Memorial of Orville A. Derby 146 Announcements 146 Presentation of general papers 146 Presence of a median eye in trilobites [abstract] ; by Rudolph Ruedemann 146 Importance of "coral reefs" and reef deposits in the formation of Paleozoic limestone [abstract] ; by Thomas C. Brown 147 Distribution and inferred migration of American Middle and Upper Devonic corals [abstract] ; by Amadeus W. Grabau 147 Mutations of Waagen, Mutationsrichtung of Nenmayr, Mutants of De Vries : Relations of these phenomena in evolution [title] ; by Henry Fairfield Osborn 148 Systematic rank of mutations and submutations in orthogenetic series among the invertebrates [abstract] ; by Amadeus W. Grabau 148 Classification of the Tetraseptata, with some remarks on parallel- ism in development in this group : A study in orthogenesis [ab- stract] ; by Amadeus W. Grabau 148 Guelph formation of Ontario [abstract] ; by M. T. Williams 148 Presidential address by E. O. Ulrich ; The use of fossils in correlation . 149 Section of Vertebrate Paleontology 149 Phylogenetic review of extinct and recent anthropoids, with spe- cial reference to the evolution of the human dentition [ab- stract] ; by W. K. Gregory 149 (139) 140 PROCEEDINGS OF THE PALEONTOLOGICAL SOCIETY Page Additional characters of Tyrannosaurus and Ornithomiinus [ab- stract] ; by Henry Fairfield Osborn 150 Criteria for the determination of species in the Sauropods, with description of a new species of Apatosaurus [abstract] ; by diaries 0. Mook 151 Pelvis and sacrum of Camarasaurus [abstract] ; by Henry Fair- field Osborn 151 An early Pliocene Monodactylous horse [abstract] ; by Edward L. Troxell 151 Session of Thursday, December 30 152 Preliminary report of the committee on the nomenclature of the skull elements in the Tetrapoda [abstract] ; by W. K. Gregory- 152 Origin of the sternum in the reptiles and mammals [abstract] ; by S. W. Williston 152 Mounted skeleton of Ganis dims, with remarks on the methods of reconstruction of extinct animals [title] ; by W. D. Matthew.. 153 Mounted skeleton of Blastocerus pampwus — a fossil deer from Argentina [title] ; by W. D. Matthew 15.'! Skeletons of Biplodocus and Apdtasanrus in the Carnegie Museum [abstract] ; by W, J. Holland 153 Section of Invertebrate and General Paleontology 153 Summary of the results of investigations of the Floridian and Bahainan shoal-water corals [abstract] ; by T. Wayland Vaughan 154 Correlation of the Upper Cretaceous deposits of the Atlantic and Gulf Coastal Plain [abstract] ; by L. W. Stephenson 154 Session of Thursday, December 30 155 Report of the Auditing Committee 155 Mississippian section in west-central Kentucky [abstract] ; by Charles Butts 155 Stratigraphic and faunal succession of the Chester group in Illi- nois and Kentucky [abstract] ; by Stuart Weller. 156 Comparison of the Yellowstone Park algse with Algonkian forms [abstract] ; by Charles D. Walcott 156 The Chester controversy [abstract] ; by E. O. Ulrich 157 Stratigraphy of the Canadian Cordillera [abstract] ; by Lancaster D. Burling 158 New species of the Mesonacidae, with twenty-nine rudimentary segments posterior to the fifteenth [abstract] ; by Lancaster D. Burling 158 Comparison of European and American early Paleozoic formations [abstract] ; by Ainadeus W. Grabau 159 Subdivisions of the Traverse group of Michigan and its relation to other mid-Devonic formations [abstract] ; by Amadeus W. Grabau 159 Some fossil algae from the oil-yielding shales of the Green River formation of Colorado and Utah [abstract] ; by Charles A. Davis. . .' 159 CONTENTS 141 Page Former exteusion of the Devonian formations in southeastern Missouri [abstract] ; by Stuart Weller 160 Bottom control of the composition of marine faunas as illustrated by dredging in the Bay of Fundy [abstract] ; by E. M. Kindle. . 160 Register of the Washington meeting, 1915 162 Officers, correspondents, and members of the Paleontological Society 163 Minutes of the sixth annual meeting of the Pacific Coast Section of the Paleontological Society ; E. L. Packard, Secretary 168 Resolution of condolence on the death of J. C. Hawver 168 General business 168 Election of officers 169 Titles and abstracts of papers presented 109 Systematic position of several American Tertiary Lagomorp.hs [abstract] ; by Lee R. Dice 169 Pleistocene mammal fauna of Hawver Cave, a fissure deposit near Auburn, California [abstract and discussion] ; by Chester Stock 169 Fauna of the Rodeo Pleistocene [abstract] ; by John C. Merriam, Chester Stock, and C. L. Moody 169 New Miocene mammalian fauna from the Tehachapi region (ab- stract and discussion] ; by John P. Buwalda 170 The bison of Rancho La Brea ; by Asa C. Chandler 170 Structure of the posterior foot in the Mylodont sloths of Rancho La Brea [title] ; by Chester Stock 170 Recent studies on skull structure of Thallattosaurus [abstract] ; by John C. Merriam and Charles L. Camp 171 Review of the Pleistocene species, Pavo calif ornicus [abstract] ; by Loye Homes Miller 171 Hipparion-like horses of the Pacific Coast and Great Basin prov- inces [abstract] ; by John C. Merriam 171 Relationships of the invertebrates to the vertebrate faunal zones of the Pliocene Jacalitos and Etchegoin formations at Coalinga, California [abstract and discussion] ; by J. O. Nomland 172 Climatic zones in the Pliocene of the Pacific coast [abstract] ; by J. P. Smith 172 Marine Triassic invertebrate fauna from New Zealand [abstract and discussion] ; by C. T. Trechmann 172 Fauna of the Tejon group in the Cantua District of the Coalinga quadrangle, California [abstract] ; by Roy E. Dickerson 173 Fauna of the Tejon in the San Diego County [abstract] ; by Roy E. Dickerson 173 Molluscan faunas from Deadmans Island [abstract] ; by T. S. Oldroyd 173 Corals from the Cretaceous and Tertiary of California and Oregon [abstract] ; by J. O. Nomland 174 Eocene of the Lower Cowlitz River Valley, Washington [discus- sion] ; by Charles E. Weaver 174 Faunal studies in the Cretaceous of the Santa Ana Mountains of southern California [abstract] ; by Earl L. Packard 174 142 proceedings of the paleontological society Session of Wednesday, December 29 The general session of the Society was called to order at 9.30 a. m., December 29, in a lecture-room of the George Washington University Medical School, by President Edward 0. Ulrich, who, after welcoming the members to Washington, opened the business session by calling for the report of the Council. REPORT OF THE COUNCIL To the Paleontological Society in Seventli Annual Meeting assembled: The first meeting of this year's Council was held at Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, December 31, 1911, immediately following the adjourn- ment of the Society on that clay. Eoutine business and the consideration of the ticket for the following year were considered at this meeting, but since then the business of the Society has, as usual, been transacted by correspondence. The following reports of officers give a resume of the administration for the Society^ seventh year. Secretary's Report To the Council of the Paleonlological Society: The proceedings of the sixth annual meeting of the Society, held at Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, December 29, 30, and 31, 1914, have been published in volume 26, pages 141-170 of the Bulletin of the Geological Society of America, and distributed to the members in March, 1915. Besides this publication, the scientific papers of the Society published in this Bulletin during the year are eight in number and occupy the greater part of number 3 and a portion of number 4, volume 26. The Council's proposed nomination for officers and announcement that the seventh annual meeting of the Society would occur at Washington, D. C, at the invitation of the local members, were forwarded to the members on March 10, 1915. Membership.- — During the year the Society has lost by death Dr. Or- ville A. Derby, of the Geological Survey of Brazil, so well known for his long service and researches on the geology of that country. Two resig- nations have occurred during the year. The ten candidates elected at the sixth annual meeting have been placed on the rolls, making the pres- ent enrolment 164. Eight candidates are under consideration for the present meeting. Pacific Coast Section. — The sixth annual meeting of the Pacific Coast Section of the Society was held in Bacon Hall, University of California, at Berkeley, on Saturday, February 27, 1915. Eighteen papers, dealing REPORT OF THE COUNCIL 143 with both the Vertebrate and Invertebrate Paleontology and Stratigraphy of the West Coast, were read at this meeting. The minutes of this sec- tion are printed on pages 168 to 174 of this Bulletin. Of particular interest during the year was the special meeting of the Society, August 3-6, 1915, at the University of California and at Stan- ford University. This meeting included A symposium on a general consideration of the paleontological criteria used in determining time relations, participated in by Doctors Ulrich, Matthew, Schuchert, and Knowlton; (2) A comparison between the Triassic of the Pacific area and other parts of the world, under the direction of Prof. James Rerrin Smith; (3) A correlation between the Cretaceous of the Pacific area and that of other parts of the world, under the direction of Doctor Stanton; and (1) A correlation between the Miocene of the Pacific region and that of other areas of the Avorlcl, with Professor Osborn in charge. Following the scientific meeting of the Society, several excursions were made to points of paleontological and stratigraphic interest in Cali- fornia. The minutes of this special meeting have been published in the Bulletin of the Geological Society of America, volume 26, number 4, pages 409-418. Respectfully submitted, R. S. Bassler, Secretary. Washington, D. C, December 28, 1915. Treasurers Report » To the Council of the Paleontological Society: The Treasurer begs to submit the following report of the finances of the Society for the fiscal year ending December 21, 1915: RECEIPTS Cash on hand December 1, 1914 $259.98 Membership fees, 1914 (7) 21 .00 Membership fees. 1915 (73) 2i9.20 $500.18 EXPENDITURES Treasurer's office : Postage $4.50 Printing and stationery 5 . 75 $10.25 Secretary's office : Secretary's allowance 50. 00 Expenses 39 . 15 89.15 XI — Bull. Geol. Soc. Am., Vol. 27, 1915 144 PROCEEDINGS OF THE PALEONTOLOGICAL SOCIETY Pacific Coast Section : Secretary's expenses 17 . 61 17.61 $117.01 Balance on hand December 21, 1915 $383.17 Net increase in funds $123 . 10 Outstanding dues, ' 1914 (3) $9 . 00 Outstanding dues, 1915 (6) IS. 00 $27 . 00 Respectfully submitted, Richard S. Lull, Treasurer. New Haven, Connecticut, December 21, 1915. APPOINTMENT OF AUDITING COMMITTEE The appointment of a committee to audit the Treasurer's accounts being next in order, President Ulrich selected Stuart Weller and W. J. Sinclair. ELECTION OF OFFICERS AND MEMBERS The results of the ballot for officers for 1916 and election of members was the next matter of business and was announced by the Secretary as follows : OFFICERS FOR 1916 President : Rudolph Ruedemann, Albany, 1ST. Y. First Vice-President : T. Wayland Vaughan, Washington, D. C. Second Vice-President: August P. Foeeste, Dayton, Ohio Third Vice-President : E. B. Branson, Columbia, Mo. . Secretary : R. S. Bassler, Washington, D, C. Treasurer : Richard S. Lull, New Haven, Conn. Editor: Charles R. Eastman, New York City ELECTION OP MEMBERS 145 MEMBERS L. A. Adams, Colorado State Teachers' College, Greeley, Colo. Edwin J. Armstrong, 954 West Ninth street, Erie, Pa. C. Wythe Cooke, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. J. J. Galloway, Dept. of Geology, Indiana University, Bloomington, Ind. R. C. Moore, Dept. of Geology, University of Chicago, Chicago, 111. William H. Shideler, Dept. of Geology, Miami University, Oxford, Ohio. A. O. Thomas, Dept. of Geology, University of Iowa, Iowa City, Iowa. Wendell P. Woodring, Dept. of Geology, Johns Hopkins Univ., Baltimore, Md. ELECTION OF NEW MEMBERS The Secretary then annomiced that the Council favored the election to membership in the Paleontological Society of Dr. Willis T. Lee and Dr. C. E. Weaver, both FelloAvs of the Geological Society of America. Dr. John M. Clarke moved that Prof. Joseph Barrell also be elected to mem- bership in the Society. After unanimous vote of the members present, the Secretary was instructed to add the names of Doctor Lee, Doctor Weaver, and Professor Barrell to the Society's rolls. The President next directed the attention of the Society to two nomi- nations for membership — Homer Hamlin and Eeginald C. Stover — which had been acted on favorably by the Council. Before the election of these two was concluded, Professor Weller proposed the name of K. F. Mather, Professor Van Ingen that of B. F. Howell, and Doctor G-rabau that of S. H. Knight. After a brief discussion, it was voted by all mem- bers present that the by-laws be suspended, and that these five nominees be elected to membership in the Society. The names and a brief state- ment regarding the members just elected follow: Homer Hamlin, City Engineer, Los Angeles. Cal. Engaged in invertebrate paleontology. Proposed by J. C. Merriam, E. L. Packard, and Ralph Arnold. Benjamin F. Howell, B. S. (1913) and A. M. (1915) Princeton University. Instructor of geology at Princeton University. Engaged in invertebrate paleontology, especially in study of Cambrian faunas. Proposed by Gil- bert Van Ingen and William J. Sinclair. Samuel H. Knight, A. B. University of Wyoming. Graduate student, Depart- ment of Geology, Columbia University, and assistant professor of geology, University of Wyoming. Engaged in stratigraphic paleontology. Pro- posed by A. W. Grabau, Marjorie O'Connel, and R. S. Bassler. Kirtley F. Mather, B. S. (1909) Denison, Ph. D. (1915) Chicago, assistant professor of geology, Queen's University, Kingston, Ontario. Engaged in invertebrate paleontology. Proposed by Stuart Weller and R. S. Bassler. Reginald C. Stover, Geologist, Standard Oil Building, San Francisco, Cal. Engaged in vertebrate and invertebrate paleontology. Proposed by Ralph Arnold, J. C. Merriam, and E. L. Packard. 146 PROCEEDINGS OF THE PALEONTOLOGICAL SOCIETY MEMORIAL OF ORV1LLE A. DERBY Dr. John M. Clarke then spoke of the loss to the Society by the death of Dr. Orville A. Derby, Chief of the Geological Survey of Brazil, and gave a personal appreciation of his character and life work resulting from his long acquaintance with Doctor Derby and from their mutual interest in Devonian paleontology. The memorial to Doctor Derby by Professor Branner is published as pages 15-21 of this number. ANNOUNCEMENTS It was then announced that the Council had voted favorably on the request of the Treasurer to transfer $300 of the Society's funds from the Second National Bank of New Haven to the Connecticut Savings Bank of the same place in order that this sum should bear interest. No further business remaining, the Society proceeded in general ses- sion to the reading of the papers on general paleontology. PRESENTATION OF GENERAL PAPERS The first paper of the session was presented by the author and illus- trated by lantern slides and specimens; 10 minutes. PRESENCE OF A MEDIAN EYE IN TRILOBITES BY KUDOLPH EUEDEMANN (Abstract) The median or parietal eye which is present in lower crustaceans and also in the phyllopods with which the trilohites are usually compared is. in the majority of the Ordovicic and Siluric trilohites. recognizable in a tubercle on the glabella. This tubercle has long been known to exist in all asaphids on otherwise wholly smooth carapaces (see Schmidt, Revision der ostbaltischen silurischen Trilohites) and is well known in Cryptolithus (Trinueleus) and others; its regular occurrence is recorded in the literature of more than thirty genera. It has been found by us to possess two distinct lenses, similar to the median eye of the eurypterids, in Ptyclwpyge rimulosa; in others, as in Crypto- lithus, but one lens; and in most cases it is simply a transparent spot of the crust, often thinner, sometimes thickened lenslike, more or less elevated, corre- sponding in these features to the prevailing character of the median eye in the other crustaceans. Even as simple tubercle its visual function and nature of a median eye is proven by its position between the lateral eyes, as in the other arthropods — that is, nearest to the brain ganglia — and invariably on the high- est spot of the glabella, which is the most favorable position for its visual function. The eye tubercle is. as a rule, relatively largest in the earlier growth stages; in some species, as Isotelus gigas, it disappears entirely with maturity. In some Siluric and most Devonic genera, especially the Phacopida, the median eye has, corresponding to the strong development of the lateral eyes, been more ABSTRACTS AND DISCUSSIONS OP PAPERS 147 or less reduced, but may often be still recognizable in the interior mold as a pit, due to the inward growth of the lenslike thickening of the crust. Per contra, it is most strongly developed in the so-called "blind" trilobites, where the lateral eyes are reduced or lost. The more important Cambric families still lack the eye tubercle, but in young specimens of Elliptocephala asaplioides the median eye was found to possess the primitive forms of two separate trans- parent spots or lenslike thickenings on the front part of the glabella that do not project above the surface. It has been recognized by zoologists for some time that the trilobites nor- mally should possess median or parietal eyes. The "ocelli" of Harpes, Cryptolithus, and Dionide are reduced lateral eyes with traces of the true suture. Following Doctor Buedemann's paper was one on the general subject of reef deposits, which brought forth a discussion, participated, in by Messrs. Ulrich, Van Ingen, Schuchert, Berry, and the author. Illustrated by lantern slides ; 20 minutes. IMPORTANCE OF "CORAL REEFS" AND REEF DEPOSITS IN THE FORMATION OF PALEOZOIC LIMESTONES BY THOMAS C. BROWN (Abstract) In the Paleozoic limestones a number of coral reefs and reef-like structures have been described from various horizons. In the present-day reef areas it has been found that a large part of the calcium carbonate deposited is pre- cipitated chemically by reactions brought about by micro-organisms. There are many Paleozoic horizons where similar conditions prevailed. This is clearly shown by the nature of the sediments and by the structural relations of the strata thus formed. Many of the Paleozoic limestones which have generally been considered to be the products of the mechanical attrition of shells and other organic struc- tures, or of the disintegration of preexisting limestones, show by their internal structure and physical features that they were formed under conditions similar to the reefs of today. The following paper on the distribution of corals was next in order and was discussed by Messrs. Ulrich, J. M. Clarke, Van Ingen, Ami, and the author; 20 minutes. DISTRIBUTION AND INFERRED MIGRATION OF AMERICAN MIDDLE AND UPPER DEVONIC CORALS BY ASIAUEUS W. GRABAU (Abstract) While monographing the Michigan Devonic corals light was obtained on the probable routes of migration between America and Eurasia, these being appar- ently across the North Polar region during Onondaga time and via Alaska and the northwest Canadian region subsequently. 148 PROCEEDINGS OP THE PALEONTOLOGICAL SOCIETY Several papers bearing on mutations were then read, the first of these being the following, which was discussed by Messrs. Ulrich, Grabau, Schuchert, Euedemann, and Loomis, with replies by the author : MUTATIONS OF WAAGEN, MUTATIONSRICHTUNG OF NEUMAYR, MUTANTS OF DE TRIES: RELATIONS OF THESE PHENOMENA IN EVOLUTION BY HENRY FAIRFIELD OSBORN The second paper on mutations, by A. W. Grabau, was withdrawn, so that it could be discussed in the exhibition room in connection with charts and other illustrations. SYSTEMATIC RANK OF MUTATIONS AND SUBMUTATIONS IN ORTHOGENETIC SERIES AMONG THE INVERTEBRATES BY AMADEUS W. GRABAU (Abstract) It is shown that mutations and submntations may vary in systematic value, being of varietal specific or even generic rank, in accordance with the degree of fixity attained by the various morphological stages of development in dif- ferent genetic series. A second paper by the same author was next in order, but was again withdrawn, so that it could be discussed in the exhibition room, where illustrative charts were available. CLASSIFICATION OF THE TETRASEPTATA, WITH SOME REMARKS ON PARALLELISM IN DEVELOPMENT IN THIS GROUP: A STUDY IN ORTHOGENESIS BY. AMADEUS W. GRABAU {Abstract) The paper offers amended and revised classification of the Tetraseptata (Tetracoralla) and shows how many of the common genera of this group are in reality polyphyletic eirculi, and that a recognition of the law of parallelism in development requires a redefining of these genera. The final paper of the morning then followed and was discussed by H. M. Ami and Rudolph Euedemann, with replies by the author. GUELPH FORMATION OF ONTARIO BY M. Y. WILLIAMS (Abstract) The Guelph formation of southwestern Ontario, as originally denned, con- sists of about 185 feet of saccharoidal dolomite. From information obtained ABSTRACTS AND DISCUSSIONS OF PAPERS 149 from the records of bore-holes, the formation evidently grades upward into the overlying Salina formation. Conformably beneath the Guelph are 30 feet or more of thin-bedded dolomites, recently called by the writer the "Eramosu beds." These are generally argillaceous and commonly bituminous and have been defined as the top of the Lockport formation. These beds are persistent almost throughout the Guelph area of Ontario, and indicate by their lithological characters, as well as by the meager fauna contained, transitional conditions between Lockport and Guelph sedimentation. Eastward, toward the Niagara River, the Guelph formation is greatly reduced in thickness and the underlying thin beds are illy defined. Northward, on the Bruce Peninsula, the lower Guelph beds contain a cephalopod-lamellibranch fauna, closely related to the fauna of the Racine beds of Wisconsin. The typical Guelph occurs along the west shore of the Bruce Peninsula and on the islands to the north as far as the extreme western end of Fitzwilliam Island. Beds belonging either to the Upper Lockport or Lower Guelph also occur on the south shore of the western end of Manitoulin Island. The meeting then adjourned for luncheon. PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS At 2 p. m. the Society met in conjunction with the Geological Society of America to hear the address of E. 0. TTlrich, the retiring President of the Paleontological Society, entitled THE USE OF FOSSILS IN CORRELATION Following this address the Society met in two sections, the Vertebrate Section in the library of the Medical School and a Section of Invertebrate and General Paleontology continuing in the general-session room. The minutes of the Section of Vertebrate Paleontology follow: SECTION OF VERTEBRATE PALEONTOLOGY The Section of Vertebrate Paleontology, with Prof. F. B. Loomis in the chair, held separate sessions for the presentation of special papers, com- mencing Wednesday afternoon, December 29, at 3.30 o'clock, after the presidential address and the completion of the general papers in the So- ciety. Dr. W. J. Sinclair was requested to act as secretary. The follow- ing papers were presented : PHYLOGENETIC REVIEW OF EXTINCT AND RECENT ANTHROPOIDS, WITH SPECIAL REFERENCE TO THE EVOLUTION OF THE HUMAN DENTITION BY W. K. GREGORY (Abstract) Of the anthropoids from the Lower Oligocene of Egypt Parapithecus Schlosser is known from a very small lower jaw and complete dentition. In 150 PROCEEDINGS OP THE PALEONTOLOGICAL SOCIETY some characters it recalls the Eocene Anaptomorphida?, but the pattern of the premolars and molars is fundamentally similar to that of its contemporary. Proplio pith ecus Schlosser, which is a true anthropoid, much smaller than the gibbon and foreshadowing the Pliopit It ecus-gibbon line as well as Dryopitliccus, the Chimpanzee, and the Gorilla-man group, as held by Schlosser. Dryo- pithecus of the Upper Miocene includes six species — three from India, recently described by Pilgrim, and three from Europe, known chiefly from molar teeth and lower jaws. To the writer D. punjaMcus and the later D. rhenanus appear to be ancestral to the Chimpanzee, while D. chin jicn sis and perhaps /). fontani appear to lead to the Gorilla. Pakrosiiiiia Pilgrim, from India, is known from a third upper molar which foreshadows that of the Orang. Sivapithecus Pilgrim, from the Chinji zone of the Lower Si walks (Upper Miocene) strongly suggests the Horn laicise in its wide molars and bicuspids, but retains the primitive apelike canines. In the Dryopithecits group (including Firapitliccus) there is a very special resem- blance and affinity in the patterns of all the upper and lower premolars and molars to those of the HoininicUe, which family may well have been derived from some Upper Miocene member of that group. The retraction of the jaws and the reduction in size of the canines and front lower premolars in the Hominida? are retrogressive characters, as is also the reduction in the pattern of the second and third upper molars from a more quadritubercular to a tritubercular condition. Paper discussed by Professor Osbom, Doctor Miller, and Doctor Case. Remarks by Professor Osborn on Pan veins from Third Interglacial of Tailback (a Chimpanzee of Pleistocene age). ADDITIONAL CHARACTERS OF TYRANNOSAURUS AND ORNITHOMIMVS BY HENRY FAIRFIELD OSBOEN {Abstract) The complete skeletons of Tyrannosaurus and Omithomimits recently secured and mounted in the American Museum of Natural History render possible a thorough comparison of these two extreme types of adaptation. Tyramiosaurus is highly specialized, both in the skull, fore limb, and the hind limb, as a flesh- eating type, capable of overcoming and devouring the most formidably defended prey ; in other words, it is an example of harmonious adaptation throughout. The discovery of the skull and fore-limb structure of OrnitliODiimit* has afforded one of the greatest surprises in the whole history of vertebrate paleontology. Although descended from the same stock as Tyrannosaurus, as indicated by many common points of structure, as well as by its relationship to Ornitholestes of the Lower Cretaceous, this animal has diverged as widely as possible from the raptorial type. The chief feature is the entire absence of teeth and the modification of the skull and jaws into a beak closely analogous to that of the struthious birds. The feet have entirely lost their prehensile or raptorial powers and developed cursorial adaptations very sim- ilar to those of the rhea and the cassowary. Regarding the skull and the feet alone, it might be possible to regard this as an ostrich-like or struthioid dinosaur and browser, adapted to subsisting on ABSTRACTS AND DISCUSSIONS OP PAPERS 151 shrubs and buds and to rapid flight from enemies ; but the fore limb presents very great difficulty, since it has extremely long and slender digits terminating in three laterally compressed digits with claws, somewhat resembling those of tree-sloths and ant-eaters. The bones of the shoulder have, however, no fos- sorial powers or musculature and were evidently incapable of digging. Three forms of adaptation have been suggested. First, that this arm was used for pulling down branches of trees in browsing; second, that it was used in scratching open ant-hills ; third, that it was used in scratching sand along the seashore in search for crustaceans. None of these hypotheses appears adequate or to afford a harmonious interpretation of the adaptations of this remarkable animal. Discussion by' Mr. Gilmore and Doctor Case, the latter suggesting pos- sible ant-eating habits for Ornithomimus. CRITERIA FOR THE DETERMINATION OF SPECIES IN THE SAUROPODS, WITH DESCRIPTION OF A NEW SPECIES OF APATOSAURVS BY CHARLES C MOOK (Abstract) The size and structural variations of the skeletal elements in Sauropod dinosaurs were discussed and the specific characters of a new species of Apatosaunis were given. Discussion by Professor Osborn and Doctor Loom is. PELVIS AND SACRUM OF CAMARASAURUS BY HENRY FAIRFIELD OSBORN (Abstract) A series of diagrams showing the structure of the pelvic region in Camara- saurus were exhibited, with explanatory remarks, and the identity of Camara- saurus and Morosaurus announced. Supplementary remarks by Dr. 0. 0. Mook regarding proportions of pelvis. AN EARLY PLIOCENE MONODACTYLOUS HORSE BY EDWARD L. TROXELL (Abstract) Because the modern Eqims is so intimately associated with the human race there are few fossils more interesting than the remains of its ancestors, and its evolution is probably better known than that of any other mammal. The finding, however, of an unusually complete skeleton of PlioMppus has fur- nished an additional link in the series. The search for fossils in the South Dakota P>ad Lands this past summer re- sulted in the discovery of a one-toed horse, the earliest of which we have 152 PROCEEDINGS OF THE PALEONTOLOGICAL SOCIETY authentic record. In its development it occupies a place half way between the true Equus and the earlier three-toed horses. It is distinguished from these ancestors by the absence of its lateral digits, but from the modern horse by the full length splint bones and by the complete ulna, which through its middle portion is less than an eighth of an inch in diameter. A large preorbital pit, which probably marks the location of a scent gland, appears to separate it from Equus, but allies it with several of the earlier types. The associated fauna — Mastodon, Teleoceras, Merycodus, Protohippus, etcet- era — indicate a very late Miocene or an early Pliocene age. The individual had just come into full possession of its milk teeth, indicat- ing that it was less than a year old. The completeness of the specimen and its various unique characters make it a very interesting contribution to science. Discussion by Professor Osborn, Mr. Gidley, and the author. Session of Thursday, December 30 Thursday morning, at 9.30 o'clock, the Vertebrate Section met for the completion of their program, Dr. F. B. Loomis presiding and Dr. W. K. Gregory acting as secretary. PRELIMINARY REPORT OF THE COMMITTEE ON THE NOMENCLATURE OF THE SKULL ELEMENTS IN THE TETRAPODA BY W. K. GREGORY (Abstract) The committee, consisting of Professor Williston (chairman), Doctors Case. Moodie, Watson, Broom, Gregory ( secretary ) , had considered the nomencla- ture and homologies of the skull elements of the Permian reptiles and am- phibians and modern mammals, and were in process of drawing up an alpha- betic list of preferred names with synonyms. The principles of selection advocated by the committee were set forth and the homologies of the "alis- phenoid" and other elements were discussed. Kemarks by Doctor Case and Professor Scott. ORIGIN OF THE STERNUM IN THE REPTILES AND MAMMALS 1 BY S. W. WILLISTON (Abstract) From the evidence afforded by Permian Tetrapoda, the author concludes thai the sternum of reptiles and mammals had been derived from the abdominal ribs. Discussion by Doctor Case, Doctor Gregory, and Professor Scott. 1 Read by F. B. Loomis in the absence of tbe autbor. ABSTRACTS AND DISCUSSIONS OF PAPERS 153 MOUNTED ' SKELETON OF CANIS DIRUS, WITH REMARKS ON THE METHODS OF RECONSTRUCTION OF EXTINCT ANIMALS - BY W. D. MATTHEW Eemarks by Mr. Gidley and Professor Seott. MOUNTED SKELETON OF BLASTOCERUS PAMP2EUS-—A FOSSIL DEER FROM ARGENTINA - BY W. D. MATTHEW SKELETONS OF DIPLODOCUS AND APATOSAURUS IN THE CARNEGIE MUSEUM BY W. J. HOLLAND (Abstract) By means of a lantern slide the speaker exhibited a photograph showing a skeleton of Diplodocus in the rock, with a skull of unquestionable association with the neck vertebra. This sets at rest all doubt as to the generic identity of the skull referred by Marsh to this genus. A larger skull of the ''Diplo- docus" type, with slender teeth, had been discovered very near an Apatosaurus skeleton, and its occipital condyles were found to fit well into the cotyle of the atlas of the Apatosaunis. The two genera, Diplodocus and Apatosaurus (Brontosavnis); bad many structures in common and were nearly related. Eemarks by Professor Scott and Doctor Mook. At the conclusion of the scientific program the section resolved itself into a committee of the Avhole to consider the future policy and action of the section. After a discussion of the subject by Messrs. Osborn, Scott, Holland, Case, Loomis, and Gregory, the chairman was empowered to appoint a committee of five to make recommendations to the section. The chair later appointed Prof. H. F. Osborn, Prof. W. B. Scott, Prof. S. W. Williston, Prof. E. C. Case, and Mr. J. W. Gidley. SECTION OF INVERTEBRATE AND GENERAL PALEONTOLOGY Wednesday afternoon, at 4.30, the Section of Invertebrate and General Paleontology met, with Vice-President Van Ingen in the chair. Tbe first paper, in the absence of the author, was read by L. W. Stephenson and was illustrated with numerous lantern slides. 2 Read by W. K. Gregory in tbe absence of tbe author. 154 PROCEEDINGS OF THE PALEONTOLOGIOAL SOCIETY SUMMARY OF THE RESULTS OF INVESTIGATIONS OF THE FLORIDIAN AND BAHAMAN SHOAL-WATER CORALS BY T. WAYLAND VAUGHAN (Abstract) The author will briefly summarize the results of eight seasons of field and laboratory work on the Floridian and Bahaman shoal-water corals. The dif- ferent factors influencing their life will be considered, namely, relations to currents and waves, character of bottom, temperature, light, salinity, atmos- pheric exposure, and depth of water. Experiments on the reactions of corals to nutrient and non-nutrient particles and the food of corals will be described, and the results of experiments to ascertain the duration of the free-swimming larval stages and the growth rate of corals will be given. The bearing of the investigations on geologic interpretation will be indicated. Following this paper was a strati graphic one, illustrated with lantern slides and charts. CORRELATION OF THE UPPER CRETACEOUS DEPOSITS OF THE ATLANTIC AND GULF COASTAL PLAIN BY L. W. STEPHENSON (Abstract) The Upper Cretaceous sediments of the Atlantic and Culf Coastal riain are chiefly medium to fine-grained clays, sands, chalks, and marls ranging in origin from those laid down on low coastal plains, in estuaries, or in very shallow seas to those formed in waters for the most part less than 50 fathoms deep, though perhaps in part in waters exceeding 100 fathoms deep. The formations into which these sediments may be grouped are related to each other not as the leaves of a book, a succession of regular layers of uni- form thickness, but, viewed in a section parallel to the strike, they appear as a series of intertonguing lenses, great and small] the age relations of which can be determined only on the basis of paleontologic criteria. In our present state of progress the fossils most usable in determining the age relations of the marine sediments are tbe representatives of the genus Exogyra, which were adapted for life in all but the very shallowest of the Upper Cretaceous marginal seas and which underwent evolutionary changes with sufficient rapidity to form faunal zones traceable through contempora- neous formations, whether they be chalks, sands, clays, or marls. At 5.30 the Society adjourned until the following day. At 8 o'clock the memhers attended the address of Professor Coleman, retiring President of the Geological Society of America, in the general assembly hall of the Medical School, and at 9.15 they participated in the smoker to the several societies, given by the Geological Society of Washington, at the Cosmos Club. Following the smoker a number of ABSTRACTS AND DISCUSSIONS OP PAPERS 155 the members concluded the day's exercises by attending the reception at the National Museum given by the Secretary of the Smithsonian Insti- tution to all the visiting: societies. Session of Thursday, December 30 The Society met at 9.30 a. in., with Vice-President Knowlton in the chair. REPORT OE THE AUDITING COMMITTEE The report of the Auditing Committee was the only matter of business on hand. The committee attested to the correctness of the Treasurer's account; whereupon it was A'oted that their report be accepted. The first papers in order were three forming a symposium on Missis- sippian rocks of Illinois and Kentucky. The first of these was illustrated by charts; 20 minutes. MISSISSIPPIAN SECTION IN WEST-CENTRAL KENTUCKY BY CHARLES BUTTS (Abstract) The Mississippian section of west-central Kentucky from the bottom upward includes the following formations : New Providence shale, 150 feet thick, over- lying the New Albany (black) shale; the Kenwood sandstone (new), gener- ally shale, with thin sandstone layers, 40 feet thick ; the Rosewood shale (new), 190 feet thick, and the Holtsclaw sandstone (new), 20 to 30 feet thick. These four formations are subdivisions of the Osage group, which corresponds to the Knobs'tone group. The new Providence shale yields the crinoid forms of Buttonmould knob, of Burlington age, and the Holtsclaw sandstone carries the Orthotetes keokuk and Syringothyris typa, of Keokuk age. As shown in a well in Stephensport, the whole Osage group changes to limestone in the dis- tance of about 20 miles from its eastern outcrop. The Osage group is suc- ceeded by the Warsaw limestone. 80 feet thick, made up of shale, argillaceous or siliceous limestone and shale and highly geodiferous. The Warsaw is the same as the Harrodsburg limestone of Indiana. Above the Warsaw is the Spergen (Salem, Bedford )' limestone, coarsely crystalline gray limestone. 20 feet thick. The Spergen is followed by the Saint Louis limestone, bluish gray and drab, clearly geodiferous to the east, 500 feet thick. Above the Saint Louis is the Sainte Genevieve limestone, mainly thick bedded, light gray, largely highly oolitic, 160 feet thick. This limestone is of high purity and the quarry rock of the region. At the top of the Sainte Genevieve is a hiatus of considerable magnitude, in which the Aux Vases sandstone of the Mississippi Valley is absent. Above the hiatus is about 30 to 40 feet of limestone, with Talarocrinus common. This limestone is .succeeded by a sandstone 30 to 40 feet thick; this in turn by 40 156 PROCEEDINGS OF THE PALEOXTOLOGICAL SOCIETY feet of shale and limestone, above which is the "Big Clifty'' sandstone, 40 to GO feet thick, which is correlated with the typical Cypress sandstone of Illinois. Above the "Big Clifty" sandstone is 40 feet of shale and limestone, which is succeeded by 20 to 40 feet of sandstone, and the latter sandstone is followed by 30 feet of limestone carrying a profuse fauna, including such characteristic- forms as Prismopora serrulate, Archimedes laxa, Pterotocrinus Mfurcatus, and P. depressus. Above this limestone is about 100 feet of shale and lime- stone extending up to the base of the "Tar Spring" sandstone. The section included between the "Big Clifty" and "Tar Spring" sandstone corresponds to the Okaw formation of Weller. The "Tar Spring" sandstone is 40 feet thick and is succeeded above by 150 feet, largely shale, but containing thin sand- stone and limestone beds extending upward to the basal 1'ennsylvanian sand- stone. This part of the section probably represents the Menard limestone, Palestine sandstone, and Clore formation of Weller in Illinois. Following this paper, in which the general stratigraphic section was presented, was one bearing more particularly on the points in dispute; 50 minutes. STRATIGRAPHIC AND FAUXAL SUCCESSION OF THE CHESTER GROUP IX ILLINOIS AND KEXTUCKY BY STUART WELLER {Abstract) A broad study of the Chester rocks in southern Illinois and Kentucky has shown that the entire group is divisible into four subgroups, each of which is introduced by a massive sandstone formation, which is succeeded by a lime- stone and shale series. The lower Chester is introduced by the Aux Vases sandstone, and it has its greatest and most complete development in the more western portion of the Illinois basin. The lower-middle Chester, with the Cypress sandstone, and the upper middle, with the Tar Spring sandstone as basal members, have their greatest development in the southeastern portion of the basin, with only their higher limestone and shale facies extending into the western part of the basin. The upper Chester, with the Palestine sand- stone as a base, is about equally developed across the basin. The Sainte Genevieve limestone, which has been included in the Chester by some, is ex- cluded from this group. At this point there was introduced a paper on fossil and recent algse which had been postponed from the preceding day; 20 minutes. COMPARISON OF THE YELLOWSTONE PARK ALG.E WITH ALGONKIAN FORMS BY CHARLES D. WALCOTT (Abstract) The author presented the results of further investigations of American Algonkian alga? with special reference to a study of the life habits of the recent forms found in the Yellowstone National Park. ABSTRACTS AND DISCUSSIONS OF PAPERS 157 The symposium on the Mississippi an controversy was then resumed by the reading of the last paper on the subject, which was illustrated by diagrams; 50 minutes. THE CHESTER CONTROVERSY BY E. 0. XJLRICH (Abstract) The author defended his classification of the Upper Mississippian forma- tions, the sequence, classification, and correlation of the beds of the Chester series in Kentucky and Illinois being discussed in particular. New evidence was presented showing a more decided Chester affiliation of the fauna of the lower as with the upper Sainte Genevieve than had been previously believed. Of many stratigrapbic breaks within the Chester series the most widely recognizable, and therefore the most important, is that between the top of the "Tribune" limestone of Caldwell County, Kentucky, and the succeeding typical Cypress sandstone (Bed 1 of Ulrich's Birdsville formation or group). Beneath this break the Chester formation includes two Chester formations — the Sainte Genevieve at the base, the "Tribune" (of Caldwell County) at the top — with a widely distributed sandstone between them. This sandstone is the same as the Aux Vases sandstone of Sainte Genevieve County. Missouri. Following Engelmann and Worthen, who had identified this Lower Chester sandstone in Hardin County, Illinois, with the Cypress sandstone, Ulrich, in his work on the Kentucky-Illinois fluorspar district, adopted the latter instead of the sup- posedly synonymous name Aux Vases sandstone. Now, however, since Weller has shown just what the Cypress sandstone of the type section in Union County, Illinois, is. the term Cypress sandstone, as used by Ulrich in the past (11 years), should in every instance be replaced with the name Aux Vases sand- stone. The Upper Chester or Birdsville group includes three sandstones — the Cypress, Tar Spring, and Palestine — all generally recognizable in western Kentucky and southern Illinois, and above each a calcareous formation. These Birdsville divisions vary more or less from place to place, and their variations in areal distribution and lithologic character suggests considerable oscillation of the sea in which they were deposited. As a whole, the group contains more sandstone and shale than does the lower or Montesano group. The author admitted that the Tribune limestone of the type locality in Crittenden County, Kentucky, is the same as the Menard limestone of Illinois, and hence wholly distinct from the "Tribune" limestone of the adjoining county of Caldwell. On the other hand, he insisted that the latter is a distinct formation, limited below by the top of the Aux Vases sandstone and above by the unconformable base of the Cypress sandstone. The Renault of the Illinois section he regards as representing a part of the same interval. The time for adjournment for lunch having arrived, it was decided to postpone the discussion of the three papers relating to the Chester until the afternoon. 158 PROCEEDINGS OF THE PALEONTOLOGICAL SOCIETY The general session of the Society was called to order at 2.30, Thurs- day afternoon, and the first paper was presented by the author; 10 min- utes. STRATIGRAPHY OF THE CANADIAN CORDILLERA BY LANCASTER D. BURLING {Abstract) A nearly complete specimen of a fossil fish was found in the "Jurassic" shales outcropping on the Canadian Pacific Railway west of Banff. Alberta, and further fossil evidence was secured as to the true age of this "down- faulted block." The Devonian was found to rest without observable unconformity on the Cambrian in the Sawback Range just west of Banff, and at the upper end of Upper Columbia Lake, and fossil evidence Mas secured as to the portions of the Cambrian and Devonian involved in these contacts. Between these two localities the Devonian is not present and the Cambrian is overlain by approxi- mately 10,000 feet of Ordovician and Silurian strata. The "Devonian" Sawback formation was studied in detail and collections were secured from a dozen or more faunal horizons, ranging from the top to the lower portion of the formation. These a're all of Cambrian age. The "Silurian" Ilalysites beds near Golden, British Columbia, were found to contain, in a horizon above the massive quartzite, an abundant fauna which is strikingly comparable with the Richmond of Manitoba. The relations of the "Graptolite shales" were more closely determined by the finding of fossils in the lower portion of the "Ilalysites beds" above and in the upper portion of the Goodsir shales below. Further paleontologic evidence was secured concerning the Cambro-Ordo- vician boundary and the age relations of the Goodsir shales and the Ottertail limestone. Following this paper the discussion of the three papers of the morning on the Mississippian controversy was undertaken and was J3articipated in by Messrs. Weller and Ulrich. The following was then presented and illustrated by lantern slides; 15 minutes. NEW SPECIES OF THE MESONACIDJE, WITH TWENTY-NINE RUDIMENTARY SEGMENTS POSTERIOR TO THE FIFTEENTH BY LANCASTER D. BURLING (Abstract) Mr. E. C. Amies, of Edmonton, Alberta, while acting as my assistant in field-work for the Geological Survey of Canada, found a new species of the Mesonaeida* in the Mahto formation of the Lower Cambrian in the Mount Robson district of Alberta. In general form and in the discrepancy between the segments anterior to ABSTRACTS AND DISCUSSIONS OF PAPERS 159 the fifteenth, which is .spine- hearing, and those posterior to it, it resembles Pcedumias, but differs from that genus in possessing at least 29 rudimentary segments. Five papers transferred from the program of the Geological Society of America were then presented in order. The first of these was illustrated by diagrams; 20 minutes. COMPARISON OF EUROPEAN AND AMERICAN EARLY PALEOZOIC FORMATIONS BY AMADEUS W. GRABAU (Abstract) A study of the Durness limestone and associated formations of northwest Scotland has convinced the author that most of this formation, generally classed as Cambric, is of Lower Ordovicic or Beekmantownian age, separated from the Lower Cambric by a disconformity which was located in the field. The Biri limestone and Sparagmite of Norway will be considered in the light of these studies and of the recent investigations of Rothpletz. The relations of the Orthoceras limestone of Sweden to American formations will be con- sidered, and some characters of the Siluric beds of Gotland, of Delarne, and of England will be noted. Finally the Upper Siluric equivalent of the Ameri- can Monroan in the Bohemian basin will be considered. A second paper by the same speaker followed. It was also illustrated with diagrams; 20 minutes. SUBDIVISIONS OF THE TRAVERSE GROUP OF MICHIGAN AND ITS RELATION TO OTHER MID-DEVONIC FORMATIONS BY AMADEUS W. GRABAU (Abstract) A detailed study of the Traverse group of Michigan, extending over 15 years, has furnished the material for a subdivision of the group and for correlation with the Milwaukee, Iowa, Ohio, Ontario, and New York mid-Devonic for- mations. There was then presented a paper on Eocene algas, illustrated by many striking lantern slides ; 20 minutes. SOME FOSSIL ALGffl FROM THE OIL-YIELDING SHALES OF THE GREEN RIVER FORMATION OF COLORADO AND UTAH BY CHARLES A. DAVIS (Abstract) In northwestern Colorado and adjacent parts of Utah there are extensive deposits of carbonaceous shales belonging to the Green River formation of XII — Boll. Geol. Soc. Am., Vol. 27, 1915 160 PROCEEDINGS OF THE PALEONTOLOGICAL SOCIETY the Eocene, which yield petroleum on distillation, in some cases giving larger yields than the famous oil shales of Scotland. A study of the microscopic structure of these shales, by means of methods developed in studying peat ami fresh biological material, has developed the fact that they contain an extensive flora of very minute alga? and other cryptogamic plants. Some of these plants will be presented and discussed. (Lantern slides, 20 minutes.) There was then presented and discussed by Messrs. TJlrich and Weller the following paper, which was illustrated by charts ; 20 minutes. FORMER EXTENSION OF THE DEVONIAN FORMATIONS IN SOUTHEASTERN MISSOURI BY STUART WELLEB (Abstract) The Devonian formations in Sainte Genevieve County, Missouri, are now restricted in their distribution to a narrow zone of faulting that crosses the county in a general east-west direction. It has been possible to differentiate the faulting in this zone into two periods — one late Devonian in age and the other post-Fennsylvani;m. During the earlier faulting the upthrow was all on the north, and during the succeeding period of erosion and peneplanation the entire mass of the Devonian and Silurian rocks extending northward from the fault-line was removed. The later faults followed closely the direction of those of earlier date, but in general lie a mile or less to the south of them. The upthrow of the later faults is on the south, and with the succeeding erosion and peneplanation the southern extension of the Silurian and Devonian beds was cut away. The only Silurian and Devonian record, therefore, of what was originally a succession of broadly extended seas is now preserved in the narrow strip between the two lines of faults. The final paper of the program Avas read by the author and was dis- cussed by Miss O'Connell and Messrs. Van Ingen, Kindle, Buedemann,, Wilson, and Ulrich : 20 minutes. BOTTOM CONTROL OF THE COMPOSITION OF MARINE FAUNAS AS ILLUSTRATED BY DREDGING IN THE BAY OF FUNDY BY E. M. KINDLE (Abstract) The results of collecting and dredging marine shells from the inter-tidal and shallow-water zones at 10 stations on the west coast of Nova Scotia are pre- sented in tabular form, each of 51 species of gasteropods and pelecypods being checked in columns representing different stations and types of bottom. It is shown that a very small proportion of the species are common to types of bottom which, like black mud and gravel, exhibit sharp physical contrasts. Types of bottom, however, which are similar or closely allied in physical features have a very large percentage of species in common. ABSTRACTS AND DISCUSSIONS OF PAPERS 161 The author concludes from these observations on the influence of the char- acter of the bottom on living faunas that the paleontologist should, instead of expecting the same type of fauna in synchronous deposits of widely unlike Iithology, look for faunal contrasts in which the faunal facies varies as widely as the lithologic facies. 162 PROCEEDINGS OF THE PALEONTOLOGICAL SOCIETY Register of the Washington Meeting, 1915 Henry M. Ami Paul Bartsch Joseph Barrell E. S. Bassler Edward W. Berry Eliot Blackwelder Thomas C. Brown L. D. Burling Charles Butts Ermine Case George H. Chadwick William B. Clark John M. Clarke H. P. Cleland C Wythe Cooke W. E. Crane William H. Dale August F. Foerste Julia Gardner J. W. GlDLEY Winifred Goldring Amadeus W. Grabau William K. Gregory William J. Holland Edward M. Kindle Edwin Kirk P. H. Knowlton Willis T. Lee Frederick B. Loomis W. C. Mansfield R. D. Mesler Charles C. Mook Marjorie O'Connell Henry F. Osborn R W. Pack Chester A. Reeds Charles E. Resser P. V. Roundy Rudolph Ruedemann Charles Schuchert William B. Scott E. H. Sellards H. W. Shimer William J. Sinclair Timothy W. Stanton Clinton R. Stauffer Lloyd W. Stepitenson C K. SWARTZ Edward L. Troxell E. 0. Ulrich Gilbert Van Ingen Charles D. Walcott Stuart Weller David White George R. Wieland M. Y. Williams Herrick E. Wilson OFFICEES, COEEESPONDENTS, AND MEMBEES OF THE PALEONTOLOGICAL SOCIETY OFFICERS FOR 1916 President: Rudolph Euedemann, Albany, N. Y. First Vice-President : T. Wayland Vaughan, Washington, D. C. Second Vice-President : August P. Foerste, Dayton, Ohio Third Vice-President : E. B. Branson, Columbia, Mo. Secretary : E. S. Bassler, Washington, D. C. Treasurer : Eichard S. Lull, New Haven, Conn. Editor: Charles E. Eastman, New York City MEMBERSHIP, 1916 CORRESPONDENTS Dr. A. G Nathorst, Royal Natural History Museum, Stockholm, Sweden. S. S. Buckman, Esq., Westfield, Thame, England. Prof. Chakles Deperet, University of Lyon, Lyon (Rhone), France. Dr. Henry Woodward, British Museum (Natural History), London, England. MEMBERS Jose G. Aguilera, Instituto Geologico de Mexico, City of Mexico, Mexico. Truman H. Aldrich, care post-office, Birmingham, Ala. Henry M. Ami, Geological and Natural History Survey of Canada, Ottawa, Canada. F. M. Anderson, 2604 Etna Street, Berkeley, Cal. Robert Anderson, 7 Richmond Terrace, London, England. Ralph Arnold, 921 Union Oil Building, Los Angeles, Cal. Rufus M. Bagg, Jr., Lawrence College, Appleton, Wis. (163) 164 PROCEEDINGS OF THE PALEONTOLOGICAL SOCIETY Charles L. Baker, Bureau Economic Geology and Technology, University of Texas, Austin, Texas. Erwin H. Barbour, University of Nebraska, Lincoln, Nebr. Joseph Barrell, Yale University, New Haven, Conn. Albert L. Barrows, University of California, Berkeley, Cal. Paul Bartsch, U. S. National Museum, Washington, D. C. Harvey Bassler, Geological Department, Johns Hopkins University, Balti- more, Md. Ray S. Basslee, U. S. National Museum, Washington, D. C. Joshua W. Beede, Indiana University, Bloomington, Ind. Walter A. Bell, Peabody Museum, Yale University, New Haven, Conn. B. A. Bensley, University of Toronto, Toronto, Canada. Fritz Berckhemer, Department of Paleontology, Columbia University, New York City. Edward W. Berry, Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore. Md. Arthur B. Bibbins, Woman's College, Baltimore, Md. Walter R. Billings, 1250 Bank Street, Ottawa, Canada. Thomas A. Bostwick, 43 Livingston Street, New Haven, Conn. E. B. Branson, University of Missouri, Columbia, Mo. Barnum Brown, American Museum of Natural History, New York City. Thomas C. Brown, Bryn Mawr College, Bryn Mawr, Pa. William L. Bryant, Buffalo Society of Natural History, Buffalo, N. Y. Lancaster D. Burling, Geological Survey of Canada, Ottawa, Canada. Charles Butts, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. John P. Buwalda, 2519 Ridge Road, Berkeley, Cal. Ermine C. Case, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Mich. George H. Ciiadwick, University of Rochester, Rochester, N. Y. Bruce L. Clarke, University of California, Berkeley, Cal. William B. Clark, Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Md. John M. Clarke, Education Building. Albany, N. Y. Herdman F. Cleland, Williams College, Williamstown, Mass. Harold J. Cook, Agate, Nebr. Will E. Crane, 808 Massachusetts Avenue N. E., Washington, D. C. Edgar R. Cumings, Indiana University, Bloomington, Ind. W. H. Dall, U. S. National Museum, Washington, D. C. Bashford Dean, Columbia University, New York City. Roy E. Dickerson, 114 Burnett Avenue, San Francisco, Cal. John T. Doneghy, Jr., 5618 Clemens Avenue, St. Louis, Mo. Earl Douglass, Carnegie Museum, Pittsburgh. Pa. Charles R. Eastman, American Museum of Natural History, New York City. George F. Eaton, 80 Sachem Street, New Haven, Conn. John Eyerman, "Oakhurst," Easton, Ta. August F. Foerste, Steele High School, Dayton, Ohio. Julia A. Gardner, Department of Geology, Johns Hopkins University, Balti- more, Md. G. S. Gester, 711 Flood Building, San Francisco, Cal. Hugh Gibb, Peabody Museum, Yale University, New Haven, Conn. J. W. Gidley, U. S. National Museum, Washington, D. C. J. Z. Gilbert, Los Angeles High School, Los Angeles, Cal. LIST OF MEMBERS 165 Clarence E. Gordon, Massachusetts Agricultural College, Amherst, Mass. Charles N. Gould, 408 Terminal Building, Oklahoma City, Okla. Amadetjs W. Graeau, Columbia University, New York City. Walter Granger, American Museum of Natural History, New York City. F. C. Greene, Missouri Geological Survey, Rolla, Mo. W. K. Gregory, American Museum of Natural History, New York City. Norman McD. Grier, 71S Clara Street, St. Louis, Mo. Winifred Goldring, New York State Museum, Albany, N. Y. John A. Guintyllo, University of California, Berkeley, Cal. Harold Hannibal, Stanford University, Stanford, Cal. George W. Harper, 2139 Gilbert Avenue, Cincinnati, Ohio. Gilbert D. Harris, Cornell University, Ithaca, N. Y. Chris. A. Hartnagel, Education Building, Albany, N. Y. Winthrop P. Haynes, Wellesley College, Wellesley, Mass. Junius Henderson, University of Colorado, Boulder, Colo. Adam Hermann, American Museum of Natural History, New York City. William J. Holland, Carnegie Museum, Pittsburgh, Pa. Arthur Hollick, New York Botanical Garden, Bronx Park, New York City. George H. Hudson, 19 Broad Street, Plattsburgh, N. Y. Louis Hussakof, American Museum of Natural History, New York City. Jesse Hyde, Western Reserve University, Cleveland, Ohio. Robert T. Jackson, 195 Bay State Road, Boston, Mass. E. C. Jeffrey, Harvard University, Cambridge, Mass* Otto E. Jennings, Carnegie Museum, Pittsburgh, Pa. W. S. W. Kew, Bacon Hall, University of California, Berkeley, Cal. Edward M. Kindle, Geological Survey of Canada, Ottawa, Canada. Edwin Kirk, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. Frank H. Knowlton, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. Lawrence M. Lambe, Geological Survey of Canada, Ottawa, Canada. Willis T. Lee, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. Frederick B. Loomis, Amherst College, Amherst, Mass. Richard S. Lull, Yale University, New Haven, Conn. D. D. Luther, Naples, N. Y. Victor W. Lyon, Jeffersonville, Ind. Thomas H. McBride, University of Iowa, Iowa City, Iowa. J. H. McGregor, Columbia University, New York City. Wendell C. Mansfield, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. Clara G. Mark, Department of Geology, Ohio State Univ., Columbus, Ohio. Bruce Martin, Waukena, Tulare Co., Cal. W. D. Matthew, American Museum of Natural History, New York City. T. Poole Maynard, 1622 D. Hunt Building, Atlanta, Ga. Maurice G. Mehl, University of Oklahoma, Norman, Okla. John C. Merriam, University of California, Berkeley, Cal. Rector D. Mesler. U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. Charles C. Mook, American Museum of Natural History. New York City. Roy L. Moodie, University of Illinois. Chicago. 111. Clarence L. Moody. University of California. Berkeley. Cal. W. O. Moody, 1S29 Berryman Street, Berkeley, Cal. Robert B. Moran, 311 California Street, San Francisco. Cal. 166 PROCEEDINGS OP THE PALEONTOLOGICAL SOCIETY William C. Morse, Department of Geology and Geography, Washington Uni- versity, St. Louis, Mo. James E. Narraway, Department of Justice, Ottawa, Canada. Jorgen O. Nomland, University of California, Berkeley, Cal. Marjorie O'Connell, Columbia University, Department of Geology, New York. Henry F. Osborn, American Museum Natural History, New York City. R. W. Pack, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. Earl L. Packard, Science Hall, University of Washington, Seattle, Wash. William A. Parks, University of Toronto, Toronto, Canada. William Patten, Dartmouth College, Hanover, N. H. John R. Pemberton, Hydrographic Survey, Argentina. O. A. Peterson, Carnegie Museum, Pittsburgh, Pa. Alexander Petrunkevitch, 266 Livingston Street, New Haven, Conn. Charles S. Prosser, Ohio State University, Columbus, Ohio. Percy E. Raymond, Museum of Comparative Zoology, Cambridge, Mass. Chester A. Reeds, American Museum of Natural History, New York City. Charles E. Resser, U. S. National Museum, Washington, D. C. E. S. Riggs, Field Museum of Natural History, Chicago, 111. Paul V. Roundy, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. Robert R. Rowley, Louisiana, Mo. Rudolph Ruedemann, Education Building, Albany, N. Y. Frederick W. Sardeson, 414 Harvard Street, Minneapolis, Minn. Thomas E. Savage, University of Illinois, Urbana, 111. Charles Schuchert, Yale University, New Haven, Conn. William B. Scott, Princeton University, Princeton, N. J. Henry M. Seely, Middlebury College, Middlebury, Vt. Elias H. Sellards, Tallahassee, Fla. Henry W. Shimer, Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass. William J. Sinclair, Princeton University, Princeton, N. J. Burnett Smith, Syracuse University, Syracuse, N. Y. Frank Springer, U. S. National Museum, Washington, D. C. T. W. Stanton, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. Clinton R. Stauffer, University of Minnesota, Minneapolis, Minn. L. W. Stephenson, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. Charles H. Sternberg, Victoria Memorial Museum, Ottawa, Canada. Chester Stock, 492 Seventh Street, San Francisco, Cal. Charles K. Swartz, Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Md. Mignon Talbot, Mt. Holyoke College, South Hadley, Mass. Edgar E. Teller, 305 Ellicott Square, Buffalo, N. Y. Albert Thompson, American Museum of Natural History, New York City. Edward L. Troxell, Department of Geology, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Mich. William H. Twenhofel, University of Kansas, Lawrence, Kans. M. W. Twitchell, Geological Survey of New Jersey, Trenton, N. J. Edward O. Ulrich, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. Claude W. Unger, Pottsville, Pa. Jacob Van Deloo, Education Building, Albany, N. Y. Gilbert Van Ingen, Princeton University, Princeton, N. J. Francis M. Van Tuyl, University of Illinois, Urbana, 111. LIST OF MEMBERS 167 T. Wayland Vaughan, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. Anthony W. Vogdes. 2425 First Street, San Diego, Cal. Charles D. Walcott, Smithsonian Institution, Washington, D. C. Clarence A. Waring, 580 McAllister Street, San Francisco, Cal. Charles E. Weaver, University of Washington, Seattle, Wash. Stuart Weller, University of Chicago, Chicago, 111. David White, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. G. R. Wieland, Yale University, New Haven, Conn. Henry S. Williams, Cornell University, Ithaca, N. Y. Merton Y. Williams, Geological Survey of Canada, Ottawa. Canada. Samuel W. Williston, University of Chicago, Chicago, 111. Alice E. Wilson, Victoria Memorial Museum, Ottawa, Canada. Herrick E. Wilson, U. S. National Museum, Washington, D. C. William J. Wilson, Geological Survey of Canada, Ottawa, Canada. Elvira Wood, Museum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard University, Cam- bridge, Mass. CORRESPONDENT DECEASED E. Koken, died November 24, 1912. MEMBERS DECEASED Samuel Calvin, died April 17, 1911. Orville A. Derry, died November 27, 1915. William M. Fontaine, died April 30, 1913. Theodore M. Gill, died September 25, 1914. Robert H. Gordon, died May 10, 1910. J. C. Hawver, died May 15, 1914. MEMBERS-ELECT L. A. Adams, State Teachers' College, Greeley, Colo. Edwin J. Armstrong, 954 West Ninth Street, Erie, Pa. C. Wythe Cooke, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. J. J. Galloway, Department of Geology, Indiana University, Bloomington, Ind. Homer Hamlin, 1021 South Union Avenue, Los Angeles, Cal. P.. F. Howell, Department of Geology, Princeton University, Princeton. N. J. S. II. Knight, Department of Geology, Columbia University, New York City. K. F. Mather, Queens University, Kingston, Ontario. R. C. Moore, Department of Geology, University of Chicago, Chicago, 111. William H. Shideler, Miami University, Oxford, Ohio. Reginald C. Stover, Standard Oil Building, San Francisco, Cal. A. O. Thomas, Department of Geology, University of Iowa, Iowa City, Iowa. Wendell P. Woodring, Department of Geology, Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Md. 168 PROCEEDINGS OF THE PALEONTOLOGICAL SOCIETY Minutes of the Sixth Annual Meeting of the Pacific Coast Section of the Paleontological Society By E. L. Packard, Secretary The sixth annual meeting of the Pacific Coast Section of the Pale- ontological Society was held in Bacon Hall, University of California, Berkeley, on Saturday, February 27, 1915, Dr. Roy E. Dickerson pre- siding. resolution of condolence on the death of j. c. hawver In appreciation of the life and scientific work of Dr. J. C. Hawver, who died on May 15, 1911, Dr. J. C. Merriam moved that the following resolutions be adopted and incorporated in the minutes of the Society, and that a copy of the same be sent to the widow of the late Doctor Hawver : Dr. J. C. Hawver will long be remembered as a mail of wide and sympa- thetic interests, whose ardent enthusiasm as a collector has materially aided in the study of the past and present fauna of the Sierra region. As the dis- coverer and explorer of Hawver Cave, in Eldorado County, California, he se- cured a rich representation of the Pleistocene fauna, which he has generously presented to the University of California. Though Doctor Hawver was not a large contributor to scientific literature, his name must always have a place in the history of paleontologic and geologic work in California. general business A motion of Dr. J. C. Merriam was carried to the effect that the Pa- cific Coast Section of the Paleontological Society issue a program of the meeting of the Paleontological Society to be held in San Francisco in August, 1915, and a guide book of the excursions in a twenty-page pamphlet, and that a copy be sent to each member of the Paleontological Society. Mr. Chester Stock reported on the cost of publishing such a pamphlet and the amount of funds already collected for such a purpose. A report was given regarding the program of the meeting of the Pale- ontological Society in San Francisco in 1915, It was moved and carried to hold the next annual meeting of the Pa- cific Coast Section of the Paleontological Society at Stanford University in the early spring of 1916. ABSTRACTS AND DISCUSSIONS OF PAPERS 169 ELECTION OF OFFICERS The following officers were elected for the ensuing year : President, John C. Merriam. Vice-President, Ealph Arnold. Secretary-Treasurer, Chester Stock. The presentation of papers was then taken up. TITLES AND ABSTRACTS OF PAPERS PRESENTED AND DISCUSSIONS THEREON SYSTEMATIC POSITION OF SEVERAL AMERICAN TERTIARY LAOOMORPHS j:v lee r. dick {Abstract) A study of the teeth of a number of lagomorphs from the American Tertiary has shown that these forms can not be included in the genus Lepus. Three new genera are therefore proposed for the fossil forms. The paper presents also a brief discussion of the phytogeny of this group. Discussion Dr. J. C. Merriam stated that rabbits were commonly found in the Tertiary formations of the West. The forms from the John Day Oligocene had been referred to the genus Lepus, but that the characters recognized by Mr. Dice warranted the separation of these forms from the genus Lepus and the defining of a new genus. PLEISTOCENE MAMMAL FAUNA OF HAWVER CAVE, A FISSURE DEPOSIT NEAR AUBURN, CALIFORNIA BY CHESTER STOCK (Abstract) A survey of all results of work on the Hawver Cave fauna. Discussion The discussion following the reading of this paper led to the conclusion that the region of Hawver Cave during the Pleistocene was a plateau quite deeply dissected by the American River. Thus it was not surprising to find a form like Mylodon, which appears to have been ill adapted to the rough country. FAUNA OF THE RODEO PLEISTOCENE BY JOHN C. MERRIAM. CHESTER STOCK. AND C. 1.. MOODY (Abstract) For many years vertebrate and invertebrate material has been collected from the Pleistocene beds exposed along San Pablo Bay and Suisun Bay. The fauna 170 PROCEEDINGS OP THE PALEONTOLOGICAL SOCIETY known at the present time includes a number of forms not previously recog- nized. A complete list of the known vertebrate and invertebrate species is presented with tentative conclusions as to the age of these beds. NEW MIOCENE MAMMALIAN FAUNA FROM THE TEHACHAPI REGION BY JOHN P. BUWALDA (Abstract) The paper is a discussion of a new mammalian fauna of Middle or Lower .Miocene age, obtained from strata in the summit region of the southern Sierras, near Tehachapi. The determinable material in the collections thus far obtained represents a small camel and one or more new forms of horses of the MerycMppus type, which seem to be of a more primitive stage of evolu- tion than any species within the genus MerycMppus heretofore known in America. The strata containing the mammalian remains have been cut by the faulting of the southern Sierras ; the age of the fauna sets a lower limit for the date of at least the major part of this displacement. Discussion Dr. J. C. Merriam emphasized the importance of the discovery of this type of a tooth which so closely fulfills the prediction of Mr. Gidley regarding a form of a horse which would bridge the gap between the anchitherine and the protohippine groups. THE BISON OF RANOHO LA BREA BY ASA C. CHANDLER {Abstract) In Bison antiqitus individual variation occurs in size and relative measure- ments of the skull to tbe extent of about 20 per cent, while the sex differences of these characters are small, being apparently less in B. cuitiqinis than in B. bison or B. bonasus. The horn cores show approximately similar individual variations within a sex, but the average length in females is about 25 per cent less, while the basal circumference is about 33 per cent less than in males, there being no individual overlap in either case. The variation in general form, curvature, and angle of insertion of the horn cores is slight, and these are, therefore, reliable specific characters. The teeth of B. antiquus generally have the enamel walls of the lakes more complicated than those of B. bison. STRUCTURE OF THE POSTERIOR FOOT IN THE MYLODONT SLOTHS OF RANCHO LA BREA BY CHESTER STOCK ABSTEACTS AND DISCUSSIONS OF PAPERS 171 REGENT STUDIES ON SKULL STRUCTURE OF THALATTOSAURUS BY JOHN C. MERRIAM AND CHARLES L. CAMP (Abstract) The peculiar marine reptile Thallattosaurus from the Upper Triassic of northern California has been known by very limited materials. A recently exposed skull illustrates several points of structure better than the type speci- men. Fragments representing the rostral region indicate the necessity of a small modification in the first reconstruction. REVIEW OF THE PLEISTOCENE SPECIES, PAVO CALIFORNICUS BY LOY r E HOMES MILLER (Abstract) Presence of additional material, both of the fossil form and of the nearer related living species, makes review of the entire question of relationship proper. The Yucatan turkey, Agriocliaris, has been distinguished generically from the northern form, Meleagris. The Central American bird shows certain peacock affinities in the tail feathers and in the osteology of the posterior limb. The fossil species from Rancho La Brea displays characters far removed from Meleagris and intermediate between Agriocliaris and Pavo, but well removed from either genus. A new generic designation for the Pleistocene species be- comes necessary. Chapman considers the present habitat of Agriocliaris the focus of retraction of a larger distributional area. Admitting the possibility that a similar change has taken place in the distribution of Pavo on the opposite side of the Pacific Ocean, it is not surprising to meet with an inter- mediate form in the Pleistocene of California. HIPPARION-LIKE HORSES OF THE PACIFIC COAST AND GREAT BASIN PROVINCES BY JOHN C MERRIAM (Abstract) Until recently the Hipparion group has been very imperfectly known from North America west of the Wasatch Range, the only described forms clearly of this type being two species reported from the later Tertiary of the John Day region of eastern Oregon. Within the past few years a number of new repre- sentatives have been discovered at widely different localities, and nine or ten species are now known. As the history and distribution of the group have unusual importance in comparative study of the American Tertiary faunas west of the Wasatch, the writer has essayed to assemble the available infor- mation relating to the forms of this genus known in the Pacific Coast and Great Basin provinces. 172 PROCEEDINGS OF THE PALEONTOLOGICAL SOCIETY RELATIONSHIPS OF THE INVERTEBRATES TO THE VERTEBRATE FAVNAL ZONES OF THE PLIOCENE JAUALITOS AND ETCHEGOIN FORMATIONS AT COALING A , CALIFORNIA BY J. 0. NOMUND (Abstract) The work of Professor Merriam has shown that the invertebrate and verte- brate faunal zones have a rather definite relationship in several of the Mio- cene and Pliocene formations near Coalinga, California. This is well shown in the Jacalitos and Etchegoin formations. Invertebrate faunal zones have been located in the type section of the Etchegoin, which are correlated with those south of Coalinga, including the Mya Zone, or uppermost Etchegoin. The vertebrate faunal zones are placed with reference to these zones. Discussion The vertebrate fauna, which was correlated with the Mya Zone by Mr. Nom- land, appeared to Dr. J. C. Merriam to be possibly of Pleistocene age and to have been derived from terrace material instead of from the Etchegoin forma- tion. The bones of a large, highly developed Equus, which is not certainly known in the Pleistocene, and of a large deer of the Elk type have never been found in America in beds older than the Pleistocene. Some of the camel bones are possibly from older. Dr. Merriam congratulated Mr. Nomland on the work clone in the correlation of the vertebrate and invertebrate faunal zones of this Coalinga district. CLIMATIC ZONES IN THE PLIOCENE OF THE PACIFIC COAST BY J. P. SMITH {Abstract) The climate of the Eocene of the Pacific coast was tropical or semi-tropical even as far north as Alaska. Similar conditions prevailed during the Oligocene at least as far north as Puget Sound. During the Lower Miocene the climate was mild-temperate north to Washington, while in the Upper Miocene it was warm-temperate. During the Lower Pliocene almost sub-boreal conditions prevailed as far south as Eel River, Mendocino County, California. Middle California had a climate during this time that was much as. it is today. South- ern California was warm-temperate, as is attested by the character of the Fernando fauna. The climate of the Upper Pliocene appears to have been cooler than that of the Lower, as is shown by the character of the faunas from southern California. MARINE TRIASSIC INVERTEBRATE FAUNA FROM NEW ZEALAND BY C. T. TBECHMANN {Abstract) The most typical Upper Triassic section of New Zealand occurs on South Island, near Nelson and near Nugget Point. The latter section consists of ABSTRACTS AND DISCUSSIONS OF PAPERS 173 about 3,000 feet of fossiliferous slates, graywackes, and conglomerates hav- ing a nearly vertical dip. The most common fossil forms obtained from these beds include a number of cephalopods, species of Monotis, HaloMa, Mytilus problcmaticus, Gyphcea, and Pinna, besides several new species. A reptile, possibly representing an Ichthyosaur, was also found. The occurrence of a Trigonia within the Triassic of this island of a form comparable to a Jurassic species of Europe suggests that this general region was the center of distribu- tion of that form, and that it later migrated to Europe. Discussion Dr. J. P. Smith suggested that the form referred to Monotis might prove on further study to be a closely related form, for Monotis is not known to occur with Halobia in either Europe or America. FAUNA OF THE TEJON GROUP IN THE CANTUA DISTRICT OF THE COALINOA QUADRANGLE, CALIFORNIA BY ROY E. DICKERSON (Abstract) The Eocene strata between Domengine and Oantua creeks, Coalinga quad- rangle, belongs to the Tejon group. These strata appear to be equivalent to the Eocene strata in the vicinity of Mount Diablo. They apparently represent a longer portion of Eocene time than the Tejon of the type locality. The fauna of the lowermost beds is older than the Rimella simplex Zone, which is the fauna of the type Tejon. This lowermost fauna is tentatively correlated with the Turbinolia Zone of the Mount Diablo region. The fauna of the white sandstone member is, as a whole, the equivalent of the typical Tejon, although the fauna from the uppermost beds may be tran- sitional between the Rimella simplex Zone and the Siphonalia sutterensis Zone. FAUNA OF THE TEJON IN THE SAN DIEGO COUNTY BY ROY E. DICKERSON (Abstract) The Tejon-Eocene strata of San Diego County have yielded a fauna of over ninety forms, many of which are common species in the Tejon of Canada de las Uvas. The Rimella simplex Zone is present in both localities. Orogenic movements in post-Eocene time have been far less vigorous in the vicinity of San Diego than in middle California. MOLLUSCAN FAUNAS FROM DEADHANS ISLAND BY T. S. OLDROYD (Abstract) Small areas in this locality have recently yielded a great number of species, some of which are new. A review of the collecting in this vicinity is given and the ranges of some of the species are considered. 174 PROCEEDINGS OF THE PALEONTOLOGTCAL SOCIETY CORALS FROM THE CRETACEOUS AND TERTIARY OF CALIFORNIA AND OREGON BY J. O. NOMLAND (Abstract) Although a number of corals have been described from the Cretaceous and Tertiary of the Pacific coast, the members of this group have been used only to a limited extent for correlation purposes. The geologic and geographic ranges of this group are discussed on the basis of (lie much enlarged coral fauna now known from this coast. EOCENE OF THE LOWER COWLITZ RIVER VALLEY, WASHINGTON by charles e. weaver Discussion Doctor Dickenson stated that Doctor Weaver should be congratulated on this excellent piece of work, which placed the stratigraphy of the Cowlitz basin on such a firm basis. Mr. Clarence Waring thought that the faunas from that region showed some basis for separation into horizons, and that they should not be treated as a unit. FAUNAL STUDIES IN THE CRETACEOUS OF THE SANTA ANA MOUNTAINS OF SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA BY EARL L. PACKARD (Abstract) The fauna from the Santa Ana Mountains is more closely related to that of the typical Chico than to that of the Horsetown. The peculiarities of this southern fauna are attributed to the difference between the environment of the Sacramento Valley and that of the Santa Ana Mountain basin of deposi- tion. BULLETIN OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA Vol. 27, pp. 175-192 March 31, 1916 DEY LAND IN GEOLOGY 1 PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS BY ARTHUR P. COLEMAN (Bead before the Society December 29, 1915) CONTENTS Page Introduction 175 Discovery of the land 177 Arid zones of the Pleistocene and present 180 Arid period of the Permian and Triassic 181 Late Precambrian deserts 182 Glacial periods 183 Pleistocene ice age 183 Permocarbonif erous ice age 184 Late Precambrian ice age 186 Huronian ice age 186 Pre-Huronian land conditions ■ 18S Why should there be dry land? 189 Have oceans and continents ever changed places? 190 Teleological considerations 192 Introduction After visits to South Africa, Australia, and India to study dry-land deposits, it has become very evident to the writer that most of the earth is covered with water, and also that a ship is the most tantalizing of all modes of travel for a geologist, since captains have a prejudice against anything of geological interest, such as rocks or reefs or shoals. After 1,200 miles of sheltered voyaging behind the great Australian barrier, one may reach Java without ever seeing a coral reef at close quarters. Except the oozes dredged from the deep sea and the contours of its bot- tom revealed by soundings, the three-quarters of the globe beneath the ocean have scarcely any message for the geologist. That the waves and the tides do important geological work is true, but to hear the growl of the breakers and to see them pounce on their prey, one must travel in a small boat close to shore and not in an ocean liner. Even to study the action of the sea 011 the shore it is better to be on land. The dry shores 1 Manuscript received by the Secretary of the Society January 27, 1916. XIII — Bull. Geol. Soc. Am., Vol. 27, 1915 (175) 176 A. P. COLEMAN DRY LAND IN GEOLOGY of Lake Bonneville, as read by a Gilbert, give more instruction in regard to wave work than all the foam and tumult of the surf on the strand. The geologist is essentially a land animal, and yet until recently most books on geology, especially text-books, have had surprisingly little to say of the land and its conditions. The writers seemed all to belong to the blue-water school, so much of their space has been given to the sea and its inhabitants. It is true that continents were mentioned, almost apolo- getically, when one came to the Cenozoic mammals, but even the Glacial period did not lift geology above the sea for some of the older writers, who preferred icebergs to glaciers for the manufacture of boulder-clay. This concentration on the sea and its life went to astonishing lengths in the more ancient parts of geological history. Like most of our older geologists, my first nourishment in the science was drawn from Dana's "Manual." Unfortunately that earliest of text-books has been lost, but curiosity led me to glance over his fourth edition (1895) to see how the dry land fares in its pages. There is the usual fiery introduction to historical geology, dividing Archean times alliteratively into Astral, Azoic, and Archeozoic eons, with a lithic era beginning at 2,500° Fahrenheit and an oceanic era commenc- ing when the earth had cooled to 500°, followed by eras of the earliest plants and the earliest animals as the boiling ocean cooled to endurable temperatures. When the streaming waters had permanently condensed in the hollows of the original crust, there was left a V-shaped nucleus of dry land about which the continent of North America Avas to be built up. After this encouraging start with a quite respectable dry-land area as a foundation, historical geology becomes submerged in seas, mostly shallow, until the end of the Silurian. Out of 114 pages devoted to this part of the world's history, the total number of lines referring to the land and its inhabitants amount to only one page, while the Devonian land plants and animals are given only 4 pages out of 46. It is true that most of the Carboniferous chapter is devoted to the rank growths of the coal swamps, but these amphibious plants have little to do with actual dry land. They never rise far above sealevel and are frequently lowered beneath it to get a fresh covering of mud or sand. The araucarias of the hills inland are barely mentioned, and it is not till one gets well on into the Mesozoic that the dinosaurs compel the student to depart a little from the seashore. Even then there is a suggestion that at least some of the clumsy beasts preferred splashing along the mud flats or paddling in the lagoons. There is no hint of lean creatures hastening with long strides to the shrinking water-holes of a semi-arid region. . Another stand-by of student days, this time in Germany, was Credner's "Geologie/' which up to the end of the Devonian gives 2 pages out of 58 INTRODUCTION 177 to the land and its dwellers. Only 32% pages out of 300, up to the be- ginning of the Quaternary, have to do with terrestrial things, even the dinosaurs almost escaping notice. The dry land was evidently of small importance. It is not unnatural that in the beginning geology should devote itself mainly to things marine, for the favored haunts of men are almost all founded on stratified rocks. Werner's idea of a world deposited layer by layer from a primeval sea seemed reasonable when he lectured in Frei- berg, though the Bergakademie stands on eruptive gneiss; and when William Smith began stratigraphic geology, on an island where one can never get many miles from the sound of the surf, he had to collect sea- shells from the rocks as coins with Avhich to date the formations. The regular succession of marine faunas in the stratified rocks laid the foundation for our chronology, showed the orderly development of living beings, and made possible the correlation of the rocks of different coun- tries. The study of marine fossils was necessary to the building up of historical geology on a sound basis, therefore, so that the almost exclusive attention given to the seas and their life was not unjustified. In those earlier clays continents had a place in geology mainly as limiting the migrations of marine faunas or as providing sediments for the shallow seas. In other respects they were largely negative things, vacuums where nothing took place, since they provided no fossil-bearing beds, while the waters around them were swarming with life and activity. ■ It seemed quite the correct thing thirty-five years ago, when the older men among us were students, to spend most of our time bending over rows of brachiopods in museum cases and memorizing lists of type fossils, so as to fix the age of rocks we might encounter in our field work. In those days the wash of the waves and the smell of the seashore seemed to permeate geology, and dry land was seldom mentioned or thought of by professors or students. Most of geology consisted of stratigraphy and invertebrate paleontology. Bluff old Credner had some justification for devoting nine-tenths of his historical geology to a consideration of the doings of the sea and its inhabitants. The land had scarcely been discov- ered. Even the "Age of Mammals" was named and subdivided in ac- cordance with the proportions of extinct to living shell-fish and not from the rapid evolution of the mammals and their differentiation into the highest forms of animals the world has known. DlSCOVEEY OF THE LAND It can not be said that the early geologists entirely ignored the land. An unmistakable land surface, like the "dirt bed" of the English Pur- 178 A. P. COLEMAN DllY LAND IN GEOLOGY beck, with its araucarian stumps still rooted in the soil, was occasionally recognized, though such occurrences are almost unknown in formations older than the Carboniferous. It was recognized, also, that heat and drought best accounted for the beds of gypsum and rock-salt found in several of the more ancient formations, though the materials might have come from the evaporation of inclosed arms of the sea, and so might not be really continental deposits. The most typical land deposits, those of arid and of glacial climates, were seldom recognized as such and were generally included among the marine stratified rocks, though the absence of fossils was disquieting. Even the red sandstones, with their hot, desert colors, were often looked on as marine, or else possibly as formed in great lakes, because they con- tained no marine fossils. The ancient boulder-clays were merely coarse, water-formed deposits of some peculiar kind. In most cases, however, dry-land periods are not represented by de- posits of any sort, but by the gaps in the sequence of formations, for normal land conditions mean erosion and denudation. Tbeir only record is usually a discordance, and a dry-land interval shown only by an uncon- formity naturally passed almost unnoticed. Most of the cbapters of the world's history are Avritten under water and show a strong bias toward the side of the Avater animals. The only continental deposits beside those of arid and glacial condi- tions which have a good chance of being preserved and recognized are those of the coal SAvamps, and they persist mainly because they are on debatable ground often invaded by the sea. During much the greater part of the world's history happenings on the land are recorded only in the most accidental Avay, as by some stray leaf or tree trunk or carcass drifting doAvn a river to be buried in the mud at its mouth. It is seldom that land formations can be found on a broad enough scale to reconstruct continental surfaces and conditions. Though it is certain that lands and their inhabitants have existed in unbroken succession from early times, the lands themselves are in geology mostly shadowy things. Whether they Avere mountainous or flat Ave can only infer from the kind of sediments they sent cIoaati to the sea. During most of the world's history the climate seems to have been mild and moist, even to the poles, and deserts and ice-sheets Avere apparently absent. We are living in an exceptional time characterized by extremes of climate and are apt to think of such extremes as normal. When Mio- cene plane trees grew luxuriantly on Spitzbergen, in latitude 78°, the Avhole circulatory system of air and water must have been different from the one Ave are accustomed to. Extremes of cold and perhaps also of dry- DISCOVERY OF THE LAND 179 ness must have been largely absent. There could have been no cold ocean currents flowing beside warm lands to desiccate the winds blowing over them, as in southern California and northern Chile, at the present time. The most characteristic land deposits, those of deserts and ice-sheets, be- long especially to the short periods of stress and trouble separating the long, genial, but unenterprising, geological ages, and hence must be rela- tively rare in the column of formations. These comparatively unusual types of deposits began to attract atten- tion about sixty years ago in Europe, and geologists of the Indian Survey correctly interpreted the ancient Talchir boulder-clays in 1859. With deserts before their eyes for comparison, they recognized also ancient arid deposits. In America not much attention was given to continental for- mations till Davis and his brilliant physiographic school, twenty-five years ago, began to explain the Cenozoic beds of the west as dry-land deposits. At about the same time Walther and other Germans took up the careful study of desert processes, giving the clue to the origin of ancient red sandstones and their accompaniments. Of late years most of us have paid at least brief visits to deserts and have felt the charm of their bare- ness, their loneliness, their clear, cool, night skies and hot orange haze at noon, and have watched the dusty pillars of the "go-devils" transport a train-load of dust across the Kalihari, or have seen the low dance of the yellow sand grains as a hot wind builds up a barchan in Nubia. We have seen the selective carving of the desert sand-blast on rocks of unequal hardness, have wondered at the brown desert varnish on exposed rock surfaces, and have speculated as to the origin of "calcrete" or "kankar." Geologists are now on the alert for continental, and especially desert, formations, and there are few red sandstones which have not been picked out of the marine ragbag and set aside as belonging to the land. It is even possible that the pendulum has in some cases swung too far and will have to swing back again. Some of the red sandstones or shales handed over to the desert may yet disclose marine fossils and have to return to the seashore. A glance through recent text-books of geology in English, French, and German shows how widely attention has been given of late years to conti- nental, and especially desert, formations. Arid conditions have been recog- nized, or at least suspected, in nearly all the main subdivisions of his- torical geology. They have been mentioned by one author or another in the Pleistocene, the Pliocene, the Miocene, the Eocene; the Cretaceous and the Triassic; the Permian, the Carboniferous, the Devonian, the Silurian, and the Cambrian; the Keweenawan, and possibly one or two earlier of the Precambrian series. In fact, only the Jurassic and the 180 A. P. COLEMAN DRY LAND IN GEOLOGY Ordovician seem to have escaped the drought, and it may be that a more careful search through the literature would disclose deserts there also. A number of the suggestions noted are only tentative, however, and wide-spread and unmistakable desert formations seem confined to the Pleistocene, Triassic, Permian, Devonian, and late Precambrian. Of these the Pleistocene deserts may be looked on as continuing to the pres- ent, the Triassic deserts form an aftermath of the arid conditions of the Permian, and the Devonian deserts seem less extensive than the others. The three times of greatest aridity appear to be, 1, the Pleistocene con- tinuing to the present; 2, the Permian-Triassic ; 3, the late Precambrian. Though well known, it may not be amiss to recall some features of these three periods of widely extended desert conditions. Arid Zones oe the Pleistocene and Present The map of the world shows two zones which are largely desert, one in each hemisphere, with a broad zone of heavy equatorial rainfall between. To the north of the northern desert belt there are moister conditions, and the same is true to the south of the southern one. There is reason to believe that Antarctica is arid, evaporation exceeding precipitation, and the same may be true of some Arctic lands. The precipitation on Spitz- bergen is stated to be only 6 inches per annum. The two belts of deserts do not run quite parallel to the equator. The northern one, beginning with the Sahara and Nubian deserts, in Africa, runs northeastward through the Arabian and Indian deserts to those of central Asia, where the desert of Gobi reaches nearly 50° of north lati- tude. In North America desert conditions are less extensive and do not extend beyond latitude 40° or 45°. In the southern hemisphere the bodies of land are much smaller, and the deserts of South Africa, Australia, and South America are correspond- ingly small as compared with those north of the equator. Their southern limits are, roughly, 30°, 40°, and 45° south latitude. Penck has shown, I think satisfactorily, that these desert belts migrate toward the equator in cold periods, narrowing the zone of tropic rains, and move respectively north and south in warmer periods. In the mild- est geological periods it would almost seem as if the equatorial belt of warmth and moisture expanded to cover the whole earth, abolishing both deserts and ice-sheets, and these appear to be the normal conditions when peneplanation has advanced far and shallow seas transgress widely over the continents. 2 2 Die Formen der Landoberflache u. Verscbiebungen der Klimagiirtel, Koenigliche, Preus. Ak., vol. Iv, 1913. ARIDITY 181 Arid Period of the Permian and Triassic Going back to Permian and Triassic times, much of the evidence has been buried or destroyed ; yet it is certain that deserts extended widely in many lands. Eed sandstones, arkoses, and shales with mud cracks and footprints, beds of salt and gypsum, are reported from England, Germany, Austria, and Russia in regions now well watered. In North America there were the wide-spread red beds of the Rocky Mountain region and the band of desert sandstones extending from Prince Edward Island southwest to Virginia ; so that arid conditions covered far more of Europe and North America than now. In India the Gondwana system includes great- thicknesses of coarse sandstone with bands of conglomerate, sup- posed to be of fluviatile origin, terrestrial deposits, but perhaps not of a specially arid kind; 3 but no other references to Asiatic land conditions have been found. I. C. White reports a thick series of massive red and gray sandstones, probably of Triassic age, resting on Glossopteris beds with coal seams in Brazil, but expresses no opinion as to the climate dur- ing the deposition of these upper beds. The basal conglomerate under the coal he thinks glacial. 4 Red beds of sandstone and conglomerate to the thickness of 1,600 feet occur, according to Rogers, in the Karroo sys- tem of South Africa, but he puts them probably above the Triassic. 5 Whether the 1,100 feet of Hawkesbury sandstones of the Triassic in New South Wales, with their steep cross-bedding, bands of conglomerates, worm tracks and sun cracks, imply an arid period in Australia is perhaps uncertain, though they are undoubtedly continental deposits. 6 It will be seen that land formations, often of a very arid kind, are found in most of the continents in Permian or Triassic times. They seem to occur rather later in the regions which endured the cold of the Permo- carboniferous glaciation than in Europe and in our Western States, but the correlation is not very certain. These "New Red" deserts following on the heels of the severest ice age on record close the Paleozoic calami- tously. It is not surprising that such extreme climatic changes put an end to the lush growths of the coal swamps, so that only hardy plants survived, and hastened the departure of the semi-aquatic amphibia, while giving an impetus to the development of the reptiles as dry-land in- habitants. There must have been very dry conditions during the Upper Silurian (Salina) of America, as shown by the salt and gypsum beds of New 3 Oldham : Geology of India, 2d edition, pp. 150-151. 4 Brazilian coal fields, p. 31. c Geology of Cape Colony, p. 216. 8 Geology of New South Wales, Suessmilch, pp. 158-160. 182 A. P. COLEMAN DRY LAND IN GEOLOGY York, Ohio, Ontario, and Manitoba ; and the succeeding Old Eed beds of Scotland and other European countries suggest a similar climate, but I have not found evidence of arid conditions on a wide enough scale to make it desirable to discuss them here. Late Precambrian Deserts Desert characters have been ascribed to sandstones, perhaps belonging to the earliest Cambrian, but more probably the uppermost Precambrian, in many parts of the world. They include apparently the Keweenawan and part of the Belt series in America, the Torridonian of Scotland, part of the Gaisa beds of Norway, perhaps also the Sparagmite of Sweden and the Jotnian of Finland. Whether the Matsap beds of Cape Colony and some of the Kuddapah sandstones of India, described as shore deposits, or the Vindhian sandstones and conglomerates should be included is uncer- tain. If these are all of the same age and have been correctly interpreted as arid deposits, this was the most severe and extensive period of desert con- ditions known. In many places on the Canadian Shield the coarse red sandstones, usually with some conglomerate at the base, may be seen rest- ing on an Archean surface of granitoid gneiss or Keewatin schist or Animikie slate, the original land surface of gently rounded hills and shallow valleys belonging to an ancient peneplain. In some outcrops the crumbling gneiss beneath, an old regolith, provides most of the materials for the basal conglomerate. This is true at various points on the north shore of Lake Superior and apparently also in Scotland, where the Tor- ridonian rests on the Lewisian. The Lake Superior Keweenawan, though much the best known, is on a small scale as compared with the areas of sandstone of the same age farther north in Canada. The Athabasca sand- stones of Tyrrell, those of Great Bear Lake and of central Labrador, not to speak of smaller areas, indicate a very broad surface exposed to arid conditions in North America. These red sandstones still occupy not less than 50,000 square miles, and it is certain that much greater areas of such relatively soft and easily attacked rocks have been destroyed in the long dry-land periods of later times. It appears that in this desert period the arid districts were mainly in the northern hemisphere and to the north of latitude 48° — that is, very much farther north than the belt of deserts of the present northern hemisphere. It is unknown, of course, to what extent Keweenawan rocks are buried to the south of Lake Superior or of Scotland. The breadth of the belt as known in North America is at least 20°, since rocks of this ao-e reach nearly to 70° north latitude in the region north of Great Bear PRECAMBRIAN DESERTS 183 Lake. The Gaisa beds on Varanger Fjord, in Norway, reach the same latitude, and the Scotch Torridonian about latitude 58°. It is hard to imagine red soils, drifting sands, and the hot winds of deserts as existing in regions now tundra-covered and frigid; but this seems to have been true in the more northern areas. Glacial Periods Thus far arid conditions only have been mentioned, but the best pre- served land surfaces of the past are those sealed up unchangeably beneath glacial deposits. It seems absurd to couple together deserts and glaciers, so opposite to one another in every respect ; nevertheless in running down the column of historical geology one finds these contradictory phenomena closely linked together. In almost all the periods where aridity has been proved there have been found also proofs of ice-action, the two seemingly hostile conditions occurring either at the same time in different parts of the world or one after the other in the same region. We live in the clos- ing stages of a great Glacial period, extensive ice-sheets still surviving in Greenland and the Arctic islands, as well as in Antarctica, and yet wide deserts are found in all continents save Europe. More or less certain evidence of ice-action has been found in the Pleis- tocene, the Eocene, the Cretaceous, the Triassic, the Permian, or Permo- carboniferous, the Carboniferous, the Devonian, or possibly Upper Silu- rian, perhaps the Cambrian, certainly the late Precambrian, and the Lower Huronian. The list just given is closely parallel to that given for the arid periods. Only four of these glacial times are of prime importance — those of the Pleistocene, the Permocarboniferous, the late Precambrian, and the Lower Huronian. Pleistocene Ice Age The Pleistocene ice age, from which the world is just emerging, unless this happens to be an interglacial period, is so familiar that little need be said of it. Boulder-clay, moraines, and deposits formed by glacial waters occur over (3,000,000 square miles of the northern hemisphere; smaller areas are found in the southern hemisphere, and Pleistocene mo- raines reach thousands of feet below the present glaciers on high moun- tains all over the world, even under the equator, showing that the cli- mates of the whole world were affected. Beneath the glacial deposits in many places there are characteristically smoothed and striated rock sur- faces, though near the edges of the ancient ice-sheets there are thousands of square miles where loose materials were not swept aAvay to bedrock. 184 A. P. COLEMAN DRY LAND IN GEOLOGY The central areas were most effectively scoured, and in many places the rocks beneath, owing to unequal hardness, have been shaped into roches moutonnees, forming hills well rounded on the side from which the ice advanced. Boulder-clay is a highly specialized product of land ice ; float- ing ice, such as floes or bergs, is not known to produce it, the materials dropped through the water when melting being necessarily more or less stratified. The "soled boulders" or "striated stones" from boulder-clay have special characters not caused by any other agency, such as mudflows or torrential action. They are manufactured articles, easily recognized by one familiar with glacier work, and not to be confounded with stones scratched or smoothed in other ways. These familiar features are re- called because they serve as criteria for the recognition of the ancient glaciations to be mentioned later. The hummocky, moutonnees surfaces left by the Pleistocene glaciers on Archean rocks which have disordered structures and vary in dura- bility are very characteristic and were once looked on as the direct handi- work of the ice-sheets themselves. The clean and polished surfaces of fresh rock, generally well striated and often deeply scored, are eloquent of the stripping and grinding of the glacier, but the original surface forms have not been greatly changed, as will be shown later. Most of the great Pleistocene ice-sheets gathered on comparatively low ground and reached sealevel, often occupying large areas of shallow sea- bottom as well as the land. Few of them began in mountain regions, and the flow of those on level ground was caused by the slope of the upper surface of the ice-mass and not by the inclination of the floor beneath. They could even move uphill for thousands of feet, when the ice-sheet was thick enough in the center, and their flow took place outward in all directions. Doubtless conditions were similar in earlier glaciations, and it is not necessary to assume great mountain ranges to account for them, as some geologists have done. Peemocaebonieeeous Ice Age The first undoubted proofs of ancient glaciation seem to have been found by the Blandfords in India, and the first Memoir of the Indian Survey (1859) contains a brief account of the Talchir tillite in central India, illustrated by a rough sketch. Soon after South African and Aus- tralian tillites of the same age were described. There was at first a good deal of skepticism expressed by European and American geologists as to the reality of the discoveries. Ramsay's interpretation of certain English boulder conglomerates as glacial a few years before had' been disputed, PERMOCARBONIFEROUS ICE AGE 185 which cast doubt on the new reports from the far east and south. Was not the Carboniferous a tropical time, even in the Arctic regions ! Gla- ciers and the steamy coal swamps did not mix well together. Since then, however, many northern geologists, including expert gla- cialists, have studied these marvelous deposits, and for a number of years no one has doubted their glacial origin, in spite of the fact that most of the localities are in what are now warm temperate or even tropical re- gions. All tbe evidences for the ice-action on a large scale found in our Pleistocene are repeated, with the difference that the Pleistocene till ceases about 38° from the equator, while the Talchir tillite in India reaches well within tbe tropics (18° north) and Permocarboniferous tillite in West Australia touches the tropics. In South Africa the Dwyka tillite reaches 24° 30', or even 22 , 7 and I. C. White and Woodworth report similar tillites between 25° and 30° in southern Brazil. 8 New localities have been reported within the last few years in Argentina 9 and the Falkland islands; 10 but only few and unimportant occurrences are known in the northern hemisphere outside of India. They have been reported from Herat in Afghanistan, Armenia, and the Urals; and in western Europe they have been described from central Prance 11 and the Frankenwald. 12 In North America tillites, probably of the same age, have been found by Sayles near Boston 13 and by Cairnes on the Alaskan boundary. 14 A year ago, near Penganga Eiver, under the hot sun of India, in lati- tude 19° or 20°, I walked across fields of ancient till strewn with gla- ciated stones and boulders, and stood on a well polished and striated sur- face of Vindhian limestone, as typical as can be found in Ontario or northern New York. This resurrection of an ice-worked surface of the Paleozoic, in what are now the sweltering tropics, gives a glacial geologist something to ponder over; and to see the same things in Africa and Aus- tralia, only on a much larger scale, as I have had occasion to do within the last few years, raises some of the most thrilling problems in all geology. 7 For literature see Glacial periods and their bearing on geological theories, by the writer. Bull. Geol. Soc. Am., vol. 19, pp. 347-366 ; and Schuchert : Climates of geologic time. Carnegie Inst., Pub. No. 192, pp. 263-298. 8 Brazilian coal fields, pp. 11-15 ; and geological expedition to Brazil and Chile. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., Harvard, vol. lvi, No. 1. 9 Keidel : Compte Rendu, Geol. Congress, XII Session, 1914, p. 676. 10 Halle : Geol. Mag., n. s., Dec. 5, vol. v, pp. 264-265. 11 Compte Rendu, 1895, vol. cxvii, p. 255. Striated stones and angular blocks up to 12 or 15 cubic meters are described. 12 J. D. G. G., 1893, vol. xlv, p. 69. Boulders occur scattered through unstratified graywacke in the upper Culm. 13 Sayles and La Forge : Science, n. s., vol. 32, pp. 723-724 ; also Harvard Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., vol. lvi, No. 2. 14 G. S. C, Mem. 67, Alaska Boundary Survey, pp. 91-92. 186 A. P. COLEMAN DRY LAND IN GEOLOGY Our Pleistocene ice age, with its array of glacial and interglacial beds, was merely an imitation on a much smaller and less impressive scale of the tremendous .Paleozoic ice age, which laid down in places 1,000 feet or more of till and included interglacial times long enough to form great coal seams, as in the Greta beds of New South Wales. These ancient boulder-clays and moutonnees rock surfaces of the south- ern continents bring us face to face with the most dramatic moment in geology, when a world enervated by the moist, hot-house conditions of the earlier Carboniferous found itself in the grip of the fiercest and longest winter of the ages, followed by the merciless droughts of the Permian and Triassic. Late Pkecambeian Ice Age Still more ancient tillites have been found in a number of regions, sometimes described as Lower Cambrian; at others as uppermost Pre- cambrian. In a few cases Cambrian fossils have been collected in beds above the tillite, but, so far as I am aware, never beneath it. It is possi- ble that there were two early ice ages, with an interval between; but it seems more probable that they are of the same age and all really Pre- cambrian. The Australians believe that their more ancient tillites are Cambrian, however. Tillites have been suggested at two places in the KeweenaAvan of Amer- ica. They occur in the Gaisa beds of Norway, where there is a striated surface beneath; perhaps also in the Torridonian of Scotland. In Aus- tralia Howchin describes an area of 460 miles by 250, and they are found also in Tasmania. They are reported from the Nant'ou formation in China; the Griquatown series in Cape Colony, where they have an area of at least 1,000 square miles, and near Simla, in India. The last two mentioned may be older than the Keweenawan. Sir Thomas Holland thinks the Simla tillite may even be as old as the Huronian. These tillites belong to higher latitudes than those of the Permocar- boniferous, none coming nearer the equator than 29°; but some of them occupy regions noAv warm temperate, while the ice-sheets of the Pleisto- cene halted at about 38° in North and South America and 52° in Europe. In so old a period one can hardly expect to find very complete evidence of the area covered by glaciers; but this ice age seems to have been more severe than that of the Pleistocene. Huronian Ice Age Much farther off in the abyss of Precambrian time is the Lower Hu- ronian Glacial period, thus far known with certainty only from the Cana- HURONIAN ICE AGE 187 dian Shield, unless the tillite reported by Hintze from the Wasatch Moun- tains and that from Simla in India are to he referred to so early an age. A characteristic tillite with well striated stones has been found in the famous Cobalt region, its hard boulder-clay cut by the richest veins of native silver in the world. Striated stones have been found also 60 miles to the east, in the Province of Quebec, by members of Morley Wilson's geological survey party, 13 and one from the original Huronian region, 160 miles to the southwest, has been figured by Collins. 16 Areas of sim- ilar coarse boulder conglomerate or tillite, sometimes inclosing blocks tons in weight and miles from their source, have been mapped at various points as far northeast as Chibougamau, 320 miles from Cobalt, and have been found also to the west of Cobalt. They are widely scattered over the Canadian Shield and were once much more extensive, covering no doubt many thousands of square miles. In most places the tillite rests with gentle dips on the low hills and shallow valleys of a peneplain closely resembling the present Laurentian peneplain. In some places the tillite passes downward, with no visible break, into an old regolith due to the decay of the Laurentian gneiss or Keewatin greenstone beneath. In others the rock below has been smoothed and polished, though no striae have jet been found on it. It is impressive to come on this old land surface half way down in the Precambrian succession, yet as thoroughly baseleveled as the neighboring undulating surface of gneiss and greenstone from which rain and frost are now stripping the boulder-clay. The continent sealed up beneath the Huronian tillite looks as finished and as ancient as the Laurentian pene- plain beneath the boulder-clay of the last ice age. The strenuous history of the world since Huronian days could add nothing appreciable to its hoary antiquity. Great mountain ranges had already been gnawed down to the bare crystalline foundations before the ice of the Huronian covered the surface with boulder-clay,- and this all happened long before a trilo- bite was entombed in the mud of a Cambrian sea. Though the extent of the Huronian ice-sheet is only imperfectly known, it is certain that a plain in all respects like that beneath the tillite stretches 2,000 miles northwestward to the Arctic Ocean and more than 1,000 miles northeastward to the edge of Labrador; for flat-lying areas of Animikie or Keweenawan rocks cover a dozen broad areas of similar peneplain in other parts of the Canadian Shield. The same plain slips gently under Silurian and Devonian sediments in the central de- pression of Hudson Bay, under Ordovician limestone and Potsdam sand- 15 G. S. C, Mem. 39, pp. 88-97. 10 G. S. C, Museum Bull., No. 8, plate i. 188 A. P. COLEMAN DRY LAND IN GEOLOGY stone in Ontario, and under Silurian, Devonian, and Cretaceous rocks toward the southwest. How far the unchanged pre-Huronian peneplain or its little changed successor extends south westward beneath the strati- fied rocks is unknown. Much of this vast surface has been buried at one time or another and sheltered from erosion by marine sediments, and has since been disin- terred scarcely modified; but it is probable that it was never all covered by the sea at once. Portions of it seem to have remained dry land as cities of refuge for the inhabitants in every inundation. That other continental nuclei have had similar histories may be con- sidered certain. In Scotland and Scandinavia nearly horizontal Precam- brian beds, whether of glacial origin or not, cover a peneplain closely like ours; and quartzites and conglomerates called Precambrian may be seen resting with gentle clips on a similarly truncated plain in West Aus- tralia. Near Clackline, for instance, Huronian-looking quartzite rests on gneiss penetrated by pegmatite dikes ; and at several places in the neigh- borhood of Kalgourlie and Koolgardie a somewhat tilted conglomerate, like that of the American Huronian, overlies the steeply clipping gneissoid rocks. Pre-Huronian Land Conditions No unchanged land surface has yet been found below the peneplain just described, but important land areas can be inferred with certainty, though now obliterated by squeezing and folding and the metamorphism due to eruptive granites. The great development of clastic sedimentary rocks included under the names Seine Series, Sudbury Series, Temis- caming Series, etcetera, widely distributed over the Canadian Shield, imply broad lands and even mountain ranges far older than those de- stroyed before the Huronian. They generally begin with a great basal conglomerate, so coarse and bouldery sometimes as to suggest ice-action, but squeezed and rolled out and folded in with other rocks in ways that make the finding of striated stones or a striated surface beneath quite hopeless. It is, however, highly probable that the climate was, in general, cool and moist, for the rocks are gray and often include arkoses with little weathered feldspars, though Lawson speaks of the Seine conglomerate in one place as a "fanglom- erate" of desert formation. The rocks as a whole suggest a continental origin and their materials must have come from the weathering of land surfaces. Some of the graywackes and slates are very evenly bedded and show regular alternations of coarser and finer materials caused by vary- ing seasons, either warm and cold or wet and dry. They resemble the stratified silt and clav laid down in glacial lakes at the end of the Pleis- PRE-HURONIAN LAND CONDITIONS 189 tocene. Sederholm's Bothnian slates with seasonal banding, probably of somewhat the same age, show similar conditions in Finland. Land can be discovered still farther down in the misty depths of time, for the pebbles of the Seine and Dore conglomerates include far older sedimentary rocks derived from the Keewatin or Couchiching or Gren- ville Series, showing vast destruction of land surfaces in pre-Laurentian ages at the very beginning of the geological record. These glimpes of American land surfaces in a past twice removed from the ancient pre-Huronian continent give one a strange vista into a dim antiquity almost infinitely remote from a dweller in the post-Pleistocene. There is no visible beginning to dry land on the continent of America. Why should there be Dry Land ? Though it is commonly accepted that there were lands in the earliest known times, there are geologists who hold a theory of the origin of the world which logically excludes the possibility of land showing itself above the sea. The original nebular hypothesis, if followed without mishap from the stage of a cooling gas to that of a liquid, and then of a solid, would result in a correct spheroid of rotation. The lithosphere thus formed Avould be covered by an unbroken hydrosphere, followed in its turn by an atmosphere. A good workman would certainly have come close enough to the ideal form of his world to prevent errors amounting to G0,000 feet. A properly manufactured world, following the orthodox nebular process, would be completely covered by an ocean 8,000 or 10,000 feet deep. This ideal world without a continent or an island would have avoided many difficulties. Land animals, blundering, bloodthirsty, even cannibal in their crude instincts, could never have existed. The ocean itself might never have been inhabited if life originated, as is commonly supposed, under shallow- water conditions. How quiet and peaceable such a world would have been ! One almost longs for it under the turmoil of present conditions. A world without land would have had its disadvantages, however. There could have been no geologists and no geology. But it is idle to speculate as to the possibilities of a landless world. The blunder was committed and the lithosphere was so far warped out of shape that more than a quarter of it rises above the sea. One might in- quire, however, whether the blunder might not have been rectified by pro- viding more water, so as to drown out the objectionable lands. We know that there have been times when much of the present continental area was encroached on by the sea. Was there more water then, or was it merely 190 A. P. COLEMAN DRY LAND IN GEOLOGY differently arranged ? Large amounts of water are withdrawn from cir- culation by the hydration of various minerals. Are they balanced by the amounts restored as juvenile waters and the steam from volcanoes, assum- ing, of course, that volcanoes give off steam and not ammonium chloride ? Probably most geologists take it for granted that the amount of water on the globe is nearly constant from age to age. The existence of dry land at all when there is so much water on the earth is a profound mystery not even plausibly explained by the nebular hypothesis, since it demands an inexcusable irregularity in the working of the nebular machinery. Have Oceans and Continents ever changed Places? Admitting that in the beginning the lithosphere bulged up in places, so as to form continents, and sagged in other places, so as to form ocean beds, there are interesting problems presented as to the permanence of land and seas. All will admit marginal changes affecting large areas, but these encroachments of the sea on the continents and the later retreats may be of quite a subordinate kind, not implying an interchange of deep sea-bottoms and land surfaces. The essential permanence of continents and oceans has been firmly held by many geologists, notably Dana among the older ones, and seems reasonable ; but there are other geologists, espe- cially paleontologists, as Avell as zoologists and botanists, who display great recklessness in rearranging land and sea. The trend of a mountain range, or the convenience of a running bird, or of a marsupial afraid to wet its feet, seems sufficient warrant for hoisting up any sea-bottom to connect continent with continent. A Gondwana Land arises in place of an Indian Ocean and. sweeps across to South America, so that a spore- bearing plant can f oIIoav up an ice age ; or an Atlantis ties New England to Old England to help out the migrations of a shallow-water fauna ; or a "Lost Land of Agulhas" joins South Africa and India. It is curious to find these revolutionary suggestions made at a time when geodesists are demonstrating that the earth's crust over large areas, and perhaps everywhere, approaches a state of isostatic equilibrium, and that isostatic compensation is probably complete at a depth of only 76 miles. Ha} r ford's results have been ably supported and applied by my predecessor, Doctor Becker, in his address last year; but some geologists hesitate to accept them. Barrell, after an elaborate discussion of the whole question, thinks the equilibrium much less complete than Hay- ford's results would suggest ; but his arguments do not seem entirely con- vincing. 17 Great stress is laid on the submarine deltas of the Nile and 17 Articles on the strength of the earth's crust. Jour. Geol., vols, xxii and xxiil. CHANGING OCEANS AND CONTINENTS 191 the Congo as loads which should have depressed the floor on which they were laid down, but have not done so. It should be remembered, how- ever, that we know them only from soundings, and that assumptions regarding them are more or less hypothetical. On the other hand, the delta of the Mississippi seems to conform to the theory of isostasy, and there are numerous examples of depression going hand in hand with the formation of shallow-water deposits quite in accord with the isostatic theory. The 14,000 feet of coal measures at the Joggins are an instance. But more convincing still is Fairchild's demonstration that a wave of elevation followed up the retreat of the ice-front during the closing stages of the Glacial period. The thickness of ice near its margin could not have been more than a few thousand feet, perhaps half a mile, which would mean in weight of rock only 750 feet. If the stiff carapace of the earth in the State of New York yielded to so slight a change of load, it is hardly credible that 9,900 feet of sediments spread over 75,000 square miles of sea-bottom off the coast of Africa could have no effect. If I understand Barrell's discussion aright, his differences from Hay- ford's conclusions are rather of degree than of kind. He thinks the earth's crust more rigid and considers adjustments to change of load much less complete, and also that they are carried out by slow movements in the "asthenosphere" much below Hayford's level of complete compen- sation at 76 miles below the surface. He would probably agree that on the broad scale continents are buoyed up because they are light, and ocean bottoms are depressed because the matter beneath them is heavy. He would admit that to transform great areas of sea-bottom into land it would be necessary either to expand the rock beneath by several per cent or to replace heavy rock, such as basalt, by lighter materials, such as granite. There is no obvious way in which the rock beneath a sea-bottom can be expanded enough to lift it 20,000 feet, as would be necessary in parts of the Indian Ocean, to form a Gond- wana Land; so one must assume that light rocks replace heavy ones be- neath a million square miles of the ocean floor. Even with unlimited time, it is hard to imagine a mechanism that could do the work, and no convincing geological evidence can be brought forward to show that such a thing ever took place. Discussing this question not long ago in the Journal of Geology, Pro- fessor Chamberlin showed that the only typical case of deep-sea deposits found on land, the well known one of the Barbados, occurs on one of the great hinge lines around which motions of the earth's crust take place and has no real bearing on the change of ocean bottoms to continents. 18 1S .Tom-. Geol., vol. xxii, pp. 131, etc. XIV — Bull. Geol. Soc. Am., Vol. 27, 1915 192 A. P. COLEMAN DRY LAND IN GEOLOGY The same may be said of the deep-sea deposits on Timor, in the East Indies, recently described by Molengraaff. 19 In position Timor is almost the counterpart of the Barbados in the West Indies. The distribution of plants and animals should be arranged for by other means than by the wholesale elevation of ocean beds to make dry-land bridges for them. W. D. Matthew's excellent paper on climate and evolu- tion suggests ways in which this may be done more economically. The elevation of mountain chains by folding or the overriding of blocks might be expected to make trouble for the isostatic theory ; but the two best known examples, the Eockies and the Himalayas, seem to be approximately in isostatic equilibrium. In the case of the Himalayas, the youngest and highest of the great mountain systems, it is staggering to find nummulitic beds 20,000 feet above the sea; but, however it was man- aged, enough light material seems to have been introduced beneath to float the mountains at about the proper height. We may conclude that, broadly speaking, the dry-land areas have al- ways been where they are now. The adjustments of the boundaries of land and sea have been confined to the margins of the continental masses. Teleological Considerations There are certain teleological features of the relations of land and water to which attention may be drawn in closing. Without water, no life such as we know would be possible. On the other hand, uniformly deep water over the whole earth, such as might have been expected in a rigidly mechanical scheme, would probably not have provided the condi- tions necessary for the development of life. An apparently accidental lack of homogeneity in the earth allows lighter parts to rise above what would otherwise have been a universal sea. The combined efforts of the epigene forces since the earliest known times have been directed toward the destruction of continents and islands and their reduction to shoals completely covered by the sea, but their efforts have always been foiled by movements originating in the earth's interior. No continent seems to have been completely submerged since Triassic times. The life of land plants and animals appears to have been uninterrupted since that time on all the continents. There has been perpetual oscillation in respect to the area and eleva- tion of land exposed, but on the whole the balance has been carefully maintained. But for the presence of oceans of water, of an abnormal lightness in some parts of the earth's crust, and an unfailing balance for 50,000,000 years between the forces of elevation and of destruction, life such as ours would have been impossible. Can we look on these surpris- ing adjustments as merely accidental? 1S Koninklijke Akad. v. Wetenschappen, Amsterdam, deel xxiy, pp. 415-430. THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA OFFICERS, 1916 President : John" M. Clarke, Albany, N. Y. Vice-Presidents : J. P. Iddings, Brinklow, Md. Harry Fielding Reid, Baltimore, Md. Eudolph Ruedemann, Albany, 1ST. Y. Secretary: Edmund Otis Hovet, American Museum of Natural History, New York, N. Y. Treasurer: Wm. Bullock Clark, Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Md. Editor: J. Stanley-Brown, 26 Exchange Place, New York, N. Y.- Librarian: F. P. Van Horn, Cleveland, Ohio * Councilors : (Term expires 1916) R. A. F. Penrose/ Jr., Philadelphia, Pa. W. W. Atwood, Cambridge, Mass. (Term expires 1917) ^ Charles K. Leith, Madison, Wis. Thomas L. Watson, Charlottesville, Va. (Term expires 1918) Frank B r Taylor, Fort Wayne, Ind. Charles P. Berkey, New York, N. Y. BULLETIN OF THE Geological Society of America Volume 27 Number 2 JUNE, 1916 JOSEPH STANLEY- BROWN, EDITOR PUBLISHED BY THE SOCIETY MARCH, JUNE, SEPTEMBER, AND DECEMBER CONTENTS Pages Hypersthene Syenite and Related Rocks of the Blue Ridge Re- gion, Virginia. By Thomas L.Watson and Justus H. Cline. 193-234 Pleistocene Uplift of New York and Adjacent Territory. By Herman L. Fairchild 235-262 Glaciation in the White Mountains of New Hampshire. By James Walter Goldthwait _ 263-294 Pleistocene Drainage Changes in Western North Dakota. By A. G. Leonard ,-'----,.- 295-304 Alexandrian Rocks of Northeastern Illinois and Eastern Wisconsin. ByT. E. Savage 305-324 Petrography of the Pacific Islands. By Reginald A. Daly - - 325-344 Dominantly Fluviatile Origin under Seasonal Rainfall of the Old^ Red Sandstone. By Joseph Barrell • - - - 345-386 Influence of Silurian-Devonian Climates on the Rise of Air-breath- ing Vertebrates. By Joseph Barrell 387-436 Crystalline Marbles of Alabama. By William F. Prouty - - - 437-450 BULLETIN OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA Subscription, $10 per year; with discount of 25 per cent to institutions and libraries and to individuals residing elsewhere than in North America. Postage to foreign countries in the postal union, forty (40) cents extra. Communications should he addressed to The Geological Society of America, care of 420 11th Street N. W., Washington, D. C, or 77th Street and Central Park, West, New York City. NOTICE. — In accordance with the rules established by Council, claims for non-receipt of the preceding part of the Bulletin must be sent to the Secretary of the Society within three months of the date of the receipt of this number in order to be filled gratis. Entered as second-class matter in the Post-Office at Washington, D. C, under the Act of Congress of July 16, 1894 PRESS OF JDDD & DETWEILER, INC., WASHINGTON, D. C. BULLETIN OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA VOL. 27, PP. 193-234 JUNE 1, 1916 HYPEESTHENE SYENITE AND EELATED EOCKS OF^Pfl^nian j^ BLUE EIDGE EEGION, VIEGINIA 1 /^ % AUG 30 i9' BT THOMAS L. WATSON AND JUSTUS H. CLINE I r " v ' (Presented before the Society December 29, 191k) ^sff'Ofla/ MuS^ CONTENTS Page Introduction .-. 194 Previous geologic work 196 Quartz-bearing hypersthene-andesine syenite 197 Distribution • 197 Megascopic character 198 Microscopic character 199 Chemical composition and classification 202 Comparison with quartz monzonite 204 Origin and application of name 204 Chemical composition 205 Comparison with akerite 206 Comparison with syenite (andesine anorthosite) of Nelson County, Virginia ■ 209 Comparison with pyroxene syenite of the Adirondacks 212 Comparison with charnockite 218 Unakite type 220 Origin of name 220 Distribution and characteristics of unakite 220 Origin of the unakite 222 Zirconif erous epidosite • 223 Granite. 223 Norite 225 General discussion of characteristics and distribution 225 Megascopic character 226 Microscopic character 227 Ilmenite-apatite gabbro 228 Chemical composition and classification 229 Pyroxenite 231 Distribution 231 Microscopic character 231 Chemical composition and classification 232 Age relations 233 1 Manuscript received by the Secretary of the Society December 6, 1915. XV — Boll. Geol. Soc. Am., Vol. 27, 1915 (193) 194 watson and cline rocks of the blue ridge region Introduction The Blue Ridge, which forms the extreme eastern member of the Appa- lachian Mountains, constitutes one of the principal topographic divisions of the Appalachian ranges. In Virginia the Blue Eidge Mountains form a fairly continuous and well defined ridge extending from Harpers Ferry southwestward entirely across the State. At Harpers Perry the Blue Eidge Mountains are narrow, and in elevation are less than 1,000 feet above sealevel; but southwestward through Virginia the ridge becomes broader and higher, and attains its greatest width in North Carolina. Heights of more than 4,000 feet above the sea are reached at several points in Virginia. The Blue Eidge is composed of a central core of igneous rocks, flanked on the northwest side by the folded sedimentary series of Cambro-Ordo- vician rocks of the Great Valley province. The basal member of this series is a quartzite (Weverton), which extends for much of the distance as a range of hills along the Avest flank of the main ridge at an altitude equal in some cases to that of the Blue Eiclge. Eemnants of the Cam- brian series of sediments are also preserved in places along the southeast slope of the Blue Eidge and at several points in the vicinity of James Eiver Gap. The sediments are arched in anticlinal fashion entirely over the ridge, completely concealing for short distances the central core of igneous rocks. The southeast slope merges into the Piedmont Plateau, along which, in places, are groups of outlying Ioav ridges that have been isolated by erosion from the main ridge, but exhibiting as a role similar rock types. In the middle and northern parts of the Blue Eidge and the adjacent portions of the Piedmont Plateau in Virginia one of the dominant igneous rocks of granitoid type is a quartz-bearing pyroxene syenite. The igneous complex, of which pyroxene syenite is the chief type, may represent a Precambrian batholithic intrusion, exposed at intervals for a distance of 150 miles in a belt up to 30 miles or more in width.' Differentiation of the syenite magma has given rise to a variety of related rocks, some of which are of particular interest. Studies of the igneous complex forming the central core of the Blue Eidge in middle and northern Virginia are sufficiently advanced to indi- cate that the rock types exhibit certain kinships which mark them as differentiates from a common magma, and that this igneous complex, designated by the writers as the Blue Eidge petrographic province, shows certain important differences in mineralogy and chemistry from the igneous rocks which enter into the composition of the Piedmont Plateau to the east. MAP SHOWING LOCATION OF THE ROCKS 195 r 196 WATSON AND CLINE ROCKS OF THE BLUE RIDGE REGION The results presented in this paper are based on field and laboratory investigations of the igneous complex which forms the central core of the northern and middle Blue Ridge region and the adjacent portions of the extreme western margin of the Piedmont Plateau, undertaken at brief intervals during the past ten years. The scope of the paper is limited to a petrographic study of this igneous complex, since a complete discussion of the Blue Ridge igneous complex can not be attempted in advance of a thorough investigation of the field relationships. The , principal claim for this study, therefore, is as a contribution to the petrography of the Blue Ridge geology. Previous geologic Work Probably the first reference to the syenites of the Blue Ridge in Vir- ginia was by Prof. William Barton Rogers 2 in his annual reports on the Geology of the Virginias from 1835 to 1841. He refers to the occurrence of syenitic rocks at various places in the Blue Ridge, notably in the James River and Tye River gaps, and makes special reference to the pronounced porphyritic texture of the syenite in Tye River Gap. During his early work in Virginia Prof. William M. Fontaine devoted considerable time in the field to study of the Blue Ridge syenites. Only occasional reference is made to their occurrence in his publications, yet the degree to which they attracted his attention is shown by the large collection of the rocks which he made from different parts of the Bine Ridge and adjacent portions of the Piedmont Plateau. These collections are preserved in Brooks Museum at the University of Virginia and have been freely used in this study. In 1884, Professor Fontaine sent to the United States National Mu- seum specimens of unakite from Milams Gap, in Page and Madison counties, Virginia, and later, in 1913, specimens of the associated syenite This led to the first petrographic description of these rocks in 1904 by Mr. W. C. Phalen, 3 who designated the syenite of the Page-Madison counties area as hypersthene akerite because of its similarity to the akerites of Norway described by Brogger. In 1894, Mr. Arthur Keith 4 mapped the syenite occurring southwest of Front Royal along the extreme western side of the crystalline belt as granite, six varieties of which he distinguished and described in the Bine Ridge region. Keith's description of one of the varieties follows: 2 See a reprint of annual reports and other papers on the geology of the Virginias by William Barton Rogers, 1884, 832 pages. 3 W. C. Phalen : A new occurrence of unakite. Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections, vol. 45, 1904, pp. 306-316. 4 Arthur Keith: Geology of the Catoctln Belt, Fourteenth Ann. Rept. U. S. Geol Survey, 1894, part 11, pp, 285-395, PREVIOUS GEOLOGIC WORK 197 "Granite from one mile northwest of Browntown, Virginia, shows quartz, orthoclase, plagioelase, hornblende, a little biotite, magnetite, and, along the feldspar cleavage, chlorite. Another specimen from the same locality shows the same minerals in larger crystals. A third specimen contains a large amount of garnet in rude crystals and fragments, a little apatite and pyrite, • and but very little orthoclase" (page 300) . In 1906, Weed and Watson 5 described the coarse-grained hypersthene syenite traced by them at irregular intervals along the west side of the Blue Eidge from Dickeys Hill, south of Front Boyal, in Warren County, southward to Hightop and beyond in Greene County. Farther southwest, at Stony Man, they stated that the field relations indicated the syenite to be of later age than the Catoctin schist, which is regarded as Algonkian. In 1907, Watson 6 published a brief discussion of hypersthene syenite and associated hornblende norite from a locality in the northern part of Floyd County, Virginia. Attention was called to the close similarity of the syenite from Floyd County to the unakite-bearing syenite at Milams Gap, in Page and Madison counties, more than 100 miles to the northeast, and to similar syenites of Norway. In 1913, Watson and Taber 7 published a detailed discussion, including descriptions of a syenite-norite-nelsonite series of rutile-bearing rocks in Amherst and Nelson counties, Virginia, and of the hypersthene syenite occurring on the west slope of the Blue Eidge farther southwest in Eoa- noke County. The Amherst-Nelson counties rock series shows striking- relationships in mineralogy and chemistry to the granite-syenite-norite series of the Blue Eidge igneous complex of the larger Blue Eidge province. Quartz-bearing Hypersthene-Andesine Syenite distribution Quartz-bearing hypersthene syenite is one of the most abundantly occur- ring granitoid rocks in the central Blue Eidge region. It has been ob- served in the Blue Eidge and adjacent portions of the Piedmont Plateau rts „j.merous exposures distributed over a distance of about 150 miles in a northeast-southwest direction (see map, figure 1). The maximum distance between extreme occurrences along a direction (northwest-south- east) normal to the axis of the Blue Eidge will probably not exceed 30 z W. H. Weed and T. L. Watson : The Virginia copper deposits. Economic Geology, vol. i, 1906, pp. 309-330 ; see especially pp. 318-319. 6 Thomas L. Watson : The occurrence of nickel in Virginia. Trans. Amer. Inst. Mng. Engrs., 1907, pp. 306-316 ; Mineral Resources of Virginia, 1907, pp. 31-33, 580-582. " Thomas L. Watson and Stephen Taber : Geology of the titanium and apatite deposits of Virginia. Bull. III-A, Virginia Geol. Survey, 1913, 308 pages ; see also Bull. 430, U. S. Geol. Survey, 1910, pp. 200-213. 198 WATSON AND CLINE ROCKS OP THE BLUE RIDGE REGION miles. The most southwesterly known exposure of the syenite is in Floyd County and the most northeasterly one is in Warren County, a short distance south of Front Royal. Exposures of the rock have been observed in every county of the Blue Ridge region between Floyd and Warren counties. The syenite frequently occurs in the northwest slope of the Blue Ridge, where it may form the basement on which the Lower Cambrian sediments rest. Usually it is more abundantly exposed on the southeast slope of the ridge, since in this position the Cambrian sediments have been re- moved to a large extent by erosion. It is not restricted, however, in dis- tribution to the slopes of the Blue Ridge, but is noted in many localities in the most elevated portions of the ridge. Along the western margin of the Piedmont Plateau hypersthene syenite is the chief rock, forming Tobacco Row Mountain in Amherst County, and is also noted in similar positions in Madison and Greene counties. Hypersthene syenite forms the Peaks of Otter, and it is very abundant in James River Gap and vicinity, where it makes up large portions of the central core of the Blue Ridge. MEGASCOPIC CHARACTER Normally the hypersthene syenite is of greenish color, which varies in shade from a moderately light greenish to a dark greenish gray rock. It shows granitic texture, which varies from medium fine to coarse granular, and having usually a pronounced greasy or waxy appearance. In places the rock is porphyritic in texture, with phenocrysts of orthoclase, rarely of pyroxene. Variation in color of the fresh rock is noted, dependent on the relative proportions of the felsic and mafic minerals, the former vary- ing in amount from 75 per cent to 92 per cent. In structure the rock is usually massive, but in places indistinct to pronounced foliation is shown, due to the effects of pressure metamorphism. Weathered surfaces are usually deeply pitted from inequality of resistance of the component minerals, and the rock yields on complete decay a reddish brown soil which is quite fertile. The syenite is composed essentially of orthoclase (microcline), plagio- clase, and pyroxene, each of which may be recognized in hand specimens. Feldspar is the most abundant constituent of the rock and is usually of dark greenish gray color, with glistening cleavage surfaces, but decidedly waxy on fracture surfaces. Quartz is nearly always present, but in vary- ing amount, some ■ specimens showing very little, while others contain considerable. Biotite occurs in places and in several localities it is pres- ent in sufficient amount to be designated a characterizing accessory. There are fades of the rock in which hornblende is an important con- QUARTZ-BEARING HYPERSTHENE-ANDESINE SYENITE 191) stituent. Garnet of red color is developed in grains and crystals of the syenite of certain localities in Eoanoke County and of those in Greene and adjoining counties in the northern Blue Eidge. MICROSCOPIC CHARACTER Normative feldspar ranges in amount from 56 per cent to 66 per cent. The varieties of orthoelase, microcline, albite, and calcic andesine make up the feldspar content of the rock. Of these andesine is the chief feld- spar, although orthoelase or microcline may equal or exceed it in amount in some thin sections. Like the rocks of other areas which it most closely resembles and with which it is compared in subsequent pages of this paper, a noteworthy feature of the soda-lime feldspars in the rock is the frequent absence of twinning lamella?, which might readily be mis- taken for orthoelase. Microcline is the dominant variety of feldspar in some thin sections. Albite occurs in most thin-sections studied, not as separate individuals, but intergrown with the potash varieties as mocro- perthite. Andesine is developed in anhedral forms and is frequently twinned, both on the albite and pericline laws. Its composition, deter- mined by Larsen on four specimens of the rock collected from different localities, by measurements on the rhombic section and of the index of refraction, is as follows : I AbiAii! 11 Ab 63 An 37 HI Ab 62 An 38 IV Ab 70 An 30 V Ab 07 An 33 I. Specimen of syenite collected near the southeast foot of the Blue Ridge, in Browns Gap, Albemarle County, Virginia. II. Specimen of syenite collected near the southeast foot of Tobacco Row Mountain, in the vicinity of Elon, Amherst County, Virginia. III. Specimen of syenite collected on northwest slope of the northern Blue Ridge, near the boundary between Madison and Greene counties, Vir- ginia. IV. Specimen of syenite collected from the base of northeast slope of the Peaks of Otter, Bedford County, Virginia. V. Specimen of syenite collected iy 2 miles east of Vinton, Roanoke County, Virginia. A comparison of these results clearly shows thai the dominant variety of soda-lime feldspar (plagioclase) present in the rock of widely separated occurrences is very uniform in composition, corresponding in each case to a calcic andesine. Tt is important in this connection to note that the 200 WATSON AND CLINE ROCKS OF THE BLUE RIDGE REGION feldspar-bearing members of the titanium-bearing series of rocks 8 in Amherst and Nelson counties, Virginia, which forms a part of the larger Blue Eidge petrographic province, contain as the dominant feldspar a calcic andesine of similar composition to that of the rock here described. The relationship of these rocks is discussed later. Computing the feldspar composition in the usual way from analyses of the syenite given on page 202, the results may be tabulated as follows : Normative Feldspar Composition of the Blue Ridge, Virginia, Hypersthene Syenite I II III IV V Orthoclase 21.68 25.02 22.24 7.78 22.80 Albite 28.82 20.44 20.44 37.20 23.58 Anorthite 15.57 15.29 13.34 10.29 18.35 Total plagioclase 44.39 35.73 33.78 4T.49 41.93 Total feldspar 66.07 60.75 56.02 55.27 64.73 Orthoclase-plagioclase ratio ... lto2 1 to 1.4 1 to 1.5 lto6 1 to 1.8 An examination of this table shows that the ratio of normative ortho- clase (microcline) to normative plagioclase ranges from 1 : 1.4 to 1 : 6, a variation which is in agreement with measurements made on thin sections under the microscope. The feldspar frequently exhibits distinct evidence of pressure metamorphism in bent and broken lamellae of plagioclase, optical disturbance, and in some cases granulation. Pyroxene is the chief mafic constituent of the syenite. Both ortho- rhombic and monoclinic varieties occur, the former being dominant in most cases. Augite may fail in a few thin sections of the rock, but hypersthene very rarely. The two pyroxenes are frequently intergrown with each other. They are very similar in color and can only be distin- guished in nrany cases by their optical properties. The optical properties prove hypersthene to be the orthorhombic pyroxene present. It varies from colorless to reddish, exhibiting fairly strong absorption in the more deeply colored forms of the mineral. Tt is developed in stout, irregular-shaped forms, usually elongated in the direction of the c axis and frequently containing rounded inclusions of apatite and ilmenite. Platelike inclusions are abundantly developed in both the monoclinic and orthorhombic pyroxenes of some thin sections. The hypersthene is pleochroic in shades, varying from reddish brown to pale yellowish brown. It alters into a fibrous pleochroic mineral, with the long axis of the fibers oriented parallel with the c axis of the hypers- thene. Measured on the long axis of the fibers, the extinction is about 8 T. L. Watson and S. Taber : Geology of the titanium and apatite deposits of Vir- ginia. Bull. III-A, Virginia Geol. Survey, 1913. QUARTZ-BEARING HYPERSTHENE-ANDESINE SYENITE 201 10 degrees, and the mineral has been identified as uralitic hornblende. The alteration takes place about the margin of the hypersthene and along fracture and cleavage lines. In extreme cases of alteration the change is accompanied by the development of much free iron oxide. The mono- clinic pyroxene present is augite, which frequently exhibits a well devel- oped diallage parting parallel to 100, especially in the more basic facies of the rock. Quartz is present in all the thin sections, but the quantity is very variable ; in some it is a very minor accessory, in others it is an important constituent. The principal occurrence of quartz in the rock is as irregu- lar grains of variant size, being the last product of crystallization filling the interstices between the other minerals. It is also developed as rounded inclusions in the feldspar and as graphic intergrowths with both feldspar and hornblende. The quartz-hornblende growths are in all respects like the common micrographic intergrowths of quartz and feldspar. In the five analyses made of the rock from different localities in the Blue Eidge normative quartz is large in amount, ranging from 14.76 per cent to 25.44 -per cent. Without exception the quartz of the hypersthene syenites dis- cussed in this paper is some shade of gray in color and does not contain abundant inclusions of rutile needles, as the blue quartz of the quartz- bearing rocks of the Amherst-Nelson counties rutile area and of some granitoid rocks in the northern Blue Eidge region. Biotite is sometimes developed in the syenite, both as an original and as a secondary constituent. The pyrogenetic biotite is of the ordinary brown variety, possessing strong absorption and good cleavage, and does not exhibit any unusual characters. In neither occurrence, however, is the mineral usually abundant ; in fact, it was observed only in a few thin sections. At one or two places in the Browns Gap section, Albemarle County, biotite, as an original mineral, is rather plentifully distributed through the syenite, both in hand specimens and in thin sections. Hornblende occurs as an original mineral in some thin sections of the syenite and is usually very fresh. Secondary hornblende (uralite) is also formed at times as an alteration product from the hypersthene. The primary hornblende is developed in irregular-shaped masses of fair size and to some extent in small grains. The angle between c and z is nearly 20°. Pleochroism is strong: x = pale yellowish brown, y = brown, and z = deep reddish brown. The hornblende frequently exhibits inter- growths with quartz which strongly resemble granophyric structure in feldspar and quartz. In some phases of the rock hornblende-quartz inter- growths are quite common. Apatite, magnetite, titanite, zircon, and pyrite were identified in nearly 202 WATSON AND CLINE ROCKS OF THE BLUE RIDGE REGION every thin section. Of these lesser minerals, apatite and magnetite are the most important, because of their constant presence in greater or less amount in all thin sections studied. Apatite occurs in anheclral and euhedral forms as inclusions in other minerals, while magnetite is devel- oped in grains of fairly large size and commonly shows alteration to leucoxene, both along the border and along the fracture lines. Kutile is rare except as needlelike inclusions in the felsic minerals. CHEMICAL COMPOSITION AND CLASSIFICATION The chemical composition of the Blue Eidge hypersthene syenite is shown in the five analyses of the subjoined table made on specimens of the rock collected from as many different localities. The variation in silica of nearly 8 per cent is due chiefly to the variable amount of quartz in the rock as confirmed by microscopic study. The alkalies, soda and potash, show some variation; but in all cases, except IV, which is dosodic, the rock is sodipotassic. Titania and phosphoric anhydride, especially the former, are high for this type of rock, characteristic features, but more emphasized in the composition of the Amherst-Nelson counties eomag- matic area of the same general region. Analyses of Hypersthene Syenite from the Blue Ridge Mountains, Virginia Si0 2 68.21 Al 2 O s Fe 2 3 FeO MgO CaO Na 2 K 2 H 2 0— H 2 0+ Ti0 2 P 2 5 MnO BaO CO, • S trace I II III IV V 68.21 65.88 63.76 61.08 60.52 15.33 14.15 13.04 12.43 a 16.99 s .81 .77 1.36 1.86 .60 3.62 5.29 5.64 6.66 6.53 .68 1.48 1.37 1.44 1.59 2.90 3.42 4.30 5.32 4.58 3.38 2.42 2.36 4.42 2.83 3.72 4.19 3.76 1.34 3.91 .14 .23 .10 .06 .88 .33 .41 .14 .37 1.01 1.75 2.85 4.26 n. d. .42 .39 .88 1.01 .74 none .33 .19 .41 .25 none none none none none none none none trace none .06 .09 100.15 100.71 100.11 100.75 99.42 T. Hypersthene syenite from the southeast foot of the Blue Ridge, in Browns Gap, Albemarle County, Virginia. J. G. Dinwiddie, analyst. a Includes Ti0 2 . 9 Watson and Taber : Bull. III-A, Virginia Geological Survey, 1913. QUARTZ-BEARING HYPERSTHENE-ANDESINE SYENITE 203 II. Hypersthene syenite near the southeast foot of Tobacco Row Mountain, in the vicinity of Elon, Amherst County, Virginia. J. G. Dinwiddie, analyst. III. Hypersthene syenite from the northwest slope of the Blue Ridge near the boundary of Madison and Greene counties, Virginia. J. G. Din- widdie, analyst. IV. Hypersthene syenite from the base of the northeast slope of the Peaks of Otter, Bedford County, Virginia. J. G. Dinwiddie, analyst. V. Hypersthene akerite (syenite) from Milams Gap, Page and Madison counties, Virginia. W. C. Phalen, analyst. Norms corresponding to Analyses of Rocks on page 202 I II III IV Q 25.44 23.52 24.78 19.80 Or 21.68 25.02 22.24 7.78 Ab 28.82 20.44 20.44 37.20 An 15.57 15.29 '13.34 10.29 Di .68 2.54 8.57 Hy 4.26 9.97 6.63 3.42 II 1.98 3.51 5.47 8.21 Mt 1.16 1.16 2.09 2.78 Ap 91 .91 1.86 2.17 Pr .24 .36 Incl 47 .64 .54 .43 Summary of Classification Number. Symbol. Magmatic name. I T. 4. 3(2). 3. amiatose II II. 4. 3. 3. harzose III II. 4. 3(2). 3. harzose IV II. 4. 2. 4. dacose V II. 4. 3. 3. harzose V 14.76 22.80 23.58 18.35 13 .80 2 .28 .93 1 . :>:> Mineralogically the rock is characterized by (1) calcic andesine as the chief feldspar with notable amounts of alkali feldspar developed in part as microperthite ; (2) a variable but frequently a considerable amount of quartz, and (3) orthorhombic (hypersthene) and monoclinic (augite) pyroxenes with very subordinate biotite, which becomes the chief mafic mineral in several localities, and sometimes a little hornblende. From the microscopic study of a large number of thin sections covering all known exposures the rock is quite uniform in mineral composition, but considerable variation in the proportions of the principal minerals is indicated. Confirmation of this variation is shown in the three subrang positions of the rock in the Quantitative System as determined by five analyses made on specimens from different localities. The norms corre- sponding to the five analyses made of the rock indicate in each case more 204 WATSON AND CLINE ROCKS OP THE BLUE RIDGE REGION normative plagioclase than normative orthoclase. Determinations of the plagioclase conclusively prove it to be andesine. Based, then, on the fact that the chief feldspar is andesine, with considerable but less alkali feld- spar (orthoclase), the normal facies of the rock should be designated a pyroxene-granodiorite. According to the usage of many petrographers, the rock would be grouped as a pyroxene-quartz monzonite, with which it is compared on pages 204-206. Because of the notable amount of potash feldspar present, which may equal or exceed soda-lime feldspar in some thin sections of the rock from some localities, but not in the norms cal- culated from the five analyses in the table on page 202, the rock may also be classed as a quartzose-pyroxene-andesine syenite. However the rock may be grouped, it is entirely clear that it is a transitional or intermediate type. As indicated both by microscopic study of thin sections and by the table of norms on page 203 (I to V), alkali feldspar is present in notable amount, being in all cases but one (IV) three-fifths of the lime-soda feldspar, and therefore sodipotassic in four (I, II, III, and V) and dosodic in one (IV). Considered further from the quantitative point of view, three analyses (II, III, and V) of the rock place it in the alkali- calcic rang tonalase and the sodipotassic subrang harzose, one (I) in the alkalicalcic rang coloradase and the sodipotassic subrang amiatose, and one (IV) in the domalkalic rang dacase and the dosodic subrang dacose. COMPARISON WITH QUARTZ MONZONITE Origin and application of name. — Monzonite was the name first given by de Lapparent in 1864 to rocks of Monzoni, composed essentially of orthoclase and andesine with subordinate pyroxene. Brogger applied the term in 1895 to a transitional or intermediate group of phanerites be- tween syenite and diorite having approximately equal amounts of alkali feldspar and lime-soda feldspar with any kind of mafic mineral in sub- ordinate amount. The name quartz monzonite 10 would apply to any quartz-rich monzonite and would stand in the same relation to the granite- quartz diorite groups as monzonite does to the syenite-diorite groups. In his discussion of the chemical composition of quartz monzonite and granodiorite Iddings 11 suggests "that the name quartz monzonite be ap- plied to varieties in which orthoclase exceeds the lime-soda feldspars, and 10 The name grandiorite, given by Becker and Lindgren in 1891 to the granitic rocks of the Sierra Nevada in California intermediate between granites and quartz diorites, is considered by some petrographers as synonymous with quartz monzonite. Brogger uses the term adamellite for acid quartz monzonites or for quartz monzonites as designated by Iddings. Igneous rocks, vol. ii, 1913, p. 61. See in this connection Bull. 426, U. S. Geol. Survey, 1910. 11 J. P. Iddings : Igneous rocks, vol. ii, 1913, p. 69. QUARTZ-BEARING HYPERSTHENE-ANDESINE SYENITE 205 that granodiorite be used for those rocks in which lime-soda feldspar ex- ceeds orthoclase." Concerning their quantitative relations, he says : "Dis- tinguishing quartz monzonites from granodiorites by the relative amounts of orthoclase and lime-soda feldspar, it will be convenient to limit the term quartz monzonite to those rocks of this group in which orthoclase exceeds lime-soda feldspar up to the ratio of 5 :3, and to confine the term granodiorite to those in which lime-soda feldspar exceeds orthoclase up to the ratio of 5 :3." Chemical composition. — There are given in the table below five analyses of quartz monzonites (one each from Idaho, Colorado, California, and Montana, and an averaged analysis of 20 analyses from various localities) for comparison with the five analyses of the Blue Eidge, Virginia, type on page 202. The rocks are all sodipotassic ; and I, II, and III correspond to the subrang name toscanose, and IV to amiatose. 12 Each one (I, II, III, and IV) has been described as quartz monzonite, but, following Idd- ings, they would belong chemically with granodiorite rather than with quartz monzonite. Tbe correspondence nevertheless with the Virginia type is very close, except IV, page 202, which is clearly a quartz diorite. In each case the rocks are characterized by considerable alkali feldspar and a larger amount of lime-soda feldspar of andesine composition. Ac- cording to the grouping by Iddings, the Virginia type corresponds more closely to granodiorite than to quartz monzonit<\ Analyses of Quartz Monzonites Si0 2 68.42 Al 2 O s 15.01 Fe 2 3 FeO MgO OaO Na 2 K 2 H 2 0+ H 2 0— Ti0 2 P 2 5 MnO BaO Incl I II III IV 13 V 68.42 66.83 65.70 63.88 67.41 15.01 15.24 15 . 31 15.84 15.76 .97 2.73 2.54 2.11 1.93 1.93 1.66 1.62 2.50 1.96 1.21 1.63 1.62 2.13 1.43 2.60 3.59 2.56 3.97 3.54 3.23 3.10 3.62 2.81 3.45 4.25 4.46 4.62 4.23 3.74 .73 .56 .42 .66 .54 .17 .22 .50 .54 .72 .65 .51 .13 .18 .33 .21 .19 .06 .10 trace .07 .06 .12 .11 .12 . .09 .25 .09 .18 .36 99.95 100.82 99.53 99 . 82 100 . 00 12 Near harzose. 13 Two other analyses of the quartz monzonite (granite) from Butte correspond to the subrang name harzose, as do three of the five analyses of the Virginia type. Compare this analysis with the analyses of the Virginia type on page 202. "206 WATSON AND CLINE ROCKS OF THE BLUE RIDGE REGION I. Quartz nionzonite from Hailey, Idaho. W. F. Hillebrand, analyst. W. Lindgren : Twentieth Annual Report, United States Geological Survey, 1900, part iii, page 91. II. Quartz monzonite, near San Miguel Peak, Telluride, Colorado. H. N. Stokes, analyst. W. Cross : Telluride Folio, United States Geological Survey, 1899, page 6. III. Quartz monzonite, Nevada Falls Trail, Yosemite Valley, California. W. Valentine, analyst. H. W. Turner : Journal of Geology, volume vii, 1899, page 152. IV. Granite (quartz monzonite), Walkerville Station, Butte, Montana. H. N. Stokes, analyst. W. H. Weed : Journal of Geology, volume vii, 1899, page 739. V. Average quartz monzonite, twenty analyses averaged. R. A. Daly : Igne- ous rocks and their origin, 1914, page 386. Norms corresponding to Analyses of Quartz Monzonite on page 205 I II III IV V Q 25.1 22.2 19.1 19.3 22.98 Or 25.6 26.7 27.2 25.0 22.24 Ab 26.7 26.2 30.4 23.6 29.34 An 13.1 14.2 12.1 18.1 16.68 C .3 .... .4 . ..'. ..... Di 2.6 .... 1.3 Hy 5.0 3.4 4.1 6.7 4.95 Mt. 1.4 3.9 3.5 4.2 2.78 II 9 1.1 1.4 .91 Ap .31 Normative Feldspar Composition I II III IV V Total plagioclase 39.8 42.5 40.4 41.7 46.02 Total feldspar 65.3 69.7 67.1 66.7 68.26 Ab n An m 2:1 2.5:1 1.8:1 1.3:1 1.8:1 Orthoclase-plagioclase ratio ... 1 to 1 . 5 1 to 1 . 6 1 to 1 . 5 1 to 1 . 7 1 to 2 . 1 COMPARISON WITH AKERITE " In 1914, Phalen 15 applied the name hypersthene akerite to the rock from Milams Gap, in Page and Madison counties, Virginia, because of 14 The name akerite was proposed by Brogger (Zeitsch. f. Kryst., vol. xvi, 1890, p. 43) for a variety of syenite at Aker, Norway, consisting of orthoclase, niuch plagioclase, biotite, augite, and some quartz. Rocks referred to this type have been described as plagioclase-augite syenite, whose feldspars are soda microcline and lime-soda feldspar. According to Iddings (Igneous rocks, vol. ii, 1913, p. 164), they may also be classed as , soda monzonites. The akerites show wide variation ir. composition and belong to differ- ent groups. 15 W. C. Phalen : A new occurrence of unakite — a preliminary paper. Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections, vol. 45, 1904, p. 311. QUARTZ-BEARING HYPERSTHENE-ANDESINE SYENITE 207 its close resemblance in composition to Brogger's hypersthene akerite 16 from Barne Kjern See, Norway. The resemblance is admittedly close, but unfortunately the analysis of the rock from the Norway locality is rated by Washington 17 as inferior, and must be accounted therefore as having but slight comparative value. For purposes of comparison we have selected the seven superior analyses of akerites listed by Washington, one each from Massachusetts and New York and five from Norway. Analyses of Akerites from Massachusetts, New York, and Norway I II III IV V VI VII SiO, 66.60 66.13 63.45 62.35 59.56 58.48 58.00 ALA 15.05 17.40 IS. 31 19.50 17.60 19.24 16.91 Fe 2 3 1.07 2.19 .42 3.05 2.90 5.75 3.29 FeO 4.42 n. d. 3.56 2.25 3.38 n. d. 3.74 MgO 36 .04 .35 1.46 1.87 .99 1.96 CaO 2.21 .81 2.93 2.40 3.67 5.02 3.60 Na 2 4.03 5.28 5.00 2.71 4.88 5.52 5.14 K,0 5.42 5.60 5.15 3.28 4.40 3.06 5.20 H,0— 41 1.22 ^ r .75 1.37 .47 .60 H 2 0+ }- 30 { Ti0 2 76 .74 .07 1.25 1.22 .96 .85 P 2 5 trace MnO trace .13 none .18 .03 trace .80 BaO none 13 100.33 99.54 99.73 99.18 101.32 99.41 100.09 I. Akerite, Gloucester, Massachusetts. H. S. Washington, analyst. Journal of Geology, volume vi, 1898. page 798. II. Akerite (porphyritic) between Thinghoud and Fjelebua, Norway. R. Mauzelius, analyst. W. C. Brogger : Zeitsch. f. Kryst., volume xvi, 1890, page 46. III. Augite syenite (akerite), Loon Lake, Franklin County. New York. E. W. Morley, analyst. H. P. Oushing : Bulletin of the Geological Society of America, volume 10, 1899, page 183. IV. Akerite, Thinghoud, Norway. G. Sarnstrom, analyst. W. O. Brogger : Zeitsch. f. Kryst., volume xvi, 1890, page 46. V. Syenite (akerite, W. O. B.), Vettakollen, n. Kristiania, Norway. P. Jann- asch, analyst. H. O. Lang : Nyt. Mag., volume xxx, 1884, page 40 ; see also W. C. Brogger : Zeitsch. f. Kryst., volume xvi, 1890. page 50. VI. Akerite, Ramnas, Kristiania region, Norway. R. Mauzelius, analyst. W. C. Brogger : Zeitsch. f. Kryst., volume xvi, 1890, page 46. VII. Akerite, Tuft, Laugendal, Norway. V. Schmelck, analyst. W. C. Brogger : Eg. Kg., volume ii, 1895, page 33. 18 W. C. Brogger : Zeitsch. f. Kryst., vol. xvi, 1890, p. 50. 17 H. S. Washington : Professional Paper No. 14, U. S. Geol. Survey, 1904, p. 389. 208 WATSON AND CLINE ROCKS OF THE BLUE RIDGE REGION Norms of Akerites corresponding to Analyses of Rocks on page 207 Q . Or Ab An . Ne 01 . Di . Hy II . Mt Hm I II Ill IV Y VI VII 15.2 11.5 12.6 26.5 2.8 .7 32.2 33.4 30.0 19.5 26.1 18.3 30.6 34.1 44.5 37.2 23.1 41.4 45.6 43.0 7.0 2.8 9.7 12.0 13.1 19.2 7.S 1.6 7.0 .3 2.7 3.4 3.0 4.5 5.0 8.2 5.0 2.7 1.4 2.8 .9 3.5 3.7 2.3 3.7 4.4 2.3 4.2 7.9 1.8 1.3 1.7 1.6 4.9 .5 Summary of Classification Number. Symbo: 1. Magmatic name. I I, , 4. 2. 3. toscanose II I. 5. 1. 3. phlegrose III I. 5. 2. 3. pulaskose IV I. 4. 2. 3. toscanose V II , 5. 2. 4. akerose - VI 11. 5. 2. 4. akerose VII II. 5. 2. 3. monzonose Bocks belonging to the akerite type in Massachusetts are found chiefly in the eastern part of Essex County associated with granites and nepheline syenites. They have been described by Wadsworth, 19 Sears, 20 and Wash- ington, 21 who agree in classing them with the quartz-bearing angite syenites. Washington compares his analysis of the akerite from Glou- cester, Massachusetts (I of table of analyses, page 207), with one of akerite (porphyritic), described by Brogger, 22 occurring between Thinghoud and Fjelebua, Norway (II of table of analyses, page 207). He remarks that the Massachusetts rock shows close parallelism with the more acid of Brogger's akerites and belongs to an extreme type, since the akerites as a group are more basic. Although the analysis of the Massachusetts rock shows rather high lime, Washington states that this is all used up in the formation of pyroxene, leaving none for lime-soda feldspar, which the microscope shows is not present. This rock is an alkalic and sodic tos- canose whose plagioclase is albite. 18 H. S. Washington : Professional Paper No. 14, U. S. Geol. Survey, 1904. 18 M. E. Wadsworth : Geol. Mag., 1885, p. 207. 20 J. H. Sears : Bull. Essex Inst, vol. xxiv, 1892, and vol. xxv, 1893. 21 H. S. Washington : Jour. Geol., vol. vi, 1898, pp. 787-808 ; see especially pp. 796-799. 22 W. C. Brogger : Zeitsch. f. Kryst, vol. xvi, 1890, p. 55. QUARTZ-BEARING HYPERSTHENE-ANDESINE SYENITE 209 The rock from New York, represented by analysis III of table on page 207, is from Loon Lake, Franklin County, in the Adirondacks. It has been carefully studied and described by Gushing, 23 who compares it with the akerite described anew by Washington from Essex County, Massa- chusetts, and remarks that the two show great similarity, except that the Massachusetts rock lacks hypersthene. Cushing states that the rocks belong to the variety of augite syenite called "akerite" by Brogger and are quartzose augite syenites. They are clearfy the more acid representa- tives of the syenite group. Like the analyses of the Massachusetts and New York rocks, the five analyses of the Norway akerites (II, IV- VII, table of analyses, page 207) show a high alkali content, except IV (5.99 per cent), which is consid- erably lower than the other four and in which K,0 -f- Na 2 ranges from 8.74 to 10.88 per cent. In the four analyses (III, V, VI, and VII) showing high alkalies the total normal feldspar exceeds 80 per cent in each case. In the Norway rocks normative plagioclase ranges in composi- tion from andesine (IV) through sodic andesine (V and VI) to nearly albite (II and VII). One (II) is extremely and four (IV to VII) are dominantly alkalic, when the alkali-lime ratio is considered. Two (V and VI) are dominantly sodic and three (II, IV, and VII) have soda and potash in nearly equal proportions. Normative quartz is considerable in II and IV, 2.8 and 0.7 respectively in V and VI, and nil in VII. The position of the Norway akerites in the quantitative system, as shown on page 207, differs widely among themselves. The Virginia rocks, on the other hand, contain a much lower alkali content and in general higher lime, the two being, with one exception (IV, page 202), in nearly equal proportions, and therefore alkalicalcic. The proportions of soda and potash in these four rocks are nearly equal. The normative feldspar ranges very much lower than in the Norway rocks; the dominant feldspar is a more calcic plagioclase (andesine), and normative quartz is uniformly higher. The mafic minerals are similar in kind for the Virginia and Norway rocks, except that hypersthene is a constant constituent of the Virginia rocks. COMPARISON WITH SYENITE (ANDESINE ANORTHOSITE) OF NELSON COUNTY, VIRGINIA The rocks of the Amherst-Nelson counties area 24 are igneous in origin and show in their mineral and chemical composition derivation from a 23 H. P. dishing: Bull. Geol. Soc. Am., vol. 10. 1899, pp. 177-192. 24 For a detailed description of the geology of this area the reader is referred to Bull. III-A, Virginia Geol. Survey, 1913, by Watson and Taber. XVI — Bull. Geol. Soc. Am.. Vol. 27. 1915 210 WATSON AND CLINE— ROCKS OF THE BLUE RIDGE REGION common magma. They are characterized by prominence of apatite and the titanium minerals, ilmenite, rutile, and in a few places titaniferous magnetite; opalescent blue quartz; pyroxene (hypersthene) or secondary hornblende (uralite) derived from pyroxene as the dominant mafic min- eral; and in most of the feldspar-bearing types by andesine antiperthite, with inclosed orthoclase (microcline) spindles as the dominant feldspar. They have been intensely, but unequally, metamorphosed, and in most of them complete or partial foliation has been developed. The principal rock types that have been mapped by the Virginia Geological Survey include (1) biotite-quartz monzonite gneiss with variant schists, (2) syenite (andesine anorthosite), referred to as pegma- tite in all publications previous to Bulletin III-A of the Virginia Geolog- ical Survey; (3) gabbro, (4) nelsonite, and (5) diabase. Intermediate gradations are observed between most of these types, and usually the dominant minerals in one type form the. subordinate minerals in the others. Of the five rock types enumerated syenite is of most importance in this paper. The syenite covers an area of about 20 square miles. Tt is, as a rule, closely crystalline and in places gneissoid or even schistose in structure. In some places along its southeastern border the rock exhibits abnormally coarse texture. It is composed chiefly of feldspar and blue quartz, but contains also, in places near the margin, pyroxene (hypersthene usually altered to hornblende), rutile, and lesser amounts of ilmenite and apatite. The ratio of these minerals varies greatly in different parts of the rock- mass, but feldspar is the dominant mineral, except in portions of the border zone. Two facies of the rock which apparently grade into each other are recognized — a feldspathic variety corresponding to dosodic 'pied- montose and a hornblendic variety, which is developed chiefly as a border zone and corresponds to dosodic tonalose. The central and larger portion of the mass consists almost exclusively of feldspar, with only scattered grains of blue quartz and scarcely any visible rutile or other minerals. The principal feldspar is a calcic soda variety (andesine) corresponding to about Ab 65 An 35 and containing intergrowths of microcline oriented parallel to the twin lamellae. In the feldspathic facies of the rock norma- tive orthoclase (microcline) ranges from 16.68 to 23.35 per cent, with an average of 19.88 per cent. Total normative feldspar averages 88.63 per cent. The composition of the syenite is shown in the chemical analyses given below, which should be compared with those of the Blue Ridge syenite on page 202. QUARTZ-BEARING HYPERSTHENE-ANDESINE SYENITE 211 Analyses of Syenite (Andesine Anorthosite) , Nelson County, Virginia 26 I II Si0 2 60.44 57.06 A1 2 3 23.02 14.54 Fe 2 3 29 1.49 FeO 19 4.52 MgO 21 4.10 OaO 5.59 4.37 Na a O 4.94 3.13 K s O 3.37 1.96 H 2 0— 08 .09 H 2 0+ 32 1.32 Ti0 2 1.11 7.10 P 2 5 15 .24 MnO trace . 04 C0 2 trace . 09 S trace trace 100.31 100.05 L Average of four analyses of feldspathic facies of syenite (potash-bearing andesine anorthosite) , Nelson County, Virginia. William M. Thornton, Jr., analyst. T. L. Watson : Bulletin 580-O, United States Geological Survey, 1914, page 399 ; for individual analyses see Watson and Taber : Bulletin III-A, Virginia Geological Survey, 1913, page 78. [I. Average of three analyses of hornblendic facies of syenite, Nelson County, Virginia. William M. Thornton, Jr., analyst. T. L. Watson: Bulletin 580-O, United States Geological Survey, 1914, page 399; for individual analyses see Watson and Taber : Bulletin III-A, Virginia Geological Survey, 1913, page 78. Norms of Syenite corresponding to Analyses above I II Q 5.70 16.56 Or 20.02 11.68 Ab 41.40 26.20 An 28.36 19.74 C 82 Hy 10.20 II 46 8.21 Hm 32 Mt 2.09 Ru .88 2.40 Tn .98 Ap .31 .31 25 For analyses and complete description of this rock see Bull. III-A, Virginia Geol Survey, 1913, by Watson and Taber. 212 WATSON AND CLINE- — ROCKS OF THE BLUE RIDGE REGION Summary of Classification Number. Symbol. Name. I I. 5. 3. 4 piedmontose II II. 4. 3. 4 tonalose When the Blue Ridge type of rock here described is compared with the rutile-bearing type of syenite (andesine anorthosite) of Amherst and Nelson counties, Virginia, the dissimilarity is seen to he equally as great as in the akerites, yet striking similarity in mineral composition in part is indicated. Both types are characterized by andesine as the dominant feldspar, but of a very unusual kind in the Nelson County rock, which is composed of andesine antiperthite with inclosed orthoclase (microcline) spindles. Feldspar intergrowths occur, but seem not to be characteristic of the main Blue Eidge type. Hypersthene, although largely altered to uralitic hornblende in the Nelson County rock, is a constituent of both types. Neither monoclinic pyroxene (augite) nor primary hornblende and biotite, mineral components of the Blue Eidge type, are known to occur in the Nelson County rock. Both types are quartz-bearing, but the quartz of the Blue Eidge rock is gray, while that of the Nelson County rock is deep blue, due to a crowding of its substance with abundant very minute needles of rutile, which are essentially absent from the quartz of the former type. The dominant facies of the Nelson County rock is composed largely of feldspar, averaging more than 85 per cent of this mineral, the principal variety of which is andesine, with important amounts of orthoclase (microcline), ranging up to 20 per cent; subordinate quartz, and negli- gible amounts of mafic minerals. It is a rutile quartz-bearing anorthosite composed of andesine antiperthite and is a dosodic piedmontose. The border or hornblendic facies of the rock-mass contains less feldspar, the dominant variety of which is andesine, but more quartz of deep blue color, and considerable uralitic hornblende derived from hypersthene. This facies of the rock corresponds to a dosodic tonalose. The rocks of the Amherst-Nelson counties comagmatic area, of which syenite (andesine anorthosite) is a principal type, are so related, both as to geographic position and broad geologic relations, as to leave no doubt of their belonging to the larger Blue Eidge petrographic province. COMPARISON WITH PYROXENE SYENITE OF THE ADIRONDACKS The Adirondack highland consists entirely of a Precambrian rock com- plex rimmed by early Paleozoics. The Grenville series, which is Pre- cambrian, is the only sedimentary series yet recognized in the region, and, so far as known, it is older than the associated igneous rocks, which consist of anorthosites, syenites, granites, and gabbros — all more or less meta- QUARTZ-BEARING HYPERSTHENE-ANDESINE SYENITE 213 morphosed and some greatly so. The investigations of Professors Smyth, Kemp, Gushing, and Miller indicate extensive masses of syenite and granite to be the most abundant rocks in the Adirondack region. The granites are regarded as variants of the syenites. 26 Miller has described the normal syenite of the Adirondacks as follows : 27 "This rock shows a greenish-gray color when fresh and it weathers to a light brown. Its weathered surface is seldom more than a few inches thick. As regards structure and granularity, it is a quite variable rock. The granu- larity ranges from fine to fairly coarse, with a medium grain decidedly preva- lent. A porphyritic texture is sometimes moderately developed. The structure ranges from only faintly gneissoid to very clearly gneissoid to almost schis- tose, this structure being accentuated by the arrangement (or flattening) of the dark-colored minerals, with their long axis parallel to the direction of the foliation. Evidence of crushing or granulation is common, though it varies greatly, the feldspars showing the effects of the granulation more than the other minerals. "In mineral composition, too, the syenite is rather variable. Feldspars — microperthite, orthoclase, and soda-rich plagioclase — constitute 50 to SO per cent of the rock. Quartz, in varying amounts up to 20 per cent, is always present. Pyroxene or hornblende, or both, occur in amounts up to 20 per cent. The pyroxene is mostly a green augite, with sometimes a little hypersthene. Hornblende is generally more abundant than pyroxene in the more quartzose syenites. From 1 to 5 per cent of magnetite always appears. Small amounts of zircon, zoisite, and apatite seldom fail. Garnet is much more sporadic in occurrence, though at times it makes up several per cent of the rock." dishing 28 states that, when traced from place to place, the syenite is quite a variable rock and becomes both more basic and more acidic than the normal type. Both are chiefly peripheral changes, though they may occur locally within the general mass. In its extreme basic facies the normal quartz syenite is of gabbroic composition, while in its acid facies variation into a rock of granitic composition with very abundant quartz is indicated. Megascopic descriptions of the Adirondack syenites by Gushing, Kemp, and Miller fit equally well the Blue Bidge type ; also the variation in the amount of quartz in the normal type of the two regions, which mark the passage into a rock of gabbroic composition on the one hand and into one of granitic composition on the other, applies with equal force in the Virginia region. 20 For detailed descriptions of these rocks the reader is referred to the bulletins of the New York State Museum ; also the following- papers should be consulted : C. II. Smyth, Jr. : Bull. Geol. Soc. Am., vol. 6, 1895, pp. 271-274. H. P. Gushing : Bull. Geol. Soc. Am., vol. 10, 1899, pp. 177-192. H. P. Gushing : Bull. Geol. Soc. Am., vol. 18, 1907, pp. 477-492. H. P. Cushing : Amer. Jour. Sci., vol. 39, 1915, pp. 288-294. W. J. Miller : Jour. Geology, vol. 21, 1913, pp. 160-180. W. J. Miller : Bull. Geol. Soc. Am., vol. 25, 1914, pp. 243-263. 27 W. .1. Miller : Bull. Geol. Soc. Am., vol. 25, 1914, p. 245. 28 H. P. Cushing : Bull. Geol. Soc. Am., vol. 18, 1907, p. 479. 214 WATSON AND CLINE ROCKS OF THE BLUE RIDGE REGION ©0-*JO©©©©© X -I JO 1-1 CO C5 CO L— o CO © CO CO t- © t- H H IB !D ■* © iH N H ^ JO H ^" rH © rH © rH t- JO CO CI CO 00 IO r s ca Iff X •_- »o © h- -y -t CO s •c :: r o rH CO © O > r: co •H ca CO IO ira w sc iH s o - 'tt H IO e» iH rH 1- - IO H ^ > ■* 1- -# r. © r-i © 01 Tt< © M co •H Ol -* CO CO -f rC s o h- 1 \— 1 H •" i/l h- (XI IO 30 C ~. CO IO CI J> © CO CO CO "* 2Q M I— I OlONt-Mt-Hfflt-fflOOIfliP ri^lO^MHOOOlOHOOCOH •"^^^©^©COCO JO rH : J • O o c - QUARTZ-BEARING HYPERSTHENE-ANDESINE SYENITE 215 I. Basic syenite from near Raquette Falls. E. W. Morley, analyst. De- scribed by H. P. Cusbing: New York State Museum Bulletin 115, pages 513-514. II. Augite syenite. Line of townsbips 22 and 23, Franklin County. E. W. Morley, analyst. Described by H. P. Gushing : New York State Mu- seum Bulletin 115, page 514. III. Augite syenite, 3% miles north of Tupper Lake Junction. E. W. Morley, analyst. Described by H. P. Gushing : New York State Museum Bul- letin 115, pages 514-516. IV. Augite syenite, Ticonderoga. Essex County. M. K. Adams, analyst. Described by J. F. Kemp : New York State Museum Bulletin 138, pages 45-46. V. Augite syenite (akerite), "Loon Lake, Franklin County. E. W. Morley, analyst. Described by H. P. Cushing : Bulletin of the Geological So- ciety of America, volume 10, 1899, pages 177-192. VI. Syenite, Whitehall, New York. W. F. Hillebrand, analyst. Described by J. F. Kemp : New York State Museum Bulletin 138, pages 45-46. VII. Augite syenite (akerite) from Diana, New York. Description and analy- sis by C. H. Smyth, Jr. : Bulletin of the Geological Society of Amer- ica, volume 6, 1895, pages 271-274. VIII. Quartz-hornblende syenite, one mile northwest of Northville. E. W. Mor- ley, analyst. Described by W. J. Miller : New York State Museum Bulletin 153, pages 14-17. IX. Augite syenite, Little Falls, New York. E. W. Morley, analyst. De- scribed by H. P. Cushing : New York State Museum Bulletin 115, pages 514-515, 518. X. Quartz syenite, 2*4 miles south of Willis Pond, Altamont, Franklin County. E. W. Morley, analyst. Described by H. P. Cushing: New York State Museum Bulletin 115, pages 514-519. By consulting the table of analyses above of the Adirondack syenites and comparing them with analyses of the Blue Eidge type in table on page 202, it will be seen that in general variation in chemical composition is almost as great for the Virginia type as for the Adirondack type. This variation gains added confirmation when the norms and positions of the rocks in the quantitative system are computed from the analyses. The two types show about equal range in silica, but the Adirondack syenites are richer in alumina and total alkalies than the Virginia rock. It is from the mineralogical composition gained from microscopic study of thin sections of the rocks from the Adirondacks and the Blue Ridge that the differences become most apparent. The distinguishing features of the Adirondack syenites are: (1) The feldspars, which make up 50 to 80 per cent of the rock, are microperthitic orthoclase and soda-rich plagio- clase, the ratio of orthoclase to plagioclase being variable; and (2) the most prominent mafic mineral is green augite, with sometimes a little hypersthene, hornblende being very common and frequently more abun- 216 WATSON AND CLINE ROCKS OF THE BLUE RIDGE REGION h SQ N M ^ rt Si ta oo .. I— I CD t- © t- CO M ■* t- rji H (C iH CO > ffl 1* I- N H ci t-i o Cxi t- 0! OS > c t- OS CD CD > — t- CI Cx] ■* Cxi M t- t- ^ 00 CO CO O t- Ifl ■ ■■ ri Tf IO CO H f-Ti X C-l cq Cxi 00 H 00 77 CD 5 ri c -r -r 71 00 1- 10 t- X 10 71 S 71 10 H 10 77 c •o 00 co cq 1~ 10 OS 77 c X 00 CD CD S O H ft •-< Q CO 53 [3 oa o 2 " " C E 3 £ % c3 c3 < O o 03 O c fi QUARTZ-BEARING HYPERSTHENE-ANDESINE SYENITE 217 dant than augite in the more quartzose facies, and biotite rare. The Blue Ridge type is more closely allied with rocks of dioritic than of syenitic composition because of its chief feldspar being a more calcic plagioclase of andesine composition, although, orthoclase is a prominent constituent and in some thin sections may equal or exceed plagioclase in amount. Broadly speaking, the rock is more a transitional than a well defined type. For convenience of comparison the composition and ratios of the normative feldspathic content of the Adirondack and Blue Eidge types are given in tabular form on the preceding page. Summarizing the results obtained from a comparison of the normative feldspathic constituent of the syenite from the Adirondacks and the Blue Ridge, the Adirondack type shows a higher average of total feldspar (71.29 per cent as against 60.57 per cent for the Blue Ridge), a higher average total of plagioclase (44.85 per cent as against 40.66 per cent for the Blue Riclge), a higher average total of orthoclase (26.44 per cent as against 19.90 per cent for the Blue Ridge), and a more nearly equal ratio between total orthoclase and total plagioclase (1 : 1.6 as against 1 : 2 for the Blue Ridge). Not only does normative orthoclase average higher in the Adirondack type, but normative plagioclase is more sodic than in the Blue Ridge type. This is confirmed both by the. examination of thin sections of the rocks under the microscope and by chemical analysis. The above statements are based on averages of the total analyses. Ex- amination of the table will indicate wide variation in each case, and indi- vidual analyses may be singled out which show reasonably close agreement for the rocks from the two States. Quartz is subject to a wide but about equal variation in both the Adirondack and the Blue Ridge type, and unquestionably specimens from the Adirondacks can be duplicated in the Blue Ridge, so far as the amount of quartz is concerned. In the Adirondack type the chief mafic constituent is augite, with hornblende very common, and at times a little hypersthene, but rarely biotite. The Blue Ridge type is a hypersthenic rock with constant augite, which in places may even equal or exceed in amount hypersthene. Horn- blende is less common and biotite rare, except in one or two places, where it becomes an important constituent. The ratio of mafic to felsic min- erals is naturally variable, but probably no more so for the Adirondack type than for the Blue Riclge type. Wide variation in both normative hypersthene and diopside characterizes the rocks from both regions, but the average for each is quite close for the same type in the two States, although the norms of the Virginia type apparently indicate a slightly higher average in each. 218 WATSON AND CLlNE ROCKS OF THE BLUE RIDGE REGION In conclusion, it may be stated that while certain striking differences are apparent in the type from the Adirondacks and the Blue Eidge, yet there are equally as strong resemblances, and the Blue Eidge rocks dis- cussed in this paper seem to be more closely similar to those of the Adirondacks than of any similar large area in this country. COMPARISON WITH OHARNOCKITE *> The charnockite series of southern India includes a group of Archean hypersthene rocks which range in composition from granite to pyroxenite, the members being so related as to constitute a distinct petrographic province. The more siliceous varieties, though rare, are pyroxene diorites and hypersthene granites (77.47 per cent Si0 2 ), and the more mafic ones are norites (50.04 per cent Si0 2 ) and pyroxenites (46.86 per cent Si0 2 ). However, the most abundant representative of the series is a rock of inter- mediate composition containing about 63.77 per cent Si0 2 . It is char- acterized by abundant andesine with orthoclase, often perthitically inter- grown, with hypersthene, and blue and gray quartz. Augite, hornblende, and biotite occur, the first two being remarkably uniform in character in all occurrences of the charnockite series and are almost as characteristic as hypersthene. Analyses of Rocks of the Charnockite Series s0 (H. S. Washington, analyst) I Si0 2 77.47 ALO, 11.00 Fe 2 O s 1.04 FeO 2.02 MgO . .. 0.43 CaO 1.02 Na 2 2.86 K 2 4.14 H 2 0+ 0.20 H 2 0— 0.05 Ti0 2 0.26 Zr0 2 P 2 5 none S Cr 2 O a II 63.85 14.87 2.32 5.07 3.29 4.48 3.72 1.09 0.11 0.83 trace 0.08 0.15 none III 50.04 11.65 2.63 15.76 5.58 7.89 3.08 0.89 0.19 1.93 0.20 IV 47.44 5.36 3.13 12.42 19.96 7.60 0.48 0.10 0.08 1.29 none 0.27 0.34 0.07 28 T. H. Holland: Memoirs Geol. Survey of India, vol. xxviii, part 2, pp. 119-249; Quart. Jour. Geol. Soc. London, vol. 53, 1897, p. 405. 30 We wish to express to Dr. H. S. Washington our sincere appreciation for his kind- ness in granting us permission to use the four complete analyses recently made by him of rocks belonging to the charnockite series, for which grateful acknowledgment is made. QUARTZ-BEARING HYPERSTHENE-ANDESINE SYENITE 219 i MnO none BaO SrO 100.59 99.95 II III IV 0.05 0.15 none none 0.04 99.64 100.69 I. Hypersthene granite, Saint Thomas Mount, Madras, India. II. Hypersthene quartz diorite, Yercaud, Shevaroy Hills, Madras, India. III. Norite, Saint Thomas Mount, Madras, India. IV. Hornblende hypersthenite, Pammal Hill, Pallavaram, Madras, India. Norms corresponding to the Analyses of Rocks of the Charnockite Series on page 218 (Calculated by Dr. H. S. Washington) I II III IV Q 41.22 20.95 Or 24.46 6.67 5.00 0.56 Ab . 24.10 31.44 26.20 4.19 An 5.00 20.57 15.29 12.23 Di '. 1.36 19.43 18.97 Hy 3.34 13.74 20.27 42.35 01 5.63 13.01 Mt 1.62 3.25 3.71 4.41 II 0.61 1.52 3.65 2.43 Ap 0.34 0.67 Classification Number. Symbol. Magmatic name. I I. 3'. '2. 3. tehamose II II. 4. 3. 4'. tonalose III III. 5. 3. 4'. camptonose IV IV. 1'. '2. 1. 2. hilose There appears to be remarkably close correspondence in mineral com- position of the most abundant variety of charnockite of intermediate composition and the Blue Bidge, Virginia, syenite. The principal min- erals, andesine with orthoclase and hypersthene, and the nearly constant presence of augite are identical in the two types. In the charnockite the silica percentage is about 63.77, and in the Blue Bidge type an average of five analyses (page 202) gives 63.89 per cent silica. Hornblende seems to be more constantly present in the charnockite series, while both types are alike in the irregular occurrence of biotite. Feldspar intergrowths are not so characteristic of the Blue Bidge type as of the charnockite member, but are equally characteristic of the feldspar members of the Nelson-Amherst counties, Virginia, comagmatic area, 220 WATSON AND CLINE ROCKS OP THE BLUE RIDGE REGION which forms a part of the larger Blue Eidge petrographic province. Sim- ilarity is again shown to the larger Blue Eidge province in the quartz of the quartz-bearing members being either of blue or gray color. Again, the members of the charnockite series vary in composition from granites to pyroxenites with a similar variation shown in the Blue Eidge series, and in each province the rocks are hypersthenic. It must be stated here, however, that while there is apparently a close correspondence in mineral composition and in the variety of types in the two provinces, the field relations of the several types to each other in the Blue Eidge prov- ince are not yet conclusively determined. Unakite Type origin of name The name unakite was first applied by Bradley 31 in 1874 to "a member" of the granitic series from the Great Smoky Mountains, a portion of the Unaka Eange of the Blue Eidge, which range forms the boundary between North Carolina and Tennessee." Bradley's description was based on specimens seen from the slopes of the peaks known as "The Bluff," "Wal- nut Mountain," and "Max's Patch," Cocke County, Tennessee, and Madi- son County, North Carolina. His brief description of the rock (unakite) is as follows : "The character relied on for the separation of the species is the constant replacement of the mica of common granite or the hornblende of syenite by epidote. The amount of this ingredient present is quite variable, in some cases even exceeding one-half of the whole mass. The feldspar present is orthoclase of various shades of pink, forming from one-fourth to one-third of the whole. The quartz is mainly white, but occasionally smoky ; its isolated portions form but a small part, say one-fourth of the mass ; it is veined in structure, but this is probably not a constant character. Small grains of magnetite are scattered through the rock, but not so thickly as in many granites. No other ingredients have as yet been detected. Mr. G. W. Hawes has determined the specific gravity at 2.79." DISTRIBUTION AND CHARACTERISTICS OF UNAKITE Since the publication of Bradley's original note on unakite, in 1874, occurrences of the rock have been noted and described from a number of localities in Virginia and North Carolina. 32 The rock is by no means 31 F. H. Bradley : Amer. Jour. Sci., 3d ser., vol. vii, 1874, pp. 519-520. 32 W. C. Phalen : Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections, vol. 45, 1904, pp. 306-316. Thomas L. Watson : Jour. Geol., vol. xii, 1904, pp. 395-398. Watson, Laney, and Merrill : North Carolina Geol. Survey, 1906, pp. 172-174. Thomas L. Watson : Amer. Jour. Sci., vol. xxii, 1906, p. 248. Thomas L. Watson : Bull. 426, U. S. Geol. Survey, 1910, pp. 22, 71, 73, 77-78, 111- 112, 157-159. UNAKITE TYPE 221 restricted in distribution to the localities published, as the writers have noted its occurrence in many places in the Blue Eidge of Virginia in association with the type (hypersthene-orthoclase-bearing quartz diorite) described above. In the many occurrences noted the rock shows consider- able variation, both in color and in composition. Usually two phases are recognized: (1) A highly feldspathic phase in which pink or red feld- spar amounts to three-fourths of the mass, the other two essential con- stituents being yellow green epidote and white to smoky quartz; and (2) a non-feldspathic phase composed of quartz and epidote and designated epidosite. Feldspar is not apparent in hand specimens of the epidosite phase of the rock, but is recognized microscopically in some thin sections. Other variations are into essentially all quartz on the one hand and into essentially all epidote on the other. All gradations between the two prin- cipal phases of the rock mentioned above are noted. The rock is low in quartz, but contains much epidote. The feldspar is usualty orthoclase or microcline, or both. Plagioclase is rare in the thin sections studied, and mafic minerals have not been identified. From its mode of occurrence and association in the thin sections studied, epidote is clearly a secondary mineral. Its microscopic description by the senior writer in the unakite of Madison County, North Carolina, is essentially similar to that of the Blue Eidge, Virginia, occurrences and is quoted in full. 33 "It [epidote] occurs in large masses composed of minute microscopic gran- ules, many of them replacing the entire feldspar individuals, and as continu- ous and irregular disconnected bands and areas of large and small size, fol- lowing the fractures in both the feldspar and the quartz, but most extensively developed in the feldspar. The development of epidote along the breakage lines can be continuously traced in many places from the larger areas or masses replacing the entire feldspar individuals across or into contiguous feld- spars. In still other places the feldspar shows scattered granules of epidote over its surface. All gradations between these two extremes of epidotization appear. Hardly any of the feldspar in the sections examined was entirely free from some epidotization." The commonest accessory minerals are zircon, apatite, and iron oxide. A chemical analysis of the unakite from Milams Gap, in the northern Blue Eidge of Virginia, gave the following result : 33 Thomas L. Watson : Bull. 426, IT. S. Geol. Survey, 1910, pp. 158-159 ; see also Jour. Geol., vol. xii, 1904, p. 397. 222 WATSON AND CLINE ROCKS OF THE BLUE RIDGE REGION Analysis of Unakite, Milams Gap, Virginia (W. O. Phalen, analyst) Per cent Si0 2 58.32 A1 2 3 15. 77 34 Fe 2 3 6.56 FeO 89 MgO 09 OaO 11.68 Na 2 32 K 2 4.01 H 2 1.73 P 2 5 48 MnO >. 13 ZrO, trace 99.98 ORIGIN OF THE UN A KITE The unakite-bearing rock of the Unaka Mountains of western North Carolina and eastern Tennessee is a coarse biotite granite varying from porphyritic to even-granular in texture, usually exhibiting pronounced secondary gneissoid structure, and mapped by Keith 35 as the Max Patch granite of Precambrian age. In the Blue Eidge of Virginia the unakite- bearing rock, where observed, is a quartz-bearing hypersthene-andesine syenite, previously described by Phalen 36 in the Milams Gap locality as hypersthene akerite. In each instance it seems entirely clear that the unakite and its associated rock are derived from the same magma, and all who have studied the unakite from the several localities are in agreement that epidote, one of the essential minerals, is secondary in origin; also that the epidote has developed from feldspar and the mafic constituents (biotite in the North Carolina-Tennessee area, and pyroxene and to some extent hornblende in the Virginia area) through chiefly hydrometamor- phism (action of percolating meteoric waters) , aided probably by dynamic metamorphism. Only certain very restricted parts of the rock of either State are unakite-bearing. From the senior writer's studies of the Madison County, North Carolina, area it seemed quite conclusive, from the different ex- posures studied of the unakite in its relations to the epidote-bearing granite, that it was of distinct vein character, which can be referred very likely to the segregation type. It is suggested, then, that in some cases M Includes Ti0 2 . 35 Arthur Keith: Asheville Folio (No. 110), Geol, Atlas U. S., U. S. Geol. Survey, 1904. 89 W. C. Phalen : Op. cit. UNAKITE TYPE 223 at least the now highly epidotized portions of rock yielding the type unakite represent magmatic segregations or secretions similar to schlieren or possibly pegmatite, some of whose original constituents have been altered to epidote chiefly by hydrometamorphism. ZIRGONIFEROUS EPIDOSITE In the syenite areas north of James Eiver fragments of highly epi- dotized rock occur, many of which are rich in ilmenite, apatite, and zircon. The rock is found in largest quantity on the southeast slope of the Blue Ridge in the Beverly Settlement in Amherst County. The rock was not found in place, but the loose fragments were associated with those of syenite in such fashion as to suggest its probable occurrence as possible segregations in the syenite. It certainly seems possible that it has a sim- ilar genesis to that of the probable related type, unakite. In hand speci- mens of the rock the minerals easily recognized are, named in order of abundance, epidote, quartz, ilmenite, zircon, and apatite. Epidote and quartz compose the bulk of the rock, with the former greatly in excess. The ilmenite, zircon, and apatite are not distributed uniformly through the rock, but are grouped in close association with each other in irregular areas. Each of these minerals varies greatly in amount in the different hand specimens. Zircon occurs in small crystals of light reddish-brown color (colorless in thin .sections), and at least 50 were removed from a single small speci- men of the rock. The largest crystal measured 2.5 millimeters in length and 1 millimeter in thickness. Microscopic study of thin sections gave no additional information from that gained by megascopic study of hand specimens as to the character of the rock. Geanite Field investigation of many of the syenite areas in the Blue Ridge dis- closes the association of more acidic rocks of granitic composition in which quartz usually becomes very abundant. Orthoclase (microcline) is increased in amount and the plagioclase constituent is more sodic. Mafic minerals are decreased in amount and in some instances they fail almost entirely. Like the syenite, the weathered portions of the granite show characteristic pitted surfaces. The pitting from weathering and disappearance chiefly of the feldspar has left the quartz in projecting reticulated areas in the more massive phases of the rock and in more or less drawn out connecting spindles in the more gneissic phases. The exact field relations of the granite and syenite have not been defi- 224 WATSON AND CLINE ROCKS OP THE BLUE RIDGE REGION nitely determined for all areas, but in several the evidence seems con- clusive to the writers for regarding them as differentiation phases of the same intrusive magma, since definite contacts between the two types have nowhere been observed; but on the contrary there seems to be a gradual passage from one into the other. In several of the areas on the southeast slope of the middle Blue Ridge that have been studied in most detail it is possible to collect specimens along a traverse that will range in the amount of quartz from a minimum in the more typical syenite to a maxi- " mum in normal granite, with practically all gradations between the two extremes. It is regretted there are no available analyses of the more acid type of rock of granitic composition. For such areas the field relation- ships and microscopic study of thin sections are best explained on the assumption that the granite is an acid extreme of the syenite. So far as our studies have extended, we have not been able to note any border phenomena in either rock of the several areas where the two are associated which would indicate that one has been cut by the other. However, de- tailed field studies have not been extended to all known areas of the rocks, and to say that such relations do not exist would be unwarranted at the present stage of our knowledge. In some places the granite occupies areas up to several miles in width in which apparently no syenite appears, while in other places a traverse will show alternations of granite and syenite. The former relation is especially true of the granites mapped and described by Keith 37 in the northern Blue Bidge of Virginia. The granites are even-granular, medium-grained rocks of fairly uni- form texture, of light gray or pink color, and usually show indistinct to pronounced foliation developed from pressure metamorphisni. In hand specimens feldspar and quartz are easily distinguished, the latter being of bluish color in some cases. Considerable green epidote is developed in places, especially in the pink granite, yielding a rock similar in appear- ance and composition to unakite (pages 220-223). Garnet is sparingly developed and is largely altered to chlorite. Microscopic study of thin sections of the granites shows them to be, in part at least, pyroxenic rocks. In most thin sections examined complete alteration of the original ferromagnesian constituents to epidote, chlorite or amphibole, and iron oxide rendered their determination impossible. Cores of orthorhombic pyroxene rimmed by secondary fibrous amphibole and iron oxide as alteration products were observed in a few thin sections of the light gray granite. No trace of an original ferromagnesian min- eral was noted in any thin section of the pink granite. "Whatever dark 37 Arthur Keith : Fourteenth Ann. Rept. U. S. Geol. Survey, part ii, 1892-1893, pp. 285-395. GRANITE 225 silicates were present in the rocks originally could not have been abundant because of the present small amounts of secondary minerals that could have been derived from them. The most abundant constituent of the rock is feldspar, which is chiefly orthoclase and microcline, and always some sodic plagioclase (albite- oligoclase) in varying amount, almost equaling in a few thin sections the potash varieties. Much of the orthoclase is intergrown with albite as microperthite, but graphic intergrowths with quartz are rare. Quartz is next to feldspar in importance and is of the usual kind in granites. The common accessory minerals are the same as those observed in the syenite which comprise magnetite, apatite, and zircon. Others sometimes noted are needle-like inclusions of rutile in some of the quartz, garnet in irreg- ular masses, and crystals frequently partially or completely altered to chlorite and epidote. Noeite general discussion of characteristics and distribution Gabbros have thus far been observed by the writers only at several localities in the Blue Eidge region of Virginia in association with the pyroxene syenite. In each instance the rock is hypersthenic, and is there- fore a norite. So far as our field investigations have extended, two varieties of the norite have been studied, the most abundant one of which is a hornblende norite (analysis III, page 229), the other a variety abnor- mally rich in apatite and ilmenite (analysis I, page 229) and closely re- sembling in this respect the gabbro-nelsonite 38 (roselandose) of the high titanium-phosphorus rocks of the Amherst- Nelson counties comagmatic area near the southeastern foot of the Blue Bidge. Both varieties are rich in hypersthene and diallage (see analysis II, page 229, and map, page 195). Analyses of these two varieties of gabbro (I and III) are given in the table of analyses on page 229, with which are compared analyses of gpbbro and gabbro-nelsonite of the Amherst-Nelson counties area 39 (II. 38 Nelsonite, a new rock type, is the name that was given by Watson to a group of high titanium-phosphorus-bearing rocks of igneous origin, occurring in dikelike bodies of varying size and irregular shape in the Amherst-Nelson counties region, Virginia, and to a less extent farther southwest on the northwest slope of the Blue Ridge in Roanoke County. The name gabbro-nelsonite. a new rock type, was proposed by Watson and Taber for a holocrystalline igneous rock having a mineralogical composition interme- diate between normal gabbro and nelsonite proper. The nelsonites proper belong to class V of perfemanes, but occupy new rang and subrang positions in the quantitative system, and accordingly are new rock types to which appropriate magmatic names have been given. See T. L. Watson : Mineral resources of Virginia, 1907, p. 300 ; Watson and Taber : Bull. 430, U. S. Geol. Survey, part i, 1909, pp. 200-213 ; University of Vir- ginia publications, Bull. Phil. Soc, scientific section, vol. 1, 1913, No. 14, pp. 331-333 ; Bull. III-A, Virginia Geol. Survey, 1913, pp. 100-155. 30 Watson and Taber : Bull. III-A, Virginia Geol. Survey, 1913, pp. 138-145. XVII— Boll. Geol. Soc. Am., Vol. 27, 1915 226 WATSON AND CLINE ROCKS OF THE BLUE RIDGE REGION IV, and V) and of norites from Maryland (VI) and the Adirondacks (VII and VIII). The area that has been studied in greatest detail in the Blue Ridge proper lies north of James Elver Gap, on the two slopes of the Blue Ridge in Amherst and Bockbridge counties. Other areas that have been studied and published on are the Amherst-Nelson counties comagmatic area 40 near the southeast foot of the Blue Bidge and the Hemlock area 41 in Floyd County, southwest Virginia. The gabbro of the Floyd County area is a pyrrhotite-rich hornblende norite containing biotite and a little olivine. Several areas of ga.bbroic rocks of the hornblendic variety have been studied in the Bobinson Gap section, about 8 miles northeast of Balcony Falls. One of the areas is located in Bockbridge County, on the north- west slope of the Blue Bidge ; the others occur in Amherst County, on the southeast slope of the ridge. The principal body of gabbro is found in the Beverly Settlement, in Amherst County. It is essentially a horn- blende norite, although a biotite facies occurs, but is not abundant. The smaller areas of gabbroic rocks are described below, under pyroxenite. The gabbroic rocks, including pyroxenite, and the syenite are intimately associated, but the evidence is not yet conclusive as to what are their exact field relations. Small bodies of the syenite are found in the larger gabbro mass, while similar bodies of pyroxenite are associated with the gabbro, from which they differ chiefly in the presence of scant feldspar and the substitution of biotite for hornblende. Smaller areas of pyrox- enite are distributed as dikelike bodies in the syenite and may represent either independent intrusions as dikes or segregations as schlieren in the syenite body. That the rocks are differentiates from a common magma is entirely evident on mineralogical and chemical relationships, but whether they represent separate intrusions or variants from differentiation in place can not be definitely answered at this time. Further detailed investigations of this igneous complex in the region immediately to the north will be necessary before this question can be settled. In general the chief difference noted in the gabbros and the more abundantly asso- ciated type syenite is in the proportion and not in the kind of minerals, for the important constituents in one type are usually present in greater or less quantity in the other. MEGASCOPIC CHARACTER For the areas studied the gabbroic rocks are of dark gray to nearly black color and of medium, even-granular texture. They show distinct *° Watson and Taber : Bull. III-A, Virginia Geol. Survey, 1913, pp. 42-234. tt T. h, Watson : Trans, Amer. Inst. Mng. Engrs., vol. xxxviii, 1907, pp. 683-697. NORITE 227 foliation (gneissic) in places, but frequently they appear entirely massive in structure. In the more highly feldspathic fades of the rock (gabbro proper) the light and dark colored minerals are so distributed with refer- ence to each other as to impart a decidedly speckled appearance to the rock. Variation in the proportion of the light and dark minerals is observed, but as a rule the dark ones are in excess. The recognizable minerals in hand specimens of the gabbro are pyrox- ene, hornblende, feldspar, and sometimes biotite. In the Floyd County rock sulphides range up to 50 per cent of the total rock-mass. Pyroxene is more abundant than hornblende, the latter mineral apparently failing in some specimens. A distinct cliallage parting may frequently be seen in specimens with the aid of a pocket lens. Like the syenite and granite types previously described, the weathered surfaces of the gabbro show pitting from the removal of pyroxene and feldspar, leaving hornblende and some of the, lesser more resistant minerals standing in relief. MICROSCOPIC DESCRIPTION Study of thin sections of the gabbro under the microscope shows the principal minerals to be cliallage, hornblende, hypersthene, occasional biotite, and calcic plagioclase. Minor constituents are quartz, apatite, titanite, magnetite, and sulphides (pyrite and pyrrhotite). Pyroxene, as augite (diallage) and hypersthene, the former usually in excess, is the most important constituent. It is developed in stout allotriomorphic grains, containing the common platy forms of brown inclusions, which ar.e more abundant in the augite than in the hypersthene, and, in addi- tion, inclusions of the minor constituents. The augite is usually very fresh, but hypersthene is partially or completely altered, the manner of alteration being identical with that of the syenite, yielding a fibrous pale green amphibole, accompanied by the separation of iron oxide in extreme cases, and frequently considerable calcite. The feldspar is completely altered in all thin-sections of the horn- blende gabbro studied, but from the character of the alteration products it is inferred that probably two varieties are present. Kaolin is the most frequent alteration product of the feldspathic constituent, with which is associated some muscovite. A reasonably fresh specimen of the biotite- rich gabbro (pyroxenite) studied contained but little feldspar, the prin- cipal variety of which was andesine-labradorite, showing well developed albite and sometimes pericline twinning. An appreciable amount of orthoclase and some quartz were present. Hornblende is an important mineral of the rock, but is not so abundant as pyroxene and is not so uniformly distributed. The optical properties 228 WATSON AND CLINE ROCKS OF THE BLUE RIDGE REGION indicate that it is near common hornblende in composition; the angle c A 2. is about 23 degrees; absorption is z = deep brown, x and y light brown. It shows no alteration. ILMENITE-APATITE GABBRO This type was not found in place, but is represented by abundant large and small boulders littering the surface on the southeast slope of Rocky Row Mountain between James River and the headwaters of Rocky Row Run, in Amherst County. It is not possible, therefore, to say what its field relations are to the other rocks. The rock is very dark in color be- cause of the predominance of ilmenite and pyroxene, although feldspar irregularly distributed through the rock is recognized, usually grouped in irregular-shaped areas of about 1 inch in diameter. Apatite is devel- oped in small crystals, many of which show hexagonal outline; when crystal form is lacking the mineral is distinguished with difficulty from the small grains of secondary epidote. Some secondary quartz, red garnet, and chlorite can be distinguished in hand specimens. Indistinct foliation is developed in the rock. Microscopic study of thin sections of the rock show it to be much altered, the most abundant minerals of which are secondary, including chlorite, amphibole, epidote, and quartz. However, in some thin-sections the original minerals are sufficiently fresh to determine the composition of the rock to be chiefly hypersthene, plagioclase (labradorite), some orthoclase, ilmenite, apatite, diallage, and quartz. Hypersthene is abundant, but is much altered, the alteration being- identical with that of the hypersthene in the syenite, with the exception that considerable chlorite is developed in the alteration of the gabbro. Diallage is less abundant than hypersthene and does not occur in all thin- sections ; but when present it is fairly fresh, with only slight alteration to probably amphibole along the cleavage and fractures. Plagioclase of the variety labradorite is greatly altered, and in most cases little or none of the original mineral remains. Some orthoclase is also present. The richness of the rock in apatite and ilmenite is a noteworthy feature, which removes it from the ordinary gabbro, and in this respect the rock resembles the gabbro-nelsonite (roselan close) of the Amherst-"N~elson counties area, 42 an analysis of which is given on page 229. The apatite is in large amount in all thin sections studied, developed both as separate large rounded hypidiomorphic crystals and as small crystals inclosed in the other minerals. It varies in quantity in different thin-sections and 42 Watson and Taber : Bull. III-A, Virginia Geol. Survey, 1913, pp. 138-142. NORITE 229 even in parts of a single section, but it is remarkably fresh. Ilmenite is developed in scattered irregular granular masses of large sizes, partially altered to leucoxene. Both primary and secondary quartz occur contain- ing abundant inclusions of rutile needles. Original hornblende was not identified in any thin section of the rock. CHEMICAL COMPOSITION AND CLASSIFICATION The composition of the Blue Ridge gabbros described above is shown in analyses I and III of the subjoined table. Ill shows no unusual features in composition, but I is especially interesting because of its un- usual richness in Ti0 2 and P 2 5 . It is compared with the analysis (II) of the new rock type gabbro-nelsonite of the near-by Amherst-Nelson comagmatic area. The two rocks are rich, but not equally so in Ti0 2 and P 2 5 . In most other respects the two rocks are chemically unlike, as indicated not only by the analyses, but by their positions in the quanti- tative system, I being a salfemane and II a dofemane. Mineralogically, however, the two are closely similar, since they contain the same silicate and ore minerals, but in different proportions. For purposes of comparison, analyses of hypersthene gabbros (norites) from several well known eastern areas are introduced in the table — IV and V from the Amherst-Nelson, Virginia, area ; VI from the Baltimore, Maryland, area, and VII and VIII from the Adirondack region. Disre- garding the gabbro-nelsonite represented by analysis II, the rocks show decidedly close chemical relationships, as indicated by their positions in the quantitative system. They are all salfemanes and fall into order I or 5, rang 3 or 4, and subrang 3 or 4. Analyses of Gabbros I II 43 Si0 2 42.10 33.83 A1 2 3 12.06 5.19 Fe 2 G 3 1.10 11.38 FeO 8.43 15.08 MgO 5.62 8.57 CaO S.63 8.22 Na 2 1.97 1.28 K,0 1.12 .50 H 2 0— 20 .45 H 2 0+ 3.80 .75 Ti0 2 10.15 4.84 P 2 5 3.77 10.00 MnO 63 .26 43 Contains C1-- - .04, F — .55. Ill IV V VI VII VIII 47.67 50.99 51.08 46.85 47.16 44.77 15.93 12.40 16.45 19.75 14.45 12.46 1.96 2.10 .84 3.22 1.61 4.63 6.80 11.80 10. OS 7.99 13.81 12.99 8.99 4.09 6.95 7.75 5.24 5.34 12.32 6.46 5.57 13.10 8.13 10.20 1.68 2.38 3.49 1.56 3.09 2.47 .79 2.19 1.28 .09 1.20 .95 .12 .12 .08 }. 56{ .12 .12 1.80 1.21 .51 .48 .48 .85 4.66 4.44 3.37 5.26 .13 1.S6 .14 .57 .28 1.51 .11 .08 .24 .17 230 WATSON AND CLINE ROCKS OF THE BLUE RIDGE REGION I II III IV V VI VII VIII NiO, CoO ! , .02 , p,-. \ none trace none trace trace < „- 1 .37 S none .25 .16 trace trace .14 .26 99.58 101.39 100.71 100.37 100.99 100.84 99.98 100.75 Excess O 30 101.09 I. Apatite-ilmenite gabbro (norite) from southeast slope of Rocky Row Mountain, about 3 miles north of James River, Amherst County, Vir- ginia. J. G. Dinwicldie, analyst. II. Gabbro-nelsonite exposed on the west side of the Arrington-Roseland Road, 1 mile south of Roseland. Type locality. William M. Thorn- ton, Jr., analyst. Watson and Taber : Bulletin III-A, Virginia Geo- logical Survey, 1913, pages 138-142, especially page 140. III. Hornblende gabbro (norite) from the southeast slope of the Blue Ridge in Robinsons Gap, Amherst County, Virginia. J. G. Dinwiddie, analyst. IV. Gabbro (norite) dike exposed on 100-foot level, 50 feet from shaft, General Electric Company's mine, 1.5 miles northwest of Roses Mill. William M. Thornton, Jr., analyst. Bulletin III-A, Virginia Geolog- ical Survey, 1913, page 95. V. Gabbro (norite) in Roseland-Arrington Road, near Mr. Adams' house, about 100 yards south of Roseland post-office. William M. Thornton, Jr., analyst. Bulletin III-A, Virginia Geological Survey, 1913, page 95. VI. Gabbro (norite), Baltimore, Maryland, area. Average of 23 typical specimens. L. McKay, analyst. G. H. Williams : Bulletin 28, United States Geological Survey, 1886, page 39. VII. Gabbro, Woolen Mill, 1 mile west of Elizabethtown, Essex County, New York. W. F. Hillebrand, analyst. J. F. Kemp: Bulletin 138, New York State Museum, 1910, page 40. VIII. Gabbro (norite). Wall rock of titaniferous magnetite deposit, Lincoln Pond, Essex County, New York. George Steiger, analyst. J. F. Kemp : Nineteenth Annual Report of the United States Geological Survey, part iii, 1899, page 407. Norms of Oabbros corresponding to Analyses on page 229 J44 jj JJJ44 jy y yj44 y H 44 yni« Q 8.94 7.38 8.94 Or 6.67 2.78 4.45 12.79 7.23 .06 7.2 5.6 Ab 16.77 11.00 14.15 19.91 29.34 13.01 26.2 21.0 An 20.57 6.95 33.64 16.68 25.58 43.9 25.0 19.5 Di 1.51 21.57 3.43 .92 17.3 12.5 25.9 Hy 14.10 22.55 9.87 21.05 27.53 11.4 8.1 4.0 Ol 9.42 8.4 12.8 5.9 Mt 16.47 2.78 3.02 1.16 4.6 2.3 6.7 II 19.30 19.15 1.67 8.82 8.36 6.4 9.9 Hm 1.12 Ap 9.07 11.42 .34 4.03 .31 1.3 ** Norms calculated by Dr. H. S, Washington. NORITE 231 Summary of Classification Number. Symbol. Name. ■ I III. 4'. (3)4. 4. no name II I V. t ,3. 1. 2. 3. roselandose III III. 5. 4. 4. auvergnose IV 'III. 4'. 3. '4. vaalose V 'III. 5. 3'. 4. andose-ca mptonose VI III. 5. 4. 3. auvergnose VII III. 5. 3. 4. eamptonose VIII III. 5. 3. 4. camptonose Pyroxentte DISTRIBUTION The several small areas of gabbroic rocks referred to under gabbro are here classed as pyroxenite. The areas are in the same general region, but are rather widely separated. One occurs in Eockbridge County near the northwest slope of the Blue Eidge, about 3 miles southeast of Buena Vista ; the other occurs in Amherst County, on the southeast slope of the Blue Eidge, on the Eobinson Gap Eoad, three-quarters of a mile southeast of the church in the Beverly Settlement. MICROSCOPIC CHARACTER In mineral composition the rock can not be considered a typical repre- sentative of either the gabbro or the pyroxenite group, but must be re- garded as a transitional or intermediate type, as confirmed by the analyses on page 232. In some respects it is more closely allied with the gabbros than with the pyroxenites, but because of its being essentially a pyroxene aggregate with considerable biotite and subordinate feldspar it has seemed best to group it with the pyroxenites. The rock is the same in the several areas studied and differs essentially from the gabbro of the same district in containing less feldspar and hornblende, but increased amounts of augite (diallage), hypersthene, and biotite. Because of the great preponderance of the dark-colored mafic minerals, the pyroxenite is much darker in color (nearly black) than the normal gabbro. Microscopic study of thin sections indicated the same optical properties of the minerals as for those in the gabbro described above. Augite (diallage) is in excess of hypersthene and some original quartz and ortho- clase occur. Biotite is more abundant than hornblende, the latter failing entirely in several thin sections. Because of the presence of some feldspar and much biotite, the rock is designated a biotite-feldspar-bearing py- roxenite. 232 WATSON AND CLINE ROCKS OF THE BLUE RIDGE REGION CHEMICAL COMPOSITION AND CLASSIFICATION A chemical analysis of the biotite-feldspar-bearing pyroxenite from the northwest slope of the Blue Eidge in Eockbri'dge County is given in column I below. Analyses of two other well known pyroxenites — one from Baltimore County, Maryland (II), and one from Webster, North Carolina (III) — are tabulated for comparison. I is a feldspar-biotite- bearing hypersthene-cliallage mixture, II a bronzite-diopside aggregate, and III is a bronzite-diallage mixture. Thus on the basis of mineral composition each of the rocks represents a different type of pyroxenite, a difference clearly expressed chemically in the analyses below. In the Virginia rock (analysis I) the presence of feldspar manifests itself in the increased percentages of alumina, lime, and alkalies. The greater richness of the Maryland (II) and the North Carolina (III) rocks in the enstatite molecule (bronzite, which is hypersthene in the Virginia rock) accounts for the greatly increased percentage of magnesia, which is about double that of the Virginia rock. The difference in composition of the three rocks is further shown in the table of norms below. As indicated by their positions in the quanti- tative system, the Virginia rock is a dofemane, while the Maryland and North Carolina rocks are perfemanes. Analyses of Pyroxenite I II III Si0 2 50.08 50. SO 55.14 A1 2 3 6.56 3.40 .66 Fe 2 3 1.56 1.39 3.48 FeO 8.94 8.11 4.73 • MgO 12.95 22.77 26.66 OaO 16.14 12.31 8.39 Na 2 .89 trace .30 K 2 .46 trace none h 2 o+ ".'!!.'!!.'.'!!!!"!""!'!"!•.'!"] '.32 [ - 52 - 38 Ti0 2 1.90 none trace P 2 5 19 trace .23 MnO 40 .17 .03 Cr 2 3 .32 .25 CI .24 S 37 trace 100.95 100.03 100.25 I. Biotite-feldspar-bearing pyroxenite from northwest slope of the Blue Ridge in Robinsons Gap, Rockbridge County, Virginia. J. G. Dinwid- die, analyst. PYROXENITE 233 II. Pyroxenite, Johnny Cake Road, Baltimore County, Maryland. J. E. Whit- field, analyst. G. H. Williams : American Geologist, volume vi,. 1890, page 41. III. Websterite, Webster, North Carolina. E. A. Schneider, analyst. G. H. Williams : American Geologist, volume vi, 1890, page 44 ; also Bulletin 148, United States Geological Survey, 1897, page 92. Norms* 5 of Pyroxenites corresponding to Analyses on page 232 Q Or Ab 2.78 7.34 An 12.51 Di 53.60 Hy :. 13.10 Ol 4 . 48 Mt 2.32 II 3.65 Ap 34 Summary of Classification II 9.2 41.4 33.8 12.2 2.1 III 1.7 2.6 32.7 57.1 5.1 umber. Symbol. Name. I IV. 1'. 1'. 2(3). 2. no name II V. 1. 1. 2. 2. baltimorose III V. 1. 1. 2. 1. websterose Age Eelations In the northern Blue Ridge of Virginia the syenite traced at irregular intervals along the west side of the mountains southward from Dickeys Hill, in Warren County, is found in more or less intimate association with the Catoctin schist of Algonkian age. The Catoctin is a dark-col- ored, dense, and heavy basaltic rock, two varieties of which have been recognized by Keith, 46 a lower diabasic sheet and an upper basaltic sheet, both altered, sometimes highly schistose, with the upper one largely epi- dotized. In his discussion and mapping of the igneous rocks in this part of the Blue Ridge, Keith 47 has clearly shown that all are Precambrian, and that the sequence of events involves the granite intrusion [including syenite] between the diabase eruptive and the diabase flow. Farther south, in the middle Blue Ridge region, the basal conglomerates of the Lower Cambrian series contain frequent well-rounded pebbles of the pyroxene syenite on which the sediments rest. The evidence is con- 45 Calculated by Dr. H. S. Washington. 48 Arthur Keith : Fourteenth Ann. Rept., U. S. Geol. Survey, part ii, 1892-1893, pp. 285-395. * 7 Arthur Keith : Ibid., pp. 296-318. XVIII— Bull. Geol. Soc. Am., Vol. 27, 1915 234 WATSON AND CLINE ROCKS OF THE BLUE RIDGE REGION elusive, therefore, that the syenite of this region at least is Precambrian in age. The same evidence applies to the granites, which in this region, as in the northern Blue Eidge, are Precambrian. Where observed by us, the syenites of the Blue Eidge indicate, from their relations to other rocks, Precambrian age ; but whether more than a single period of intrusion is represented can not be answered from our present knowledge of the field relations. It has been shown that the syenite has not been equally metamorphosed in all places, but that the rock varies greatly in structure from massive to highly gneissic, and some- times almost schistose. The principle of inequality of metamorphism alone, as expressed in the rock structures of this region, can not be used as a positive criterion for regarding the rocks to be of more than one period of intrusion, and therefore of different age, since in some areas there can be traced syenite of the same mass whose structure ranges from massive or only faintly gneissoid to highly gneissic, which is beyond question the product of a single intrusion. On the other hand, there are areas where such evidence is apparently lacking, and there may have been more than a single period of intrusion of the syenite. It has been pointed out that the syenite shows variations in some local- ities into more acid or granitic phases on the one hand and possibly into more basic or gabbroic phases on the other, though the evidence is much less conclusive for the latter. Not until the region has been covered by thorough detailed study can 'the field relations of the several rock types be finally settled, and whether there has been more than one period of in- trusion of the syenite magma. It can be stated in conclusion, however, that the relations show conclusively that the syenite of at least some of the areas, and probably of all, is of Precambrian age. VOL 11. 191/5 pt. in BULLETIN OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA VOL. 27, PP. 235-262, PLS. 10-12 JUNE 1, 1916 PLEISTOCENE UPLIFT OP NEW YOEK AND ADJACENT TEKKITOKY 1 BY HERMAN L. FAIRCHILD (Read before the Society December 29, 1915) CONTENTS Page General statement 235 Isobases 237 Marine plane 240 Iroquois plane , 242 Altitudes and warping in the Ontario basin 243 Outlet control — splitting of beaches 245 Flooding of the south shore of Iroquois 247 Checks and proofs 248 Relation of land uplift to the ice-body 249 Comparison of maps ' 253 Conclusion and summary 254 Bibliography 255 Postscript 262 General Statement In 1913 the writer published (see number 127 of the bibliography) evidence and argument to prove the deep submergence of the Connecticut and Hudson-Champlain valleys and indicated by a map the approximate amount of postglacial uplift. It was shown that the marine plane, repre- sented by a wealth of shore phenomena, rises from zero below New York City to over 700 feet on the Canadian boundary, and that the isobases are inclined 20° from the latitude parallels, running north of west by south of east. In other words, the direction of steepest npslope is north 20° east. The determination of these directions was made by connecting points of equal altitude on the marine plane in the Hudson and the Con- necticut valleys, and with no regard to any previous work or writing on land deformation. It is significant, therefore, to note that Professor Coleman found the direction of greatest uplift of the Iroquois plane in 1 Manuscript received by the Secretary of the Society January 7, 1916. (235) 236 H. L. FAIRCHILD PLEISTOCENE UPLIFT OF NEW YORK the Ontario basin to be 20° east of north (95), and that Professor Gold- thwait estimated the post-Algonquin deformation of the Great Lakes area as north 22° east (109). The practical agreement of the conclusions of three independent students, covering overlapping areas, although perhaps somewhat different time episodes, is evidence of accuracy that may be accepted in our court of last resort. The writer's study of the Iroquois and marine planes in the Ontario- Saint Lawrence area has been handicapped by lack of topographic maps and precise altitudes. Eecently an advance sheet of the Chateaugay quadrangle made possible the precise mapping of the Iroquois and Gilbert Gulf shores on the west side of the northern salient. We now know with fair precision the altitudes on both sides of the Covey Hill promontory. Here the Iroquois beach ends, while the marine beach follows around the salient, running northwest from the Champlain Valley into Canada, and then southwest back into New York past the villages of Chateaugay and Malone. The important fact is determined, which seemed theoretically probable, that the land deformation and hence the isobasal lines of the Saint Lawrence-Ontario area are in accord with those of the Champlain-Hudson and western New England. The Adirondack mass and the wide sur- rounding areas seem to have upraised in unity when the total uplift of both glacial and postglacial time is considered. It appears that the land warping during the successive episodes of the ice removal had some- what different directions in the several provinces of the large area, but the combined effect has produced a fair regularity of slope over the entire area. This is shown by the map (plate 10). If the low altitude of the land at tbe close of glaciation had any causal relation to the weight of the ice-cap then it would seem to logically fol- low that no uplifting occurred until the ice-body was waning and the glacial load diminished. This implies that the ice-front had receded from its most advanced position before land uplift began, and it appears quite certain from facts to follow that the land uplift at any point was subsequent to the removal of the glacier at that point. It follows, there- fore, that the summit features of the marine shorelines in the Hudson and Connecticut valleys register the total Pleistocene uplift in those areas; and the same must be true of the deep valleys of New England that lie open to the sea. It also appears certain that the Hudson and Connecticut valleys could not rise independently of the regions east and west, except by great and conspicuous faulting. It seems theoretically proper to extend the isobasal lines of equal uplift westward across the whole of New York State and GENERAL STATEMENT 237 eastward into New England. The observational data and the calculated results confirm the theoretic unity of the larger territory. As the Labradorian glacier reached only to Staten Island, the ice-front recession through the Hudson-Champlain Valley represents all the time involved in the removal of the ice-sheet, not only from all of New York, .but from most or all of the Great Lakes area. The recession to Albany corresponds in time to the recession from Salamanca to Syracuse. The stages in the melting of the ice-sheet from New York have been shown in a series of maps published by the New York State Museum (119, plates 32-40; 125,. plates 9-17). We have in the Hudson-Champlain Valley a direct, complete, and evident record of the total amount of land uplift during Pleistocene time for all of New York and the region of the Great Lakes. Conversely, it is the record of the depth of submergence in the sea at the close of glacial time. Outside the sea-flooded area the record is not so clear or full. In the Erie and Ontario basins the tilted shorelines of the glacial lakes, when compared and their deformations added, give us approximate figures. The latest continuous beach of any particular lake registers only the deformation subsequent to the extinction of the lake. The uplifting which occurred during the life of the water body may be suggested by the shifting of outlets or by the splitting of beaches ; but these records are not always clear and the} r may be overlooked. Any possible uplift before the initiation of the lake will, of course, not be recorded in its beaches. However, if the land uplift in any particular district was subsequent to the un-icing of that locality, the glacial lakes which laved the receding glacier front evidently register the earliest rising of the land. Many years ago, in 1891, Mr. Upham made calculations, based on the several glacial lake shorelines in the Erie and Ontario basins, with remarkably accurate results (27, pages 261-262). This subject will be discussed later. ISOBASES The accompanying map, plate 10, shows in isobasal lines the total uplift of the land in Pleistocene time. Conversely, it shows the depres- sion when beneath the load of the Labradorian ice-cap. If the reader refers to the map and diagram in the former article (127, plates 10, 11), a difference will be noted between those maps and present map which needs explanation. In the former diagram (plate 10) the line representing the tilted uplift was drawn as a straight line, to be used as a datum plane, in the absence at that time of sufficient data to plot the line with its true curvature. In the sketch map (plate 11) the iso- 238 H. L. FAIRCHILD PLEISTOCENE UPLIFT OP NEW YORK bases were located in harmony with the datum plane and consequently were equally spaced. It must be understood that the "hinge line" can not be a true line, but is a belt of country ; or, in other words, the hinge is flexible and not a joint. The stationary or non-tilted surface must gradually blend into the uplifted area. In different expression, the tilted surface must slowly flatten out into the undisturbed area. This implies that the gradient, or rate of uplift, increases toward the north for some distance and must be drawn as a curving line. The isobases of lower value, from zero up, will be spaced further apart than those in the area of steeper tilting. In the present map the isobases are placed as accurately as the data permit, and it is believed that they are approximately correct. The isobases of 200 to 400 feet uplift are located at practically the same points as in the former map. The zero and 100-feet lines are carried southward, while those above 400 feet, in the region of steeper tilt, are more closely spaced, which carries them also to the south. The amount of Pleistocene submergence and subsequent uplift indi- cated on the present map for New York City district and also for the Champlain Valley are slightly more than in the former map. The isobases are drawn with inclination from the latitude parallels of 20°, 70° divergence from the meridians, which give them a curvature equal to their nearest parallels, on the projection of the map. Further knowledge and extension of the isobasal lines over larger territory, spe- cially eastward, may require some slight changes in position and spacing, and specially in curvature ; for somewhere, both west and east, the lines must bend into sharper curves to lie about the center of maximum uplift. The positions of the isobases of 200 to 500 feet were determined by comparison of marine summit phenomena in the Hudson and Connecti- cut valleys. The 100-feet line is located with special reference to the deformation in the Lake Erie basin. Leverett gives the amount of defor- mation of the Maumee beach at the Ohio-Pennsylvania boundary as 10 feet (100, page 739). At this point the later and lower Whittlesey beach has an altitude of 746 feet (100, page 756). A rise of 90 feet more, or to 836 feet, evidently gives the total uplift of 100 feet. This point on the Whittlesey shoreline is found about 9 miles east of Dunkirk and 2 miles north of Forestville and about 4 miles south of Silver Creek. This point, therefore, is taken for the location of the isobase of 100 feet. Drawn approximately parallel to the 200-feet isobase, it crosses the north boundary of New Jersey and intercepts the Hudson River 3 or 4 miles south of Tarrytown. Precise measurements of the marine plane in the lower Hudson will check this line. But in passing it may be noted that ISOBASES 239 Professor Salisbury says (97, page 203) : "On the whole, the evidence seems to favor the conclusion that the northwestern part of the State (New Jersey) was covered by standing water to the depth of 100 feet or more after the ice retreated, though this conclusion can not be regarded as beyond question. If this be correct, the area has risen a corresponding- amount since the ice melted." And F. J. H. Merrill gives the amount of uplift at Few York City as 80 feet, and at Peekskill as 120 feet (63, page 105), which accords with the map altitudes. In giving Croton Point as 100 feet, which is about 15 feet too low to harmonize with his other altitudes, he only made the common error of accepting the broad, conspicuous delta plains as the summit level. The zero isobase is drawn parallel with the 100-feet line so as to touch Ashtabula, Ohio, which point is given by Leverett as the locality where the Maumee and Whittlesey beaches lose horizontality (100, pages 755- 756). This position for the zero line accords precisely with Goldthwait's limit of horizontality of the early beaches in the Michigan Valley (108, page 465). These locations of the zero and 100-feet isobases, based on well-determined beach altitudes, gives the increased spacing required by theory. In the Whittlesey and Warren shorelines we have yet other checks, on higher altitudes farther north. Using Leverett's figures as far as Marilla, we find that the total uplift at that locality is 164 feet. As the isobases lie on the map, Marilla is estimated as between 162 and 165 feet. Pond triangulation station, 8 miles northwest of Batavia, is the highest point on the Warren beach, with altitude 887 feet (118, page 77). This is 32 feet higher than the same beach on the Marilla isobase, which gives us 196 feet for the uplift at Pond; and the point is just over the 200-feet isobase. When the several variable factors are considered, the corre- spondence of the isobases on the map with the field data is remarkably close. The only question which can be raised as to the validity of the isobases on the Hudson-Champlain meridian is whether they indicate the whole amount of Pleistocene uplift. They have been determined by study of the abundant shore phenomena practically continuous along both sides of the Hudson-Champlain and Connecticut valleys, and therefore they can not represent too great depression and uplift. The objection to the sea- level character of the waters has been on account of the deep submergence which the beaches imply. If the isobases do not represent the total land movement, it must be because some rising occurred in areas covered by the glacier, so that the 240 H. L. FAIRCHILD PLEISTOCENE UPLIFT OF NEW YORK waters were excluded ; and this raises the isostatic problem, the rate and manner of uplift during the waning of the ice-cap. No one is likely to hold the view that a large continental area would rise indifferent to the ice-load, or that the northward differential uplift occurred beneath the ice-body, for that would imply that the ice-bur- dened area rose faster than the unloaded region. The causal relation of the glacier to the land movement seems to be well grounded in geophy- sical philosophy. The alternative to such conception is that of a wave uplift responsive to the unloading. We can not postulate a small or local uplift immedi- ately at or beneath the edge of the ice-sheet. Some considerable depth of the earth's crust is involved, and time is required to establish the elastic reaction and isostatic movement and the flow of the deep-seated material. The uplift wave must be dilatory. If the earth wave of uplift ever overtook the receding glacier margin, the amount of rise there must have been very small as compared with the subsequent uplifting. All the facts from field study and all the philosophy based on them (largely suggested in the tabulated data, plate 11) lead to the conception of a wave uplift subsequent to the removal of the ice. The isobases almost certainly represent the total land uplift and will be so regarded in this paper. Marine Plane In the northern edge of the State the most critical locality is the Covey pass, the second outlet of Lake Iroquois. The summit marine level is there 740 feet. On either side of the salient, of which Covey Hill is the point, heavy gravel bars are found in close set series. On the east these stretch for miles south and north of Cannon Corners, in the northeast corner of the Mooers quadrangle. Woodworth saw and mapped part of these bars (103, map), but did not correlate them. The highest of these splendid cobble bars are about 4 miles southeast of Covey outlet and about a mile north of Cannon Corners, by the White school, with altitude 735 feet. On the west side of the promontory a fine display of cobble bars lies about 6 miles northeast of Chateaugay village, in the extreme north- east corner of the Chateaugay quadrangle, and three-fourths of a mile north of the Irish school and one-fourth mile south of the International Boundary monument, No. 70 6 A. The summit altitude of this series has not been determined with great precision, but it is 730 to 735 feet. As : bars, cliffs, or deltas, the marine shore is strongly developed in the Cha- teaugay district. It passes into Canada just west of Frontier and follows the land slope northeast, past the west end of the Covey outlet channel. MARINE PLANE 241 This shoreline of sealevel waters has been mapped at various points in the Saint Lawrence Valley, In the Ontario basin and upper Saint Lawrence it is represented by the Gilbert Gulf beaches, described in 1905 (117). The summit features of the marine shore are now traced in practical continuity the whole length of both sides of the Hudson-Cham- plain Valley, about the Covey Hill salient, and through the Saint Law- rence-Ontario Valley until they pass beneath the waters of Lake Ontario near Oswego (117, page 714). The remarkable series of heavy gravel bars which lie at 525 feet above Covey Hill salient, passing near Covey Hill Post- Office, and through Maritana and Franklin Center, reentering New York at Boyds Lines, represents a relative pause in the rising of the land. This beach series is over 200 feet below the summit plane of the sealevel waters. West of Plattsburg this lower beach series disappears, while the Cannon Corners, the summit series, is remarkably heavy, and is represented by shore phenomena the whole length of the Champlain- Hudson Valley, on both sides. On the north face of Covey Hill the sum- mit marine plane is poorly represented, for the reason that the upper slope had been swept bare by the heavy ice-border drainage of the doAvn- draining Iroquois, so that little material was left on the slope for the construction of bars, and because the work of the waves and currents on the salient was erosional and not constructional. The Cannon Corners beaches are on extensive tracts of cobble delta which were built in the sealevel waters by the latest outflow, around Covey Hill, of the lowering Iroquois waters. This stretch of delta lies along the east edge of a broad belt of bare Potsdam sandstone, the "Staf- ford" and "Blackman" rocks, which were swept clean by the stream-flow. The relation of the lowest distributary channels on these deltas to the cobble beaches helps to determine the altitude of the standing water, which is taken as 740 feet at the Cbvey channel. Because of the critical relation of the marine plane to the latest level of Iroquois an isobase of 740 feet is drawn through the Covey outlet. The isobases of 600 and 700 feet are given theoretical positions, but in good accordance with abundant data on both the New York and Vermont sides of the Cham- plain Valley. 2 No attempt is made to locate the 800-feet isobase, but this may be done after examination of the marine summit in the north edge of Vermont. It seems certain that the sealevel waters passed over the top of Mount Royal, at Montreal. 2 The detailed descriptions and mapping of the marine and Iroquois phenomena will be given in publications of the New York State Museum and the Vermont Geological Survey. 242 H. L. FAIRCHILD PLEISTOCENE UPLIFT OP NEW YORK It is possible that the gradient of the warped surface may decrease north of New York, and that in the Champlain Valley we have the steepest portion of the upslope. Precise determination of the summit features in the north edge of Vermont, New Hampshire, Maine, and east- ward will throw light on this problem. For several reasons which may not be discussed here, the inscriptions left by the highest waters may be very weak and difficult to trace, but the common mistake should be avoided of regarding the upper conspicuous features as necessarily the summit level. Iroquois Plane In the Hudson-Champlain Valley the marine plane is shown by the isobases, but not in the Saint Lawrence and Ontario basin. In the south part of the latter area considerable rise occurred before the sealevel waters were admitted. The isobases in this area represent not only the later uplift out of the sealevel waters, but also the rise during the previous episode, the life of Lake Iroquois. In the relation of the Iroquois to the marine level is found the key to very interesting facts. As far north as the Watertown district the Iroquois shore has long been known, being traced and measured by Spencer (43) and Gilbert (36) and in later years by the writer (114). In recent years Ohadwick and the writer have located Iroquois beaches at several points to the northeast, and we now have approximate altitudes of the shoreline clear to Covey hollow, the second and final outlet of the ancient lake. The Chateaugay and Churubusco sheets of the topographic maps cover the last 20 miles of the shoreline in New York, while the remaining 3 miles lie in Canada, covered by the Chateaugay sheet of the Canadian government. Very definite features are found close to the boundary line, at 1,025 feet, and the water surface at Covey outlet is regarded as 1,030 feet. The relation in altitude of the two outlets of Iroquois, Pome and Covey, was very close, if not practically identical. If the waters under control by the Pome outlet reached the Covey Pass decidedly higher than the latter, we should expect some record of river flow on the south slope of the pass, but such has not been found. Moreover, in such case a drop in the water level should be recorded in the beaches of the lake shore; but the beach along the south shore and west end of the basin is a unit and seems to have been formed in rising water. It is barely possible that' the control of the earliest flow through the Covey Pass was not at the pass, but around on the east side of the highland, in the region of the Altonabare rocks. It is probable that the Covey Valley originally held some filling of glacial drift which the Iroquois outflow had to remove in IKOQUOIS PLANE 243 order to establish the channel as we find it. For reasons that will appear later in this writing, it seems quite certain that there was no appreciable land uplift in the Covey district, while the Covey outlet was effective; but any considerable rise would have thrown the outflow back on the Rome outlet. These questions are subjects for future intensive study. But even now it seems clear that there could not have been great differ- ence between the altitudes of the two outlets, and that the highest beach south of the Rome isobase and the latest beach in all the basin correlates with the Covey outlet and practically with the Rome outlet also. When the former is described and illustrated, it will be seen that it carried the pre-Saint Lawrence flood long enough to establish its shoreline. The Covey outflow persisted while the front of the glacier rested against the north and east faces of Covey Hill at a height above 1,030 feet. While the ice-front was receding, on the north-facing slope, from 1,030 down to 740 feet, the sub-Iroquois outflow was scouring the slope between those altitudes. In horizontal distance on the northeast face of Covey Hill the drop from 1,030 to 740 feet is only about one-half mile. How long time did this bit of ice-front recession consume? i\.nd how much uplift of the district occurred during this episode ? Relatively, the time must have been brief, and if there was any rising of the land at all it was so small that we may consider it negligible in our calculations. Altitudes and warping in the Ontario Basin It is believed that the time interval between the abandonment of the Covey outlet and the establishment of the marine level in the Ontario basin was relatively so short that the land uplift at Covey outlet during that brief time is negligible as compared with the total uplift. With this admission, it follows that the vertical interval everywhere in the Ontario- Saint Lawrence depression between the Iroquois and the marine planes is 290 feet (1,030 minus 740). This uniform interval throughout the basin provides us with a master key to the amount of deformation during two time episodes — Glacial (Iroquois) time and post-Glacia] (post-Iro- quois) time. Wherever in the Lake Iroquois area we can find the alti- tude of either the Iroquois or the marine plane, we can calculate the other one. The marine or sealevel altitude in the Ontario basin represents the amount of post-Iroquois uplift. By subtracting this from the total up- lift, as indicated in the map of isobases, we determine, for that point in space, the amount of uplift previous to the extinction of Iroquois, which is Glacial time for New York; and the total uplift, the isobasal value, subtracted from the present altitude of the point, gives us the height of that point above the ocean before the uplifting began. 244 H. L. FAIRCHILD PLEISTOCENE UPLIFT OP NEW YORK The table, plate 11, gives examples of the above analysis. Comparison of this table with the map of isobases brings out clearly some very inter- esting and important data. It appears that Hamilton, Ontario, at the extreme west end of Lake Iroquois, received during Glacial time more than half of its total uplift. The same is true of Eome, the southeastern extremity of the lake and the main outlet; and these two points, Eome and Hamilton, were the first to be relieved of the ice burden. At Lewis- ton the glacial uplift was just half the total, while between Lewiston and Eome, the most southerly stretch of the Iroquois shore, but somewhat longer beneath the ice load than the east and west points, the glacial uplift was less than the post-Iroquois rise. It will be seen that Eome was the point of largest Glacial uplift and of the lowest initial altitude. From Eome northward the Glacial uplift was small, declining to zero near the Canadian boundary, where all the rise seems to have taken place after the marine level was established in the Saint Lawrence Valley. These figures appear to prove that the New York area did not rise as a rigid body, but that the uplifting was a wavelike movement, following the removal of the waning ice-sheet, as long ago suggested by Upham (31). The low initial attitude of Eome agrees with the requirement for the early glacial drainage, for the earliest ice-border streams in central New York passed east to the Mohawk-Hudson by channels at Syracuse which today, after uplifting and Iroquois silting, are less than 400 feet above tide (115, 119). The Schenectady- Albany district was beneath the sea down to much later time, though some uplift occurred in Iroquois time, as proved by directions of Iromohawk flow beyond Schenectady, described by J. H. Stoller (112). The tabulated data studied in connection with the map shows that dif- ferent portions of the large area had different up-movements. About the east end of the Ontario basin the post-Iroquois uplift was steepest in a northerly direction, due to the later and more rapid rise of the Canadian area. This partly accounts for the steep gradient on the Iroquois shore north of the fulcral line. In applying the mathematics of the table to any particular locality it must be understood that the figures apply to the particular point taken for Iroquois or for marine altitude ; for example, the figures for Hamilton, Ontario, are for the summit of the Iroquois bar. The initial altitude of the city of Hamilton would be calculated by comparison of its altitude with the summit of the great gravel ridge of Iroquois. Eome is a more complex example. The altitude taken is the crests of the beaches south- west of the city — 460 feet. The lowest part of the col or wasteweir of BULL. GEOL. SOC. AM. VOL. 27, 1915, PL. 11 Canada Localities. o 2 o •a in e c to 3 696 738 290 290 406 448 24 2 430 450 25 6 266 288 696 738 Present altitude of Iroquois Extinction altitude of Iroquois Post-Iroquois uplift. . \ Present marine plane / ■Glacial uplift, before Iroquois extinction Total uplift, by isobases Rise of Iroquois level due to flooding . . Initial altitude Present altitude of Iroquois 362 I 290 II 72 + 98 170 + 32 + 110 II 362 434 290 144 106 250 74 no 434 557 290 267 83 350 5. • 207 557 632 290 342 53 395 55 237 632 676 682 290 290 386 392 39 33 425 425 36 9 251 257 676 682 New Yokk Localities 22 gO rt n c a S < | edS « 565 603 650 671 ? 290 290 290 290 ? 275 313 360 381 ? 115 102 85 69 •? 390 415 445 450 ? 38 42 51 62 35 172 188 205 221 ? 565 603 650 671 ? Present altitude of Iroquois Extinction altitude of Iroquois Post-Iroquois uplift. . \ Present marine plane ) Glacial uplift, before Iroquois extinction Total uplift, by isobases . Rise of Iroquois level due to flooding. . . Initial altitude Present altitude of Iroquois 362 385 290 290 II 72 95 + 98 95 II 170 190 + 82 85 + 110 110 II 362 385 430 290 140 105 245 75 110 430 440 440 456 290 290 290 150 150 166 no 110 114 250 260 280 80 70 66 110 110 no 440 440 456 452 2S0 162 143 305 37 110 452 460 290 170 180 350 Splitting) - of (-0 beaches. ) 110 460 544 290 254 121 375 22 169 544 860 900 290 290 570 610 25 10 595 620 9 9 265 280 860 900 980 290 690 5 695 ? 285 980 1,015 29Q 725 725 290 1,015 1,030 290 740 740 290 1,030 PLEISTOCENE DEFORMATION OF THE ONTARIO BASIN Altitude figures refer to ocean level. The figures in heavy face are field measurements ALTITUDES AND WARPING IN THE ONTARIO BASIN 245 the ancient stream head is about 430 feet. Hence the initial altitude of that point would be 110 feet minus 30, or 80 feet. But this must not be regarded as the height of the divide and channel head in pre-Iroquois time, for it is quite certain that the Home district has been buried under delta filling by the glacial drainage from the north (125), and that the original land surface was much below 80 feet altitude. It is thought that the earliest control of glacial stream-flow was at Little Falls, 36 miles southeast of Rome. Three classes of figures in the table are derived figures — those for the two periods of land uplift and those for the amount of flooding by Iroquois waters. These are all based on (1) the fixed vertical interval between the Iroquois and Gilbert Gulf planes and (2) the isobases of total uplift, taken in multiples of 5 feet. The first of these basic ele- ments can not be seriously changed, and any possible change will affect all stations alike. Any modification of the isobases will change the de- rived figures locally. However, with all reasonable allowance for errors, the data show striking coherence and unity and close agreement with all present knowledge and philosophy. Outlet Control — Splitting of Beaches The altitude of the water surface of Lake Iroquois was controlled by the height of 'the outlet, which, up to the closing episode, was at Borne. It appears that Borne had the greatest amount of uplift during Iroquois time of any point in the basin and was probably the point that was earliest in an area of rising land. There may be suggestion of detrital or delta filling at the outlet to account for some part of the uplifting at Borne. Heavy glacial drainage from the north poured vast quantity of detritus into the Mohawk Valley between Borne and Little Falls during much of the lifetime of Iroquois. (For discussion of this see 116, page 34; page 38.) It seems probable, however, that the great Glaciomohawk Biver and its successor, the Iromohawk, were not effectively dammed by the tribu- tary filling to any greater extent than to establish sufficient grade over the filling that perhaps extended to the rock channel at Little Falls. The point of outflow or head of the river flow may have shifted westward, with some increase in height; but to whatever amount the Iroquois plane was raised by choking of the Borne outlet, it simply reduces by that much the 180 feet of glacial lifting at that point without in any way affecting the figures for any other locality. The calculations in the table are based on the water planes, and the cause of changes in the Iroquois level does not modify the consequences of such changes, 246 H. L. FAIRCHILD PLEISTOCENE UPLIFT OF NEW YORK In 1902 the writer published a description of the Iroquois beaches ex- tending from Richland to Watertown Center, with maps, profiles, and table (114, pages 106-112). In that stretch of splendid beaches con- spicuous from the Rome, Ogclensburg and Watertown Eailroad, the gravel bars are spaced through considerable vertical range, up to 50 feet at Watertown Center and to 77 feet at the Farr farm, 3 miles east of Water-, town, the point used in the accompanying map and table. It has been the theory of students of the glacial lakes phenomena that the differential uplift of a basin should produce splitting of the bars by the relative lowering of the water level north of the fulcral line, the isobasal line passing through the outlet. It was expected that the vertical spacing of the Iroquois beaches would increase steadily to the northward. This expectation was not realized. Prom Richland to Watertown Center, 28 miles by the shore, the bars exhibit no consistent or harmonious rela- tion and no decided increase in vertical range, though the stretch of shore is decidedly tilted as a whole. Four miles farther to the northeast the range at Farrs is 77 feet. From there northward, so far as our detached figures show, the vertical range of bars decreases, and toward the north edge of the State the beach becomes simple. This discordance with our theories has been something of a puzzle ; but now, in the light of the tabulation and the facts of this paper, the explanation seems clear. The Richland- Watertown series of .bars registers a local wavelike land uplift just before the extinction of Iroquois and before any recorded rising of the land occurred at Covey outlet. During the life of Iroquois the Rome outlet had been rising and the water level in correspondence. Eventually the ice-body had been so long and so far removed from the upper Saint Lawrence Valley and the Adirondack mass that relatively rapid uplift began in the Watertown district and the land uplift exceeded the rise of the water level by the amount of splitting recorded in the Watertown beaches. The latest or extinction water level at Farrs is taken as 671 feet, after much study of the matter in the field and office. The summit of the bar series is 733 feet, which makes the amount of splitting of the bars, the uplift out of Iroquois waters, 62 feet. The tabulation gives the glacial uplift at Farrs as 69 feet. When the Covey outlet became effective the rising of the Iroquois water level practically ceased, as that district was not lifted until after the extinction of Iroquois. The stationary attitude of the Iroquois water gave the Watertown wave of land uplift the chance to slowly rise out of the waters and produce the series of beaches. Between Rome and Richlaud the Iroquois shore has not been mapped, it lying in a drumlin area, but must be examined with reference to this SPLITTING OF BEACHES 247 question. It is predicted that some splitting of bars, increasing north- ward, will be found. Between AYatertown and Mai one precise data have not been sought, but about 12 miles south of Canton, near Russell, Pro- fessor Chadwick and the writer measured with aneroid a strong set of Iroquois bars having a vertical range of at least 35 feet. The figures for Canadian points, from Professor Coleman, show that the glacial uplift declines northward, and the vertical range of bars, as measured in the field, has remarkable agreement with the theoretic derived figures. The Iroquois altitude for West Huntingdon is probably too high. It should be noted, as an illustration of the wave uplift, that during Glacial time Rome was lifted 111 feet more than Parrs, but that during post-Iroquois time Parrs rose 211 feet more than Rome. This gives Parrs a net excess of 100 feet, the difference shown by the isobases. In summarizing this topic, it may be said that south of the Rome or fulcral line all the beach phenomena seem to be an effect of rising water ; that the splitting of beaches north of the fulcral line declines in amount or vertical range both north and south of Watertown; that the tabulated figures for Canadian points show similar relation, and that .the splitting is clue to later local land uplift, which probably occurred while the lake outlet was at Covey Pass. This topic is further discussed below. Flooding of the south Shore of Iroquois The southern shore of Lake Iroquois has the characters which are pro- duced by a rising water level. The rise of the lake surface was evidently caused by the excessive lifting or differential uplift of the outlet at Rome. Probably the most striking feature produced by the rising water is the huge gravel bar at Hamilton, Ontario. This has been described by Cole- man (95, pages 351-352), who implies that the flooding was toward 100 feet. Turning to our table, we find that while Rome was lifted 180 feet, Hamilton was raised only 98 feet, and that consequently that point must have been flooded 82 feet. It is more than mere singular coincidence that 83 feet is the depth in the Hamilton bar at which "unworn Mammoth remains" (95, page 352) were found. By similar calculation the amount of flooding may be determined at all points. It is estimated that the flooding in the Rochester district was about 70 feet and at Syracuse 45 feet. To determine the altitude of the initial water surface at any point on the south-shore beaches, we deduct the amount of flooding, plus the amount of total uplift, from the present height of that point. For ex- ample, at Hamilton the total uplift, as figured from the isobases of the map, is 170 feet; the flooding is 82 feet. The sum of these deducted 248 H. L. FAIRCHILD PLEISTOCENE UPLIFT OF NEW YORK from 362, the present altitude, gives 110 feet, It will be noted that this is the initial altitude of the Iroquois plane at Eome. All points of the flooded area south of the fulcra! line will give the same initial altitude, since they are derived figures ; but, of course, the original water level was everywhere the same as the outlet. Checks and Proofs Several matters already presented in this paper fall properly under this topic, but will not be repeated. There remains, however, a significant coincidence which requires notice. The direction of the isobases of the map was determined, as stated above, by comparison of the summit features of the marine waters in the Hudson and the Connecticut valleys, and they indicate the total uplift during Pleistocene time. It is an interesting and important fact that Professor Coleman found precisely the same direction for the lines of equal Iroquois uplift in the Ontario basin (95, page 363) . Yet the rising movement discussed by Coleman belongs to only the later part of the Pleistocene. Another coincidence is that Coleman drew his fulcra! line of the Iroquois uplift through Quays and Eome, which is the precise loca- tion of our isobase of 350 feet total uplift. If this is mere accidental coincidence, it is quite remarkable ; but if it rests on verities in the sequence of geologic events, it implies a true philosophy. At first glance the figures of the table show decided lack of harmony. Quays is 557 feet above tide today, while Rome is only 460. While Eome was rising in Glacial time 180 feet, Quays rose only 83 feet; but in post- Iroquois time Quays rose 267 feet to Rome's 170 feet. How is it that these two points, with such diverse uplift figures, can lie on the fulcra! line of Iroquois tilting? Evidently they did not for the whole of Iro- quois time. By plotting the data in a diagram the solution is suggested. Quays was under the ice-sheet for a long time after Iroquois waters occu- pied the southern portion of the basin, and during that time no uplift occurred at Quays. When the land finally began to rise at Quays it had already lifted 97 feet at Eome, and the water level stood at 207 feet. From that time onward the two points lifted in comparative unison for 83 feet, or up to 290 feet, the height of Iroquois extinction. Now it should be noted that the table shows that the present uplifted plane of Iroquois started at 110 feet above tide at Eome and 207 feet at Quays. Again, it may be emphasized that the key to all such calculations is found in the fixed vertical interval between the Iroquois and the marine planes, taken in conjunction with the isobases of total uplift. If either of these elements were wrong, the results would not agree with the facts of observation. Students of the Pleistocene may find other ways of test- CHECKS AND PROOFS 249 ing these figures. It is believed that the data given in the table harmonize the field data and clarify our knowledge of the Pleistocene water planes in New York, and that further study in the areas not yet mapped will confirm these figures. One of the most significant proofs of the correctness of the philosophy of this paper is the remarkable coincidence of the derived figures for the amount of Glacial time uplift north of the fulcral line with the actual amount as indicated by the bar spacing found in the field. This is de- scribed in the next chapter. Relation- of Land Uplift to the Ice Body The broad relationship of the Labradorian glacier, in both extent and thickness, to the area and the amount of Pleistocene uplift of the land has long been recognized. The results of the present study, specially shown in the tabulated data, strikingly emphasize the causal relationship of the weight of the ice-body to the land movement. In the previous chapter it was shown that the two points in the Iro- quois area which were earliest relieved of the ice burden, Hamilton and Rome, experienced the largest amount of uplift, relative to the total rise, during Glacial (Iroquois) time, it being more than half. Passing north from Rome, the amount of Glacial uplift decreases rapidly, and at Water- town it is only one-seventh of the total. Farther north it decreases to zero at Chateaugay and Covey outlet. These facts will be used later (see pages 251-252). The beaches in Canada show similar relations. Toronto, on the same isobase as Greece, with about the same relation to the ice-body, has sim- ilar figures, the Glacial uplift being two-fifths of the total. But Quays, on the same isobase as Rome, but much longer under the ice-body, received less than one-fourth of its rise in Glacial time. The district north from Quays shows declining Glacial rise and greater post-Glacial, similar to northern New York. Some of these figures from Professor Coleman are possibly subject to slight correction (95, page 356), but the significant facts will stand. These facts are all in agreement with our knowledge of the form and mass of the waning ice-sheet during its slow removal from New York. An attempt to exhibit several phases in the ice removal has been made by the writer in a series of maps (119, plates 34-42 ; 125, plates 9-17) . From the data already in hand it seems certain that the Iroquois basin was not lifted as a rigid mass, but by a wave movement. The south side of the basin was given (on the average) only one-half of its total rise during Iroquois time. The northern portion was lifted very little, and the far north portion not at all, until Gilbert Gulf and later time. XIX — Bull. Geol. Soc. Am., Vol. 27, X915 250 H. L. FAIRCHILD PLEISTOCENE UPLIFT OP NEW YORK All the phenomena described in this paper and the facts relating to land nplift are explained best on the theory that the rise of the land did not begin in any district until after the ice-sheet was removed from the region, and perhaps far removed. In common with other geologists, the writer has formerly assumed that some land uplift took place beneath at least the border of the waning ice-sheet. This older view requires that a large land area should lift with considerable rigidity quite promptly after the ice load was only partly reduced, or else that a smaller wave movement should folloAV very quickly. If the rising of the land surface several hundred feet may be produced only by the inflowage of the interior, plastic magma beneath the area of diminished weight, it must be a very slow process, and we should expect that it would lag far behind the release of pressure ; and it would also seem most probable that the uplift would be wavelike instead of the rigid lifting of a large area. It is a question, or balancing, of the relative rate of the melting of the glacier and of the restoration of isostatic equilibrium. It will be conceded that no uplift would begin in the region of the terminal moraine until release of weight began, which means not until the ice-front had receded; so it is a question if the land uplift will ever overtake the ice-front recession. One might conceive that subsequent to the long time removal of the ice burden from a district some far readvance of the edge of the ice-sheet might lie on rising ground, but such great readvance after the glacial waning was well established and sufficient to produce isostatic uplift seems improbable. It will not be held that when uplift began it simultaneously involved the entire great area buried under the ice-cap, unless the rising was very dilatory, because the waning of the continental glacier must have been around the borders for a long time before there was any ablation of the ice-cap and reduction of weight over the central area. The only alter- native is wave uplift, and the question is, therefore, as to the character of the wave, its breadth, and its time relation to the ice-margin. We have some facts bearing on both elements of the problem. First, as to the time relation. Certainly the Few York City district did not rise at all until the ice was gone, for not until the ice-margin had withdrawn considerable distance was there any effective reduction of weight. Did the wave uplift ever overtake the receding ice-front up the Hudson Valley? All the evidence is negative. In the Schenectady dis- trict we have positive proof that the land uplift did not overtake the glacier. For a very long time after the Schenectady- Albany district was under the sealevel waters the Glaciomohawk and Iromohawk rivers were building the great delta with its apex at Schenectady and the spreading flow southeastward. When the uplift finally began the river, blocked by RELATION OF LAND UPLIFT TO ICE BODY 251 its own deposits, was diverted northward toward Ballston and Saratoga. The flow in this direction continued for another long episode, sufficient to build the broad sand plains west and south of Saratoga Lake and about Schuylerville. Eventually the differential uplift lifted the Saratoga dis- trict faster than the Schenectady district, and the river was thrown back into its present eastward course toward Cahoes. In the Ontario basin we find interesting and convincing data. The facts shown in the tabulation, plate 11, and already briefly discussed (page 244), clearly indicate that the rise of areas north of the Iroquois fulcral line took place under Iroquois waters and not under the ice-sheet, because in the "splitting of beaches" the vertical spacing of the abandoned bars in Canada and in New York north of Watertown gives a vertical range of lowering water level equal to the whole Glacial uplift before Iroquois extinction ; and the amount of glacial uplifting steadily decreases north- ward instead of increasing, while the latter would have been the case if the land uptilting had been in progress during the recession of the ice- front. This matter is important as a check on our theory. The figures for the spacing of Iroquois bars north of the Rome isobase, the fulcral line, are entirely independent of all the derived figures in the tabulated data. The amount of beach splitting is field measurement alread}*' on record in publications. It is the height of the summit bar above the latest and lowest water plane, which is the one used in the analytic tabu- lation. The close coincidence between the amount of beach splitting and the Glacial uplift in Canada is very significant. Following is the com- parison : New York points: Glacial uplift, ^^.f^ Rome 180 Richland 121 22 Lacona 115 38 Adams 102 42 Brookside 85 51 Watertown 69 62 Russell ? 35 Canton 25 ? Potsdam 10 ? Malone 5 ? Chateaugay Covey Canada points : Quays 83 Trenton 53 55 Oak Hill 39 36 Havelock 33 ? Madoc 24 25 West Huntingdon 2 6 252 H. L. FAIRCHILD PLEISTOCENE UPLIFT OF NEW YORK No way has been found of explaining these figures except by a local wave uplift in the Watertown-Trent River region while under Iroquois waters which were comparatively stationary. If uplift had been in prog- ress while ice lay over the Covey district and Iroquois waters laved the ice-front, then some vertical spacing of the bars would have continued northward to the Covey outlet. Any uplift, even after Covey Pass was opened, would have thrown the outflow back to Rome and still produce splitting of beaches at Covey. The figures appear to prove two things — a wave uplift subsequent to the ice-retreat and the total uplift value of the isobases in the map. The Canadian points, measured by Professor Coleman, lie in about the same isobasal belt as Watertown and exhibit similar movement, but show less Glacial uplift, evidently because of the longer halt of the glacier over the Ottawa lowland and the belated uplift (125, plate 17). Evidence has already been given to show that Quays did not rise at all until after it was immersed in Iroquois water. Second, as to the dimensions of the earth wave. While the Watertown district was rising, the Iroquois water level appears to have been com- paratively stationary. Any considerable rise at Covey outlet would have thrown the outflow back to Rome, in which case lower bars would have been formed in the Covey district, inferior to the Covey outlet. It ap- pears, therefore, that the district of rapid wave uplift must have been limited by the distance between the two outlets. The distance between the Rome and Covey isobases is 142 miles. North of Malone there was very little uplifting, which cuts off about 17 miles. This leaves a breadth transverse to the earth wave of 125 miles. The Canadian data are at present supplied by only a relatively small area in the district of Trent River, which seems to represent the north slope of the earth wave, and thus correlating with the Malone-Covey district. Parallel with the ice border the wave might have indefinite extent, and no facts are at hand relating to that. The height of the earth billow at Watertown — that is to say, the uplift in excess of any synchronous rise of the Iroquois water level — is not over 70 feet. With a horizontal amplitude of 100 to 125 miles, this vertical movement may be regarded as a very moderate undulation of the earth's zone of rigidity, and as far within the possible theoretic limits. It seems probable that the earth wave, of the sort here discussed, was only the beginning of the uplift movement, merely the first effect of the local relief of pressure, and that it was promptly succeeded by or resolved into a general lifting movement that involved the whole depressed area 1- In V> ' «_ V "* **- ' ■•''* ■'• ■"■■*•; ■>■ ■ if) . • \ ..- -"" J 3 " ""-'1 \ \ -—■-"""" \. / 1 .. o 3 (; : ---KMmkf^ Q : "" r . '~~t~""T4 I Jf^'Ml^l % '%% \~\» / s/ — — 4^ P f- \ \|WlpW|i a i v P -* Wim'^ M ■' ' 1 1 ^4c /i /°^1/ / '^- if 5 **v ^t *\ Vt' f i °io — — - — ~~ / / ^^ / ^ 1 V 'ft / -1 ife > "SVf* ^° i ^ 1 . s° ' r- ■■'//: A i |W ¥ | irf^l "'■// '/. rmtm Mf% • III 1 If l A » 1 *= 1 1 •? / T-i^- "1 i " |\ t~~ // lit r\n^/\«i '£ f'^ ^ N «r ^ 1 1 1 / ll~ / --! v 1| w lf ! i * f- II // / / / / / !' A**^ a i±JLJ ! 5? 5 i i/ff/jjVf^ CO 4 ..— f/m/fm^Wi CO J in s M'-./j ./ 7 J ^U / ■ ~ 1 j^l 1° k ! / «o i ; ' CO it Oil' I ., 1 \ ijAt-s = / . , J* 1 ?• - .< » l/ \a [ 0" <0 r-| v- c « Q o- »~ m m — "J- ■ «*• * . ■■:■■;■' Figure 2. — Broad Pleistocene Valley or the Yellowstone River, looking east through the Valley toward the Little Missouri River, western McKenzie County, North Dakota. OLD PLEISTOCENE VALLEYS IN WESTERN NORTH DAKOTA AGE OF MISSOURI RIVER VALLEY 299 boulders, which lies just above river level, is at least 12 to 14 feet thick and extends along the water's edge for a distance of 100 yards, while scattered boulders and ferruginous gravel occur at intervals for another 200 yards. Overlying the boulders are 15 feet of gravel. While some of the boulders of this deposit may have been brought here by floating ice, it is probable that most of the deposit was left here by the pre-Wisconsin ice-sheet when it advanced south of the river. The finer materials of the drift, if they were ever present, have been carried away, leaving the gravel and boulders. Pleistocene Yalley of Missouri and Yellowstone Rivers But while the Missouri Eiver probably occupied its present valley for a considerable time prior to the Glacial period, the ice-sheet, when it invaded the region, blocked the valleys of both the Missouri and Yellow- stone rivers and also the preglacial valley of the Little Missouri, forcing these streams to seek new channels. Lakes were formed in the valleys of the Yellowstone and Little Missouri rivers, the water rising until it over- flowed the divide between the latter and the Knife Eiver south of the Killdeer Mountains. The combined waters of the three rivers flowed east across Dunn County and southeast across Morton to the mouth of the Cannon Ball Eiver. The valley thus formed crosses the divide between the Knife and Heart rivers and also that between the Heart and Cannon Ball. The length of this Pleistocene valley of the Yellowstone and Mis- souri rivers from the head of the Knife to the mouth of the Cannon Ball is 155 miles. It is followed for 30 miles by the Northern Pacific Eailroad between Almont and Hebron, this portion of the valley being today occu- pied by Curlew Creek (figure 1, plate 14). The Heart Eiver follows the valley for 6 to 8 miles below the mouth of Curlew Creek, and the broad depression continues its southeasterly course through the divide to the Cannon Ball, being followed for many miles by Louse Creek, a tributary of the Cannon Ball. Two broad valleys connect the Knife Eiver Valley with that of Curlew Creek. One enters the latter valley between 3 and 4 miles below Glen Ullin and is followed by the northward flowing Elm Creek throughout a portion of its extent. Between the latter and the tributary of Curlew Creek the valley bottom is occupied in part by a hay marsh. The other valley, which joins that of Curlew Creek just below Hebron, is known as Farmers Valley and extends to the head of Deep Creek, a tributary of Knife Eiver. 300 A. G. LEONARD DRAINAGE CHANGES IN NORTH DAKOTA It will be noted that the Knife, Heart, and Cannon Ball rivers, to- gether with several of their tributaries, now occupy parts of this old Pleistocene valley of the Missouri and Yellowstone rivers. The valley is clearly much too large to have been formed by several of the streams which today flow through it, such as Curlew, Elm, or Louse creeks, and some portions now have no stream. Throughout much of its course the old valley has a broad, flat bottom one-half to one mile and more wide, with gently sloping sides. Pleistocene Valleys of the Yellowstone Eiver The lower 50 miles of the Yellowstone Valley was blocked with ice during the Glacial period and the river was forced to seek a new channel. Its waters flowed east to the valley of the Little Missouri and formed at least two broad, flat-bottomed valleys connecting these streams. The most northerly of these old valleys, which is 28 miles long, is now occu- pied by the northwestward flowing Benny Pierre Creek, a tributary of the Yellowstone, and by the eastward flowing Hay Draw Creek, a tribu- tary of the Little Missouri (figure 2, plate 14). The second valley has a northeasterly course, is about 32 miles long, and joins the first about 10 miles above its junction with the Little Mis- souri. That portion of the Benny Pierre-Hay Draw Valley floor which forms the low, flat, almost imperceptible divide between the Yellowstone and Little Missouri drainage systems has an elevation of 185 feet above the latter river, or about 2,209 feet above sealevel. The valley is bor- dered on either side by high, steep bluffs and the level plain forming its broad bottom is nearly a mile wide. This great trench was clearly occu- pied at one time by a stream many times larger than those now having possession of it. Preglacial Valley of the Little Missouri Eiver The Little Missouri, as well as the Yellowstone and Missouri rivers, was forced out of its preglacial valley by the ice-sheet. The lower 55 miles of this valley was filled with ice, so that a lake was formed back of the glacial barrier, the water rising and overflowing to the east by way of the old valley previously described as occupied by the Missouri and Yel- lowstone rivers during the Pleistocene period. The abandoned valley of the preglacial Little Missouri was first men- PREGLACTAL VALLEY OF LITTLE MISSOURI RIVER 301 tionecl by Wilder, 6 who saw one end of it in 1903, but its course was not explored. During the summer of 1914 this old valley was mapped in detail by the writer and a line of levels was run from the south edge of the Eay quadrangle to the Little Missouri Elver. The valley extends from the mouth of Bowling Creek north and east to the Missouri Eiver at the mouth of Tobacco Garden Creek, a distance measured along the axis of the valley of 55 miles. Its bottom varies in width from half a mile to one and three-quarters miles and throughout much of its course it is a mile or more wide. Two very low and inconspicuous divides are present in this valley, one between Tobacco Garden and Cherry creeks and another between Cherry and Eedwing creeks. The former is between 3 and 4 miles north of Schafer, where the divide is less than 20 feet above Cherry Creek. Even more flat is the divide separating the headwaters of Cherry from those of Eedwing Creek, which is located about two miles south of Elsworth. For a distance of 3 to 4 miles along the valley floor the elevation does not vary more than 4 or 5 feet, and so flat is this interstream area in the old valley that the water does not run off after a rain, but stands on the surface until it sinks into the ground or evaporates. The present divide between Eedwing and Bowling creeks constitutes the highest point in the old river valley. Its elevation is 2,191 feet above sealevel, or 177 feet above the Little Missouri at the mouth of Bowling Creek. In that portion now occupied by Cherry Creek the average slope of the valley floor is 7.4 feet per mile for a distance of 20 miles, while in that portion occupied by Tobacco Garden Creek the slope averages 5.5 feet per mile. Abnormal Drainage Features of Little Missouri Tributaries The upper valleys of both Squaw and Eedwing creeks open out into this preglacial valley of the Little Missouri, so that the floors of these valleys tributary to the Little Missouri are continuous with the broad flats of Cherry Creek. The explanation of this peculiarity, in the case of Eedwing Creek, is found in the fact that this youthful and vigorous stream, with a fall of 23 feet per mile, has worked its way back by head- ward erosion and taken possession of a portion of the flats forming the The lignite of North Dakota and its relation to irrigation. Water Supply and Irri- gation Paper No. 117, U. S. Geol. Surv., p. 43 ; also Third Biennial Report, North Dakota Geol. Surv., map, p. 16. 302 A. G. LEONARD DRAINAGE CHANGES IN NORTH DAKOTA old valley floor, so that now the tributaries of Kedwing Creek meander over the flats in shallow trenches cut in the valley plain. That portion of Squaw Creek above the sharp bend was formerly a tributary of the Little Missouri when it occupied the old valley. But in postglacial time the young and vigorous Squaw Creek, which is now tribu- tary to the Little Missouri of today, with a fall of about 22 feet per mile, worked its way back until it captured the northward flowing tributary of the preglacial river and diverted the waters to the south, thus forming the sharp bend in the present course of Squaw Creek. The abnormal features of the Cherry Creek drainage are even more striking than those of Kedwing Creek. The upper valley from Elsworth to the bend several miles north of Schafer is broad, the valley floor being in many places from one to one and one-half miles wide; the side slopes are for the most part gentle, and the rather numerous tributaries enter by broad, flat-bottomed valleys. In contrast to this the lower valley is comparatively narrow, from one-quarter to one-half mile wide, and the side walls are quite steep. In its upper course the creek has an average fall of 7.4 feet per mile, while below the bend the average fall is almost 10 feet per mile. The normal stream has its broad flats along its lower course, where the fall is also less than in the upper portions of its valley. The explanation for the abnormal features of Cherry Creek is clearly to be found in the fact that above the bend near Schafer it follows the old preglacial valley of the Little Missouri Eiver, while below the bend it flows in a much younger postglacial valley. After the Little Missouri had been forced by the ice-sheet from its former valley and had cut its present trench, a tributary developed and extended itself by headward erosion, forming the present lower valley of Cherry Creek. This vigorous young stream worked back until it reached the preglacial valley of the Little Missouri and captured the upper portion of the creek flowing through it, diverting it to its present southeasterly course below the bend where the piracy took place. With such a development the Cherry Creek drainage would possess the abnormal features mentioned above. Evidence of postglacial Age of Lower Little Missouri Valley When the Little Missouri River was forced by the ice-sheet to seek a new channel, it probably flowed for a time through the Pleistocene valley of the Missouri and Yellowstone rivers, previously described. But later it took an easterly course and formed its present postglacial valley, which extends from the mouth of Bowling Creek to the Missouri River, a dis- tance of 100 miles. There is abundant evidence that this lower valley of EVIDENCE OP POSTGLACIAL AGE OP LITTLE MISSOURI 303 the Little Missouri is much younger than the portion above the mouth of Bowling Creek, and that it has been formed since the ice-invasion of the Glacial period. The following are some of the reasons for believing it to be postglacial, or at least post-Kansan : 1. The great majority of the tributaries of the lower Little Missouri below Bowling Creek are short — much shorter than those above. Most of them are not over two or three miles in length, while the tributaries of the river for 60 miles above Bowling Creek are from four to eight times as long, since they have had a much longer time to lengthen by headward erosion. 2. Closely connected with the length of the tributaries is the width of the badlands, which are formed by the erosion of the Little Missouri Eiver and the streams flowing into it. Below Bowling Creek the bad- lands in most places are not over five to seven miles wide, at some points extending back only two or three miles from the river on either side, while along the river above Bowling Creek the belt of badlands has a width of 15 to 25 miles. 3. One of the conspicuous features of the Little Missouri Valley in Billings County and for a few miles of its course in southern McKenzie County are the high, broad flats or terraces on one or both sides of the river. They have an elevation ranging from 240 feet at the south to nearly 300 feet above the river at the north and are one to two miles and over in width. They were undoubtedly formed prior to the Glacial period. These high terraces are wholly absent from the lower valley, which would seem to indicate that this portion is more recent and was formed since the region was elevated, so that the rejuvenated river cut its inner valley several hundred feet below the floor of its earlier one. 4. The fact that the Little Missouri Eiver leaves its preglacial valley and turns east at a point which coincides closely with the southern bound- ary of the ice-sheet, and that for over 40 miles the new valley follows quite closely the former ice-sheet margin, suggests that the latter gov- erned to some extent at least the location of the lower valley of that river. The old valley was blocked with ice as far south as the point where the Little Missouri abandons it, and the waters, when forced to seek a new channel, eventually made their way east not far from the edge of this ice-sheet, and the river thus cut its valley along this eastward course. 5. The Killdeer Mountains, in northwestern Dunn County, are flat- topped buttes or mesas, rising from 500 to 650 feet above the surround- ing upland plain and nearly 1,200 feet above the Little Missouri Eiver. They lie less than six miles south of the latter, and it does not appear 304 A. G. LEONARD DRAINAGE CHANGES IN NORTH DAKOTA probable that they would have persisted and survived the rapid erosion to which they are subjected by the tributaries of the Little Missouri if they had long been in such close proximity to that stream. Had the latter occupied its lower valley longer than postglacial time, it is likely that the Killdeer Mountains would long since have been swept away by erosion. T. T. Quirke, in an unpublished paper, shows that the peculiar topo- graphic features of the Killdeer Mountains are probably caused by the change in the course of the Little Missouri when it abandoned its pre- glacial valley. BULLETIN OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA VOL. 27, PP. 305-324, PLS. 15-17 JUNE 3, 1916 PROCEEDINGS OF THE PALEONTOLOGICAL SOCIETY ALEXANDRIAN KOCKS OF NORTHEASTERN ILLINOIS AND EASTERN WISCONSIN 1 BY T. E. SAVAGE (Presented before the Paleontological Society December 30, 191J/.) CONTENTS Page Introduction 305 Alexandrian rocks and sections of northeastern Illinois 305 Alexandrian strata in Wisconsin 308 General statement 308 Description of sections 308 Correlation of the Mayville beds of Wisconsin with the Alexandrian rocks of northeastern Illinois 310 Correlation of the Alexandrian rocks of the Mississippi Valley with the early Silurian strata of Anticosti 312 Relation of the Sexton Creek limestone to the Cataract formation 313 History of the Alexandrian epoch in the Mississippi Valley 314 Description of species 316 Explanation of plates 323 Introduction The Silurian rocks of northeastern Illinois and eastern Wisconsin occur over a belt 350 miles long and from 20 or less to 50 miles wide, extending from below Kankakee, Illinois, northward to the extremity of Green Bay Peninsula, in Wisconsin. This area is on the east side of the La Salle anticline and the highland of central Wisconsin, away from which the strata dip gently toward the east; so that the older Silurian rocks reach the surface at intervals only along the west border. Alexandrian Rocks and Sections of northeastern Tllinots The most southern exposure of Alexandrian rocks in this region is in the banks of Horse Creek, iy 2 miles east of the town of Essex and about 1 Manuscript received by the Secretary of the Geological Society November 27, 1915, (305) 306 T. E. SAVAGE ALEXANDEIAN ROCKS OF ILLINOIS AND WISCONSIN 14 miles west of Kankakee. These strata consist of a thickness of 12 to 15 feet of brown magnesian limestone, in layers 3 to 6 inches thick, that are now known to belong to the Edgewood formation as developed in southwestern Illinois and eastern Missouri. Above the Edgewood lime- stone near Essex are a few feet of brown dolomite that contains silicified shells of a pentameroid described by Foerste 2 as Platymerella manniensis, and which has been considered the basal portion of the Sexton Creek limestone in Illinois. Less than 10 miles northeast of the outcrop near Essex and about an equal distance southeast of Wilmington, Illinois, an excellent section of Alexandrian strata is exposed in the north bank of Kankakee River. At this place typical Maquoketa shale is immediately overlain by a bed of reddish-brown iron oolite, 3 or 4 feet thick, which is considered the youngest member of the Maquoketa series in this region. Overlying the iron oolite in apparent unconformity are 4 to 6 feet of brown magnesian limestone belonging to the Edgewood formation. This limestone is suc- ceeded by about 20 feet of hard gray to brown limestone, in layers 6 to 18 inches thick, which represent the Sexton Creek limestone as formerly defined. The basal part of this limestone, as elsewhere in Illinois, con- tains many shells of Platymerella manniensis. A zone 15 to 18 feet above the base of the formation also contains numerous fossils, the most significant of which are BJiinopora, near verrucosa; StricJclandinia triple- siana; StricJclandinia, somewhat resembling 8. davidsoni Billings, de- scribed in this paper as 8. pyriformis; another species related to S. salteri Billings, and Triplecia, near insularis var. anticostiensis. Fifteen miles north of the exposure on Kankakee River strata corre- sponding to the Edgewood and Sexton Creek limestones are exposed in the banks of Desplaines River, iy 2 to 3 miles south of Channahon, in Will County. A section of the strata as now known in this vicinity is given below : Section of Strata exposed 3 Miles south of Channahon Edgewood limestone. p ee t 3. Limestone, gray, crystalline, the lower part containing such typical Edgewood fossils as Lyellia theoesensis, Atrypa prmmarginalis, Dalmanella edgewoodensis, Camarotcechia ? concinna, Rhyncho- treta theoesensis, and Whitfleldella ovoides 11 2. Limestone, brown ; corresponding in part to the limestone formerly described in the original Channahon section 10 Maquoketa shale. 1. Shale, bluish, plastic 8 2 Aug. F. Foerste: Bulletin of the Denison University, vol. xiv, no. 6, p. 70, April, 1909. DESCRIPTION OF SECTIONS 307 A short distance south of the above exposure the strata containing Platymerella manniensis outcrop at a level only a few feet higher than the top of number 3 of the above section. Exposures of limestone equiva- lent to some horizon of the Sexton Creek formation are numerous over an area several square miles in extent between Channahon and Wilming- ton, where the covering of Pleistocene deposits is thin. About 22 miles north of Channahon limestones corresponding in age to the Edgewood and Sexton Creek formations are exposed in the banks of Waubansia Creek, in the vicinity of Oswego, where they have quite a similar development and contain similar fossils to those along the Desplaines River. North of Batavia limestone of Sexton Creek age outcrops in several places along the Eox River in the vicinity of Geneva, Saint Charles, and Elgin. A representative section of the strata exposed in the quarry 2 miles south of Elgin is as follows : Section of Strata exposed in the Quarry 2 Miles south of Elgin Sexton Creek limestone. Feet 3. Limestone, yellow, dolomitic, weathering into layers 2 to 4 inches thick 4y 2 2. Limestone, gray, appearing massive in the ledge, but weathering into thin layers 17 1. Limestone, gray, with a number of chert bands near the middle part 15 Borings on the floor of the quarry reached the top of the Maquoketa shale at a depth of about 6 feet. No Edgewood limestone is present at this place, nor is it known in northeastern Illinois north of Oswego. A zone in the upper part of the quarry exposure at Elgin, number 3 of the last section, contains numerous casts of shells of several species of Stricklandinia, and corresponds to the horizon of Stricklandinia in the upper part of the exposure along Kankakee Eiver, and to the Strick- landinia zone exposed at Hamburg, in Calhoun County, Illinois. The species include 8. cf. triplesiana and forms related to the Anticosti species 8. davidsoni, 8. brevis, 8. lirata, and 8. salteri, besides the fossils Rhi- nopora near verrucosa, Dinobolus sp., Leptwna rhomb oidalis, Sclwcher- tella hanoverensis, Plectambonites transversalis var., Dalmanella elegant- ula, Orthis fldbellites, Platystrophia daytonensis, Pentamerus oblongus, Cyclonema daytonensis, and Illamus daytonensis. North of Elgin to the Wisconsin State line the western border of the area of Silurian limestone is covered so deeply with glacial drift that no outcrops of Alexandrian strata are known. 308 t. e. savage alexandrian rocks of illinois and wisconsin Alexandrian Strata in Wisconsin general statement The oldest division of the Silurian limestone in Wisconsin was referred to by Chamberlin 3 under the name "Mayville beds" and has a thickness of 100 to 175 or more feet. The present studies have shown that this lowest division of the Silurian rocks of Wisconsin corresponds in time to some portion of the Alexandrian series of Illinois and Missouri and to some part of tbe Becsie Eiver formation of Anticosti Island. DESCRIPTION OF SECTIONS Almost the entire thickness of the Mayville limestone is exposed in an abandoned quarry 3 miles south of the town of Mayville. A detailed section of the rocks exposed in this quarry is given below : Section of Mayville Limestone exposed in a Quarry 3 Miles south of Mayville Feet 5. Dolomite, yellowish gray, vesicular, in layers 2 to 6 feet thick, which contain very numerous casts and molds of shells of Yirgiana bar- randei var. mayvillensis ' 21 4. Dolomite, hard, yellowish gray, with many irregular cavities and a few casts of shells of Yirgiana barrandei var. mayvillensis 10 3. Dolomite, massive, hard, crystalline, in layers 4 to 6 feet thick 33 2. Dolomite, yellowish gray, fine-grained, in layers 4 to 16 inches thick... 32 1. Dolomite, hard, crystalline, in rather thick layers having numerous irregular cavities 22 The upper 12 to 20 feet of the Mayville beds everywhere contain numerous casts of shells of Virgiana barrandei var., which serve as an excellent marker of this horizon in eastern Wisconsin. In the large quarry 4 miles south of Mayville the zone of Yirgiana barrandei var. occurs about 50 feet above the base, and a drilling pene- trated 90 feet of dolomite below the floor of the quarry without reaching Maquoketa shale, indicating a thickness of at least 140 feet of Mayville limestone below the Virgiana zone. The relation of the Mayville limestone to the older strata of this region is well shown in the quarry face of the old iron-ore pit in Iron Ridge, near the village of ISTeda, about 6 miles south of Mayville. The character of these strata is shown in figure 1 and is described in the detailed section given below : ; T. C. Chamberlin : Geology of Wisconsin, vol. ii, 1877, p. 336. DESCRIPTION OF SECTIONS 309 Section of Strata exposed in the Iron-ore Pit near Neda Mayville limestone. Feet 5. Dolomite, gray, crystalline, vesicular, in layers 1 to 2 feet thick ... 12 4. Dolomite, yellowish gray. hard, crystalline, in irregular layers .... 24 A break in sedimentation. Iron-ore bed. 3. Iron ore, nearly black, impure 1 2. Iron ore, oolitic, brown to red, in regular layers, with small pebble- like masses of iron at certain zones in the lower part 12 to 30 A break in sedimentation. Maquoketa shale. 1. Shale, bluish gray, calcareous 8 The lower part of the Mayville limestone at this place, as elsewhere in 'Wisconsin, furnished several fossils which were mostly casts and molds of Zaphrentoid and Favositoid corals, the preservation of which was so poor as to make specific identification too uncertain for purposes of corre- lation. The species that could be satisfactorily identified have a wide, vertical range and are not markers of any definite horizon in the early Silurian. A succession of strata similar to those present in Iron Bidge are well exposed at Cascade Falls, 5 miles east of De Pere and about 10 miles south of Green Bay. The iron-ore bed at Cascade Falls furnished a number of fossils characteristic of the Maquoketa shale, including frag- ments which resemble parts of the rays of Stenaster sp., Eurydictya montifera ? Lingula cf. cobourgensis, Strophomena ivisconsinensis, Dal- manella tersa, Byssonychia intermedia, B. cf. radiata, Pterinea cf. demissa, and Liospira sp. These species indicate the late Ordovician (Bichmond) age of the iron formation. The Virgiana. zone is Avell exposed in the east quarry at Marblehead, about 20 miles north of Mayville., where the following section was made : Section of Strata exposed in the Quarry at Mardlehead Mayville limestone. p eet 6. Dolomite, yellowish gray, coarse-grained, in thick layers, containing numerous casts and molds of large shells of Virgiana oarrandei var , 12 5. Talus-covered interval 40 4. Dolomite, gray, crystalline, in thick, irregular layers 21 3. Dolomite, gray, fine-grained, in layers 4 to 5 inches thick 42 2. Dolomite, penetrated in a drilling but not exposed 58 Maquoketa. shale. 1. Shale, bluish gray , 1 XXIII — Bull. Geol. Soc. Am., Vol. 27, 1915 310 T. E. SAVAGE ALEXANDRIAN ROCKS OF ILLINOIS AND WISCONSIN The Mayville limestone is again well shown in an old quarry one-half mile south of the town of Peebles, near the south end of Lake Winnebago. Figure 2 shows the character of the strata at this place, a detailed section of which is given below : Section of Strata exposed one-half Mile south of Peebles Mayville limestone. Feet 4. Dolomite, yellowish gray, hard, coarsely crystalline, with many cavities and numerous nodules of chert 6 to 9 3. Dolomite, brown to pink, hard, vesicular, in somewhat irregular layers 1 to 6 feet thick 30 2. Dolomite, dark gray, in thin irregular layers, separated by bands of chert 3 1. Dolomite, dark gray, with a few chert nodules 20 The base of this quarry is only a few feet above the top of the Maquo- keta shale, as is shown by the numerous springs that issue in this region at a slightly lower level. In a ravine a few rods north of the quarry the contact of the Mayville limestone and the Maquoketa shale is clearly exposed, with no intervening bed of iron ore. From the residual material found in the cavities of the limestone com- prising the upper member (number 4) of the quarry section near Peebles the following fossils were among those collected ; Favosites sp. PlatystropMa daytonensts Halysites catenulatus Clorinda sp. Lyellia cf. thehesensis Rhynchonella ? janea Dalmanella edgeivoodensis Rhyncliotreta parva Orthis flabellites Atrypa putilla The above species of fossils indicate the Edgewood age of this lime- stone and leave little doubt that at least the lower 60 or 80 feet of the Mayville beds, and probably all of this limestone below the zone of Vir- giana barrandei var. mayvillensis. belong to a time interval equivalent to the Edgewood formation of the Alexandrian series. In the vicinity of Brillion, about 25 miles north of Peebles, the Vir- giana zone of the Mayville limestone is well exposed 130 feet above the top of the Maquoketa shale, and it outcrops again 50 miles still farther north, at the township line about 6 miles west of Sturgeon Bay. Correlation op the Mayville Beds of Wisconsin with the Alexandrian Eocks of northeast Illinois The fossils listed above, that were collected from the upper layers of the limestone exposed in the quarry near Peebles, Wisconsin, clearly CORRELATION 311 correlate the lower and middle portions of the Mayville beds and their equivalents in Wisconsin with the Edgewood formation of Illinois and Missouri. The upper portion of the Mayville beds in Wisconsin, con- taining numerous shells of Virgiana barrandei var., can not be so defi- nitely correlated with any horizon of Alexandrian rocks in northeastern Illinois. The stratigraphic position of the zone of Virgiana barrandei var. in the upper Mayville beds, overlying the Edgewood portion of the Mayville in apparent conformity, is similar to that of the Platymerella manniensis horizon in northeast Illinois, which there immediately suc- ceeds the Edgewood limestone without any distinct sedimentary hiatus. However, in some places, but not everywhere, in southwestern Illinois and eastern Missouri the Platymerella manniensis zone is separated from the underlying Edgewood limestone by an erosional unconformity. The genera Virgiana and Platymerella are very closely related. The genus Virgiana was defined by Twenhoferin 1914 to include the species described by Billings as Pentamerus barrandei, later referred by Schu- chert to' the genus Clorinda, and two of its varieties, all of which were known only from the Anticosti region. Of this genus Twenhofel says : 4 "In the Becsie River formation of the Anticosti section occurs the shell de- scribed by Billings as Pentamerus barrandei, which in its young stages has all the characters of a true Clorinda. With maturity, however, the shell attains large size, becomes decidedly elongate, narrow, and pronouncedly galeatiform and the fold and sinus become reversed, the latter being obliterated and trans- formed into a fold by the development of an axial rib, and the former disap- pearing through bifurcation of the initial fold producing a sinus at the mar- gin. The interior is that of Clorinda." Some of the shells of Platymerella, defined by Foerste in 1909, show no distinct mesial fold or sinus on either valve, but many of them have a sinus in the dorsal valve and a fold on the ventral, the latter having been formed by the repeated division of a single plication which occupied the bottom of what was originally a sinus, as shown in plate 16, figures 11 and 12. The sinus in the dorsal valve of Platymerella was likewise de- veloped by the repeated division of a medial plication or fold. How- ever, the ventral valve of Platymerella is never so galeate, nor is the mesial fold so keeled, as in the shells of Virgiana. It seems probable that the Upper Mayville beds in Wisconsin belong to a different geological province from that in which the limestone in Illinois containing Platy- merella manniensis was laid down, and the direct correlation of these horizons is not yet certainly established. * W. H. Twenhofel : The Anticosti Island faunas. Canada Geol. Survey, Mus. Bull, no. 3, Geol. series no. 19, Oct., 1914, p. 27. 312 T. E. SAVAGE ALEXANDRIAN ROCKS OF ILLINOIS AND WISCONSIN jSTo older Silurian strata corresponding to the Girardeau limestone of southwest Illinois and eastern Missouri are known in Wisconsin. Correlation of the Alexandrian Rocks of the Mississippi Valley WITH THE EARLY SlLURIAN STRATA OF THE ANTICOSTI EmBAYMEXT There are two fossil zones in the Alexandrian series of the Mississippi A" alley whose equivalents can be recognized in the section of strata ex- posed on Anticosti Island, recently described by Twenhofel."' One of these is the Stricklandinia horizon, which, in Illinois, occurs 18 to 25 feet above the base of the Sexton Creek formation, and contains shells of a number of species of Stricklandinia, among which 8, piriformis, 8. pyriformis var. elongata, 8. breviuscula, and 8. circularis respectively resemble Billings species, 8. davidsoni, 8. salteri, 8. brevis, and #. lirata. which occur in the upper part of the Gun Eiver 6 formation of Anticosti Island as defined by Schuchert and Twenhofel. Associated with the species of Stricklandinia in the limestone of Sexton Creek age in northern Illinois are Diphyphyllum ccespitosum. Schucher- tella pecten var. Plectambpnites transver salts, Orthis flabellites, Plaly- strophia daytonensis, Pentameriis oblongus, and Triplecia aff. insularis var. antic osiiensis. These species are also found in association with the shells of Stricklandinia in the upper part of the Gun Eiver formation of the Anticosti region. Prom the resemblance of the species of Strick- landinia in variety and in the number of individuals, and from the sim- ilarity of their associates, in the middle part of the limestone of Sexton Creek age of northern Illinois, to those in the upper part of the Gun Eiver formation of Anticosti Island, it seems certain that the Strick- landinia zone in these widely separated regions represents about the same period of time, and that there was a sea connection between the Missis- sippi Valley basin and the Anticosti embayment during the time the rocks of this zone in the two areas were laid down. Another horizon in the Alexandrian rocks of Wisconsin that can be confidently correlated with a definite portion of the Anticosti section is the Virgiana zone. In Wisconsin shells of Virgiana barrandei var. are found only in the upper part of the Mayville beds. In the Anticosti Island section Virgiana barrandei is a guide to the upper part of the Becsie Eiver 7 formation, where the shells of this species are numerous and exhibit a multiplicity of variation, as they do in Wisconsin. 5 W. H. Twenhofel : The Anticosti Island faunas. Canada Geol. Survey, Mns. Bull, no. 3. Geol. series no. 19, Oct., 1914. 6 Charles Schuchert and W. H. Twenhofel : Ordovicie-Siluric section of the Mingan and Anticosti islands. Gulf of St. Lawrence. Bull. Geol. Soc. Am., vol. 21, no. 4, 1910, pp. 708-713. 7 Schuchert and Twenhofel : Bull, Geol. Soc. Am., vol. 21, 1910, pp. 705-708. CORRELATION 313 Parastrophia lenticularis and Ccelospira planoconvexa are associated with Virgiana barrandei in the Anticosti Island region. A form very close to P. lenticularis is also common in the Virgiana zone in Wisconsin, and Ccelospira planoconvexa was reported by Whitfield from a correspond- ing horizon of the Mayville beds near Hartford, Wisconsin. There seems no doubt that the Virgiana zone in the upper part of the Mayville beds in Wisconsin is to be correlated with the zone of Virgiana barrandei in the upper part of the Becsie Eiver formation of Anticosti. The lower and middle parts of the Mayville beds, which correspond in time to the Edgewood formation of Illinois and Missouri, occur below the Virgiana zone in Wisconsin, and are thus shown to be older than the corresponding strata containing Virgiana barrandei in the Anticosti region; but they can not be readily correlated with any definite horizon in the Anticosti section. However, from the relation of the strata bearing Edgewood fossils to the Virgiana zone in Wisconsin, the Edgewood for- mation can not be younger than about the middle of the Becsie River division of the Anticosti Island section. The Girardeau limestone, which is the oldest of the Alexandrian for- mations in Illinois and Missouri, is not represented in Wisconsin or northeastern Illinois. Its horizon can not be definitely recognized in the Anticosti section, but it probably corresponds in time to the lower part of the Becsie River formation. Relation of the Sexton Creek Limestone to the Cataract Formation In view of the fact that Ccelospira planoconvexa is associated with Virgiana barrandei in the Anticosti region and has been found associated with the variety of this species in the Upper Mayville beds at Hartford, Wisconsin, and that it is a characteristic fossil of the basal (Manitoulin) member of the Cataract 8 formation, it is possible that the Virgiana hori- zon (Upper Mayville beds) of Wisconsin is to be correlated with the basal part of the Manitoulin member of the Cataract formation in Ontario, but it more probably belongs to a time shortly preceding the Cataract. The Manitoulin member not only contains Ccelospira plano- convexa in considerable abundance, but also Eldnopora verrucosa and a number of other species characteristic of horizons near the middle of the Sexton Creek limestone, with which formation the Manitoulin member of the Cataract is probably equivalent in time. It is noteworthy that no shells of Virgiana or of the numerous species of Stricklandinia that are 8 Charles Schuchert : Medina and Cataract formations of the Siluric of New York and Ontario. Bull. Geol. Soc. Am., vol. 25, no. 3, 1914, pp. 277-320. 314 T. E. SAVAGE ALEXANDRIAN ROCKS OP ILLINOIS AND WISCONSIN common in the limestone of Sexton Creek age in northern Illinois have been found in the Cataract formation. The fauna of the limestone of Sexton Creek age in Illinois is more closely related to that of the Gun Eiver formation in the Anticosti region than to that of the Cataract and seems to indicate during this time a more direct sea connection of the upper Mississippi Valley basin with the Anticosti embayment than with that portion of the epicontinental sea in which the rocks of the Cataract formation were laid down. History of the Alexandrian Epoch in the Mississippi Valley The earliest deposits of the Alexandrian series in the Mississippi Valley comprise the Girardeau limestone which accumulated in an arm of the sea that advanced from the Gulf of Mexico region, reaching a few miles north of Cape Girardeau, Missouri. Deposition of this limestone was closed by the more or less complete withdrawal of the sea, and the sedi- ments of the succeeding Edgewood formation were laid down during the next advance of this southern sea, which extended north as far as Will and Kendall counties, Illinois. That portion of the Mayville beds in Wisconsin that corresponds in age to the Edgewood limestone in Illinois is thought to have been deposited in a basin that had a northern sea con- nection and was separated from the Illinois basin by a land area or other barrier across southern Wisconsin or northern Illinois. This assumption seems justified on account of the difference in the fossils associated with the characteristic Edgewood species in Wisconsin compared with those in Illinois. The presence of the Virgiana zone near the top of the May- ville limestone appears also to indicate a connection of this province with the Anticosti region during the time the Upper Mayville beds were de- posited. If this assumption is correct, these strata of Edgewood age in Wisconsin belong to a different province from that in which the Edgewood strata in Illinois and Missouri were laid down, and should very appro- priately continue to bear the name "Mayville limestone/' In northeastern Illinois the zone of Platymerella manniensis imme- diately follows the Edgewood limestone without clear evidence of a sedi- mentary break, although in places in Calhoun County, in southwest Illi- nois, and in Pike County, Missouri, a distinct unconformity separates these horizons. Platymerella manniensis occurs also in rocks • belonging to a corresponding horizon in western Tennessee, and this species is thought to have entered the Mississippi Valley from the Gulf of Mexico region, as did the earlier Edgewood fauna. The geological provinces of Edgewood time in this part of the Mississippi Valley appear to have re- HISTORICAL 315 mained practically unchanged until after the limestone of the Platy- merella manniensis zone was deposited, after which there occurred move- ments of sufficient importance to materially change the outlines of these basins. If this interpretation is correct, the most important movements of this time in the Mississippi Valley occurred immediately after the deposition of the limestone of the Platymerella manniensis zone, instead of just before. For this reason, it is here proposed to shift the upper boundary of the Edgewood formation and the basal part of the Sexton Creek limestone 3 or 4 feet higher than formerly, placing it at the top of the limestone containing Platymerella manniensis in Illinois and Missouri, instead of at the base of this zone, where it has previously been drawn. Deposition of the limestone containing Platymerella manniensis was followed by crustal movements, which changed in a very important way the outlines of the basins in which the Edgewood strata were accumulated. Disturbances in the Ozarkian region resulted in the formation of an arch trending toward the northeast nearly through the present site of Saint Louis. This arch formed a barrier to the advance of the southern sea, not only during all of Sexton Creek time, but it remained effective during the subsequent times of submergence of this region throughout the re- maining part of the Silurian and all of the Lower and Middle portions of the Devonian period. The Sexton Creek sediments that accumulated in the basin south of this barrier are well exposed in Alexander and Union counties, in southwestern Illinois, where they have an aggregate thickness of about 70 feet. Nearly or quite coincident with the Ozarkian movement there occurred warping in the northern Illinois-southern Wisconsin area, which sub- merged the barrier that existed there in Edgewood time and permitted the sea from the Gulf of Saint Lawrence region to extend toward the west and south as far as Calhoun County, in western Illinois. g In this northern basin the Stricklandinias flourished in great numbers and variety near the middle of Sexton Creek time. During the same time in the southern basin in Illinois and in the Brassfield basin of Ohio and Ken- tucky the only known species of that genus was Stricklandinia triplesiana, which also occurs associated with typical forms of Tnplecia ortoni in the middle part of the Sexton Creek limestone along Sexton Creek, in south- ern Illinois, from which creek the name of the formation was taken. To the rocks in this southern basin that are equivalent in age to the Brass- field strata of Ohio and Kentucky it is proposed to restrict the name Sexton Creek limestone. The strata of corresponding age that accumu- lated in the northern basin, including western Illinois and eastern Mis- 316 T. E. SAVAGE ALEXANDRIAN ROCKS OP ILLINOIS AND WISCONSIN souri north of Saint Louis and northeastern Illinois, are well developed and clearly exposed along Kankakee River about 5 miles south of Richey, and hence these will hereafter be referred to by the name "Kankakee limestone." From the similarity and abundance of the species of Strick- landinia and other fossils in this horizon compared with those in the upper part of the Gun River formation of the Anticosti region, it is thought that this embayment in northeastern Illinois was connected toward the northeast with the Anticosti Island region in the Gulf of Saint Lawrence during Sexton Creek time. Description of Species 9 genus schuchertella girty Schuchertella pecten var. robusta n. var. Plate 16, Figure 1 Description: Shell semielliptical in outline; width about iy 2 times the length; greatest width at the hinge line; cardinal extremities forming nearly right angles with the sides, A nearly complete shell measures l T /i6 inches long, iy 2 inches wide, and has a convexity of about 14 inch. Ventral valve moderately concave in general contour, but flattened toward the cardinal extremities, the greatest concavity near the middle, without mesial sinus ; beak moderately large, somewhat distorted ; cardinal area of moderate height, extending to the extremities of the hinge line. Dorsal valve with convexity about equalling the concavity of the ventral valve, highest near the middle, from which the surface curves rather steeply to the cardinal margin and more gently to the front and lateral margins; flattened toward the cardinal extremities; no mesial fold or sinus ; beak inconspicuous. Surface of both valves marked by rather fine, narrowly rounded, or subangular radiating striae of unequal size, which divide two or three times between the beak and the margins, and by numerous very fine con- centric lines, and a few much stronger lines of growth. Remarks : This variety differs from the very variable species S. pecten of the Anticosti region in the larger size and coarser expression, the greater convexity of the ventral valve, and the greater irregularity in the size of the radiating stria?. Horizon and locality: Kankakee limestone, near Oswego, Illinois. 9 The writer wishes to acknowledge his indebtedness to Prof. Charles Schuchert and Dr. W. H. Twenhofel, through whose kindness a comparison of the species of fossils dis- cussed and described in this paper was made with allied species of the Anticosti region. DESCRIPTION OP SPECIES 317 GENUS CLORINDA BARRANDE Clorinda transversa n. sp. Plate 16, Figures 2 and 3 Description : Shell transversely subelliptical in outline ; a little wider than long; hinge line shorter than the greatest width, which is near the middle of the shell ; front margin slightly extended. Specimens of nearly average size have a length of % to ^4 inch, a width of % to % inch, and a thickness of % to % inch. Ventral valve arched from beak to front; depressed along the median portion in a rather broad mesial sinus, which extends from the beak to the front margin; on each side of the sinus the curvature is rather abrupt to the lateral and cardinal margins; the beak is pointed, elevated, and strongly incurved; the cardinal area rather high, concave; spondylium rather deep, supported by a high, slender median septum. Dorsal valve much less arcuate than the ventral, its greatest convexity in the umbonal region ; the surface moderately convex from beak to front and elevated into a prominent mesial fold, which becomes rather broad in the anterior portion of the shell, where it is bounded by a poorly de- fined depression ; antero-lateral portions nearly flat, postero-lateral slopes rather gentle; beak pointed and strongly incurved beneath that of the opposite valve. Surface of both valves nearly smooth, marked only by a few concentric lines of growth, which are more numerous toward the outer margin of the valves. Horizon and locality : Associated with Triplecia aff . insularis in a zone about 18 feet above the base of the Kankakee limestone at Grafton, Illinois. GENUS STRICKLANDINIA BILLINGS StricManclinia pyriformis n. sp. Plate 16, Figures 8 and 9 Description : The shell is subovate to pyriform in uutline ; the greatest width below the middle ; the anterior margin somewhat extended ; lounded or sometimes with a slight emargination on each side of the middle. The valves are subequally convex; hinge line straight, from yj to j4 the greatest width; the cardino-lateral angle about 90°. Ventral valve rather regularly convex along the median line from beak to front, the greatest convexity a little posterior to the middle ; without a distinct fold or sinus; the curvature rather gentle toward the antero- lateral margins, but steep in the postero-lateral regions, where the valve 318 T. E. SAVAGE ALEXANDRIAN ROCKS OF ILLINOIS AND WISCONSIN becomes flattened in the more narrowed portion of the shell ; the cardinal area is narrow, concealed when the valves are in place; beak very low and inconspicuous, incurved. The dorsal valve nearly as convex as the ventral, gently curving longi- tudinally from beak to front ; highest along the median line, but without a distinct fold; transversely, it is rather strongly convex, the curvature more abrupt toward the postero-lateral margins ; sometimes with a slight depression near the front on each side of the median portion ; beak small and incurved beneath that of the ventral valve. Surface of both valves marked by numerous lines of growth, some of which are stronger than others, but without definite radiating markings. The dimensions differ greatly in different specimens. Those of about an average shell are: length, 2% inches; greatest width, 1% inches; thick- ness, 1 inch. Eemarks: This form somewhat resembles 8. davidsoni Billings in its generally large size, elongate form, and the short hinge line in proportion to the greatest width of the shell. It differs from Billings' species in being larger and thicker, in having a much shorter hinge line, in the widest part of the shell being at or anterior to the middle, and in the flattened postero-lateral margins. In some respects it also resembles 8. deformis Meek and Worthen, from which it differs in the relatively shorter hinge line, the more symmetrical growth, the shell showing no strong concentric constrictions, and in the less oblong outline, the poste- rior half of the shell being relatively much narrower than in S. deformis. Horizon : About 18 to 25 feet above the base of the Kankakee limestone at Hamburg, along Kankakee Biver 5 miles south of Bichey, and at Elgin, Illinois. Stricklandinia pyriformls var. elongata n. var. Plate 16, Figure 7 Description : The shells of this variety differ from those of 8. pyri- formis chiefly in being much thinner, in having the hinge line nearly or quite as long as the greatest width of the shell, and the cardinal extremi- ties more or less produced, so as to make the cardino-lateral angles slightly less than right angles. The shells are somewhat oblong in outline, a little longer than wide, about equally and very moderately convex, with greatest elevation along the median line, but without definite fold or sinus on either valve; the sides are nearly parallel, and the front margin regularly rounded ; cardinal areas linear and beaks obscure. The dimensions of a cast are: length, 1% inches; width, iy 8 inches; thickness, about ^2 inch. DESCRIPTION OP SPECIES 319 Remarks: This variety differs from 8. salteri in the more elongate form, the length being much greater in proportion to the width. From 8. triplesiana of the Brassfield limestone it differs in the relatively greater length of the shell and in the absence of a mesial fold or sinus. Horizon: Stricklandinia zone 18 to 25 feet above the base of the Kankakee limestone, at Hamburg, along Kankakee Eiver above Custer Park, and at Elgin, Illinois. Stricklandinia pyriformis var. vasculosa n. var. Plate 16, Figure 6 Description: Shells having the appearance of young forms of 8. pyri- formis, but the surface of the casts marked by somewhat irregular ridges of unequal size, three to five of which extend longitudinally along the median portion. From the margins of this median area less prominent ridges curve downward and outward over the lateral portions of the shells, some of which divide once or twice before reaching the margin. The markings on the surface of the casts indicate the presence on the interior of the shells of a few longitudinal furrows in the median portion, from the borders of which low, rather broad, often bifurcating furrows extend downward and outward to the margins. The shell is ovate in outline; the hinge line shorter than the greatest width ; the valves subequally convex, without fold or sinus ; the spon- dylium is moderately deep, and is supported by a short medium septum; the impressions of the crural processes are rather deep, slender, and some- what diverging. Horizon and locality: In the Stricklandinia zone 18 to 25 feet above the base of the Kankakee limestone, along Kankakee River near Custer Park, and at Elgin, Illinois. Stricklandinia circularis n. sp. Plate 16, Figure 4 Description : Shell subcircular in outline ; length and width about equal, the greatest width near the middle ; valves about equally convex ; hinge line slightly longer than half the greatest width; cardino-lateral portions and the front and lateral margins rather regularly rounded. . Ventral valve gently convex, the greatest convexity near the middle ; medial portion depressed longitudinally from beak to front, forming a shallow sinus, which becomes quite broad in the anterior half of the valve. The surface is gently convex transversely over the anterior and lateral 320 T. E. SAVAGE ALEXANDRIAN ROCKS OF ILLINOIS AND WISCONSIN regions and curves more strongly to the hinge line on the posterior por- tion ; no cardinal area ; beak small, not much elevated, incurved. Dorsal valve about equal in convexity to the ventral, somewhat elevated from beak to front along the median line, forming a low, poorly denned mesial fold, away from which the surface curves gently toward the front and sides and more strongly toward the cardinal margin ; beak small and inconspicuous, incurved beneath that of ventral valve. Surface of both valves marked by numerous indistinct, very fine lines of growth ; without distinct radiating markings, but the fibrous structure of the shell, where partly exfoliated, sometimes gives the appearance of very fine radiating striae. Eemarks: This species differs from 8. davidsoni in its much shorter length and proportionally greater width and the absence of such a promi- nent anterior extension; from S. lirata, which it resembles in general outline, it differs in the absence of distinct radiating markings. Horizon : Kankakee limestone at Oswego, Illinois. StricMandinia breviuscida n. sp. Plate 16, Figure 5 Description : Shell subcircular in outline, a little wider than long, the greatest width slightly posterior to the middle; the lateral and anterior margins rounded ; the .valves nearly equal in size and convexity ; hinge line straight, equalling about half the greatest width of the shell. The dimensions are : length, % inch ; greatest width, % inch ; thickness, nearly y 2 inch. Ventral valve moderately convex, the greatest convexity at or posterior to the middle, the median portion depressed longitudinally into a rather broad shallow sinus. Cardinal area very narrow; beak low; spondylium rather short and supporting median septum very short. Dorsal valve similar in form and convexity to the ventral, the median portion elevated from beak to front into an indistinct mesial fold; the surface is very gently convex or nearly flat on each side of the mesial fold in the anterior portion, with a stronger curvature over the cardinal and postero-lateral margins ; beak small and somewhat incurved. Surface with a few lines of growth near the margins, but without radiating markings. Eemarks : This species differs from S. brevis in its smaller size and in the stronger longitudinal convexity of the dorsal valve. It may prove to be a young form of S. circularis, which it resembles in general outline, but it differs from the normal shells of that species in the much smaller DESCRIPTION OF SPECIES 321 size, the more prominent beak, and in the greater, length in proportion to the width. Horizon: Zone of Stricklandinia 18 to 25 feet above the base of the Kankakee limestone, at Elgin, and near Channahon, Illinois. GENU 8 VIRGIANA TWENHOFEL Virgiana barrandei var. mayvillerisis n. var. Plate 17, Figures 3 to 7 Description : Shell presenting a very considerable range of variation in size and appearance; unequally biconvex; subovate in outline; length about \y% times the width, the greatest width anterior to the middle ; anterior margin rounded. All the specimens are in the form of casts of the interior. Ventral valve strongly arcuate from beak to front, the curvature in- creasingly convex toward the beak, the greatest convexity posterior to the middle, the median portion elevated into a more or less distinct fold. In the casts a sinus appears at the beak which soon becomes occupied by a plication that divides two or three times so as to form a mesial fold in the middle and anterior portions, which in some specimens is very prom- inent. The surface is strongly convex transversely in the anterior por- tion, becoming progressively more arcuate in the middle and posterior portions to near the cardino-lateral margins, above which it is abruptly curved toward the delthyrium ; cardinal area arcuate ; delthyrium large and triangular; beak high, arcuate, strongly incurved over the hinge line ; spondylium deep, supported by a short median septum. Dorsal valve gently convex from beak to front along the median line, highest in the umbonal region, where it is strongly convex transversely, the curvature becoming more gentle toward the anterior portion, where the valve is nearly flat ; the median portion of old shells usually depressed so as to form an indistinct mesial sinus, which extends from near the beak to the front margin. No trace of a mesial sinus is present in the dorsal valves of young specimens, but instead they frequently bear an indistinct mesial fold ; beak rather prominent and incurved beneath that of the ventral valve; crural impressions long, slender, and nearly parallel. Surface of both valves marked by rather strong radiating striae, which divide two or three times between the beaks and the margins, and by con- centric lines of growth, which are more numerous near the margins. There is great variation in the size of the shells, but the type specimen, which is near the average, measured as follows : length, 214 inches ; great- est width, iy 8 inches; thickness, 1% inches. 322 T. E. SAVAGE ALEXANDRIAN ROCKS OF ILLINOIS AND WISCONSIN Remarks : This variety differs from V. barrandei in the broader con- vexity of the ventral valve from side to side, in the less sharp and promi- nent mesial fold, in the less distinct sinus in the dorsal valve, in the better defined radiating plications, and the larger size. Horizon and localities: Upper part of the Mayville limestone; near Mayville, Brillion, and west of Sturgeon Bay, Wisconsin. Yirgiana barrandei var. major n. var. Plate 17, Figures 1 and 2 Description : Shell broadly ovate in outline, with the greatest width in the anterior portion; the front margin rounded. Ventral valve arcuate from beak to front, highest posterior to the middle, the curvature becoming progressively more convex posteriorly; transverse convexity very strong; the postero-lateral margins abruptly incurved, anterior margin less strongly convex; mesial fold in the casts extending from near the beak to the front, very high and prominent, especially in the middle and anterior portions; the beak is strongly ele- vated and incurved; spondylium large, supported by a strong median septum. Dorsal valve much less convex than the ventral ; highest posterior to the middle, where the longitudinal and transverse convexity is moderately strong ; the curvature is gentle over the anterior portion, where the valve is frequently flat or concave; mesial sinus present only in the anterior portion, where it is broad, shallow, and poorly defined; beak moderately prominent ; crural processes making strong impressions in the casts. Sur- face of both valves marked by numerous striae, which divide two or three times between the beaks and the margins. The dimensions of a large specimen are : length, 2^4 inches ; width, 214 inches, and thickness, 1% inches. Remarks : Compared with V. barrandei var. mayvillensis, this form is much larger and broader, with much stronger mesial fold in the ventral valve and less distinct sinus on the dorsal, and weaker and more numerous radiating striae. Horizon and locality : Upper part of the Mayville limestone ; at Marble- head, Wisconsin. GENUS EURYPTERUS DE KAY Eurypterus pumilus n. sp. Plate 17, Figure 8 The ventral portion only is exposed in the type specimen of the above species. The shell is so thin and the test has been so flattened by pressure BULL. GEOL. SOC. AM. VOL. 27, 1915, PL. 15 Figure 1. — View of the Mayville Ltmestoxe The limestone overlies the iron ore in Iron Ridge, near Neda. Wisconsin Figure 2. — Quarry in the Mayville Limestone The quarry is half a mile south of Peebles, Wisconsin. The upper layers furnish fossils characteristic of the Edgewood formation MAYVILLE LIMESTONE DESCRIPTION OF SPECIES 323 that the outline of the compound eyes and a few other features of the dorsal surface are visible from the ventral side. Description : Body small ; ovate-lanceolate in outline ; entire length, 2 inches ; greatest width about one-third of the distance from the anterior end, where it measured 9 /i 6 of an inch. Carapace a little more than one-fifth of the total length of the body; subrectangular in outline; length, y 2 inch; width, 7 /™ inch; lateral mar- gins nearly straight, anterior margin gently convex-forward; antero- lateral, angles rounded; posterior margin nearly straight except at the genal angles, where it curves slightly forward. Compound eyes mod- erately large, nearly one-third the length of the carapace, situated in front of the middle, more than twice as far apart as distant from the lateral margins, reniform, prominent; ocelli not visible. Ventral surface of carapace much broken. Preabdomen about one-sixth the length of the body, wider than long, greatest width about the fourth segment ; the edges of the ventral plates project slightly beyond the dorsal, which are slightly produced back-' ward into short spines. Postabdomen a little more than one-third the length of the body, the width decreasing more rapidly in the first and second postabdominal segments than in the more posterior ones; the length of the segments progressively increasing posteriorly; post-lateral angles slightly produced into short spines. Telson about one-fourth the length of the body, rapidly contracting from the articulation into a slender spiniform process, which tapers to a mucronate point, and is carinate on the ventral side. Appendages indistinct; imperfect impressions of portions of the proxi- mal parts of three appendages are visible on each side of the carapace, but are too indistinct to permit of description. Horizon and locality: In the lower part of the Essex (Edgewood) lime- stone ; near Essex, in Kankakee County, Illinois. Explanation op Plates Plate 15. — Mayville limestone Figure 1. — View of the Mayville limestone. The limestone overlies the iron ore in Iron Ridge, near Neda, Wisconsin. Figure 2. — Quarry in the Mayville limestone. The quarry is half a mile south of Peebles, Wisconsin. The upper layers furnish fossils characteristic of the Edgewood formation. XXIV— Bull. Ghol. Soc. Am., Vol, 27, 1915 324 T. E. SAVAGE ALEXANDRIAN ROCKS OF ILLINOIS AND WISCONSIN Plate 16. — Fossils from the Alexandrian Rocks Figure 1. — Schuchertella pecten var. roousta n. var. Ventral view of a nearly entire specimen. Kankakee limestone, Oswego, Illinois. Figures 2 and 3. — Glorinda transversa n. sp. Dorsal and ventral views of a nearly entire cast',' the type specimen. Kankakee limestone, Grafton. Illinois. Figure 4. — Stricklandinia eireularis n. sp. Dorsal view of a nearly complete specimen. Kankakee lime- stone, Oswego, Illinois. Figure 5. — Stricklandinia breviuscula n. sp. Dorsal view of an entire specimen. Kankakee limestone, near Channahon, Illinois. Figure 6. — Stricklandinia pyriformis var. varicosa n. var. Ventral view of a cast of the interior; type specimen. Kanka- kee limestone, Elgin, Illinois. Figure 7. — Stricklandinia, pyriformis var. elongata n. var. Dorsal view of an internal cast. Kankakee limestone, Elgin, Illinois. Figures 8 and 9. — Stricklandinia pyriformis n. sp. Dorsal and ventral views of a nearly entire shell ; the type specimen. Kankakee limestone, Hamburg. Illinois. Figure 10. — Stricklandinia pyriformis n. sp. View of ventral valve of a young shell. Kankakee limestone, along Kankakee River, 5 miles south of Richey, Illinois. Figures 11 and 12. — Platymcrella manniensis (Foerste). Ventral and dorsal views of nearly complete specimens ; after Foerste. Plate 17. — Fossils fronv the Alexandrian Rocks Figures 1 and 2. — Virgiana oarrandei var. major n. var. Ventral and dorsal views of an internal cast of large size. Upper part of Mayville limestone, Marblehead, Wisconsin. Figures 3, 6, and 7. — Virgiana oarrandei var. mayvillensis n. var. Dorsal, lateral, and ventral views of an internal cast; the type specimen. Upper part of Mayville limestone, near Mayville, Wisconsin. Figures 4 and 5. — Virgiana barrandei var. mayvillensis n. var. Ventral view of internal casts of two other shells. Upper part of Mayville limestone, near Mayville. Wisconsin. Figure 8. — Eurypterus pumilus n. sp. View of ventral surface of the type specimen. Natural size. Edgewood (Essex) limestone, near Essex, Illinois. BULL. GEOL. SOC. AM. VOL. 27, 1915, PL. 16 3 • ' ' 1 1 10 1 1 FOSSILS FROM THE ALEXANDRIA!* ROCKS BULL. GEOL. SOC. AM. VOL. 27, 1915, PL. 17 FOSSILS FROM THE ALEXANDRIAN ROCKS \y BULLETIN OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA VOL. 27, PP. 325-344 JUNE 3, 1916 PETROGKAPHY OF THE PACIFIC ISLANDS 1 BY REGINALD A. DALY (Presented before the Society December 28, 1915) CONTENTS Page Proposal of a comprehensive exploration 325 "Continental" rocks 326 Volcanic islands 326 Andesites and their genetic associates 327 Alkaline rocks 328 Quartz-bearing igneous rocks 331 Miscellaneous types 331 Conclusions 331 Table I. — Islands of Oceanica showing outcrop of "continental" rock 332 Table II. — Pacific islands described as volcanic, with list of igneous rock types 333 Leading references 341 Table III. — Number of islands from which rock species is reported 343 Proposal of a comprehensive Exploration Polynesia, Melanesia, and Micronesia, together with the isolated, open- ocean islands of the Pacific basin, include nearly 3,000 named islands. Not counting New Guinea, New Zealand, and their immediate satellites, the total area of these islands is about 73,000 square (statute) miles, or 189,000 square kilometers. Nearly one-half of the total is covered by a dozen islands, among which are Hawaii, Yiti Levu, Vanua Levu, New Pomerania, New Mecklenburg, and New Caledonia. The other islands average only about 12 square miles in area. That part of the ocean basin in which the islands are situated measures 35,000,000 square miles (90,- 000,000 square kilometers). Hence the complete mapping and investi- gation of a total land area less than that of the State of Nebraska would bring in practically all the information that can ever be obtained con- cerning the bedrock geology of one-sixth of the earth's surface. It is highly desirable that a single association shall soon undertake a compre- hensive study of these thalassic islands. If their geology, botany, zoology, 1 Manuscript received by the Secretary of the Society January 2, 1916. (325) 326 R. A. DALY PETROGRAPHY OF THE PACIFIC ISLANDS and anthropology were thus fully worked out, the results for general science would be incalculably beneficial. This paper is intended to emphasize the rich field for research to be found in the petrography of the Pacific islands. It is possible to sum- marize in a few pages nearly all that has been done so far in this field. The facts are most readily assembled in tabular form, and the three fol- lowing tables tell the story of published petrographic results up to Jan- uary 1, 1916. The tables primarily refer to Oceanica, but some other islands are included. New Zealand, New Guinea, and their satellites, as well as the islands close to continents, are not included. The tables are doubtless not quite complete, but they serve to stimulate the active petrologist. In spite of the very small amount of systematic work yet accomplished, the published facts can not fail to suggest certain questions regarding the origin of the Pacific lavas and other island rocks. Some of the problems will be briefly considered, particularly those dealing with the volcanic islands. "Continental" Eocks Table I lists the thirty-three or more islands which are now known, or have been suspected, to contain quartzose rocks, basic schists, serpen- tine, or deformed limestones. These are all rocks that abound in each of the continents and, for convenience, they may be called "continental rocks." Ellis's statement that he found quartz-feldspar rock on Borabora of the Society Group and Commander Thomson's reported discovery of granite and slate on Easter Island are both doubtful and need testing in the field. With those exceptions, all the Oceanican continental rocks so far known to the writer in published record lie west of a straight line joining the eastern Fijis with the Mariana Group. In principle this dis- tribution is, of course, well known and has long been explained in con- nection with the theory of Tertiary fragmentation of the Australia- Melanesia continent. Volcanic Islands The much longer Table II summarizes present-day knowledge of those open-ocean islands which are wholly or largely composed of volcanic rocks. To date 370 islands have been definitely so described. The whole number of them probably well exceeds 600. Of these only about 180 have fur- nished any information regarding the nature of their constituent rocks. Not a single island has yet been studied and mapped in the detail suited to the needs of petrology. In Table II there are 82 names of rock species. Most of these are readily grouped into four classes, respectively representing basaltic, ande- VOLCANIC ISLANDS 327 sitic, peridotitic, and "alkaline" magmas. Three other classes include transitions between basaltic rock and each of the other three chemical types or groups. An eighth class comprises quartz-bearing rocks, and a ninth includes a few species not certainly referable to any of the other classes. So far as the records go, the relative importance of these classes is suggested by Table III, which shows the number of islands where each rock species has been reported. Andesites and their genetic Associates In spite of the obvious difficulties, due to faulty nomenclature and general lack of chemical analyses, it is clear that typical olivine-bearing plagioclase basalt and as typical pyroxene andesite have been most often discovered, and it is safe to hold that the two species mentioned are by long odds the commonest lavas in Oceanica. The two occur side by side in at least 17 of the islands listed. They are connected by transitional varieties, including many olivine-free basalts, gabbros, diabases, etcetera, as well as the species named in Class 2 of Table III. All these relations are very often repeated on the continents, where, moreover, pyroxene andesite and plagioclase basalt are associated, not only in eruptions of the Kecent Period, but also in nearly all the great rock systems since at least the late Precambrian. When a given kind of rock association persists, both in time and space, it is reasonable to suspect syngenesis for the species involved. Elsewhere the writer has elaborated the thesis that pyroxene andesite and certain ultra-basic rocks may be complementary differentiates from plagioclase basalt. 2 More recently Cross has concluded that the andesites and other igneous rocks of the Hawaiian Islands have been derived from a general basaltic magma by a process of pure differentiation. 3 The experiments of Bowen have fully shown the possibility that the differentiation is based on the gravitative separation of crystals, though the other possibility — that the splitting is due to the gravitative separation of non-consolute liquids chemically similar to the phenocrysts, can not be excluded. 4 In view of this uncertainty, the present writer prefers to use the expression "gravitative differentiation," rather than "fractional crystallization" or "liquation," to indicate the method of splitting. In the writer's opinion, most of the rock species named in Classes 2, 3, 4, and 5 of Table III are best explained as formed by the more or less 2 Jour. Geology, vol. 16, 1908, p. 401 ; Memoir 38, Geoi. Survey Canada, 1912, p. 782 ; Igneous rocks and their origin, New York, 1914, p. 375. 3 W. Cross : Professional Paper 88, U. S. Geol. Survey, 1915, p. 87. * N. L. Bowen : Amer. Jour. Science, vol. 39, 1915, p. 175, and vol. 40, 1915, p. 184. 328 R. A. DALY PETROGRAPHY OP THE PACIFIC ISLANDS advanced gravitative differentiation of common olivine basalt, the most abundant of Pacific lavas. The grounds for this belief will not here be repeated. The chemistry and mineralogy of basalt, pyroxene andesite, dunite, wehrlite, lherzolite, and the corresponding transitional types sug- gest that the splitting has been, in a sense, spontaneous, and not induced by the incorporation of any foreign material except, perhaps, vadose water in a few cases. The natural condition for such splitting won Id be a comparatively low temperature for the basaltic magma. If, at such a temperature, a certain percentage of the phenocrystic material were to segregate and then settle out, the remaining liquid would have the com- position of molten pyroxene andesite. The mother liquor might freeze in the volcanic vent, giving a dioritic rock, or freeze on the surface after its extrusion as a lava flow, giving the andesitic type. The temperature appropriate for gravitative differentiation may be temporarily established in a basaltic vent at any epoch in its history, but probably most often toward the close of the life of a great basaltic volcano, when the feeding magmatic chamber approaches the temperature of final solidification. Even then, however, flows of primitive basalt may often be expected to alternate with flows of andesite, and these with flows of picrite or picritic basalt. Such alternations are common among the superficial, and therefore younger, lava flows of the gigantic Hawaiian volcanoes. 5 In general, the field relations of the Pacific island lavas seem to agree with the hypothesis of gravitative splitting for the andesites, etcetera; yet the hypothesis is emphasized more to indicate the need of special, detailed field-work in the islands and to serve as one of the guides in that research than to suggest any finality for the explanation. Alkaline Eocks The twenty-six species listed in Class 7 are called "alkaline," after the Eosenbusch tradition. The word is, of course, used metaphorically. Thus in Class 7 are placed several species which are not rich in alkalies, but the world over are regularly, and doubtless genetically, associated with alkali-rich species. Alkaline rocks have been found in thirty-five of the islands, repre- senting thirteen major archipelagos and two isolated islands. In thirty e In Professional Paper 88 of the U. S. Geological Survey (p. 92), Cross states that the writer believes all of "the upper 6,000 feet of Manna Kea" to be composed of ande- sitic and closely allied, trachydoleritic, rocks. This statement is based on a complete misapprehension. Throughout his published account of the lavas on the upper slopes of Mauna Kea (Journal of Geology, vol. 19, 1911, pp. 297, 311, 313), the writer refers only to the surface rocks on the eastern side of the volcano. It is entirely possible that typical olivine basalt occurs at the surface in "the upper 6,000 feet" of Mauna Kea and very probably is there much more abundant below the surface. ALKALINE ROCKS 329 islands, including examples in twelve archipelagos, as well as two iso- lated islands, the alkaline rocks are associated with feldspar basalt or its chemical equivalent, gabbro. With abundant repetition the "Atlantic" and "Pacific" types of lava are both found in the same small island. Here, as elsewhere in the world, the hypothesis that the two suites are differentiation products of primordially distinct magmas meets obvious and apparently fatal difficulties. In the Auckland, Fiji, Hawaiian, Juan Fernandez, Samoan, and Society groups the immense preponderance of the subalkaline basaltic rocks is already clear. In fact, the simplest explanation of nearly all the alkaline rocks of the Pacific is that they have been derived from primitive basaltic magma. Cross has recently adopted this view of the trachytic, nephelite-bearing, and melilite-bearing rocks of the Hawaiian Islands. 6 He states that the alkaline rocks in Hawaii and elsewhere are "products of the same general process of differentiation as the other rocks with which they are associated. They are simply the extreme phases of the group now known and are connected by intermediate lavas with rocks assumed by Daly to result from gravitative differentiation." Cross makes these statements without giving any proofs or any suggestion as to how or why a pyroxene andesite was differentiated from the primitive basalt in one place and a phonolite, a melilite basalt, or a soda trachyte in another. However, it is right to suppose that the conditions must have been different in the two cases. What, then, is the controlling factor in the generation of an alkaline rock from basaltic magma? Smyth's thesis, that the alkali-rich rocks are the results of concentrating alkalies by mag- matic emanations or "mineralizers," is very helpful. It should specially aid some penologists to emerge from the mysticism induced by that over- worked term "differentiation." Too many authors have considered their intellectual work done when they have concluded that a rock or a rock series is due to differentiation. Seldom do petrographic memoirs contain a word about the mechanism or steps of the magmatic splitting, which the authors of the memoirs affirm to be the origin of the rocks concerned. For the alkali-rich rocks Smyth has shown a more excellent way ; yet his thesis seems to need an important supplement. His essay does not an- swer the question as to why the magmatic gases were specially abundant and hence specially able to segregate the alkalies of an initially sub- alkaline magma. It does not explain the very general association of lime-rich magmas with alkali-rich magmas. It does not explain the abundance of lime minerals in many alkali-rich rocks. It does not ex- plain the generation of feldspathoids in place of the usual feldspars. 6 W. Cross : Professional Paper 88, U. S. Geol. Survey, 1915, pp. 87 and 90. 330 R. A. DALY- — PETROGRAPHY OF THE PACIFIC ISLANDS These and allied facts have prompted the suggestion that the solution of sedimentary material in subalkaline magma has led to the development of many of the so-called alkaline rocks. 7 Limestone is here the most significant of the sediments, on account of its fluxing power, its inoculat- ing power, and its extremely high content of volatile matter. Yet other kinds of sediment would in less degree affect the chemical equilibrium of a subalkaline magma in which they might be dissolved. According to the writer's hypothesis, the most potent "magmatic mineralizers" engaged in concentrating the alkalies while forming alkali-rich submagmas are largely "resurgent" rather than "juvenile" in origin. This recognition of syntexis and sedimentary control in the development of such rocks as soda trachyte, phonolite, foyaite, etcetera, seems to supply the lack noted in Smyth's hypothesis. Cross and Marshall have rejected the writer's explanation of the alka- line rocks of Hawaii and Tahiti respectively. Each is doubtful that the volcanic vents supplying the alkaline magmas pass through limestone which could be assimilated in the required quantity. 8 But the percentage of limestone so dissolved in a large body of hot basalt may be very small, in order to cause the development of a flow of phonolite or a flow of the strongly contrasted melilite basalt. Can any one doubt the possibility that much calcareous material is included in the submarine portions of the Hawaiian and Tahitian volcanic masses ? Is it extreme to hold that enough of this deep-lying sediment is present to match the relatively minute volumes of alkaline rocks in Hawaii and Tahiti? Clearly the origin of the alkaline rocks can not yet be demonstrated, but little prog- ress toward that demonstration is made by implying or asserting that no limestone beds have been cut by volcanic vents in islands like Hawaii and Tahiti. Other rather remarkable arguments have been published against the hypothesis of limestone control. One of them may be quoted: "If an alkaline rock cuts a limestone in dikes or stocks, this fact proves that that limestone did not have anything to do with the alkalic character of the cross-cutting body." 9 To a believer in magmatic stoping and abyssal assimilation this "proof" carries no conviction. However, this is not the place to discuss the objections in detail ; suffice it to say that those so far announced have not shaken the grounds on which the sedimentary-control hypothesis of the alkaline rocks has been founded. 7 R. A. Daly : Bull. Geol. Soc. Am., vol. 21, 1910, p. 87 ; Igneous rocks and their ori- gin, New York, 1914, pp. 393-445. Cf. C. H. Smyth : American Journal of Science, vol. 36, 1913, p. 33. 8 W. Cross : Professional Paper 88, U. S. Geol. Survey, 1915, p. 90 ; P. Marshall : Trans. New Zealand Institute, vol. 47, 1915, p. 372. 9 W. Cross : Op. cit., p. 90. CONCLUSIONS 331 QtTAETZ-BEAEING IGNEOUS EOCKS As already noted, the quartz-bearing lavas, Class 8 of Table III, are probably confined to the region of continental fragmentation in the south- west Pacific. Their origin is a world problem specially affecting the geology of the continents, and the Pacific islands are not likely to shed much light on that complex subject. Yet in island or mainland one of the chief facts to be considered is the general association of feldspar basalt or its chemical equivalent with quartz-bearing lavas, where the latter types do occur. That fact is explained by the syntectic-differentia- tion theory of igneous rocks. No other explanation covering the ascer- tained field, chemical, and mineralogical relations has yet been published. Miscellaneous Types The species listed in Class 9 have uncertain affinities. Most of them are chemically related to basalt or ordinary gabbro, and their genesis probably involves no important principle not represented in the origin of Classes 2 to 7, inclusive. Conclusions The available petrographic data do not yet, of course, permit of final conclusions as to rock origins, but they do suggest : ( 1 ) that underneath the Pacific the only primary magma is, and long has been, of basaltic composition; (2) tha.t the pyroxene andesites and picritic types are direct differentiates of this primary magma itself; (3) that the alkaline rocks may possibly be due to the solution of comparatively small proportions of limestone in the primary basalt, the syntexis being usually masked by differentiation. The primary basalt may most simply be conceived as forming a con- tinuous stratum beneath the whole ocean basin. From this subcrustal stratum material has been eruptible, locally and from time to time. The failure of quartz-bearing lavas in most of the basin suggests that the basaltic substratum is there not overlain by a solid quartzose crust, as it is in continental areas. With this conception may be correlated the geodetic proofs of specially high density beneath the Pacific Ocean. Suggestion and hypothesis have great value if they lead to action, to renewed search in nature for the facts. A glance at the larger aspects of Pacific petrology shows how pitifully slight is our knowledge of the island petrography. Now is not the time for settled convictions. Now is the time for concerted, persistent effort, leading to a thorough explora- tion of the Pacific archipelagos, under the auspices of a single institution with a. staff of cooperating observers. 332 R. A. DALY PETROGRAPHY OF THE PACIFIC ISLANDS Pd PL, o PS o ■ H P O o o iZ! o O & o 03 c Szi < Pi a ^ a a o o co w C3 o3 a a "O d a a 03 ~: 4-> 4J .a xi be be © a> a a 02 OQ © .a CCS a w w w a ;* 03 £j 03 a 53 ^ aj g .^ .S a a a,a a? K. 03 03 85 0> O IS- JZJ 02 02 J >H 0) CD 03 :|3. © 03 03 a & & si , . Jl 03 CO g aa O 03 S3 §00 03 © U 03 a*— 03 as— -w a co be a a 1 3 a^3 a t. &i a a O M © a o a ^^ o Li O . u u S tn 03 03 ^ s a a » •^ :?3 :o3 03 o3- f-i Fi .a r-H c o .© la a a 03 ©~ a Ha o 03 .-^ ©^ CO eg o a o o 03 C3 +* S a S o3Q r-, 03 O -o 03 CO B "S a 03 C3 03 -iH „ © © 03 .Q ,© 03 •a »a a '»j 9 aa.a 2aa g a a ap a h 32 a da 03 >>a a,a a a p be 03 a 52 03 03 • 2 * • E a . c o ^i 03 •£ a 03 o 3 -O 03 a o3 -w aa « o ^ a - ° 03 03 q, O a £r.© c © 'S . ~ a a J •Sn a atjS o g . b a as n 03 © |8 Li© .2 or fl a 03 03 t3 a a ^ 03 9 03 a « & or i) 03"^ a 03 "fl a © 03 So "S 03 03 S3- 1 -' a a o> -S "ill 2 S © t, .i-l i— i r. p«H O a os^ © Si v a •o -— © c«- a X X o art a agg. rt S^ c3l 5v?^^© k 2o>©©ao3'3S , C 3SSti ^r^ §12 g§ S=£ ^ is o rt .a-? ©© *" « MO OEr #£ G 2 o O -w O 03 .a +j a — .a © a o? =2 a u « 03 a O 1 as g 5 03 >j © ^M"SM a -a o> © ^3 a -° * — ti a 0) J5 t) T3 a -O a> CS 4) u a s "cc ISLANDS OF OCEANICA 333 < ~ ft ft a ft d =5 cCO —. <-- d of ft S ad S o ft +J id u o ft u 03 d KJ a; 03 4-S d .a 4) 0) rrt Id d so .-£ oT ~ s-i £ ■*>£ 2 a> ^ ^ d o 2 - fl £d S 33 d u _d d d Cs C? 03 03 o ft « oS >.5rt _-'d OS d c 03 -u - ■^ 03 £) o> u +* o d d T 4- 0) N w N N oS in oS d d os d d awaa J» •• 0) SH a d ' oS o? 5 ,5 05 w Eh 00 M o o IN -p(M flH ^' d W -S -tf w ^ Ph 1=1 ^S d ■H OS O -t-> oS CO •d Speigh Marsh Thorns Speigh Marsh p 03 O fin: oS _ 02 0U 03 rt 3o,^ M S^d'S M oq d d* ft •?d-d/ SB oToj d-S rt +-> +J -r-H -2 ^5 fcpos w d J* -d « -g w> S fl «5 rtl ■ V N N d d ^ d ^ ° © OS ^ OS "S rt u u d sh d £ 03 53 "d o < Pn ^ d d OS a -w f-i oS w o o 02 03 oS d d d •—■ •p.Soo gas <73 (7j ci sal M W) os ft ft 1 ^ mm OS 03 d -d d oS +j -d M "Sj ft 02 5 *"l J^ 03 teg 03 ^?-? eg 03 J2 +J rt *^ d d aj R- d 3 > a o 0) a; +j cS o: cS oS »p s O I *+-' > S »a d ft^^ . o>" 9 d -^ - ftjb -^ ■S «5 k. 0) H d l be « « T ~ fe a> o X) . — te o <2 3 os saw OP d g" S - 2 > £3 la 3 H © ' »5 « -s a os a fll cS 50 bo © ©t! o ■4-1 H jjH . H cS © os a S'3,0 1 oS oS •A X oS oS M M — . — 33^ ■J© .© .©■ oS cS cS r* rh r^ © © >j ■M +J J? .i-i .i-i A3 02 02 ft © © £7 a a ft © © .d +-> I+J O g g CO"H © ^ © 02 2 ft » 3 fee ,d a a © a „- .a a p © . jj © © £ 02 ^ ^ 03 50 -T • © ^ © 2 © £ . a S a fee © fee > >-- 3 £ ^.5,a os u a 3 , © \© o 3 .Q 3 fl ©^ fl & 03 © oS oS oS Je £ J* 3 la la 02 02 02 OOO ©^ s © -J +J §•02 & © Zh T* ' a .° ©' OS +3 © a © .©: -C T! fee © OH -di H oS ■Sg-glgt&iJH ■i^?a '^ ^*H ^^i . "• ^ *ir rr 5- oS © (-• M *- :^3 3 w © 2 ft o ft 3 Q © 03 CS S^^ > cS -^ ^•°o5 a§ft © .a 50 >-. > d K S © ?-3 © "© *d fn r3 0> na 3 a a 3.2 m M 3 a ,, © 02 ft M d 3 cS d o oS^J d 3 MH VOLCANIC ISLANDS 335 3-" _ p a d oS oS so ,d ,d ^ o o Ci -H •'-I c3 cj ^5rP| CO CO OS 03 ioia g oc id lO lO ' d <£ id Id 50 ^ co" d d oSfeoSoSi£cS£:PlcSoS ,d CD ,P .d > d ft pi p o oj £ oj a; o CO CO CO >-j OJ " Pi PI di -M CD CD ^ ft! co --; d "TS r2 -d oS Pi P cS jn u oS •P.P CO CO cp a) fltl PI Pi cp a; cd jj F 1 i its * OS £ bo'Scii S&g CO CO S ~ -ol OS os£ 3 N OS 'u . o a> d >> ^2 .S" OS d be ° :»n w Pi ^ 3 p ^ co d P ^C oS °S o,P ■ ' ft be oT d „ P-S o ■fi "S .g ft m d os £> .q P p ."d i) =s o" p i' 01 O P . ^o .a -u a ys d £ ^ aT Z2 cS 50 „^j *d ej o> --I S 50 O . os £ a; g ^ 0) ft CD OJ CD CD CD SI CD CD D .5 .'Pi .~ .3 V — i .p; .t; fl be bl] > d (■* be be "Pd^fl^dd 'be 'be > 'sh'bD > SSS3SS < < o < < o CD CD cj .9.S ft 55 § oSfj ' d ^ o .d -rH C CD S. C 50 ^ 50 ^-3 g O w 1) i coS d be p o & a. ^ -d -w 2 oJ oJ S 1 ei S .d .d 9 ^ • r-c I -P tj ? oS CD w ■S.S •Sf OS & -d Q fa XXV — Bull. Gbol. Soc. Am., Vol. 27, 1915 P S 3 &SS oS d-2 os^ o a Pi a Sh ^ (^ cj O Si OS oS OS O P p .5 oS O os be p . . p . . > . . a) 3 ^ OS P >a S ^Z^OO^^!> P W ^H P << P > 336 R. A. DALY — -PETROGRAPHY OF THE PACIFIC ISLANDS B OOGO OO < CI CI CI : to 1- a a "3 § a 05 02 CO ,B 02 ^ !J 1< O ■< a a a r^ a B oj 0> ■M 4> 't>ca fl - sS oj o> p| 4) a -r - o> . B -u 02 B ^3 a U B H 4> as > to > 0) a Q Ot-! CJ CQ -3 3 O 02 .5 3 a 23 oj a ?oO >, ?2 4> SOD a 02 52 o5 52 "3 02 ? ? © .0 go 6 60 5 §5 rj Oj .in 02 ft Oj go as m SI w £ oj .0 " 02 fl V ;j •; sp^ a- 1— 1 a JOB 't 1 - & ±3 >? °-a " s a_£ B 02 02 a) a> cj +j ^ ^ % a 2 £ ^ ft,a S 0> 4> 4j b oj ,a U o 02 .rt 4) B fl 1) bo o.a i ■3 o a ^ "~ l 7* B >a oj -u ,0 ■ Oj «2 +j ^ O T3 Xj b S oj £ OJ g+'ou -5 0> xj h oj ^ 02 4) Oj B^ >• 4) I! -,B O; ^ 4) fcC S O m Si 03 a ■P Oj 0) „ a j V Oj •H 02 o a oj.—- . 02 4) 4 oj -M F r 1 m Oj oj »2 02 S * ' S O) oj a 02 T-i a

,0 o) o) ri a rt rl 03 ^fl B B oj ^ t- > g 4) .!-! -r-j ^ +J O CO o 00 Sg^Sfl^ar ag S '3 3 3 S ? » *3 o -S 5 -5 a & OS oj JS oj Oj a Oj >,/ a Oj 02 '3 Oj o o Oj Oj 02 05 ^a ai &faa 02 02 a 02 tn ^ ^ t-i Oj Oj 2 Si §§2§ 02 Sh Oj 4) . -°o -a os a 02 +j O rn 4> oj -rt o rt 4) >B 4) oj a a o u O ox O oj a m a a Of a o a o ft a 05 . 02 02 Oj 4) O B 9* 4) o> a ±Z a 75 02 S3 d 4 j' o> a .2 § .3 B 5-s*ft 5 o S aj sj ■a 03 b bp oj o « oj a h'o 2 g-oj s s P r— I Oj fl o w pfl O 4J O 02 flfe 03 VOLCANIC ISLANDS 337 J3 Xi JZ H EH EH ^A--C ^ © ©© © t tH ■* TH ~-^ v — ' " — ' +j -1-3 +J 4J A ■ dd d 60 60 &JD bo '53 0> O) 0) a a a w mm SQ ^ O) O 0) OJ D 0) D ■rt £ .£ .t •& -M -M -M OOOOOO OO a IS d oS s-i 'so > 60 -d ade oli ite. d OS .. fl OS ite site gra a? +j 60 «B O p'S'd 'co o oS fl d "d OS 0) CO .P ' H 'So OS > o d OS j_r w O ' *H -w ■'if "3 .Sn CO • co d «j a 6o a 1SS1 • O Js •£ 60 •73 j,Q +J +J a +. : cs • 0) h ugite-h livine andesi andesi "5 o > •— livin uff f ite. < C ■O EH < o (rt n3 0) P "3 ^ H 5r! £ — - x ~ 1 ,z ■ ri N OS ^s s « oi tn 03 CS oS a q £«2 O oj oS d-d CO CO g 1 OJ O WW a d |f u"Si •r 1 '^ 2 % cs « 03 ^ 0~ 60 d P o> o - d S .—( 03 33 co o o> o ,0 'S'Hi cs oS O d o> O "3 'So To G S3S a d O OS p 6B p d — oS oS d d CO CO oS oS : d ■ >» . +j .. a ■ d . +j : os X : ss . £ ; o • .a ! V • o ; >, ■ 3 • B3 • tf ■ C ^ O '. -i— . >5 . . O d o . tf oS • — ?-J oS u> , 60 o : « V o o S S S S oS oS ^ oS CO CO 0) CO oS oS -w oS gg«°S © 00- -a -d d oi .a .'S oS d d - d o 0) .5 +j 4> *s rt C' "3 X ^ ■CO ^ 71 >. - OPQ^"P5 CO „j OS S 9 2 d d oi u d D d X ■= ? t^ oS d &- o ^2 r >,L5 r HoS'i-i-<-ija;P i -'r; O w .„ a '3 o fl a ^ o-d d d 'd-n >= >> &'§)rt l 2 , § 2-g^-d a s -Jh o M d d o tw a co oS ' g d 8* 3 os a d os o> a> o 338 R. A. DALY PETROGRAPHY OF THE PACIFIC ISLANDS 3-8 '£, W C^ cd n3 A o jh a O V* OO 02 CD • 02 72 ^ !_i (1) ^ ^ oS o3 ? oS oS ft a o - u 020 s-l a a o o _j >w qj a eg > t> oS ft 03 ta a \_ a os" / H a B--S ^ os n _, £>C £ a±e a br a. a 9 r- a 33 cd cd cd cd 1> Sh ££ „ +J a 72 . • a aj • .o-SS • (H O a ft as. CD ft • a - ■ ■F 1 +J o"| _ 02 . 4J~ a • %* : !» CD . a -*-> ■QS • CD . -a •rt ft f-i a • ftaf ' a • ■• 02 • £ a a a= 02 . H a . a3 ft CD a be a a 2 CD a CD oj ll 02 02 2 a 02 WCCO K ~ &J0 ; , ... +3 a +j «-• j'_ BSa a a as a cd -a a 71 a - a w 3; 52 5j cj?S-S a2 43 mS o a -a' a & ft .-S & o 02 -a 02 a >o o -c ^; Em Em ; : ft^aa a m, S • °;a • • • . gg§g£~lp. 3lftjjgg ":|:s a cd a • CM CM 02 U a ^3 -a MH ^C ^A^-A X GO GO iM — - a a 03 a: a) a: 02 02 O; Fh F-i r: a a S §£ +j a S oa a ft ■S ft ^M ^+j O "I- 3 >> o1| a3 a g ftX2 +2 -w g+J a *r* a 02 .> 32 PC OK a£ a a o ft ft If- r5 ^ ft _, S ao^ CD fe O ^«2 "SCQ III a o.S a o a a 02 z 02 VOLCANIC ISLANDS 339 os .p B t*S P I -- -c •* o aT os£ p£ 6J)H t^T itic ephe hau wehi W P ■„. 0) oj . cc ^4 ih Js 3, e roc inol eni -M « S>> •r 1 a; P a> &-p ft •H P a aj r o> r- H +J •> pO +j -5 w £j >h O D OSP 5? 23 .b-H u U P P « 0) p ■ H oS cd aT 9 03 (D -p a> S ^ § P os ■3 .£ jz P ft bt QO OS CO 0) & 03 m 05 CO 03 ? 0) M fl ft-r p^ 03 - s s -s ? b N CO 03 OJ p P 03 >. P^ 03 t3 a flH 03-^ VI >i "£ a 03 P/ • .00 Guppy (11) Guppy (11) Marshall (2 (11) (11) (11) Guppy Guppy Guppy ^ %b o> p bo c 03 „ IP o> Pp? ."S N P S3. SpS •r-l 02 p-p OS p 03 S d S a; So p-O <1 Q 03 a3 P in .ij o3 02 50 o 'P r 1 ■y p To ^ © g 'P 'd& .. i> O *P -- P Pi 03 hO 03 qj bOrg P +3 0> T3 -^ a - P "55 "fj os TJ Pn 1) P P*^ S -S -, 03 P P Pn os P u O P >3 P rp ITS P P 03 h 02 02 P .H OS b0 X 340 R. A. DALY PETROGRAPHY OF THE PACIFIC ISLANDS 0> 00 W • — - r o ^ S3 - Newton. Newton. Newton. Newton. a a 03 a~ Teall and Teall and Teall and Teall and Cohen, Wi Marshall ( 05 4> S ^ S §^ 05 -y 05 rt r n - 3 °s ^3^ * -y ."S a3 o< a? ■ S "3 S s 2 a V 03 o fl 5 T3 a a bO bJO 05 i— i -rt 03 ^h b* :=! d — f- 1 zl S "3 2 o3 § .g c3 £ tH *BQ rgl 05 5° 03 ^j fcjc j3 •rH r-i rH r- 1 ._j 03 «j H * o3 +* '. 03 05 ci •° : o ; +j , cu a : ^ +J ■ 03 05 o3 •° : u . '. 03 OJ . a£ • 05 i—i . -« o . ^ d „pi o - : h 0) •^ •f . .a £? ! 03 £3' be W 3 03 S a; CO — ss n 'bid 0) 0) DOfl n "S o3 _ , m S 03 0) ^j g -r 1 ,-n 05 > 03^ WO o 0) ft §§^Hft gWfr^^&O > ^ 03 OH v2 O =5 O O cjd bibliography 341 Leading References 1. E. C. Andrews : Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology, Cam- bridge, Massachusetts, volume 38, 1900. 2. Bornstein: Peter. Geog. Mitt, 1914 (1), page 315. 3. E. Cohen: Neues Jahrbuch fur Mineralogie, etcetera, 1880 (2), page 23. 4. L. Cohn: Peter. Geog. Mitt., 1913 (2), page 315. 5. W. Cross : Professional Paper Number 88, United States Geological Survey, 1915. 6. R. A. Daly : Journal of Geology, volume 19, 1911, page 289. 7. A. Diesseldorff : Neues Jahrbuch fur Mineralogie, etcetera, 1903 (1), Referate, page 255. la. F. Dietrich : Untersuchungen fiber die Boschungsverhaltnisse der Sockel ozeanischer Inseln, Griefswald, 1892, page 7. 8. G. C. Frederick : Quarterly Journal of the Geological Society, volume 49. 1893, page 227. 9. J. S. Gardiner: Quarterly Journal of the Geological Society, volume 54, 1898, page 1. 10. F. A. Gooch : Tscher. Min. Petr. Mitt., 1876, page 133. 11. H. B. Guppy : The Solomon Islands, London, 1887. 12. H. B. Guppy : Observations of a naturalist in the Pacific between 1896 and 1899, London, volume 1, 1903. 13. A. Harker : Geological Magazine, volume 8, 1891, page 250. 14. M. Hartmann : Neues Jahrbuch fur Mineralogie, etcetera. 1878, page 825. 15. J. P. Iddings : Igneous Rocks, New York, volume 2, 1913. 16. E. Kaiser : Jahr. k. preuss. geol. Landesan., volume 24, 1903, page 110. 17. A. Kramer: Mitt, aus den deut. Schiitzgebieten (folio), 1908, page 169. 18. A. Lacroix : Bull. soc. geol. France, volume 10, 1910, page 91. 19. E. Lehmann : Tscher. Min. Petr. Mitt, volume 27, 1908, page 181. 20. W. Lindgren : Water-supply Paper Number 77, United States Geological Survey, 1903, page 14. 21. J. J. Lister : Quarterly Journal of the Geological Society, volume 47, 1891, page 590. 22. A. Liversidge : Proceedings of the Royal Society of New South Wales, volume 20, 1886, page 235. 23. P. Marshall : Transactions of the New Zealand Institute, volume 41, 1908, page 98. 24. P. Marshall : Transactions of the New Zealand Institute, volume 47, 1915, page 361. 25. P. Marshall : Transactions of the New Zealand Institute, volume 42, 1909, page 333. 26. P. Marshall: Transactions of the New Zealand Institute, volume 47, 1915, page 387. 27. P. Marshall : Subantarctic Islands of New Zealand, volume 2, 1909. 28. P. Marshall: Oceania, Heidelberg, 1912. 29. D. Mawson: Proceedings of the Linmean Society of New South Wales, 1905, page 400. 30. F. Mohle : Neues Jahrbuch fur Mineralogie, etcetera, B. B. 15, 1902, page 342 R. A. DALY PETROGRAPHY OP THE PACIFIC ISLANDS 31. E. Naumann : Zeit. deut. geol. Ges., volume 29, 1877, page 364. 32. K. Oebbeke : Neues Jahrbuch fiir Mineralogie, etcetera, B. B. 1, 1881, page 451. 33. W. R. B. Oliver: Transactions of the New Zealand Institute, volume 43, 1910, page 524. 33a. J. Petersen : Jahrb. Hamb. Wiss. Anst, volume 8, 1891. 34. P. D. Quensel : Bulletin of the Geological Institute, University of Upsala, volume 11, 1912, page 252. 35. E. Reclus : Ocean et Terres Oceaniques, Paris, 1889, page 389. 36. A. Renard: Report on the Petrology of Oceanic Islands (in Challenger Reports, volume on Physics and Chemistry, Number 2), 1889, page 149. 37. K. Sapper: Verb. XVII Geographentages zu Liibeck, 1909, Berlin, 1910, page 151. 38. K. Sapper : Mitt, aus den deut. Schiitzgebieten, Erg. Heft Number 3, 1910, page 58. 39. K. Sapper: Mitt, aus den deut. Schiitzgebieten (folio), volume 23, 1910, page 193. 40. R. Speight : Transactions of the New Zealand Institute, volume 42, 1909, page 241. 41. R. Speight : Transactions of the New Zealand Institute, volume 45, 1913, page 326. 42. R. Speight and A. M. Finlayson : Subantarctic Islands of New Zealand, Wellington, volume 2, 1909. 43. E. Suess : La Face de la Terre, Paris, volume 3 (iii), 1913, page 1040. 44. J. J. H. Teall : Quoted by D. Mawson, Proceedings of the Linnsean Society of New South Wales, 1905, page 411. 45. J. J. H. Teall : Quarterly Journal of the Geological Society, volume 54, 1898, page 230. 46. J. J. H. Teall and E. T. Newton : Geological Magazine, volume 4, 1897, page 151. 47. A. P. W. Thomas : Transactions of the New Zealand Institute, volume 20, 1887, page 311. 48. C. Velain : Bull. soc. geol. France, volume 7, 1879, page 415. 49. W. W. Watts and E. T. Newton : Geological Magazine, volume 3, 1S98, page 362. 50. M. Weber: Abhand. k. bayer. Akad. Wissen.. Math.-phys. KL, volume 24, 1909, page 287. 51. A. Wichmann : Journal of the Museum Godeffroy, Hamburg, Heft 8, 1875, page 123. 52. A. Wichmann : Neues Jahrbuch fiir Mineralogie, etcetera, 1875. page 658. 53. A. Wichmann : Journal of the Museum Goddefroy, Hamburg, Heft 14, 1879, page 213. 54. A. Wichmann : Neues Jahrbuch fiir Mineralogie, etcetera, 1879. page 663. 55. A. Wichmann : Tscher. Min. Petr. Mitt., volume 5, 1882, page 1. 56. A. Wichmann: Zeit. deut. geol. Gesell., volume 63, 1911, Monatsber., page 77. 57. T. Wolf: Verhand. Gesell. Erdkunde, Berlin, volume 22, 1895, page 253. 58. S. Yoshiwara : Geological Magazine, volume 9, 1902, page 290. NUMBER OP ISLANDS 343 Table III. — Number of Islands from which Eock Species is REPORTED Class Representing feldspar - ba- salt magma. 2. Representing transitions be- tween Classes 1 and 3. 3. Representing pyroxene - an- desite magma. 4. Representing transitions be- tween Classes 1 and 5. 5. Representing peridotitic magma. 6. Representing transitions be- tween Classes 1 and 7. 7. Representing magmas. "alkaline" Names given by authors Number of islands Olivine basalt 32 Feldspar (plagioclase) basalt 16 "Basalt" 26 Dolerite 14 Melapbyre 2 Olivine anamesite 1 Basalt porphyrite 1 Diabase 5 Olivine diabase 3 Diabase porphyrite 2 Gabbro 13 Olivine gabbro 2 Norite 1 - 118 Andesitic basalt 2 Basaltic andesite 3 Olivine andesite 6 Augite-olivine andesite 3 14 Augite andesite 37 Hypersthene andesite 11 Augite-hyperstbene andesite Pyroxene andesite 5 Augite-hornblende andesite 4 Hornblende andesite 12 •'Andesite'' (probably pyroxenie) 16 Augite porphyrite 1 Augite diorite 1 Diorite porphyrite 1 Feldspar porphyrite 1 Porphyrite l Diorite (in part ?) 7 - 102 Picritic basalt 7 Picrite 1 Dunite 2 Peridotite ] Wehrlite 4 Lherzolite l Diallage rock 2 11 Traehydoleritic basalt l Essexitie gabbro 1 Trachydolerite 2 Nephelite basalt 7 Nephelite-melilite basalt ?, Nephelite basantoid 1 Nephelite basanite (bearing haiiynite) 2 Basanite 1 Melilite basalt 1 Haiiynite-hornblende rock 1 Haiiynophyre 1 Magma basalt 1 344 R. A. DALY PETROGRAPHY OF THE PACIFIC ISLANDS Class 7. Representing magmas. "alkaline" 8. Quartzose rocks. 9. Residual types. Names given by authors Number of islands Limburgite (subalkaline ?) 6 Theralite '. 1 Tephrite 1 Monzonite 1 Nephelite syenite 1 Foyaite 1 Nephelite monzonite 1 Syenite (in part ?) 6 Trachyte 9 Soda trachyte 6 Phonolite 6 Nephelinite 1 Trachyandesite 1 Syenite porphyry 1 Tinguaite 1 Camptonite 1 Granite 12 Rhyolite or liparite 5 Quartz f elsite 1 Quartz porphyry 4 Quartz diorite 5 Quartz andesite 2 Dacite 3 Hornblende basalt 1 Hornblende gabbro 1 Bronzite basalt 1 Hornblende-mica andesite 2 Augite-biotite andesite 2 Trap-granulite 1 Kauaiite 1 Pyroxenite 1 Augitite 1 11 64 32 BULLETIN OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA VOL. 27, PP. 345-386 JUNE 5, 1916 DOMTNANTLY PLUVIATILE ORIGIN UNDER SEASONAL RAINFALL OP THE OLD RED SANDSTONE 1 BY JOSEPH BARRELL (Presented before the Society December 28, 1915) CONTENTS Introduction 345 Prevailing views regarding conditions of origin 349 Criteria as to modes of origin of sediments 352 Description of the Old Red Sandstone formations 362 General relations 362 Uppermost Silurian — Downtonian formations 364 Lower Devonian — Lower Old Red 366 Middle Old Red — Orcadian formations 370 Relations to older rocks 370 Old Red of the Moray Firth. 371 Formations of the Orcadie basin in Caithness 371 Old Red Sandstone of the Orkney Islands 374 Interpretation of the Orcadian deposits 375 Significance of conglomerates 375 Significance of colors 376 Significance of mud-cracks and rain-prints 377 Significance of intercalated limestones 377 Lowest Upper Old Red of the Shetland Islands 378 The Upper Old Red Sandstones 379 Geography of the British Isles in Devonian time. . 382 General conclusions on Devonian climate in British Isles. . . 385 Introduction The Devonian system is represented in the British Isles, except in the extreme south of England, by a thick series of red sandstones, shales, and conglomerates. Red sandstone is the predominate outcropping rock, the colors of which range from light red to deep chocolate brown, but in places exhibit green, yellow, gray, and mottled tints. The series of for- 1 Manuscript received by the Secretary of the Society January 25, 1916. (345) 346 J. BARRELL PLUVIATILE ORIGIN OP OLD RED SANDSTONE mations which make up this system have been known collectively since the early days of geologic science as the Old Eed Sandstones. In Cornwall and southern Devon the Devonian is represented by slates, grits, volcanic materials, and thick masses of limestone holding marine fossils ; but in Ireland, Wales, Scotland, and the contiguous parts of Eng- land the formations of equivalent age constitute the totally different facies, the Old Eed Sandstones. These show their contrast not only in lithologic character, but in their barrenness of marine fossils- The Devonian age of these rocks was in fact only known at first because of their intercalation between the formations of the Silurian below and Carboniferous above, both identifiable by their marine fossils. What, then, were the geographic and climatic conditions which con- trolled the nature of the Old Eed Sandstone deposits? The question is raised to a higher degree of interest because the formations, though barren of fossils of the sea, yet hold at certain horizons an abundant and varied fauna of ostracoderms and fishes, the latter including forms which lead toward the amphibians. The footprints of amphibians can be traced back to the close of the Devonian period. It was in the Devonian that they doubtless rose from air-breathing fishes. We must look, then, for our own ancestral tree within certain families of these Old Eed Sandstone fossils. . Was it within the physical conditions which determined the nature of the Old Eed Sand- stone, or was it from the open sea that certain fishes grew to breath the vivifying air, to crawl on the solid land, and inaugurate from such humble beginnings that dynasty of terrestrial vertebrates which through all after ages was to lead in the march of evolution and rule over the living things of earth? It can be shown with high probability that it was from "the faunas of the Old Eed Sandstone, molded in adaptation to the physical and climatic conditions which surrounded them, that the amphibians arose. Studies in evolution are commonly regarded as within the field only of comparative anatomists, either students of fossils or of living forms ; but the ancient life history of the earth embraces not only the organic remains, as shown by the fossils, but a study of the environment which surrounded them and to which their life activities made efficient response. The analysis and evaluation of this environment is as important in the complete mosaic of knowledge as is a minute description of the fossils of successive faunas. Yet the student of fossils is not, by virtue of his knowledge of fossils alone, qualified to interpret fully the life surroundings of those former organisms. For this he must draw on his knowledge of physical geology and the habitats of living forms. He must be able to GEOGRAPHY OF BRITISH ISLES IN DEVONIAN TIME 347 — 60 Figure 1. — Geography of the British Isles in Devonian Time The loci of deposition of the Old Red Sandstone of the Lower and Middle divisions are shown and are interpreted as river basins, not as lakes, though subordinate lacus- trine phases would attend fluviatile deposition. The outcrops of Devonian formations are shown in black. 348 - J. BARRELL FLUVIATILE ORIGIN OF OLD RED SANDSTONE interpret the meaning of the sediments which envelop the fossil — sedi- ments which are the record of the environment of the living animal. There is a side, then, to the ancient life history of the earth which belongs to physical geology. It is as a physical geologist, and not as a paleontol- ogist, that the writer has taken up the present problem, but with the purpose of showing the relations between the environment and the evolu- tion of air-breathing vertebrates. This article was prepared in essentially its present form in 190? and made the basis of a paper on the causes of the evolution of land vertebrates presented orally on December 26, 1907, to the American Society of Vertebrate Paleontologists. 2 It was withheld from publication because the writer hoped to make a personal field study of the Old Red Sandstone formations of the British Isles- These plans did not materialize, but in the meantime he has published a paper on the somewhat similar deposits of the Appalachian geosyncline, 3 and he has also published a number of critical studies on the interpretation of the sedimentary record. A broad knowledge of the geologic problems involved and the correctness of the criteria of interpretation are as important for drawing conclusions as are the local facts to be interpreted ; this is the basis of judgment which has led to a decision to publish the following study on the Old Eed Sandstone, chiefly because of its bearings on the problems of the evolution of the amphibians. The descriptions are taken from various memoirs, but experience shows that the features which serve best as criteria of origin have been often overlooked in the field or left undescribed in their reports by the older geologists, partly because of a lack of appreciation of their significance, partly because, even Avhen present, they are often as difficult to find'" as fossils and require similar painstaking search of fresh exposures. The central conclusion reached in this paper is that the Old Eed Sand- stone formations were not deposited in lakes or estuaries, nor are they of desert origin. The analysis of their characteristics and comparison with sediments now forming determines them to be river deposits accumulated in intermontane basins. This is a kind of sedimentation not now found in the British Isles. For a close analogy one may turn to the basin deposits of the western United States laid down in the Tertiary period between the growing ranges of the Cordillera. This reinterpretation of the Old Red Sandstone of the British Isles is in line with that which has gone forward in America during the past fifteen years in regard to the 2 Abstract in Science, vol. xxvii, 1908, pp. 254, 255. 3 The Upper Devonian delta of the Appalachian geosyncline. Amer. Jour. Sci., vol. xxxvi, 1913, pp. 429-472 ; vol. xxxvii, 1914, pp. 87-109, 225-253. GEOGRAPHY OF BRITISH ISLES IN DEVONIAN TIME 349 mode of origin of the continental Tertiary deposits : once looked on as deposited in lakes greater in area than any now existing on the earth, they are now regarded as accumulations made chiefly on river plains. Such a reinterpretation for the Old Eed Sandstone involves radical changes in the conceptions of Devonian geography — no less a change than the substitution of land surfaces, occasionally flooded, as a replacement in the mental vision of wide and permanent bodies of water. If the new interpretation is well founded, it means that such terms as "Lake Cale- donia" and "Lake Orcadie" should be turned into the "Caledonian and Orcadian basins/' Peevailing Views regarding Conditions of Origin Hugh Miller regarded the Old Eed Sandstone as a marine deposit, reaching this conclusion by direct comparison of the structures of the solid rocks with near-by tidal deposits now being made. It was soon per- ceived, however, by British geologists that the sediments and organic contents were of different types from the obviously marine Devonian strata to the south. These distinctions led Godwin-Austen in 1855 to a view, previously maintained by Dr. John Fleming, that the Old Red Sand- stone was laid down in great fresh-water lakes or inland seas. This in- terpretation soon became generally accepted- During the next generation the geologist who gave most thorough study to the subject was A. Geikie. He separated the Old Red Sandstone into several basins of deposition. According to Geikie, Lake Caledonia stretched across central Scotland, and within it were deposited a maximum thickness of perhaps 20,000 feet of strata. Other basins were occupied by the Welsh Lake. Lake Cheviot, Lake Lome, and Lake Orcadie. In the latter area there are exposed as much as 16,000 feet of strata. These views are developed in his paper of 1877-1878 4 and are summarized in his textbook in 1903. Macnair and Reid in 1896 give, however, what they regard as reasons for holding that the fresh-water lake hypothesis of origin is "utterly untenable" and come back to the view of Hugh Miller, that the Old Red Sandstone is marine. 5 In 1904 Good child published a paper which embraces the following statements : "There is no satisfactory reason for regarding any of the Scottish rocks of Devonian age as of marine origin ; and, on the other hand, there is much to be said in support of the view that they were all formed under continental con- 4 On the Old Red Sandstone of western Europe. Trans. Roy. Soc. Edinburgh, vol. xxviil, pt. ii, pp. 345-452. 6 Geol. Mag., Decade 4, vol. iii, 1896, pp. 106-116, 217-221. 350 J. BARRELL FLUVIATILE ORIGIN OF OLD RED SANDSTONE ditions, and under conditions of climate which, though doubtless varying much from time to time, were yet, on the whole, characterized by an annual rainfall decidedly below the average in amount. It is this feature which has imparted a common character to the whole of this series of rocks." "The fauna of the Upper Old Red consists almost exclusively of fishes which probably found their way into the sediments from the rivers of upland origin, whose waters were dissipated by the excessive evaporation when they reached the lowland area." "As regards the mode of origin of the Old Red of the Caledonian area (Lower Old Red), there appears to be evidence of a satisfactory nature that the whole of this vast formation was accumulated under continental condi- tions, partly in large inland lakes, partly as torrential deposits of various kinds, partly as old desert sands, and partly as the result of extensive volcanic action." 6 With these views the present writer is in accord, except that he would give first place to true fluviatile deposition, spreading sediments on broad and flat river plains, a form of deposition intermediate between torrential and lacustrine and yet quite distinct from either. It is one which is not, however, specifically mentioned by Good child. In 1907 the writer, unaware at the time of Goodchild's paper, presented the evidence showing the wide-spread development of floodplain deposits in the Old Eed Sandstone and the presence of a fluviatile piscine fauna. This view was, however, only published at the time in brief abstract. 7 In 1908 Walther published a volume entitled "Geschichte der Erde und des Lebens." In this is a chapter on the Devonian continent which lay northwestward from central Europe and which included Scandinavia and the British Isles. He includes in this same continent Greenland and the Canadian Shield- The name he gives to it is "The Old Eed Northland." The chapter, pages 254 to 271, is largely of general statements and draws an analogy between the climatic and sedimentary conditions of this con- tinent and the present interior of Asia and Australia. Walther states, for example (page 259) : "The northern Devonian land consisted of many parts. Many lines of frac- ture passed through the older mountain structures. Some of the principal lines extending northeast are yet visible. Often the sandstones lie on the steep-walled cores of the ancient mountains, filling up deep basins, so that great regions of deposition, as the 'lakes' of Orcadie, Caledonia, and Lome, can be distinguished. One should not conceive under that term, however, enduring bodies of water, but rather wide basins surrounded by mountains limited by temporary sheets of water, water which converged to shallow lakes of variable 6 J. G. Goodchild : The older Deutozoic rocks of North Britain. Geol. Mag., Decade 5, vol. i, 1904, pp. 591-602. 7 F. B. Loomis : The American Society of Vertebrate Paleontology. Science, vol. xxvii, Feb., 1908, p. 254. PREVAILING VIEWS AS TO CONDITION OF ORIGIN 351 area and depth. These would dry out until the next period of rains filled them." "We attain therefore the conception that the northern continent, already in the Upper Cambrian, again in the Upper Silurian, and further through the whole of the Devonian period, even into the Lower Carboniferous, possessed a hot desert climate whose dry periods were broken only seldom by the down- pours of thunder-storms." AValther considers the red colors as original to the sediments. From this he derives his name of the Old Eed Northland. There has been pre- sented, however, no evidence that the original sediments had the present color tones of the solid rocks. Dehydration and change in color of the iron oxide commonly accompany thorough cementation. Neither has there been presented evidence of pronounced wind action or the existence of evaporation deposits. It seems, therefore, that this picture of a desert climate is overdrawn. A truer view may center on a semi-arid climate and a land whose character lies half way between the permanent lakes of the British geologists and the permanent deserts of Walther. Jukes-Browne published in 1911 a revision of his volume on "The Building of the British Isles." In the chapter on the Devonian period he discusses the evidence which goes to show that the basins of Old Eed deposition were originally much wider than their present limits. The small areas he regards as remnants isolated by erosion. The difference in the faunas and floras of the Caledonian and Orcadian areas must therefore, as Traquair has argued, be due to shifting of subsidence and consequent shifting of deposition during the course of the Devonian, and not to the maintenance of permanent mountain barriers between them. Jukes-Browne recognizes Goodchild's arguments for a climate at times desert in character, but refers to the areas of deposition as lakes. These lakes, under his conception of greater area of deposit, become in fact fresh-water seas of far-reaching extent- Thus the essentially lacustrine conception is maintained and fluviatile deposition is not accorded a place of importance. In -America the trend of opinion in regard to the proper interpretation of the Old Bed Sandstone has been increasingly in the direction of ascrib- ing a larger importance to fluviatile deposition, but these views are mostly unpublished and have naturally therefore carried no weight in British opinion. The earliest American expression of view, in what is here re- garded as the right direction, was, so far as the writer is aware, that by T. C. Chamberlin in 1900. This pioneer in geologic thought, in a paper of philosophic nature on the habitat of the early vertebrates, suggested that the Old Bed Sandstone was deposited under conditions not unlike XXVI — Bull. Geol. Soc. Am., Vol. 27, 1915 352 J. BARRELL FLUVIATILE ORIGIN OF OLD RED SANDSTONE those now found m the Great Valley of California. There was, however, no presentation of detailed argument. Since then Grabau and the pres- ent writer have independently and repeatedly written on the part which the rivers of later Paleozoic time have played in continental deposition, dealing chiefly with the rivers flowing westward from Appalachia. The arguments for them apply with variations to the British deposits also. Grabau studied the latter some years since, in the field, and has stated that he is in full agreement with the conclusions of this paper in regard to the dominantly fluviatile character of the sediments. Approaching the subject from another side, Doctor O'Connell has written an extensive paper, entitled "The Habitat of the Eurypterida," to be published as one number of the Bulletin of the Buffalo Society of Natural Sciences. She has treated the subject of the Old Eed Sandstone at some length, pre- dominantly, though not exclusively, from the standpoint of the faunal evidences. The conclusion is reached in her paper that the eurypterids were preeminently a fluviatile fauna, and their associations in the Old Red Sandstone show that the latter is dominantly fluviatile. This is a supplemental line of evidence, and she states as a conclusion : "I am convinced that the detailed study of the geological and geographical distribution of the eurypterids (and I think the fishes, also) will do more than anything else to prove that they lived in the rivers, and that many peculiar deposits will be easily explained as of floodplain or delta origin when the importance of fluviatile deposition is once realized." 8 In the Textbook of Geology by Pirsson and Schuchert, published 1915, the view is adopted by Schuchert that the Old Red of Scotland is probably wholly continental. The opinions of Goodchild and Walther are quoted, but the basins, following the British custom, are still spoken of as lakes ; and it is stated # that Lake Orcadie may have extended as an estuary north- east to Christiania, in southern Norway, and possibly even to Petrograd, in Russia. The south Irish deposits are regarded by Schuchert as marine.* Criteria as to Modes of Origin of Sediments ° It is evident from the preceding review of opinions that a sound con- clusion regarding the geography of the British Isles during the Devonian period depends not so much on the accumulation of new facts of observa- 8 Personal communication. * Pages 715-717, 1915. 9 This topic is essentially a summary of such arguments as bear on the present prob- lem from articles published by the writer in the Journal of Geology and Bulletin of the Geological Society of America. If this article dealt only with American geology, a very brief restatement of these criteria would doubtless suffice ; but as the subject in hand is CRITERIA AS TO MODES OF ORIGIN OF SEDIMENTS 353 tion as on the soundness of the principles of interpretation- Especially important is the quantitative evaluation of the significance of various characteristics, since it is true that some lacustrine conditions will accom- pany fluviatile deposition and vice versa. Loose sand may be subjected to wind action and build dune structures even in humid climates. Semi- aridity is a condition which will permit the development of features which are also found in the most arid climates, and yet semi-aridity does not exclude the existence of abundant life. Semi-aridity is more widely asso- ciated with seasonal rainfall than with deficient precipitation throughout the year. The rainfall may be as abundant during the rainy season as that of truly humid climates. Fluviatile deposition is vitally distinct from either lacustrine or desert conditions, and semi-aridity is a type of climate equally distinct from either normally humid climates, on the one hand, or arid climates on the other. Yet it is fluviatile deposition under a semi-arid climate which is here held to have characterized the laying down of the Old Red Sandstone. This interpretation is essentially new and lies between that of the lakes of Austen and Geikie and the deserts of Walther and Goodchild. As stated to a considerable degree in a previous paper, 10 many features from which an observer may gain an impression as to the mode of origin of a deposit are really not definite proofs. Thus ripple-marked, cross- bedded, and fossil-barren deposits may be developed either beneath a permanent water cover or on river plains, though doubtless the quantity and quality of their development differ in the two cases. Red beds have been regarded by some, because of their color, as evi- dences of terrestrial deposition ; by others, of seas barren of life. Again, they have been cited as indications of a deeply decayed regolith, of a humid climate, or of aridity. The present writer holds that redness in rocks may in fact accompany any of these conditions, and is not therefore a criterion by itself of any one. 11 Mud-cracks and conglomerates have been cited usually as evidences of ancient tidal flats and beaches, but are now observed to occur chiefly in river deposits of continental interiors. Those formed in the littoral zone, furthermore, except on the fronts of deltas, are rather unfavorably situ- the mode of origin of formations in the British Isles and the special feature of the paper is the application of these criteria, it seems desirable to give a fuller review of the principles on which they rest. This is because it is hoped that the subject will he of interest to British geologists, to many of whom the papers on which this discussion rests may not be readily accessible. 10 Joseph Barrell : The Upper Devonian delta of the Appalachian geosyncline. Amer- Jour. Sci., vol. xxxvi, 1913, pp. 436-440. 11 Relations between climate and terrestrial deposits. (The climatic significance of color.) Jour. Geol., vol. xvi, 1908, pp. 285-294. 354 J. BARRELL PLUVIATILE ORIGIN OP OLD RED SANDSTONE atecl for geological preservation, and are to be distinguished by associa- tions which are commonly absent in ancient examples- 12 Thus it seems clear that it is the character, the quantitative development, and asso- ciations of the stratigraphic features, as well as the nature of the en- tombed organic remains, which are significant rather than their mere occurrence. In general, traditional criteria are liable to lead into error, because they become accepted as axioms and are applied without further thought. They lag behind the development of a science, whereas the very word "research" implies the necessity of continually testing the correspondence of the images of science with nature. Attention may now be turned to what may be regarded in the present- state of knowledge as fairly definite criteria, which will be of use in discussing the origin of the Old Eed Sandstone formations. A fresh-water origin for these deposits will be assumed as established and accepted by practically all geologists, but many are accustomed to thinking of the presence of fresh-water faunas and the absence of marine organisms as implying nothing more than land-locked, brackish-water bodies, perhaps fresh near their heads, as seen in Chesapeake Bay and the Baltic Sea. The deposits, following this conception, would be called estuarine. If clearly separated by a land barrier from the open ocean, then the deposits have in the past been usually regarded as lacustrine and taken to imply the former existence of great fresh-Avater lakes or inland seas. True estuaries must have been of limited development, however, in past times, since, like lakes, they are temporary features and are made by a rising sealevel against a land surface previously dissected by erosion- Deposits made in nearly landlocked water bodies, like the Baltic, should rather be called "bay formations." Where there is some intermingling, interfingering, and gradation of marine and fresh -water deposits with their respective faunas, the relation which is implied is commonly that of the shore of a. delta. Such a shore is marked by shifting growth, by wide advances and retreats, and the inclosure of marginal lagoons of various degrees of salinity. 13 In the Old Eed Sandstone of the British Isles these marginal delta phases are not so important as in the Devonian on the continent-of Europe and in eastern North America. They do occur, however, in northern Devon and in southern Ireland. The problem of the British Old Bed Sandstone really resolves itself into the discrimination between true 12 Joseph Barrell : Mnd-ciackp as a criterion of continental sedimentation. Jour, of Geology, vol. xiv, 1906, pp. 524-568. 13 Joseph Barrell : Criteria for the recognition of ancient delta deposits. Bull. Geol. Soc, Am., vol. 23, 1912, pp. .377-446. CRITERIA AS TO MODES OP ORIGIN OP SEDIMENTS 355 lacustrine deposits on the one hand and terrestrial deposits on the other. Terrestrial deposits may in turn be classified into fluviatile, torrential, glacial, and eolian. Lakes are characterized by being permanent water bodies as measured by the changes of decades, centuries, or longer periods. Constructional alluvial plains, on the other hand, are largely turned into temporary lakes during the annual season of flood and give thereby some similarities to lacustrine deposition, but are drained during the dry season, and their life is that of the land. In the upper part of the alluvial plains the river grades are steeper, the waste coarser, the flooded condition more brief. The marks of sub- aerial exposure are more dominant, as seen especially in the greater oxida- tion of sediments, giving red rocks on cementation, and the greater paucity of fossils. In the lower part of the plains, on the contrary, the grades are flat, commonly less than a foot per mile; the sediments are finer and more impervious to ground waters; the flooded condition is of greater annual duration, and in playa lagoons and swamps may in fact be permanent for a series of years. The rivers, owing to minor climatic fluctuations, will during one series of years entrench themselves and minimize the flooding of the plains. During other series of years they may rise high, flood their plains broadly and for longer periods, depositing an excess of waste- The channels also shift and the natural levees are built upward to above the level of all save the highest floods. In the same geologic section, therefore, river action is characterized by variable relative durations of exposure to flood waters and exposure to the air. True lake conditions, then, as distinguished from the temporary and subordinate water bodies connected with fluviatile deposition, are char- acterized on the margins by wave-formed sands and conglomerates, as distinguished from the current deposits of streams. The basins of per- manent lakes must be sufficiently deep to have the greater portion of their bottom below wave base. The shore deposits of lakes will conse- quently, for any one horizon, be essentially marginal, and the greater area of the lake will be marked by clays and fine silts deposited from suspen- sion. Regular, even lamination, giving rise to paper-thin shales, will be typical. Lenses of sand, but especially beds of conglomerate, will be absent. The presence or absence of sand is in itself, however, of doubtful value as a criterion. Conglomerates, on the other hand, when they are of wide-spread occurrence, are of the highest significance. For floodplain conditions there are a number of definite criteria de- pending on the texture of the deposit and the climate under which they are laid down. Where the deposits are argillaceous and the climate is 356 J. BARRELL FLUVIATILE ORIGIN OF OLD RED SANDSTONE one subject to dry seasons, the most important criterion consists of marks of subaerial exposure, developed both broadly and vertically through mechanical sediments. These consist chiefly of mud-cracks, rain-prints, and impressions of roots in situ. Where these occur in such relations they seem to show conclusively a terrestrial origin, and not to represent the littoral facies of a marine or lacustrine formation. Not only, as stated previously, does the shore form at any one time but a narrow border to the accumulating mantle, but, except on the front of an advancing delta, it is commonly a region of erosion rather than of accumulation- Tidal flats are furthermore flooded and drained twice per day, with the result that they are always limited in width and are cut by deep channels. These conditions are quite distinctive from those which are found inland. For over deltas and playa basins, on the contrary, every part is alternately covered by water and by air for considerable periods of time. Where the climate is suitable mud-cracking is developed habitually and on a broad scale. Mud-cracking in chemical sediments — that is, in limestones^ most typically the impure or "water-limes" — must, however, be distinguished in significance from the cracking in claystones. Lime carbonate is car- ried in solution and its deposition as limestones requires a comparative absence of sand and clay, the mechanical deposits carried by rivers and by waves. The solutions, to have sufficient concentration, may come from permanent water bodies, either lakes or seas. The deposit, therefore, comes not from the direction of the land, but from the direction of the water. The cracking goes on between the extreme levels of high and low water, and the slight shifting of level is not a tidal, but at least a seasonal, phenomenon. Such mud-cracking of limestones is a playa phenomenon, and especially in certain earlier ages, when the lands were baseleveled and lay awash with the sea, broad areas seem to have been at times marine playas. Marine fossils, often of depauperated kinds, occur sometimes in mud-cracked limestones. The nearest approach in the modern world is found, doubtless, in the Bann of Cutch, an area of 10,000 square miles south of the Indus, flooded by the sea for a part of the year, during the period of onshore monsoon winds. In the detection of mucl-eracks in ancient formations reasonable care must be used to avoid mistaking for them a polygonal cracking of the rock arising after its solidification. The two, however, are readily dis- tinguished- True mud-cracks always have a filling; the polygons are irregular, but do not show irregularity constant in one direction. True mud-cracks, although easily separated from simulated features, are, how- ever, often very difficult to detect, as the filling may be identical in nature CRITERIA AS TO MODES OP ORIGIN OF SEDIMENTS 357 with the original stratum; and weathering, furthermore, destroys such strata very rapidly unless the shales are interlaminated with sandstones. Rain-prints must be separated from the pits made by escaping marsh gas and are more usually marked by a spattered surface of the mud than by a few concave depressions. Root-marks should show a branching pattern and finer tendrils given off from the larger marks. Footprints may be very obscure, but the test in that case is the regularity of recurrence on the stratum, owing to the stride of the animal and its regularity. Finally, a criterion of special application to much of the Old Red Sand- stone deposits is found in the nature of the conglomerates. Conglomerates now forming which are both thick and wide-spread, as Blanford and Bonney have shown, are observed to be of fluviatile and not littoral origin. This is because rivers are able to carry gravels far out over a subsiding river plain; but the waves, on the contrary, tend to keep gravel banked in the zone of the shore. During an advance or re- treat of the sea, basal conglomerates may be widely spread, but they are thin and often wanting, reaching their greatest development among islands or along an irregular rocky shore able to withstand the waves for some time during a rising sea. A maximum limit to wide-spread basal marine conglomerates seems to be 100 feet, and therefore broad con- glomerate formations of greater thickness are evidences of terrestrial accumulation. 14 - They may, of course, be of terrestrial origin also when thinner and more limited; but in that case, so far as these criteria deter- mine, they may also be marine or lacustrine. Other characters which are, under certain circumstances, of importance are found in the detailed structures and associations of the conglomerate beds. Gravels which have been carried considerable distances by power- ful rivers may be as well sorted and as thoroughly worn as are the wave- worn gravels of the shore, but weak rivers carry their debris especially during great floods. Coarse and fine are swept along together; sorting and wear are less perfect ; streaks of gravel are swept out from the basin margins and intercalated with dominant sandstones and even with beds of shale. River gravels are shingled by the currents so that the longer diameters of the pebbles dip upstream, giving a faint appearance of false bedding, which on the average, unlike the false bedding of sandstone strata, dips toward the basin margin. Shore gravels, on the other hand, are developed parallel to the shore. The onshore waves have a greater force than the undertow and the shingling dips away from the shore, or runs out laterally from protruding headlands. 14 Joseph Barrell : Some distinctions between marine and terrestrial conglomerates. Abstract. Bull. Geol. Soc. Am., vol. 20, 1908, p. 620. 358 J. BARRELL FLUVIATILE ORIGIN OF OLD RED SANDSTONE Lastly, from a larger point of view, shallow-water deposits, where of great thickness and built of land waste, must very often be dominantly terrestrial, especially on the side of the deposit toward the source of supply. This may be seen by reflection on the broader physiographic relations which attend them. If subsidence were the dominating regional feature of the tectonic movement which results in erosion and sedimenta- tion, then there would be a passage to lacustrine or marine conditions. If, however, uplift in the regions of erosion dominates either areally or vertically over subsidence of the regions of deposition, then the basins will be kept filled to the level of the river grade; there will result an excess of sedimentation. The rate of deposition in any section consisting throughout of shallow-water beds is determined not by the rate of erosion, but by the rate of subsidence. The excess of sediment will be carried farther off, the balance being finally deposited in marine formations. But in all except the most arid regions the great carrying agent is river water. Where sedimentation is in excess of subsidence the deposits will consequently bear usually the marks of fluviatile deposition- The condi- tions of sedimentation can then be divided into two broad classes depend- ing on the ratio of sediment to subsidence. There will only rarely and temporarily occur that delicately balanced condition where subsidence takes place at the same rate, but keeps slightly ahead of deposition, giving rise to permanent yet shallow bodies of water. Nevertheless this balanced state, maintaining a thin yet permanent cover of water, is the one usually assumed to have existed during the Paleozoic when marks of shallow water, of currents, and of exposure to the air are found through great thicknesses of mechanical sediments. It is seen from this analysis that such features must be much more commonty the marks of floodplains and without any necessary relation to shores. The emphasis of discussion has been placed thus far on the distinctions between fluviatile and lacustrine deposition. There remain to be con- sidered criteria of another category — those which serve to distinguish the fluviatile deposits of seasonally dry and semi-arid climates from the dominantly torrential and wind-borne deposits of true deserts. In desert mountains there is a maximum of rock exposure. Eock- breaking is due to sun and frost. The unweathered rubbish washes and creeps down the slopes and is broken finer until it is within the reach and greater power of the occasional cloudbursts. These sweep along coarse and fine materials together, but soon lose power, and torrential action, as marked by this heterogeneity, is confined to the perceptibly steep slopes of streams within a few miles of the basin margin. .On the desert basin plains the wind is the chief agent of transportation. CRITERIA AS TO MODES OP ORIGIN OF SEDIMENTS 359 During the long dry periods the sand is shifted by each high wind; the small grains acquire a millet-seed roundness foreign to the work of water ; the dust is taken up in the air and exported from the desert basin. Where sand blows across stony floors the pebbles become faceted, giving the sharp-edged and polished forms known as dreikanter. Where sand progressively accumulates through wind action the base of each dune remains behind in the forward marching of the dunes. The dunes of the Sahara are frequently 300 feet in height. Owing to the shifting of winds, all of one series of dunes may be removed elsewhere; a hundred feet of the base of others may remain. Cross-bedding of marked irregu- larity on a gigantic scale is developed from this in the growing deposit. The cross-bedded members of dune sands are not limited by parallel and horizontal surfaces, and the lines of cross-bedding are broad sweeping- curves, tangent to the horizontal at the base and tens or even some hun- dreds of feet in their radii of curvature. In true desert deposits there is a marked absence of the argillaceous component, although the sediments of the earth as a whole consist of 80 per cent shale. The constituents of shale are borne from the desert region as dust, deposited hundreds of miles away as loess, or mixed with the deposits of more humid climates, or with the limy oozes of open seas or deep permanent lakes. Where large rivers maintain their way across deserts or terminate within them the alluvial deposits are very largely reshaped by wind, as over the delta of the Indus, and notable deposits of gypsum and salt mark the sites of lagoons or interior seas. Contrast the preceding with the conditions of sedimentation under semi-arid or seasonally dry climates. This is an entirely distinct cate- gory, yet one which is practically not recognized by Walther, the apostle of deserts. Climates of this character are marked by a concentrated rather than a deficient rainfall. If the temperature of the wet season is not too cold, an abundant vegetation may grow and a rich and varied fauna may inhabit the land. Such climates exist over much of the tropics, as seen in Africa and India ; over broad continental interiors in the temperate zones, as seen in the great wheat and cattle lands of the globe. Under semi-arid climates water is the great transporting agent. Dur- ing the rainy seasons the shrunken rivers fill again, flow long distances to the sea, sweep gravel far from the hills, wash out the evaporation deposits of the dry season, cover up the mud-cracked alluvial flats with new lavers of silt and clay- During the dry season the herbaceous vegetation turns brown, the humus is oxidized out of the soil, the slimes left by the last 360 J. BARRELL PLUVIATILE ORIGIN OP OLD RED SANDSTONE flood waters are dried out and cracked, the polygons resulting from the cracking curling up on the edges. From the stream channels sand is blown to leeward and buries, perhaps permanently, the dried and curled plates of mud. The wind plays a much less important part, however, than in true deserts, not so much because of the more restricted period of action as because of the greater efficiency of the water and the binding action of the vegetation of the plains. Clean sands, however, still give rise to dunes, and even in humid climates dune action is not wholly absent. The significance of limestone deposited in fresh water needs to be con- sidered. It is found to occur under a number of dissimilar conditions. First, over semi-arid or arid floodplains evaporation of ground water takes place throughout much of the year. The dissolved material which is most abundantly precipitated because of this evaporation is calcium carbonate. Except under truly arid climates, the salt, gypsum, and alka- line carbonates and sulphates are washed out by the following flood waters ; but the lime, once precipitated, is relatively insoluble and remains as a cement in the silt and sand. If the waters flow from limestone regions, they are correspondingly richer in lime, and this process may occur in relatively humid climates, as in that over the deltas of the Ehine and Ehone. For the precipitation of lime in floodplain deposits from waters flowing from crystalline rocks, it would appear, however, that the climate must be at least semi-arid in its dryness. In India this cement in the alluvial soils forms impervious nodular layers known as kankar; in Mexico it occurs often as a granular impure limestone, called caliche, and in the' western United States such sands and gravels cemented by lime, chiefly at the upper level of the ground water, are known as mortar •beds. Probably the agency of plants is inconsequential in this class of lime deposits. Second, there are found to be deposited in fresh-water lakes and streams lime muds, known as marl, or concretions of nearly pure calcium car- bonate- In springs, salt lakes, and in tropic seas deposits of similar com- position are also found. In recent years, in fact, it has become recognized that Chara mosses, green and blue-green algse, and bacteria are the agents of calcareous precipitation to such an extent that these lowly vegetable forms are now thought by many to be quantitatively the most important geological agents in the making of limestones. For the deposition of fresh-water limestones, chiefly of algous origin, the only condition appears to be that of some degree of warmth and of richness in calcium bicar- bonate. Under the humid climate of the eastern United States such marls have been extensively deposited in the lakes of northern Indiana. 15 15 Blatchley and Ashley : The lakes of northern Indiana and their associated marl deposits. Indiana Dept. of Geology and Natural Resources, 25th Ann. Rept., 1901, pp. 31-321. CRITERIA AS TO MODES OF ORIGIN OF SEDIMENTS 361 Eecently Roddy has made a careful investigation of the lime concretions discovered by him in streams. He shows that in the streams of south- eastern Pennsylvania concretions made chiefly by blue-green algae grow freely where the amount of calcium bicarbonate in the water reaches 300 parts per million. The growth takes place only during the warmer months of the year. 16 In humid climates it is, however, only under exceptional conditions that stream or lake waters could attain the content of calcium bicarbonate which would result in a free growth of such fresh-water limestones. Under conditions such as those of the Old Red Sandstone basins, where the waters came mainly from crystalline rocks, for the formation of broad and abundant nodular limestones, the cornstones of the British geologists, a climate- of at least semi-arid character would seem a necessary postulate. A truly arid climate is, however, not needed; in fact, the absence of gypsum and salt as associated deposits seems to show that aridity was not present. The physical conditions best adapted for the laying down of the cornstones are those of broad, shallow bodies of warm water, lying- in basins beyond the reach of abundant mechanical sediments and largely evaporated during a dry season. Not until the Cretaceous were grasses evolved, and trees even now can not grow in compact forests on semi-arid lands. So far as present knowledge goes, there does not seem to have been during the Devonian a binding of the soil by vegetation adequate to hold the upland waste of semi-arid climates. If that be true, there would appear to have been at that time but little distinction between the weathering phenomena of truly desert and of semi-arid uplands- No effective soil mantle would have held organic acids, atmospheric carbon dioxide, and moisture within its pores. As soon as the rocks were broken fine enough, the waters of the rainy season would sweep the debris away. Lichens, it is true, would live on the bare rocks, and some bacteria in the regolith. In the wet Season these lowly agents would carry on, in a measure, chemical decom- position, but they could hardly be counted as binders of the soil. From these barren uplands there would be a graduation of conditions to the flat parts of river basins. Under a semi-arid climate the level of ground water would not sink far below the surface of these flats. There vegeta- tion could flourish and chemical decay go forward the greater part of the year. Oxidation of the soil would become imperfect: grays and greens as subsoil colors would result. These features are seen to be both quali- tatively and quantitatively different from the typical lagoons of desert climates. 18 Roddy : Concretions in streams formed by the agency of blue-green algae and related plants. Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc, vol. liv, 1915, pp. 246-258. 362 J. BARRELL FLUVIATILE ORIGIN OP OLD RED SANDSTONE These are the kinds of tests which must be used in the study of the mode of origin of the formations of the Old Ked Sandstone. Description of the Old Bed Sandstone Formations general relations In order that each reader may possess the basis for an independent conclusion on the conditions of origin of a series of formations, detailed descriptions must be given of the significant characters. Since the con- ditions may shift from stage to stage, these descriptions must cover the whole series with some degree of completeness. 17 The results of continued investigations by British geologists have shown that the Old Bed Sandstone conditions of deposition began in Scotland and in north England in uppermost Silurian times, the marine rocks of the Ludlow passing conformably, by oscillation of conditions, into barren, red and yellow, cross-bedded sandstones, with some conglomerates, and red to gray or green mud-stones. Goodchild states that a violent uncon- formity separates the base of the true Old Bed of Devonian age from these basal rocks, which the British Survey has named Downtonian, but for which Goodchild prefers the name Lanarkian, from their typical ex- posure in Lanarkshire, in southern Scotland. 18 Above the Downtonian and unconformable to it comes the Lower Old Bed Sandstone, characterized by red and purple sandstones, gray sandy flagstones, and coarse conglomerates. The most characteristic fossils are Cephalasp-is, Pteraspis, Climatius, and Pterygotus. It is typically shown south of latitude 57°, especially in the Caledonian area, according to Geikie, some 20,000 feet of beds being there exposed. Lower Old Bed deposition was closed by disturbances which shifted the regions of great subsidence to the north, especially around the Moray Firth and in Caithness. These are the Orcadian formations, estimated to reach as much as 17,000 feet in thickness. The typical fossils are Estheria, Dipterus, Osteolepis, Homosteus, Mesacanthus, Coccosteus, Ptericlithys, etcetera. The Middle Old Bed is in turn separated by a profound unconformity from the rocks stratigraphically above, which constitute the Upper Old Bed, but recently Flett has shown that the Old Bed of the Shetland Islands bridges to some extent this hiatus. The plants of the Shetland 17 Descriptions of the features significant of origin will be quoted more fully for the benefit of American readers than if this article were to be printed in a British journal, for the reason that much of the original literature may be difficult of access to many American geologists. 18 J. G. Goodchild: The older Deutozoic rocks of Great Britain. Geol. Mag., Decade 5, vol. i, 1904, pp. 591-602. DESCRIPTION OP THE FORMATIONS 363 area appear to represent a distinct flora, but the vertebrate fauna shows relationships to the Upper Old Eed; consequently it may be the lowest, or one of the lowest, zones of the Upper Old Eed. The well determined genera are A sterol epis and Holonema. 19 The typical Upper Old Eed is found resting with angular unconformity on the Middle Old Bed and all older rocks, but passes conformably into the Carboniferous rocks above. The basins of deposition only partly corresponded with those of the older red sandstones. The rocks are characteristically red and yellow sandstones and conglomerates. Bothrio- lepis major and HoloptycMus nobilUsimus are typical species. From this series of unconformities and shiftings in regions of deposi- tion it is clear that great crust movements were intermittently in progress in this zone during latest Silurian and all of Devonian time. These were accompanied by much igneous activity, since lava flows, breccias, and volcanic ash make up large portions of the sediments, especially of the I ower Old Eed. Uplifts along certain axes must have been in progress to have supplied the great quantities of coarse waste. Downsinking of adjacent areas must have accompanied the former in order to permit such thick accumulations. Fault zones and step-faulting are implied ; perhaps also true folding. In these ways may be partly explained the remarkable variations in thickness of formations, the disappearance of others, such as the British Survey has recently shown to exist in southern Wales and in northern Devon and Somerset. Here an east-west axis runs through the Bristol Channel. On the northern margin of this axis in Glamorgan the total thickness of the Old Eed sandstone is reduced to 400 feet, but on the northern outcrop of this southern Welsh area the thickness swells to 3,000 or 4,000 feet. Similar thicknesses are found in northern Devon, on the south side of this axis. It is not easy to assume a narrow and lofty mountain range between these two basins, enduring without rejuve- nescence and gradually buried by the mantle of sediments, for the erosion which would provide this thickness of sediments would also destroy the axial character and height of the mountains. Differential, intermittent uplift of this axis and subsidence of the adjacent belts during sedimenta- tion seems a probable relationship. In the structural complex of ridges and basins we maj recognize considerable resemblance between the British Isles in Devonian time and the Cordilleran area of the United States in the Tertiary. The analogy is instructive not only from the structural standpoint, but from the physical conditions of sedimentation as well. With this introduction on the general character and relationships of 18 John R. Flett : On the age of the Old Red Sandstone of Shetland. Trans. Roy. Soc. Edinburgh, vol. xlvi, pt. ii, 1908, pp. 313-320. 364 J. BARRELL FLTJVIATILE ORIGIN OF OLD RED SANDSTONE the Old Bed, we may turn attention to those detailed stratigraphic char- acters -which go to show the conditions of origin. UPPERMOST SILURIAN — DOWNTONIAN FORMATIONS "Rocks. — The series of strata grouped under the term Downtonian has hitherto been regarded as of Lower Old Red Sandstone age, owing to the prevalence of red and yellow sandstones and shales which are the prominent feature of that formation. The recent discovery by the Geological Survey, in shales and mudstones intercalated in these sandstones, of a marine fauna which in some respects is identical with that of the underlying Ludlow Rocks has led to a revision of the classification hitherto adopted. These passage beds are now viewed as forming the highest subdivision of the Upper Silurian rocks. They may be briefly tabulated in descending order as follows : "Lower Old Red Sandstone, the basal bed being a coarse conglomerate or conglomeratic sandstone, with pebbles composed mainly of greywacke derived from the Southern Uplands. "Unconformability in the Pentland Hills and in Ayrshire, apparent con- formability in Lanarkshire. C 4. Chocolate-colored sandstone. Conglomerate with quartzite pebbles derived from the High- lands. Green and red mudstones with bands of greywacke and brown flaggy carbonaceous shales with fishes and eurypterids. Red and yellow sandstones and mudstones, underlain in the Hagshaw Hills by a fine conglomerate of local occurrence, resting conformably on Upper Ludlow Rocks. "Fossils. — The organic remains, which are restricted to Zone 2 of the fore- going series of strata, consist of plants, ostracods, phyllocarid crustaceans, eurypterids, and fishes. "Among the fragments of plants obtained from this horizon, Mr. Kidston has identified Pachytheca and one specimen as belonging to the genus Parka, though of a different species from P. dccipiens. The ostracods are represented by Beyrichia, a form which is common in the Upper Silurian rocks of the Southern Uplands ; the phyllocarid crustaceans by Ceratiocaris. Most of the genera of eurypterids found in the Wenlock and Ludlow Rocks in Lanarkshire and the Pentland Hills, viz. : Eurypterus, Pterygotus, Slimonia, Stylonurus, have been obtained from the Downtonian fish-band (Zone 2 of above table). "The most striking pala?ontological feature, however, is the remarkable as- semblage of fishes procured from this horizon which are wonderfully complete when carefully extracted from the carbonaceous shales. Dr. Traquair has identified in the collection of the Geological Survey five genera of fishes, four of which are new, and seven new species. One genus (Thelodus) is common to the Upper Ludlow Rocks of Lanarkshire and Wales and to the Lower Old Red Sandstone of Forfarshire and Oban. "Conditions of deposition. — The Downtonian strata indicate a marked change in the phases of sedimentation from those which obtained in Ludlow and Wen- lock time in the south of Scotland. While it is true that the green mudstones, Downtonian.. DESCRIPTION OF THE FORMATIONS 365 greywackes, and brown carbonaceous shales yielding fossils resemble litho- logically Upper Silurian rocks, still the dominant feature of the series as a whole is red and yellow false-bedded sandstones. It seems just to infer that the Downtonian fish-band and the associated mudstones and greywackes are marine deposits, for some of the eurypterids found in the latter strata are the associates of graptolites in the Wenlock Rocks of the Pentland Hills, and of brachiopods (Lingula minima) in the Ludlow Rocks of Lanarkshire. More- over, the occurrence of the Polyzoon, Glauconome, together with Spirorbis and sponges, likewise points to the marine origin of some of the Downtonian strata. The red and yellow false-bedded sandstones, on the other hand, evi- dently herald those conditions which prevailed during Old Red Sandstone time, when the open sea gave place to brackish water or inland lakes." 20 Peach and Home call this fauna marine, but there is to be noted the absence of ccelenterates, brachiopods, echinoderms, and trilobites, repre- sentatives of which are found in the true marine Ludlow rocks. This absence is as striking as the lingering presence of a few marine types. On the other hand, the ostracods, eurypterids, and fishes are groups which are found also as characteristic fossils in clearly fresh-water deposits as well as in brackish water or marine deposits. The conditions of deposi- tion of the fossiliferous zone would seem therefore to represent tbe re- curring but temporary existence of brackish water, permitting for a time tbe incursion of a fauna related more to the open sea than to the land. It seems to have been but a temporary condition, since the other forma- tions, as noted by Peach and Home, are suggestive of the true Old Eed Sandstone conditions. The descriptions suggest the current-laid sedi- ments of streams rather than a condition of lakes or bays. Two hundred miles south, in Staffordshire, limited outcrops of upper- most Silurian rocks have been recently discovered which show brachiopod faunas. 21 One hundred miles northeast of Lanarkshire the Downtonian rocks outcrop again along the shore at Stonehaven beneath the true Lower Old Eed. Hickling gives these basal Stonehaven beds a thickness of 1,500 feet and notes the occurrence at the base of breccia, followed by fine red sandstone, with numerous thin bands of bright red shale. Higher up several beds of the red marly shale, 50 to 100 feet in thickness, are inter- calated with light red or yellow sandstones and fine grits with some bands of gray sandstone and grit. The series of beds is distinctly fine in char- acter as compared with the overlying mass of the Old Red. 22 The base at this place is regarded by B., Campbell as an unconformity and not a 20 Peach and Home : The Silurian rocks of Britain. Mem. of the Geol. Survey of the United Kingdom, vol. i, Scotland, 1899, pp. 67-69. 21 W. W. King and W. J. Lewis : The uppermost Silurian and Old Red Sandstone of South Staffordshire. Geol. Mag., Decade 5. vol. ix, 1912. pp. 437-443. 22 The Old Red Sandstone of Forfarshire, Upper and Lower. Geol. Mag., Decade 5, vol. v, 1908, p. 399. 366 J. BARRELL FLUVIATILE ORIGIN OF OLD RED SANDSTONE fault zone. The thickness is given as nearly 3,000 feet, and from a thick helt of gray and greenish mudstones and shales fossils have been ob- tained — phyllocarids, myriopods, eurypterids, fragments of scorpions, plant fragments, and worm tracks. Further, a thin bed of reddish mud- stone underlying the above series has yielded numerous plates of a new Cyathaspis. 23 Of these fossils the phyllocarids, as an order, are typically marine; the myriopods and scorpions are as typically terrestrial. The phyllocarids belong, however, to the class of crustaceans which has always exhibited a freedom of adaptation to changes of salinity, possibly greater than is found in any other group of organisms. From these descriptions of uppermost Silurian rocks and their fossils, judged in the light of more intensive studies of other delta deposits, it would seem that toward the close of this period delta conditions had developed from the northwest, pushing the littoral zone south of Scotland. The Scottish deposits were dominantly subaerial, forming in the main fluviatile delta deposits in Downtonian times. Occasionally, as is found on the fronts of all large deltas of low gradient, submergence would bring in wide shallow bays of brackish waters with such groups of animals as were least sensitive to changes of salinity. At rare intervals this faun a I invasion reached as far inland as southern or central Scotland. The climate was dry enough to permit drying out and oxidation of the deposits of the floodplains, but there is nothing in the chemical compositions or sedimentary structures to imply the existence of a desert climate. The evidence is not so determinative as could be wished, partly no doubt because it has not been searched bed by bed for the structural features, partly because evidence which may in another decade be re- garded as determinative is not generally regarded as such at the present time. LOWER DEVONIAN— LOWER OLD RED In Cornwall and southern Devon all, or nearly all, of the Lower, as in fact the rest here of the Devonian also, is marine. In southern Ireland, however, the beds are largely or entirely fresh water in origin, since no marine fossils have ever been found there. In south Wales the Lower Old Eed is represented by the cornstone series. This consists below of red marls with bands of nodular limestones (cornstones) and irregular beds of red micaceous sandstones. Above are the Senni beds, consisting of green and dull red sandstones with marls and cornstone conglomerates. 23 The Downtonian and Old Red Sandstone of Kincardineshire. Geol. Mag., Decade 5, vol. ix, 1912, p. 511. DESCRIPTION OP THE FORMATIONS 367 "In this cornstone series cornstones occur sometimes as continuous beds of pale red or green compact limestone, and sometimes as nodular concretions in the marls ; they consist entirely of amorphous carbonate of lime enclosing some sand, and no fragments of organisms except obscure plant remains can be seen in them. They may owe their existence to the agency of some lime- secreting alga?, like that which forms the 'sprudelstein' of Carlsbad (described by F. Colin in 1862) and the travertine of the Mammoth Hot Springs in the Yellowstone Park, U. S. "The Cornstone series has yielded fish of the genera Pteraspis and Cepha- laspis, and there can be no doubt that it is homotaxially the equivalent of the marine Lower Devonian and of the Lower Old Red Sandstone of Scotland. The Senni Beds are included in this series, because they also contain Pteras- pis; they only occur in that part of the area which lies to the west of Breck- nock, where they have a maximum thickness of 1,200 feet. . . . "When the formation is followed westward beyond Llandeilo several changes are found to take place. The base of the Cornstone series ceases to show an upward passage from the Tilestones. the basement beds becoming first sandy and then conglomeratic, at the same time gradually passing across the passage beds and the Ludlow mudstone till, near Carmarthen, they have overstepped the whole Silurian series and rest directly on the Bala Beds. The whole group also becomes thinner, and is not more than 2,500 feet near Llandarog." -* These Welsh deposits have been regarded by British geologists as fresh water in origin and formed in a large lake. Much of the formations may, however, equally well, if not better, be regarded as nuviatile. The great thickness, taken with the arenaceous character, indicates shallow-water conditions maintained by subsidence. It would be difficult to conceive of a continuous fresh-water lake existing throughout and excluding the sea which lay not far to the south of the narrow intervening axis of elevation. If, however, sedimentation were, on the whole, faster than subsidence, nuviatile plains would result and the sea could be readily excluded, at the same time that intermittent lacustrine conditions could exist. Further, although the limestones, where pure and thick, suggest such lacustrine conditions, nodular layers of earthy limestones do not require such an origin. It may be concluded, therefore, that in the Welsh basin the de- posits suggest combinations of nuviatile and lacustrine conditions. The large difference which this means in interpretation is that much of the sediment was deposited on river floodplains, and on paleogeographical maps the area should not be represented as a great lake basin, but as land instead of water. Turning to the Caledonian basin, this, under the interpretation of Jukes-Browne, may be taken as including all that broad region south of latitude 57° and north of 54°. The chief area is that of southern Scot- land, but small outlying remnants occur in both Scotland and northern 24 Jukes-Brovrae : The building of the British Isles, 1911, pp. 108, 109. XXVII — Bull. Geol. Soc. Am., Vol. 27. 1915 368 J. BARRELL FLUVIATILE ORIGIN OF OLD RED SANDSTONE Ireland. The best continuous exposure is that shown on the southeast coast of Scotland from Stonehaven to. the Firth of Tay. A detailed description of these rocks is given by Hickling, and the following is quoted from him, omitting that of the Stonehaven beds, which are now regarded as Downtonian in age. "Table of the Lower Old Red of Forfarshire Feet Bdzell Shales ? 1,000 Arbroath Sandstone 1,200 Auchmithie Conglomerate 800 Red Head Series 1,500 Cairnconnan Series 2,000 Carmyllie Series 1,000 Dunnottar Conglomerate 5,000 Stonehaven Beds 1,500 14,000 "It must be remarked that the subdivisions in the above table are based purely on lithological characters and are only made for convenience of descrip- tion. No breaks in the series exist to my knowledge, and I am far from sup- posing that these subdivisions are likely to be traceable for any great distance ; rapid lateral variation in the character of the rocks is too obvious a feature of the Old Red Sandstone. The names applied to the subdivisions are taken from the localities where the series may be typically seen. The thickness of the subdivisions are estimated from theoretical sections for the most part, and are therefore to be regarded as only approximately accurate. . . . "The Dunnottar Group of coarse red and grey sandstones, grits, and con- glomerates which form the bold coast the whole way from Stonehaven to Johnshaven. As I have only been able to examine the base and the top of this series, I shall add no more than that it forms by far the most extensive series of conspicuously coarse deposits in the district. In its conglomerates pebbles commonly range up to a foot or moi*e in length, and yet are astonishingly well rounded. They mostly consist of quartzite. South of Johnshaven several thin lavas are interbedded with the top of this series, with sandstones and coarse conglomerates of porphyrite blocks between. Beyond this the coast-section is interrupted by the mass of Upper Old Red which is faulted in, extending from East Mathers to Milton Ness (described below), and which covers the junc- tion between the conglomerate series and the great mass of lavas which forms its natural top. These lavas occupy the coast southward by Montrose to Lunan Bay, being hidden, however, almost the whole way to Montrose by sand and alluvium. From Lunan Bay their outcrop strikes inland along the summit of the anticline by Friockheim and Letham, near which latter place they finally die out. About Friockheim and Leysmill are numerous quarry sections of the "Carmyllie Series, which overlies the lavas. Compact red or grey sandstone is the predominant rock of this series, with subsidiary masses of grey flagstone and blue or red shale, termed 'caulm' by the quarrymen. Together with their DESCRIPTION OF THE FORMATIONS 369 interbedded lavas, these rocks form the whole axis of the Sidlaws, all along which they are quarried for building and paving material. The well-known Carmyllie quarries are in the middle of this series. Passing upward, the "Caimconnan Series is reached, distinguished by its coarser materials, prin- cipally dull red or grey grit with bands of conglomerate. The conglomerates are more particularly developed on the north side of the anticline, as at Turin Hill, north of Rescobie Loch. This series should appear on the coast in Lunan Bay, but it is entirely hidden by the sand and alluvium. At the south end of the bay another series of lavas, admirably exposed for study, intervenes be- tween it and the "Red Head Series, which forms the bold cliffs from the promontory of that name southward to Rumness. In its lower part it consists of fine red thin- bedded sandstone with bands of hard bright red shale, while the upper por- tion is made up of thicker-bedded sandstone. Some six or seven miles to the southwest, at Arbirlot, the lower part of this series, as seen in the banks of the Elliott Burn, consists mainly of blue and grey shales, with partings of sandstone, having so strong a resemblance to some of the rocks of Carmyllie as to have led Hugh Miller to consider them as a repetition of that series. This case illustrates very well the rapid lateral variation to which all the beds of the Old Red Sandstone are liable. "The Auchmithie Conglomerate overlies the previous group in the cliffs just north of the village so named. The series consists of three main masses of conglomerate, with intervening sandstones and conglomerates. The pebbles in the conglomerates are well rounded, fairly large (generally 1 to 6 inches, rarely 12 inches), and, as usual, are mostly quartzite. The thickness of this conglomerate series diminishes along its outcrop to the southwest. "The Arbroath Sandstone is the highest series of the Lower Old Red seen on the Forfarshire coast. Coarse, gritty, sometimes pebbly sandstone is its component rock, always red in color. Just above the base of the series, by the Signal Tower at Arbroath Harbor, there is a single band of grey grit and marlstone on the shore, containing nodules of limestone from the size of a pea to 1 foot in diameter. This is noteworthy in view of the almost complete ab- sence of lime from the Lower Old Red System. . . . "The EdzeU Shales . . . overlie the Arbroath sandstones. They are gen- erally bright red fine sandstones, shales, and marls, either hard or soft, fre- quently mottled with small circular patches of pale yellow, grey, or green, or more rarely with bands of the same color. . . . "The volcanic rocks of the district do not call for description here. It may suffice to remark that they are, with very rare exceptions, in the form of con- temporaneous interbedded sheets, and are merely a continuation of the series of the Ochil Hills, where they have been described in detail by Geikie and others (A. Geikie, 1900). "Attention must now be drawn to a point, the importance of which has not, I believe, been hitherto recognized. All the recorded fossils from this dis- trict — and I suspect that the same applies to Perthshire — are from a very limited series of horizons near the middle of the Lower Old Red System, the Upper Old Red being, of course, left out of account. The Carmyllie series is the fossiliferous group par excellence, while a few of the worked localities may lie in the Cairnconnan series (e. g., Tilliewhamland quarry, Turin Hill), 370 J. BARRELL FLUVIATLLE ORIGIN OF OLD RED SANDSTONE or the top of the Dunnottar conglomerates. Odd fossils have occasionally been obtained from other horizons, but they are quite a negligible quantity." 25 To the west, the sections as exhibited in Fife and Kinross show enor- mous quantities of agglomerates, lavas, and tuffs. More or less rude sorting of the breccias shows some rearrangement by water. Some beds of breccia betray, however, no stratification ; others, on the contrary, show a great deal of rounding and sorting of pebbles and boulders. A. Geikie states that the series of deposits in the Caledonian basin everywhere presents traces of shallow-water conditions. 26 He seeks to interpret the whole as laid down in an open lake and sorted by wave action. He notes that — "An objection may arise that the remarkable coarseness of the conglomer- ates, and the large size of many of their included bowlders, are suggestive rather of the powerful breakers of the open sea than of the limited wave- action of a lake or inland sea. But possibly the coarseness of the shingle may rather be some indication of the dimensions of the lake and of the power of the waves; along its exposed shores." 2T It seems, however, that a reinterpretation is called for. The widely extended and coarse conglomerates do not suggest shore action, but re- semble the stream-borne detritus of Eocky Mountain valleys. Their coarseness, thickness, and distance of transportation are all significant of stream rather than wave action. The red or gray sandstones and red shales are similar to the Catskill deposits of Few York and Pennsylvania, and are such as in India and North America have become commonly regarded as fluviatile in origin. MIDDLE OLD RED — ORCADIAN FORMATIONS Relations to older rocks. — During the middle part of the Old Red Sandstone period the chief axes of subsidence and deposition were trans- ferred to the northern part of Scotland. Its locus has become known as the Orcadian Lake, or, better, the Orcadian basin. Disturbance and some erosion of the Lower Old Red may have resulted in retransfer of material. The enormous thicknesses of deposits imply vigorous crust movements and profound erosion. The fossiliferous beds show that the Middle Old Red is younger than the Lower Old Red to the south, but there is no doubt but that the Caledonian deposits once extended northwest of the 23 The Old Red Sandstone of Forfarshire, Upper and Lower. Geol. Mag., Decade 5, vol. v, 1908, pp. 3^-401. 26 Text-book of geology, 1903, p. 1008: 27 Geology of East Fife. Mem, of t!je Geol. Survey, Scotland, 1902, p. 43. DESCRIPTION OF THE FORMATIONS 371 present fault boundaries; so that Lower Orcadian beds may correspond to Upper Caledonian. The basal beds are preserved in certain small areas in Aberdeen and Banff. These show in some cases clearly the form of old filled river valleys. A. Geikie describes that which is now dissected by the River Avon, latitude 57° 20' north, longitude 3° 20' west. "A marked structure in some parts of the conglomerate is a kind of false- bedding of the stones. Between the gently inclined lines which mark the true dip, the stones of each bed of conglomerate are arranged in a rude stratifica- tion obliquely across the line of the valley at angles of 17° to 20°. They thus appear to dip toward the hills (representing the old valley walls), while the true inclination of the conglomerate beds is away from them." 2S This is a highly significant feature. It seems clearly to represent the stream-shingling of gravels, by which the longer axes of the pebbles slope upstream. The situation and character does not suggest beach sorting. Old Red of the Moray Firth, — Passing to the old Eed Sandstones around the Moray Firth, Geikie states : "We have found them throughout that extended tract mainly conglomeratic and arenaceous — the conglomerates in thick masses coming in again and again on successive platforms, while interstratified with them lie bands of grey clay and shale full of calcareous nodules containing fish remains. These fossilifer- ous bands retain their distinctive characters, lithological and palseontograph- ical, throughout the whole district'" (page 446). These strata stand in great contrast to the vast continuous flagstone series of Caithness to the north, though they are considered by Geikie to be equivalent to the upper portion of the Caithness section. Formations of the Orcadie basin in Caithness. — A tabulation of the formations which comprise the whole terrane, with an abstract of such features as bear most strongly on the problem of origin, is based on Geikie's complete report in the Transactions of the Eoyal Society of Edinburgh. 29 Nearly the whole of Caithness consists of Old Eed Sandstone. The interior is almost entirely covered with peat and glacial drift, but the powerful action of the ocean on these rather friable rocks has exposed admirable sections often several hundred feet in height around the entire coastline. These have been compiled by Geikie into a type section of the whole series. 28 A. Geikie : On the Old Red Sandstone of western Europe. Trans. Roy. Soc. of Edinburgh, vol. xxviii, pt. ii, 1878, p. 427. 29 Vol. xxxviii, pt. ii, 1877-1878, pp. 355-421. 372 J. BARRELL FLUVIATILE ORIGIN OP OLD RED SANDSTONE Subdivisions of the Lower Old Red Sandstone of Caithness Feet 9. John o'Groat's Sandstone and Flagstone Group 2,000 8. Huna Flagstone Group 1,000 7. Gill's Bay Red Sandstones 400 6. Thurso, or Northern Flagstone Group 5,000 5. Wick, or Eastern Flagstone Group 5,000 4. Langwell and Morven Sandstones and Conglomerates 2,000 3. Badbea Breccia and Conglomerate 300 2. Braemore and Ousedale Sandstones 450 1. Basement Conglomerate 50 16,200 The significant details of these formations are as follows : 1. Coarse Basement Conglomerate 50 feet This was laid down on an uneven floor of igneous and metamorphic rock. It presents a remarkable granitoid aspect to such an extent that it is often not easy to determine where the conglomerate ends and the granite begins. Its component blocks vary in size up to as much as a yard, or even more, in length. The bowlders are for the most part tolerably well rounded. The thick- ness given was measured at the place where studied, but the basement con- glomerate over the basin as a whole must vary much both in thickness and in age. 2. Braemore and Ousedale Sandstones 450 feet These are dull chocolate-red sandstones with sandy shales or clays. It is noteworthy how abundantly pink orthoclase occurs in the matrix of many of the sandstones. The red shales and sandstones of Braemore are sometimes pitted as if by rainprints, but have as yet yielded no fossils. 3. Badbea Breccia and Conglomerate 300 feet By far the most conspicuous member of the Old Red Sandstone series in the south of Caithness is a remarkable breccia or brecciated conglomerate. It occurs in thick beds, wherein little or no trace of stratification may be found. The stones, considerably smaller than in the basement conglomerate of Brae- more, seldom exceed five or six inches in length. They consist mainly of pink cleavable orthoclase, pink granite, grey quartz-rock, white vein-quartz, and occasional pieces of red sandstone. The feldspar is the predominant ingre- dient, and likewise enters largely, in a comminuted state, into the composition of the paste (pages 37S-379). 4. Langwell and Morven Sandstones and Conglomerates 2,000 feet The Badbea breccias and conglomerate "pass up into a thick series of dull chocolate-red, grey, and yellow sandstones, with layers of dull-red and olive- colored shales and of fine conglomerate. ... In their lower part they are highly felspathic, with a rather coarse texture, and many scattered pebbles, as well as nests and bands of conglomerate. Higher up they are more flaggy, and they finally pass upward imperceptibly into the dull-red and grey flag- stones of Berriedale. Nothing but an arbitrary line can be drawn for their upper limit. . . . The group has as yet yielded no fossils" (pages 379-380). DESCRIPTION OF THE FORMATIONS 373 Tracing these beds toward the north they are found to lose the coarse pebbly and conglomeratic features and to pass into fine flaggy sandstones, with sandy shales, the whole having a prevailing dull chocolate-red tint, through which seams of greenish-gray shales and flagstones occur. In places, as observed by Sedgwick and Murchison, the red tint is local and even superficial, the same stratum being red or green at different parts of its course. Traced inland to the west the beds so increase in the quantity of coarse detritus that on the north side of the Scarabin ridge hundreds of feet may either be called highly conglomeratic sandstones or sandy conglomerates. "The four groups of strata, above described, may be regarded as forming together a red sandy and conglomeratic base, of very variable thickness, on which lies the great flagstone series of Caithness now to be discussed" (page 386). 5. Wick, or Eastern Flagstone Group 5,000 feet This group consists of dark-gray flagstones which are often thick-bedded, thin shales and limestone bands ; the whole passing down into red shales and sandstones. The group is distinguished from that which overlies it by the greater mas- siveness of its flagstones, and by their less calcareous composition and less fissile or shaly texture. Sun-cracks and ripple-marks abound and in various horizons remains of terrestrial plants have been found, one gray shale in particular having its surface covered with carbonized vegetation. Large stems belonging to tree ferns and gymnosperms also occur. An abundant fish fauna has been obtained from this formation. 6. Thurso, or Northern Flagstone Group 5,000 feet Dark-gray and cream-colored flagstones, gray and blue shales and thin lime- stone ; some beds strongly bituminous. This group is more fissile, shaly, and calcareous than the preceding. "The flagstones which, towards the east, retain the usual normal characters of fissile calcareous strata, pass into sandstones and conglomerates as they approach and rest upon the granite and gneiss" (page 391) . "The nest feature to engage the attention of the observer is probably the extraordinary abundance of ripple-marked surfaces and sun-cracks. Though these markings abound also in the lower flagstone group, it is here that they attain their greatest development" (page 392). "More abundant and admirable illustrations of sun-cracks could hardly be found than occur along this coast. Broad gently-inclined sheets of rock again and again present themselves to view so covered with reticulations as to look like tesselated pavements. It may be noticed that the cracks not infrequently descend through many of the fine laminae of deposit for a depth of five or six inches with occasionally a breadth of three or four inches. The material filling up the interstices abounds with small, occasionally curved pieces of shale. These may, no doubt, be regarded as portions of the upper muddy layer which cracked off and curled up during desiccation, as may often be observed on dried-up pools at the present time. Some pittings, occasionally seen on the sun-cracked surfaces, may perhaps represent rain-drops. Altogether, no evi- dence could more conclusively indicate a long-continued, tranquil deposit of 374 J. BARRELL FLUVIATILE ORIGIN OF OLD RED SANDSTONE fine sediment in shallow water, which frequently retired and left wide tracts of muddy shore to be dried and cracked by exposure to the sun" (page 393). The resemblance which the fissile calcareous flagstones "bear to some of the so-called fresh-water limestones and cement-stones at the base of the car- boniferous system of the south of Scotland, cannot but strike any one who is familiar with the latter strata. This likeness includes not only the composi- tion, color, and mode of weathering, but even the minute wavy lamination indicative of intermittent but tranquil deposit. Other shaly layers are strongly pyritous" (page 400) . . . "organic remains abound in the strata exposed on the shore between Dunnet Bay and Reay. Fragments of fish and coprolites are scattered abundantly through most of the flagstones. Some of the cal- careous shales are full of Estheria, while traces of plants occur in great num- bers, though generally in a somewhat macerated condition" (page 393). The groups to which the plants belong are Ferns, Calamites, Lepidodendrids, Stigmaria, and Araucarioxylon. No traces of marine plants have been found. 7. Gill's Bay Red Sandstone 400 feet This formation consists of red, friable, false-bedded sandstones, both its base and top interleaved with seams of flagstone and grading into the flagstone groups. No fossils have yet been found in these sandstones. 8. Euna Flagstones 1,000 feet To the alternation of red sandstone and flagstones succeeds the Huna flag- stone group having characters similar to those of the Thurso flagstones. 9. John o'Groat's Red Sandstones and Flagstones 2,000 feet These consist of a mass of false-bedded red sandstones, with intercalations of flagstones, the whole much resembling the Gill's Bay formation. The sand- stones "occur in successive thicker zones, between which lie many alternations of red sandstone, red and blue flagstones, grey shale, and impure limestone. These latter strata are quite undistinguishable from portions of the older flagstone groups. The highest part of the group consists of a thick mass of false-bedded red sandstone, without flagstone or shale. Fossils occur in some of the blue flagstones and impure limestones" (page 404). Old Red Sandstone of the Orkney Islands. — The greater part of the section previously given is traceable into sandy and conglomeratic facies contiguous to the old margins of the basins. It is important, therefore, in any view of the Orcadie basin as a whole to compare the preceding with the stratigraphic characters as observed throughout the Orkney Islands, since these were much farther from the limits of the basin. In the same report from Geikie from which the preceding statements have been abstracted is given also an account of the stratigraphy as observed in the Orkney Islands. "Almost the whole of the Orkney islands consist of flagstone and sandstones of the Caithness flag series. The only other formations present appear in the southwestern part of this group. A small ridge of the underlying crystalline rocks rises to the surface at Stromness" (page 408). DESCRIPTION OP THE FORMATIONS 375 "The flagstones retain the same features so well marked in Caithness. Sometimes, as at Skaill in Pomona, they are exceedingly hard, fissile, bitumi- nous, and crowded with fossil fish. In other places, as near Kirkwall, they form thicker beds, and can be quarried for building materials, like those which are similarly used at Thurso. Bands of dull red and even yellowish sandstone occur interstratified with the flagstones, as in Scapa Bay, Meal near Kirkwall, Eday, and other places. Where the flagstones rest on the old crystalline rocks they become for a short space conglomeratic at the base'' (page 409). At certain localities occur zones of red sandstone which may be paralleled with the John o'Groat's and Gill's Bay groups of the Scottish mainland. As we advance northwards among the islands the same petrographical characters continue. One "seems to be forever meeting with repetitions of the same rocks. No doubt when these islands come to be mapped in detail, the real thickness of flagstones will be found to be more considerable than might at first have been surmised." The Orkney rocks appear to belong to the upper groups of the Caithness section, since "no equivalents are met with of the massive red sandstones, shales, and conglomerate groups at the base of the Caithness series." "The coarse conglomerate of well-rounded sandstone blocks at Heg- labir on the west side of Sanday, which has been long known (see Barry's "Orkney," page 56, and Neill's "Tour"), seems to occur at a greater distance from the local base, for it is said to overlie sandstones and flagstones" (page 410). "Many of the flagstones of Orkney are charged with organic remains. Espe- cially is this the case with some of the dark, hard, fissile, bituminous bands. On the surfaces of these strata remains of the characteristic ichthyolites are crowded thickly together, and usually in such a tolerable state of preservation as to show that the fishes must have died where their remains are found, or at least that they could not have been subjected to any prolonged exposure and transport before they were buried under the accumulating sediment. As a rule, the fossils have been converted into a brittle jet-like substance, which is so liable to crack and scale off, that unless great precautions are taken, an organism, which at first showed external sculpture in great beauty, becomes eventually a mere black bituminous patch, retaining only the outline of the original specimen. It is not difficult, in most cases, to distinguish an Orkney from a Caithness ichthyolite. "The fossil plants of Orkney include most of the forms found in the Thurso and upper Caithness groups" (page 411). Interpretation of the Orcadian deposits. — The structural features of the strata which are significant of origin have been given bv Geikie in more detail than is found in other descriptions. They permit, therefore, of a more specific interpretation. Significance of conglomerates. — It has been shown that subaerial con- glomerates may be laid down at much greater distances from the sources of supply than subaqueous conglomerates, since streams may transport resistant gravel until they lose velocity or become loaded with finer material. Subaerial conglomerates may also accumulate with much greater thicknesses than subaqueous conglomerates. The only conditions 376 J. BARRELL FLUVIATILE ORIGIN OF OLD RED SANDSTONE necessary for the continuance of deposition of subaerial conglomerates is the maintenance of rapid erosion to supply the material and river volume and grade sufficient for its transportation. The conditions for the con- tinuance of deposition of subaqueous conglomerates, on the contrary, depends on the permanent existence of a shore of suitable materials and a depth of water just such that waves and currents may transport gravel. The great Pleistocene gravel deposits of the continental interiors testify to the magnitude of the first class of conglomerates, while the limited distance to which present gravels are transported from shores, as shown by hydrographic charts, indicates the relative insignificance of the second. The pebbly sandstones far from the base of the Caithness section and at distances of many miles from the regions of erosion are highly sug- gestive of subaerial conditions, while conglomerates, such as those of the Moray Firth, forming thick masses, coming in again and again, and overlying formations of clay and shale, may be taken as fairly conclusive evidence of terrestrial deposition. Significance of colors. — Variegated colors, especially where these alter from one stratum to another and even within a single stratum, are highly characteristic of continental deposits, as Walther has pointed out. Bed sediments have been deposited to a limited extent under permanent water bodies, either salt or fresh, but are characteristically of terrestrial origin. Even where deposited under a water body the color is due to previous thorough oxidation of the iron while exposed to the air without the usual opportunity for later subaqueous deoxidation. The climatic conditions which may give rise to red tones in consolidated deposits are rather broad. As argued elsewhere, 30 the presence of red merely implies the existence at the time of deposition of either temperate or torrid climate with a dry season sufficiently marked to permit periodic aeration of the fLoodplain soil. The dominantly red color and variegated character of the conglomerates and sandstones is therefore strongly suggestive, though not conclusive in itself, of terrestrial origin under rather broadly limited climatic con- ditions. T